Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
13-073 (6)
r, A v a . A a s .z _ g .. a ffi et ' _ A Y �5'L� n "w�.�YV ta-9. dY..s T The V/J u.i....'��_I, j 1 L '�lai 1 3+.. 01 Y A Melamine slab panel door Melamine slab panel door with Texhu ed lacquer 4lDF core raised continuous solid wood rail pull panel door with melamine finish on reverse side A � 4 A y ni r rp ' s t' r2�II bbb sl��� g �� �. "M [� #tF �� r��A t,I h `[�3 la •: g � F�� { � ����1� �#i � � O z y e � dyy t 7 04 w a � d 4S a1#`:�.5 ._✓ 4 ..uB .w.n.._...F_. __. S,J J �1 &..J Thermofoil AIDF core raised panel door Recessed panel veneer door with Solid wood raised panel door with with melamine finish on reverse side solid wood rails and stiles solid wood rails and stiles w R . .. A MAISON BROKERWOOD 3814 St. Denis Street t m Q Montreal, Quebec, Canada H2W 2M2 A U m a Tel.: (514) 282-8450 ffi Fax: (514) 282-8455 a } I" y. Y S 4 � 9The Lasalle Slab Melamine �'he Laval Slab M�la�nine The Uerduri`Slab 1Gfelamine Tile Snowden Profiled with Atuminux►a Rail Pull with Oak Rawl Full Melamine on Fiberboard t t. { a d °13 s t ' ckled S�tioivden Profiled Me la The Karkland I80 Degree The Mount Royal The Orleans. ne av2th Pickled E'dgebanding High Pressure Lamirurte' Step Profile Lacquer Recessed Pane1L'cquer k x r 1 e..Westmount,Rounded The Hampstead:Rounded ?` " The:Dorual. The Rosemount: Corner Profile Lacquer :Corner Cathedral Lacquer Roman Arch Thermofoil California Arch Thermofoil Rai ised Panel Drawer Front Slab Drawer Front The St.Luc:Square Corner The Beaconsfield:Rounded Profile Lacquer Corner Mullion Lacquer CANADA 3814 St-Denis Street Montreal, Quebec H2W 2M2 Office Telephone: 514-282-8450 Facsimile Telephone: 514-282-8455 Fleur de Lys Fine Cabinetry is a registered trade mark owned and licensed by Brokerwood Products International(Canada), Inc. w n `tr y9 2' Ir£1 y f' k '� a♦, � ok ,w � Y. � ^c ii n. H d f� Yc s S s will . h x u { � - i I White satin lacquer frameless - square raised p anel cabinetry. cn g•Sr ' Glazed maPl . frameless sq' raised per' cabinet �a w � i r,— C 0 c M h_" 'L-,UWCjejS inchwle•Lift-up overhanging porcelain-enameled cooktop•Two 8"and two 6"plug-in Calrod"heating elements tM pti�nic clock and kitchen timer•Custom built-in look with simple slide-in installation. Note:bold=feahue upgrade from previous model ] �s GE 4" IK 30" Slide-In Electric Coil Range o? Oz JSP34AW Almond on almond '�` I •SmartSet Electronic Controls•Self-cleaning �= ® +� oven with Delay Clean option•Frameless glass oven door with designer-style handle o #, •Control lock capability JSP34WW White on white (not shown) a JSP34CD Bisque (not shown) kt ' Available October 2001 3 1 JSP34BW Black on black(not shown) I . O �l . co {I. ti 0 ;E; �y k C 1 i hI r• �f -C= I� P CU J � •tsnds U WIVE CD r' O U ii IF IF JIM GE GE 30" Slide-In Electric Coil Range 30" Slide-In Electric Coil Ranges JSP26BW White or almond J SS26BW Black on black Standard clean oven•Frameless glass oven door •SmartSet Electronic Controls•Self-cleaning oven with Delay-Clean option•Frameless glass with designer-style handle oven door with designer-style handle•Control JSSI6PW White or almond(not shown) lock capability •Standard clean oven•Color-matched oven door •Visor handle CM C _ ' C O C O i U 75 !i GE Spacemaker® Microwave Oven with Convenience Cooking 77taSe nwdeh ti'�•SmartControl System with Interactive Display•Time Cook I&H•Delay Start•Reminder•Auto/Time Defrost •Express Cook•Add 30 Seconds•10 Power Levels•Instant On Controls•Timer On/Off•Child Lockout•Cooking Complete Reminder •Full-View Cooktop Lighting •Easy Mount Installation•Powerful 300 CFM Exhaust Fan Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model 1 j -- JvM16468B . _ ® Black on black — — — (notshown) _—_ JVM1640AB �4 —^, Almond on almond ( (notshown) Auto and Time Defrost options I, M automatically set time and power ,__. _ - levels for fast defrosting. 4 J e 6• GE Spacemaker JVM164OWB White on white •1.6 cu.ft_oven cavity•1000 Watts*•Convenience Cooking Controls for Popcorn,Beverage, Cook and Reheat•CircuWave-1000 Cooking System•Turntable On/Off •Beeper Volume Control•Removable Cooking Rack JVM1631BB Convenience Cooking Controls Black on black allow you to defrost,cook or .not shown) Non vented model reheat at the touch of a pad. JVM1630WB White on white t\y (not shown) JVM1631WB w White on white (notshown) • Non-vented model JVM1631CB Bisque(not shown) •Non vented model GE Add 30 Seconds extends Spacemaker cooking time without the JVM1630BB Black on black hassle of reprogramming. •1.6 cu.ft.cavity•1000 Watts*•Circuwave 1000 Cooking System•Convenience Cookin Controls for Popcorn,Beve Te and Reheat Pads•lxwutable i ; -- ryy kj Ili •f: JVM1441BD 1,03 ® Black on black t t (not shown) 'r1 This powerful 300 CFM rated f I � venting system will remove { �.??' '� o I s smoke and steam from your cooktop. i.. GE i 'IEC-705 Test Procedure SSp�acemaker ! Not all features available on all models. J'M1441WD White on white For additional features,specifications and •1.4 cu.ft.oven cavity•950 Watts*•Convenience Cooking Controls for Popcorn, color availability,refer to page zzo. Beverage and Reheat•Add 30 Seconds•CircuWave'Plus Cooking System �l •Turntable On/Off•Removable Cooking Rack•Non-Vented )acemaker® Under-the-Sink Dishwashers Ovftl GE Under-the-Sink Dishwasher GSM2130FWW/GSM2110FAA �� •5 cycles/12 options•Pots&Pans cycle 'l*Y y •Normal Wash cycle•Short Wash cycle _ (on dial) •Rinse Only cycle (on dial) : _._. •Plate Warmer cycle (on dial) •HotStare' -- _ — - -. --- _ -------- • • 1 option PermaTuf interior Spacemaker® 1 _ upper rack•Deluxe lower rack•Deluxe o 1 — _ silverware basket•2 wash levels 2 •QuietPower"motor a� c Note:Under-the-Sink dishwashers can be installed under GE cooktop Y ! 1 models JP200V and JP201CV.Refer to cooktop installation instructions. O prom cow V 1! y A c O _ CO 18t o p 94 to L 8P nstalled under a single sink Installed under a cooktop �' ➢31 1 _ , v� r maker® 18" Built-In Dishwasher � 3 — CD L V � Q r 7 GEG Spacemaker 18"Built-In Dishwasher GSS180OZ �i •4 cycles/7 options•2 wash levels•Pots&Pans cycle•Normal Wash cycle (on dial) •Light Wash cycle (on dial) •Standard a) silverware basket•Heated Dry On/Off option•Reversible ...-- color panels Black/Harvest,Almond`` i, tie C,-) L co ' 1 tM C C O C --,..,...,� O Not all features available on all models. For additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to pages 228.229. 125 Built-In Dishwashers 77W Se model indU lC•Normal Wash cycle•Heated Dry On/Off option•TrimIess appearance•Rinse Only(on dial) •QuietPower"motor Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model GE Energy Star Built-In Dishwasher GSD3825FBB Black on black •6 cycles/35 options•SureClean- Wash System•TouchTap'"controls i - k E •QuietPower"I sound package t:x ? GSD3835FWW White on white(not shown) Piranha-Hard Food disposer " b •Heavy Wash cycle•Pots&Pans I F* « } GSD3855FCC Bisque (not shown) cycle•Deluxe split silverware I' w� uo basket•Deluxe rack system SureClean"Wash System lets m utl"ENEP Mz; you count on shiny,sparkling •Rinse Aid dispenser with dishes every time.GE design indicator•ENERGYSTAR•qualified assures powerful sprays of GE water are directed at every dish. Nautilus*"OMEN= HIS Exclusive Built-In Dishwasher GSD3630FWW White on white "'` •6 cycles/31 options•TouchTap'" controls•PowerScrubV'Wash System GSD3650FCC Bisque (not shown) •Piranha'"Hard Food disposer o GSD3620FBB Black on black not shown Pots&Pans I sound package ( > Pots&Pans cycle o Plate Wanner ' GSD3610FAAAlmond on almond (not shown) cycle(on dial) •Hi-Temp Wash option•Light Wash cycle•"Cycle On"indicator light•Deluxe rack Piranha"Hard Food Disposer system•6-hour Delay Start option eliminates the need to pre-rinse dishes. . • GE i MOM== N Nautilus' HPS Exclusive Built-In Dishwasher GSD3210FAA Almond on almond CLEAN 1 —! �-pA�w �\ j •5 cycles/22 options•PowerScruh' -- Wash System•QuietPowee'I sound package•Piranha°Hard Food l DELAY GSD3250FCC Bisque(not shown) disposer•Pots&Pans cycle•Plate START GSD3230FWW White on white (not shown) Warmer cycle•Hi-Temp Wash GSD3220FBB Black on black(not shown option•Deluxe rack system "` ) •PermaTuf Tub i Delay Start lets you wash GE dishes whenever it's convenient. Nautilus*" i+ HPS Exclusive Built-In Dishwasher GSD2230FWW White on white •5 cycles/12 options•QuietDesign" sound package•Standard Wash GSD2250FCC Bisque(not shown System•Pots&Pans cycle•Plate i q ) Warmer cycle (on dial) Deluxe GSD2220FBB Black on black(not shown) lower rack GSD2200FWH White front panels/black control panel(not shown) GSD2 and fr t panels/black control panel(not shown) PermaTufm Tub won't chip,peel, GE crack or rust under normal use. HPS Exclusive Built-In Dishwasher GSD2020FBB Black on black •4 cycles/9 options•Standard Wash system•HotStartf'option •Heavy Wash cycle (on dial) •Short Wash cycle(on dial) GSD2050FCC Bisque(not shown) . •Standard upper rack•Deluxe lower rack•Deluxe silverware GSD2030FWW White on white(not shown) basket•PetmaTuf®Tub Not all features available on all models. GSD2000FWH White front panels/black control panel(not shown) j For additional features,specifications GSD2000FAD Almond front panels/black control panel(not shown) j4 and color availability,refer to page 227. 124 GE Nautilus Dishwashers `All you'll notice is the clean."" L SSLLLL H k" Built-In Electric Cooktops t Built-In Electric Cooktops =' ,b1 ... Required free area between the bottom of the cooktop JP326WV and any combustible material,i.e.,shelving is 5' ; JP326CC ,�\ minimum on models JP626/326 and 1-1/2'minimum JP326AV % ! on models JP201/200.Free area not required when JP626WV JP3260V JP2004 installing wall oven underneath.Requires an 18' t JP626AV JP326CV JP201CB \ JP202D minimum from cooktop to adjacent overhead cabinets. Features " Units are furnished with a 48'flexible armored cable. Porcelain-Enameled ' Installation information: Porcelain-Enameled M Porcelain-Enameled �r Before installing,consult installation instructions Porcelain Enameled packed with product for current dimensional data. t Cooldop surface Porcelain-Enameled Brushed-Chrome Stainless Steel Porcelain-Enameled Cooktop models JP326WV/326AV/326BV/326CV are Uft-up cooktop with support rod • • approved for use over select GE 2T or 30'Single Wall 8'beating elements 2 Plug-in Calrod• 2 Plug-In Calrod• 1 Plug-In 1 Plug-in Ovens JP626WV/626AV are approved for use over 6 heating elements 2 Plug-in Calrod• 2 Plug-in Calrod• 1 Plug-in i 1 Plug In GE 30"Single Wall Ovens only.Refer to COOk Dp and Chrome } Chrome wall oven installation instructions packed with Chrome product for current dimensional data. Black Porc:Enam. V, One-piece removable drip bowls Chrome Chrome Chrome Chrome Cooktop models JP20OV,JP201CV and JP202D are �.: Infinite heat rotary controls • • • • approved for use over GE undersink dishwasher model Control panel location u fmnt Right Side Upiront Upfront GSM2100.Refer to cooktop installation instructions product for current dimensional data. White Glass p acked with p e Bisque Glass Almond Glass White Glass Black Glass Note:If installing with a GE Profile Telescopic Downdraft System,consult both cookto and Control pane Almond lass Black Glass P el�w Surface element"ON"indicator fight • • • • downdraft installation instructions packed with ; Appearance ' s product before installing.Cooktop gas/electric supply I ww may need to be re-routed to install downdraft € �; cc E °' AA tq;. ww Be WH Note:The countertop must be at least 26'deep with �< Color appearance* aA BC SS WW a flat surface area of 23-1/2'or more,front to back. MW vim,.0 Weights&Dimensions .. _ ,� w �- In addition,other clearances to the front edge of the = ' Cooldop width in inches 36 30 21-1/4 21-1/4 countertop must be considered. Approx shipping shipiting weigh lbs. 38 29 18 18 Power/Ratings �gl024DV �4 7.4 2.5 i; Amps 0 240V 40 4D 20 — 20 208V 30 3D 20 20 'SS=Stainless Steel,WW=While on white,AA=Almond on almond,BB=Black on black,BC=Brushed-Chrome,WH=White. Counter Installation Dimensions(in inches) Built-In Cooktop Dimensions(in inches) 13'MAX W depth CooktoP H} i,-...... I 30'MIN.to I unprotected cabinet 16'MIN. R MIN. B j;r�.; to cabinet clearance to CIO side Wall . 30.' rear wall from cutout A F L MIN. min. clearance to��� ( t side waft from cutout Cut should < �g not interfere Electrical junction box 12'MIN. with cabinet below countertop structure at front Dimensions(in inches) '; To Edge Minimum Spacing of Front To Nearest Counter Overall cutout Combustible all (Min.) Filler Trim Nit—When replacing an old GE 30'cooktop(with Model w I D A B C R L F larger opening) with Model JP326WV,JP326CV,JP326AV, JP626 35-12 21 33-7/8 19-18 1-3/4 6 6 2-1/2 i JP326BV,use the following one-piece trim kit to fill in the JP326 3D-114 21-1/4 2B-1/2 19-5/8 1-3/4 2 5-1/2 2-12 over-size hole.Available at additional cost JP201 21-1/4 16.58 20-18 1618 2 2 2 2-3/4 JXTR31W(White) JP2D0 21-1/4 16-58 20.1/8 16.18 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2-3/4 JXTR31A(Almond) 1; JXTR31 B(Black) :o See page 162 for warranty information 195 Built-In Cooktops: 36" and 30" Electric Coil l WSe nwde14 hrlide•Porcelain-enameled lift-up cooktop•Two 8"and two 6"plug-in Calrod®heating elements •Infinite heat rotary controls Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model GE 36 Electric Cooktop r. M,-;� JP626WV White on white •One-piece chrome drip bowls•Upfront color-matched glass control panel JP626AV Almond on almond(not shown) . . . GE ♦ ♦ • • 30" Electric Cooktop j ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ JP326BV Black on black Y� :1 •One-piece drip bowls•Color-matched glass w- control panel JP326WV White on white (not shown) JP326CC Bisque(not shown) JP326AV Almond on almond (not shown) JP326CV Brushed-chrome (not shown) ol i Built In Cooktops: 21" Compact kk' 2 GE 21" Electric Cooktop JP200V White porcelain-enamel •One 8"and one 6"plug-in heating elements •Infinite heat rotary controls•Removable one-piece chrome drip bowls•Heating element it "ON indicator light JP201CB Stainless steel (not shown) - — JP202D White on white (not shown) �a a I Not all features available on all models. For additional features,specifications i and color availability,refer to page 195. an Cycle and Manual Defrost Refrigerators ."+.::u� d,= 'Cycle Detrost Manual Defrost GFR12AAM GMSIDAAM Capacity C s Total cu.it A 11.7 Fresh food cu.ft. 9.D4 8.74 Freezer cu.ft. 2.61 .9T Shelf area(s q.ft. \ 13.9 9.68 s Features Ice'N Easy trays ! 2 Freezer chiller tray with baffle Cabinet shelves - TA-d. 2-Ad. ve etable/truh crisper 2 1 FAN Door shelves v 3 5 2 E Tall bottle storage on door i • • Dairy com artment s 1 1 Full Door Width, 1 Egg storage bin Pockets i t V Freezer compartment shells k 1 F/W 1 F/W s i Economical/Quiet CabineVdoor insulation IN Foam Cabinet/door liner Plastic Plastic f t Appearance ��� xt4x ^ Colors available White White Door handles Whhe Recessed Black a�1 Reversible doors • (`�� Right or left door opening • Weights&Dimensions E Height to top of hin a in. A 59-12 58 , Height to top of case in. B 59-5/16 57-9/16 Case depth without door in. C 26-1/8 21-3/8 O_ Case depth with door less handle in. D 28 23-1/2 Case depth with door handle in. E 28 24-13/16 { Depth with door o en 90' ) less door handle in. F 50 3/8 44-1315 Width in. G 23-12 23 Width wldoor open 90°less door handle in. H 23-3/11 23-12 Air clearances Each side in. 112 5/8 t To in. 1/2 2 s Back in. 1 1 App rox.shipping weight lbs. 139 135 `Compartment for short-term storage of frozen food.The frozen food compartment of this refrigerator wilf L make ice,and pre-frozen foods can be stored for about.two weeks.It will not eahectively freeze fresh foods or provide-long-term rage for meats,poultry,or Cycle Defrost Two Door Refrigerator Manual Defrost Single Door Refrigerator IE— H H —' �— D h ; 1 D E D E `..A B A B F � F U 1v ii Front View Top View Front View Top View i c: See page 162 for warranty information 177 s Top-Freezer Cycle and Manual Defrost Refrigerators l use'rnjocleh inchI&•Adjustable Wire Everwhite cabinet shelves•Tall bottle storage Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model GE Cycle Defrost Models f GFR12AAM i �F +; •11.7 cu ft capacity•Three door shelves •Two adjustable cabinet shelves•Two clear vegetable/fniit crispers 11 If WIN: . Wire Everwhite Shelves minimize shuffling and f �;.� restacking of food. . 11 �111� f { Full-Width Crisper provides easy access to fruits and vegetables. GE Manual Defrost Model GMS l0AAM •9.7 cu.ft.capacity•Five door shelves (two egg) •Two adjustable wire cabinet s f shelves•Full-width vegetable/fruit crisper a �e� i t 11i y x z � t y I -4 , 3 E uu u�o ry 4u � t_,1 1 DI i il: I .... 1 ' I Not all features available on all models. For additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to page 177 30 Top-Freezer "I" Series Models: 22 to 18 cu. ft. Thee models inchwle•Upfront illuminated temperature controls•Upfront fresh food lighting•Three glass shelves,two adjustable split and one full width•Two vegetable/fruit crispers•Snack pan•Two full width encapsulated door bins,one with gallon storage •Deluxe quiet design•NeverClean"condenser Note-bo - eature upgrade from previous model E Icemaker models GTS22ICM(not shown) a •21.8 cu.ft.capacity•FrostGaacd° technology•Pivot-out pan removal ► 4 _ e system•Electronic temperature sensors �. •Equipped with factory-installed > er TIM K electronic icemaker — (rrt OL GTS18ICM Gallon door storage • 17.9 cu.ft.ca aciry accommodates gallon containers for quick access Non-ic maker models to most-used items. - e GTS22IBM(not shown) •21.8 cu.ft.capacity•FrostGuarcr technology•Pivot-out pan removal -= system•Electronic temperature sensors 9 •Utility bin•Equipped for optional - i 71," electronic icemaker �R—. GTS 18IBM(not shown) •17.9 cu.ft.capacity GTHI8IBM(not shown) ' -- -- •17.9 cu.ft.capacity i '.. r k,an 1,-RGY STAR';t—, GE nos d.W,.C D•t tl pcduci Deluxe Quiet Design--new design Y roeK na ENERGY STAR and enhanced components ensure q (Model GTH1818M) quiet operation. Top-Freezer "D" Series Models: 18 cu. ft 77USe Mod&ZI�•Upfront illuminated temperature controls•Three wire shelves,two adjustable split and one full width •Two vegetable/fruit crispers•Snack pan•Three door shelves with gallon storage•Deluxe quiet design•Upfront fresh food lighting •NeverQean'"condenser Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model GE Icemaker model I = GTS18DCM ° •17.9 cu.ft capacity with ca P tY• l , t '' t factory-installed electronic icemaker ter- w I _ ': - •...,.4,,,�„__, Non-icemaker model GTSI8DBM(not shown) "r t' '�� •17.9 cu.ft.capacity•Equipped for l Upfront illuminated temperature optional electronic icemaker•Utility bin controls are easy to see and set. GTHI8DBM(not shown) 3`` •17.9 cu.ft.capacity 1( R .......... ' � As N ENERGY STAR Varpm. GE t &W—d Wt E pmtluct i �w,+ - • p��p/ riwab ft ENERGY STAR• Y '.'-i -`. �9((NN yu�aeiwes iar mervi.nc�encr. (ModelGTHtBDBM) I .. Not all features available on all models. For additional features,specifications and -� color availability,refer to pages 175-176. --- i 28 o TO 0 LM sigh-Performance, Performance, Deluxe and Standard Hoods y- Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model 1 _ � IIIIIlIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIINIII [3i F�m GE P�qfileT" GE Hth>-Perfmwnm Hood Deluxe Hood ,]V666C Stainless steel JV347X White on white (shown),Bisque, O •36"width•Three-speed fan control plus boost•Two halogen Almond on almond or Black on black > cooktop lights (50 watts each) •Night light setting•Vertical or rear •30"width•Rotary control•Three-speed fan cc exhaust(350/400 CEM) •3-1/4"x 10"rectangular duct(convertible •Cooktop light with Night light setting•Light cover o to 7.'round duct) •Convertible exhaust(Shipped in non vented U JV665C White on white or Black on black(not shown) configuration,convertible to 7"or rectangular exhaust.)•Rectangular damper included 4th r? CD G PIVfi H' P ormance Hood _....__ GE JV635C White on white(shown)or Black on black Standard Hoods •30 width•Three-speed fan control plus boost•Two halogen 327X White shown Bi ue or Almond cu coolctop lights(50 watts each) •Night light setting•Vertical or rear ( ) •30"width•7"round duct•Easy-to-use rocker cc 'I exhaust(350/400 CFM)•3-1/4"x 10"rectangular duct(convertible �'- v to 7"round duct) switches•Two-speed fan•Cooktop light JV636C Stainless steel(not shown) JV337X White,Bisque or Almond(not shown) •3.1/4"x 10"rectangular duct o •Rectangular damper included v JN327X White,Bisque or Almond(not shown) �° •Non-vented JXDA22 round damper accessory,available at additional cost(ModelsJV347/337). F o rtn rn JXHCl cord kit allows a receptacle in the cabinet over the E 'r range to accommodate either an over-the-range microwave N oven or a standard hood. > t C/:) GE P�Oy Performance Hoods JV565C White on white(shown),Bisque or Black on black •36",width*Wospeed fan control•200 CFM(max.)-Two halogen 10M, cooktop lights(50 watts each)•Convertible exhaust options(7"round, rectangular or non vented)•Rectangular damper included JV566C Stainless steel(not shown) JV535C White on white,Bisque,or Black on black(not shown) •30"width JV536C Stainless steel not shown)) Not all features available on all models. JXDFor additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to page 218. Ec 3 rotted damper accessory,available at additional cost (M6delsJV666/665/636/635/566/565/536/535). �� Oi GE Spacemaker IhM Countertop Microwave Oven GE Spacemaker II JElvt25tiY White on white .Iviid-size.9 cu ft cavity•800 Watt r. ® •Convenience Cooking Controls f is f i Popcorn,Beverage,Reheat,Snack, and Cook Pads•Delay Start/ Reminder•Time Defrost•Auto Defrost•Time Cook I&II•Exprc a ------------------- Cook•Instant On Controls•Sour On/Off•Optional trim kit available Easy Under Cabinet Installation ' „= *, ^_ _ •Optional Undercabinet mountin leaves counter space free for kit availablet v food preparation. JEM25GY Black with greystone case(not shown) Not all features available on all models. I` For additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to page 223. Counterto Microwave Optional Oven Trim Kits l p r 30" Deluxe Trim Kit For 1.8 Cu.Ft Microwave Ovens � • This trim kit allows for built-in installation of the 1.8 countertop microwave oven in a wall or �y cabinet alone,or over a GE 30"single electric wall oven as shown. a:,w. 30"Deluxe Trim Kits for Models JE18M and JE1M0 ' >� JX1830SB—Stainless Steel,Al Al JX183006—Bisque,JX183066—Black 6 27" Deluxe Tnm Kit For 1.8 Cu.Ft Microwave Ovens (not shown) rrL w built one to microwave Tha el countertop, tingat appearance or 7 27" g electric c oven for aompleone-pg d can € -1 PIP- 2T'Deluxe Trim Kids for Models JE1860 and JE7840 ca t+r JX1827SB—Stainless Steel,JX1827W6—White,JX1627C"isque,JX16276B—Black 30"Deluxe Trim Kit For 1.6 Cu. Ft.Microwave Ovens r, Y This trim kit allows for built in installation of the 1.6 countertop microwave oven in a wall or cabinet # alone,or over a GE 30' single electric wall oven as shown. 30°Deluxe Trim Kits for Models JE1660 and JE1640 JX1530MWWWhite,JX1530MAW—Almond,JX1530MBW—Black 27"Deluxe Trim Kit For 1.6 Cu.Ft Microwave Ovens (not Shown)to be The 27"deluxe trim kit allows a 161 oven for ap complete one piece buult inttntegrated appearance alone, _ CO or over a GE 27"single electric v En 2T'Deluxe Trim Kits for Models JE16ED and JE1640 JX1527MWW White,JX1527MAW—Almond,JX1527MBW—Black v 0 :- Deluxe Trim Kits For 1.5 Cu.Ft GE Profile' Microwave Ovens — Built in trim lots co wall oven der these convection microwave ovens for a single electric ,t t wall oven.Use a convection It �' complete convection cooking center. 27"Deluxe Trim Kits for Model JE1590 II 30"Deluxe Trim Kits for Model JE1590 JX1527CSC—Stainless,JX1527CWC—White, ite — tainless,JX1530CWC—White,. S 7CBC—Black ', rr, 2 SC 15 C X JX1530 JX1527CCC—Bisque,J Al530CCC—Bisque,JX1530CBC—Black E a> ' y cn Built-ln Trim Kit For .9 Cu.Ft Microwave Ovens � For a custom built-in appearance,this kit allows built in installation of the Spacemaker II`" microwave oven into a wall or cabinet alone. Trim Kits for Models JEM31 and JEM25 JX827SS—Stainless Steel Trim Kits JX827WN—White Trim Kits JX827BN—Black Trim Kits 'a 'IEC-705 Test Procedure cm b_ .7 d .9 Cu.Ft �Hanging Kit For 'S' an --optional Trim Kit--Custom Trim kits available in both Microwave ovens 27'and 30'configurations at an additional cost. O This hanging kit allows installation tinder a cabinet See page 221 to complete installation. can easily be mounted below your cabinetry,freeing up +t p 10,JE520,JE710,JEM25,JEM31 tUndercabinet mounting kit—Noted microwave oven Hanging Kit for Models JE5 Pub.No.4 A019 valuable counter space.A mounting template provides U all the necessary measurements for installation on Q practically any wood or metal cabinets. 115 C Built-In Single Ovens: 30" Electric CD M 72eSe nwdelS indUde •The largest'capacity wall oven in America!•Flush appearance installation•Fits most 30"cabinets•TrueTemp- --rn•SmartSet Electronic Controls•Certified Sabbath mode•Control lock capability•Exclusive Big©earView`"window•Variable broil -ote:bold=feature upgrade from previous model Self-Clean Convection GE Profiler ,x tF 30"Built In Single Oven o I JTPI8SD Stainless steel c--) �} is CleanDesign oven interior•Integrated designer-style handle•Upfront halogen True European convection interior oven light•Extra large 4.2 cu.ft, NI :IJ i �,t' n ` ' self cleaning oven with Delay Clean option ovens provide even cooking •Convection Bake•Convection Roast and superior baking results. pp,iti , ,Roasting rack.proofing option•Eight-pass ;I ' bake element is Three heavy-duty oven racks O r " •Exclusive 7 embossed rack positions > �a •Automatic meat thermometer f 1 0 4 ;1 to Cook more at once!Take I advantage of more oven �{ acity with the versatility of On rack positions. n j co f^ Y ll� G I I 6 !g, � I co ! The ideal environment for v proofing dough.Simply set for Proof and dough will rise to perfection. Installation E .A= p m Flexibility 30"wall ovens can be installed in a wall or -F most 30"cabinets,or ca undercounter installation o �n+ GE Fj 0�2�"° with either a gas or GE electric cooktop above. 30"Built In Single Oven 30"Built In Single Oven See page 187 for JTPISWD White on white \ JTPI8BD Black on black approved cooktop use. JTP18®Bisque(not sbown) EM C r"" c 0 ,ong leading manufacturers'brands -r— .ept models JTP56 and JTP18. j Not all features available on all models. ' U For additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to page 1 B6. Q 11 55 f GFr-kj pIiatrccE.€Worts- � 1 GE Disposall°--Food Waste Disposer 1 .0 ! ff °Qe models bwhzde •Stainless Steel,Dual Swivel,Anti Jam GE Continuous Feed Disposers € a !�} ng Blades•Ei-Mount Installation•Stainless Steel Sink Flange GFC1020F •Heavy Duty 1 HP motor•2800 RPM grinding action •Manual Reset Overload Protector•Removable Splash Guard •Super Capacity•QuietPowef'III sound insulation package (continuous feed models only) •Sink Stopper•Drain Connector Kit •1-year full replacement plus 6-year limited warranty* E I il j GFC720F •Heavy Duty 3/4 HP motor•2700 RPM grinding action fly Al •Super Capacity•QuietPower 11 sound insulation package ' •1-year full replacement plus 4-year limited warranty* 1 0 GFC530F a CM � •Heavy Duty 1/2 HP motor•2600 RPM grinding action { �' e :- :-r •Extra Large Capacity•QuietPower I sound insulation o e 4 package•1-year full replacement plus 2-year limited v r l • warranty* t t 1 GFC535F Similar to GFC530 but has attached line cord ( �� GFC520F y •Heavy Duty 1/2 HP motor•2600 RPM grinding action r e , •Large Capacity•Standard sound insulation package [ > •1-year full replacement plus 2-year limited warranty* i (# GFC1020F GFC720F GFC530F/ GFC525F h 20 b Similar to GFC5ut as attached line cord GFC535F 0 1 GFC320F L) •1/3 HP motor•1900 RPM grinding action•Large ( J-5 r Capacity•Standard sound insulation package•1-year frill , replacement warranty* h u k GFC325F F Similar to GFC320 but has attached line cord GE Batch Feed ser GFB760F •Heavy Duty 3/4 HP motor•2700 RPM grinding actions •Super Capacity•WetPower 11 sound insulation package •1-year full replacement plus 4-year limited warranty* *See written warranty for details. GFC520F/ —e=r2 n �— GFB760F � j GFC525F GFC325F r CD Co Built-In Compactors I �� GE Profrle�" � B In 44actrn- i GCG1540FSS Stainless steel _ ➢LI e l t y M •Built in only•1,t cu.h capacity I 1/3 horsepotiver 9 Removable key,locki •Toe pedal+opener Rear wheels allow fr E asy r e ; i r, l General Information for Dryer Exhausting t; Minimizing the length of ductwork and the number of turns in an exhaust system minimizes the potential for lint to settle and accumulate in the exhaust dud t and in the interior cabinet of the dryer.Refer to your specific dryer installation instructions for recommended duct length. 1.Wall Caps And Other Terminations 3.Treatment Of Turns Other Than 90° 6.Water Condensation All exhaust sysfems must be terminated in a One turn of 45°or less may be ignored.Two Condensation in a dryer exhaust system is manner that will prevent backdrafts from outside such turns should be treated as one 900.Each caused by the moisture in the exhausted air as well as prevent birds or other wildlife from turn over 45°should be treated as one 900. contacting the cold inner surfaces of the ductwt building nests or taking refuge in the ductwork. Refer to specific dryer installation for maximum Condensation,which forms at the beginning c The wall cap should present minimal resistance duct lengths and for allowable number of 90° the drying cycle,will dissipate quickly after the to the flow of exhaust air and should require little bends.In determining the number of turns for ductwork becomes heated.If the ductwork maintenance to prevent clogging.The preferred an exhaust system,one 900 turn must be added passes through an area which keeps it cool termination is either a dampered wall cap with for the bend made inside the cabinet whenever throughout the drying cycle,considerable a 4"wide opening or a movable louvered wall the dryer is exhausted through the right,left or condensation within the duct can be expected. cap.A 2-1/2'wall cap restricts airflow and bottom.NOTE:Some dryers are limited to only This can result in rapid accumulation of lint in increases drying time.It must be installed with rear exhausting.Consult the installation the ductwork. the opening down,and installed at a minimum of instruction for the type of dryer being used. Ductwork which runs through an unheated are. 12"above ground level or any other obstruction. 4.Use Of Flexible Metal Ducting or is situated adjacent to an air conditioning du ° Special consideration should be given in areas should be insulated to avoid such condensation Q, We recommend the use of T'diameter rigid > where heavy snow drifts are likely to occur to i metal ducting for permanent and transition problems.Joints should be tight to avoid leaks ; ensure the wall cap does not become obstructed. venting.Permanent venting is from the wall, and,where feasible,the duct should be dropped > � . Other types of terminations,such as roof vents floor or ceiling to the outside.Transition venting 1/16"per foot toward the termination. or louvered plenum chambers,are acceptable providing they are equivalent to the 4" is from the dryer to the wall,floor or ceiling. If dampered wall cap.They must contain at least all rigid ducting cannot be used then flexible all 14 square inches of ventilation area and afford metal ducting may be used,if the following f precautions are adhered to: 1/t6"Per I adequate protection against backdrafts. A.Use only 4'diameter all metal ducting. Foot Pitch S f: B.Never use foil or other ducting that can be (Vr'� easily punctured with a screwdriver or nail. i C.It must not be allowed to collapse,kink or � sag when the dryer is in its final installed 7•Accessibility For Clean I ° �I position.Required turns in the exhaust Since it may be necessary from time to time to Exhaust ducts must not contain screens or other system should be made with rigid elbows. remove lint from the inside of the ductwork,it is important that the exhaust system be installed j filtering devices which may become clogged D.Use the shortest duct length possible.Don't with a provision for periodic inspection and with lint.The dryer exhaust must not terminate exceed the maximum allowable duct length cleaning.Some provision should be made for in an ordinary chimney,under an enclosed house specified in the installation instructions. access to turns and straight runs of duct installed ` floor or crawl space,or into an attic,since any E.Stretch the duct to its maximum length.g in an enclosed area,such as above plastered aV1; accumulated lint could create a fire hazard and F.To reduce the risk of fire,NEVER USE PLAS- ceilings.Special consideration should be given to g�r� the moisture could cause damage.Never TIC OR OTHER COMBUSTIBLE DUCTWORK. the amount of maintenance required for roof caps ' terminate the exhaust into a common duct or on vertical installations,since the user cannot be ,�111 1 plenum with a kitchen hood exhaust since the NOTE:In special installations where it is impossible , combination of grease and lint could create a to use all metal rigid or all metal flexible duct for expected to make frequent inspections or cleanings %; transition venting,UL Listed clothes dryer transition fire hazard. 9 8.In Line Exhaust(Booster)Fans duct may be used.The following additional (booster) g Y Use of In Line exhaust booster fan for single 2.Separation Of Turns In The Ductwork precautions should be followed if this type of p unit installation is not recommended: All turns in the exhaust system,external to the ducting is used. •Operator may forget to turn it on. t � dryer itself,including the distance from the last A.Never use transition duct beyond the wall, •It may block. turn to the dampered wall cap,should be ceiling or floor inside the dryer. •It may fail without Operator noticing it. separated by at least 4'of straight metal duct. ` B.Avoid resting the duct on sharp objects. Single Family-Type Dwellings This will reduce the added resistance which � Please refer to the installation instructions for For more detailed information,refer to the € w results from rapid changes in airflow direction additional exhaust information. installation instructions for the specific dryer a inside the ducting.If two turns must be closer model selected. than 4',deduct 10'from the maximum lengths 5.Sealing Of Joints Mobile or Manufactured Home Installation I °' shown in the chart on page 233. All duct joints should avoid leaks.Duct joints Gas Dryer installation must conform with local should be made air and moisture tight by wrapping Gas Codes and with CGA 8149.1 or 8149.2 the overlapped joints with duct tape.The male (Installation code for Gas Burning Appliances 4'Min. ►� ` 4'Min. ends of each section of duct should point away and Equipments). N from the dryer. All Dryer Installations must conform to - Do not assemble the ductwork with screws or Manufactured Home Construction and Safety other fasteners that extend into the duct.They Standard,Title 24 CFR,Part 32-80.The dryer El will serve as a collection point for lint. MUST be exhausted to the outdoors with the ° termination securely fastened to the mobile home structure.The exhaust MUST NOT be directed underneath the mobile home. See page 164 for warranty information. Q 235 Front-Loading Washer Front-Loading Matching Dryer WPXH214A"' WSXH2O3A \ OPXH46EA/GA-' DSXH43EAIGA Capacity ,rr :-r� i�.��k. �..��fi Capacity 94 Capacity Extra-large Extra-Lae Capacity r' Extra-Large Extra-tare ' Cubic Feet 2.7 2.7 Cubic Feet 5.7 5.7 Features - w ,' Features Wash/rmse temperatures 2 7 4 Tumble Drying • • Water levels Auto.Adjustment Auto.Adjustment Time Dry Cycles Standard Rinse Cycles 4 3 Auto Dry Cycles 3 2 Motor Speeds Variable Variable Sensor Dry \ • ColorLogicTe 2000 • ColorLogic"m 2000 • Combinations* 1� HC,WW,WC,CC HC,WW,WC,CC Temperature 0 tions 4 4 Detergent dispenser(liquid/powderp, • • Regular/Cottons • • Bleach dispenser • • MediunVPerm.Press • • Fabric softener dispenser 0 0 Low/Delicates 0 0 End-of-cycle signal Fixed Adjustable Air Fluff/No Heat(Cool Down) • • Dryer Dimensions Final Spin/Speed selections 4 Automatic Wrinkle Care cycle 2 (in inches), Number of wash cycles 14 8 Moisture sensor • Cotton Drying rack • • 47-12 Heavy Soil • • Auto Dry Cycles 341 r Medium Soil • • Cottons • • Light Soil • • Easy Care • • O Easy Care Knits/Delicate • Medium Soil/Perm.Press • • Cool Down • • Light Soil/Wrinkle Free • Ouick Clean Lint Screen • • Door Do Del'icates/Unra Care • • End-of-Cycle Signal Fixed Adjustable 90. Pre-Wash • Drum Light • • ventl(nockoul'•-' Quick Wash • Reverse-A-Door • • F•—zs3a Extra-Rinse Cycle/Auto Option 3 2 Dura Finish Top and Drum • • SIDE VIEW 4-34 Max.Spin speed 950 850 Spill-Saver Top • • AutoTem p • Poly Tumbling Vanes • • i z1-71 Noise package Deluxe Standard Leveling Legs • • Energy star • • 100%Front Serviceable • • 0-ElecMc Leveling legs • • Exhaust Options Electdc/Gas 4/3 4/3 Connection Rear rollers • • Heavy-Duty Suspension System • • 2-9/16 Stainless steel wash drum • • Appearance 4nx r ;r ��f 1s-9116-{ Jr £ Colors available Bis Bisque,Whde on white Whde on white I Counter 36 Appearance r �; 334 3458 Colors available � i ; A x Shi in Weight Elec/Gas, 116 116 Wei Weights&Dimensions T_31711671-11i 1 i Approx.shipping w[. lbs. 217 217 Flexible installation Undercounter,stacked,side-by-side Gas Pipe Connecton LP conversion kit Avg*- Flexible installation _11ndercounter,stacked,side-by-side WE25X10003 WE25X10003 REAR VIEW HC=Hot-Cold,WW=Warm-Warm,WC=Warm-Cold,CC=Cold-Cold. Dryer Exhausting Information Washer Dimensions(in inches) Use Metal Duct Only Best performance Dryer Specifications Maximum Length of Exhaust options: � 26-3/4 17 Rigid Metal Duct p 1134 �- 2aa -{ n Electric:4-way via rear,right,left and bottom. a/a za-- -3ra 1 60 4'Dia.I F4� � Number Exhaust Hood Type Gas:3-way via rear,right and bottom.Dryer is a of B shipped exhausted to the rear. o 90° A penis Exhaust Elbow Kit: 36 O 1-12 z-t2 Tums 4.Openinq Opening Order Pub.No.14-A018. Under Water J Power D sD ft 46 n. Electrical Requirements: Counts Inlets Cord 1 52 n. 40 n. q 34-5/8' 31.5/8' 33.12' 2 44 n. 32 ft. 208/24OV,3 Wire,560OW,24A,60 Hz Front Loading 3 32 n. 24 n. 208V,3 wire,440OW,22A,60 Hz ® Dryers a 28 ft. 16 it Gas Requirements:120V,60 Hz,6 A Roller Wheels// Adjustable Legs Maximum Length of See Pub.No.49-9963-2 for installation information. REAR VIEW SIDE VIEW a'Dia.Flexible Metal Duct Number Exhaust Hood Type Washer Specifications of s Circuit Requirements:An individual,properly-grounded branch circuit, 90• A 2-12' with athree-prong grounding-type receptacle,protected by a 15 or 20 amp Turns 4'Opening Opening circuit breaker or time-delay fuse is required. 0 30 ft. 18 ft. Electrical Requirements:120V,60 Hertz,12.0 Amps Front Loading 1 22 n 14 n. Dryers 2 1 14 ft. 10 n. See Pub.No.31-2819 for installation information. Special Installation Requirements Undercounter Installation •Minimum clearances between dryer cabinet and adjacent Bathroom or Bedroom Installation •Accessory mounting kits are required for undercounter walls or other surfaces are: •The dryer MUST be exhausted to the outdoors. installation.To order,call 1-800-848-7722. 0'either side See EXHAUST INFORMATION on previous page. Washer—Order Pub.No.14-AO37 3'front and rear •The installation must conform with the local codes,or in Dryer—Order Pub.No.14-AO08 •Minimum vertical space from floor to overhead cabinets, the absence of local codes,with the National Fuel Gas Stacked Installation ceilings,etc.is 52'. Code,ANSI Z223. •Brackets for stacking dryer over washer are •Closet doors must be louvered or otherwise ventilated and Minimum Clearances other than Alcove or included with the dryer. must contain a minimum of 60 sq.in.of open ry Closet Installations area equally distributed.If this closet contains both a washer Alcove or Closet Installation •Minimum clearances to combustible surfaces: •If your dryer is approved for installation in an alcove and a dryer,doors must contain a minimum of 120 sq.in. 0'both sides or closet,it will be stated on a label on the dryer back. of open area equally distributed. 3'rear •The dryer MUST be exhausted to the outdoors. •The closet should be vented to the outdoors to prevent See EXHAUST INFORMATION on previous page. gas pocketing in case of a gas leak in the supply line. For more information on venting kits and accessories, •No other fuel-burning appliance shall be installed in please call 1-800-GE-CARES. See pages 164 for warranty information, the same closet with the dryer. 234 pr GE Profile" and GE Front-Loading Washers and Dryers F7nrifrLiJQC�2YtClshei ENERG j •2 7 to ft extra large capacity•Energy Star•High efficienry washer.!14 wash cycles •7 wash/rinse 1"u'adures•Automatic water level,adjustment Extra 12mse ' Cycle/Auto Option•AutoTemp•Quick Wash ColorLogic 2000•Adjustable final spin speed Fabric softener dispenser Bleach dispenser+Fixed end-oftycle signal •Debate Quiet;•Available m White on white and Bisque; F_7T_ U - y CD 0 Cu -. GE' P?nfzle' Front-Loading Dryer EGA':U .,5 7 cu ft extra]ar a ca aci •Tumble •Moisture Sensor•Time D . .. g .: P tY.. �ng ry cle 3 Auto Iles 4 tem'eratuTe o lions•2 Wrinkle Care cles rY _. Dy ,. , P P cy •Dryer Rack•Fixed end of-cycle signal+D ryer interior fight•Reverse A:Door ' •Colorl ogic 2000•Available in 3Nhite on white and Bisque cu �� I y p. _ GE ' As an ENERGY STAR' abler,GE hes Front-Loading Washer �� p detmmh,ed OW Ns product meets the ENERGY STAR' WSXR2O8A V d..to merpr effid—y. •2.7 cu.&extra-large capacity•Energy Star•High-efficiency washer•8 cycles:Regular(Heavy Soil, Medium Soil),Permanent Press (Medium Soil,Light Soil),Knits/Delicates,Prewash,Extra-Rinse y Cycle/Auto Option,3 standard rinse cycles•4 wash/rinse temperatures•Automatic water level adjustment•Fabric Softener dispenser•Bleach dispenser y a _... ---------.-- _.. cc CM , GE E Front-Loading Dryer t :o DSXH43EA/GA *= •5.7 cu.fL extra-large capacity•Tumble drying•Timed Dry cycle•2 Auto Dry cycles (Cottons, i -c Easy Care) •3 temperature options•Air Fluff(No Heat) •End-of-cycle signal•Dryer interior v light•Reverse-A-Door•Dryer rack `— For additional features,spec j Q color availability,refer to page 234. 39 r F { GE Profile" and GE Front-L-6a' difii ashers and Dryers The solution to a tight situation. `! Washer Features The GE stackable washer and dryer pair has a ' unique configuration that eases its way into any i situation,whether it's a hallway or a closet And ' { Y As an Energy Starm partner, wherever it is—out of the way or out of sight a GE has determined that this' this laundry pair gives you the capacity you need meets the Energy Stan to finish the laundry in minimal time. guidelines far energy efficiency ,ruk`t^ht t�fr, if�`SwL'= Y-,I K ! Automatic Water Fill eliminates guesswork and water waste. Automatically adjusts to the load type by adding water.Water fill level remains below the door. ,� k ' r n ¢ wx� I Automatic Dispenser t y a automatically dispenses detergent, bleach and fabric so, ener at just the a 555 I right time In the wash cycle. c ��� ��� ��l�Y 4a .,+e.r� ,y r•5�ac� Dryer Feature �'G.ay•,��.�'i'°5.�'.. , � -ri AID _ �TS[3?7� rr - Dryer Rack 4� The sturdy Dryer Rack is designed to . r r dry items such as washable sneakers and stuffed animals,and is easy to � Y)if'YfI[FiY9•$1FFFB�6 pm • ll insert and remove. r YVPXF 14 shvum ructh DPXH46EA/DPXH46GA iStftCk27igktt Zi2l[ICa:Ttltt/t ll1yCl� Not all features available on all models. f 5 ty �n t Side-By-Side "D" Series Model: 20 cu. ft. CEO x i.' M OJ r � a ; CJ3 Oz �: I " � I ' � e } 0 J am • � t r � t � Deluxe Quiet Design— new design and enhanced c components ensure o tip quiet operation. ®♦�� Mai yS..6..�, '(�'�`q �N, M�+ o CD ter` 1o.; Gallon door storage accommodates gallon containers for quick access to most-used items. ,w fi . GE Non-dispenser model GSS20DBM •19.8 cu.ft.capacity•Upfront electronic temperature controls•FrostGuard—technology•Deluxe quiet design•Equipped for optional electronic automatic icemaker•Two sealed crispers•Four fresh food door bins,two with gallon storage•Four wire freezer shelves,three adjustable•NeverClean"condenser '.I CD ca U rn CD O 1 U his o' Cn V) CD cu T � i o Not all features available on all models. 0 U For additional features,specifications and � color availability,refer to page 171. Q 21 I' Built-In Single Ovens: 27" Electric CD Ai�4e ModelS 2ndUde •Bakes more evenly than any other convection wall oven*•The largest**capacity wall oven in America!•Flush i appearance installation•Fits most 27"cabinets•Electronic oven controls•Certified Sabbath mode•Big ClearView window•Variable broil •Control lock capability(except model JKsw Note:hold=feature upgrade from previous model Self-Clean Convection Self-Clean Convection m " M r Pam:• ,._ t srrtr.;�x x The durable construction of the heavy-duty racks provides additional support for large - CD cooking needs. o > a� GE P�qfiy� GE Pmfilez 27 Built-In Sin gle Ocrn 27 Built-In Si ngle Oven JK915SF Stainless steel JK915WF White on white x • Extra-large 3.9 cu.L self-clean oven with Delay •Frameless glass oven door Clean option•Precise Air convection system Single- JM15CF Bisque on bisque(not shown) rn rack and multi-rack convection bake•Convection (D Certified Sabbath mode keeps JM15BF Black on black(not shown) � roast•Auto Recipe'"conversion•Electronic glass food in accordance with «3 kosher law. touch controls•Proof mode•Warm mode•Six-pass bake element•Three heavy-duty oven racks •Convection cookbook•CleanDesign oven interior/ Q Installation hidden bake element•Stainless steel oven door Flexibility •Halogen oven light•Oven meat probe 27"wall ovens can be { installed in a wall or 27"cabinet,or in an Self Clean Self-Clean/Standard Clean undercounter installation with either a 2 gas or electric cooktop above. ' U See page 189 for CD approved cooktop use. ti 1 E a � � a .t GE GE 27" Built-In Single Oven 27" Built-In Single Oven JKP25SH Stainless steel JKP20CF Bisque on bisque •Extra-large 3.9 cu.ft.self-clean oven with light •Extra-large 3.9 cu.ft.self-clean oven with light self-clean option•Two oven racks•Four self-clean option•Two oven racks•Four tT embossed rack positions embossed rack positions c ' o 20WF White on white (nor shown) _ , 3 }. JKP20BF Black on b ac z(not s own ° Not all features available on all models. 1 U For additional features,specifications and JKS06BF Black on black(not shown) color availability,refer to pages 188-189. •Extra-large 3.9 cu.ft.standard-clean oven Q •Two oven racks 59 Built In Cooktops: 30" Electric CleanDesign .2 MCI&in&&•Smooth Frameless ceramic-glass©eanDesign cooktop•Flush-mount installation capability(except stainless steel models) •Fingerprint and scratch-resistant patterned glass cooktop Note:bold=feature upgrade from previous model 3 .,�.-; ' ";4 �� i�� ,��► GE Profile's 30"Electronic Touch Control cooktop JP938BC Black on black 0 •Frameless cooktop•Electronic touch controls•Pan presence sensor•Pan size sensor•Control lockout•Kitchen timer •Four ribbon heating elements:one 6" m Y with warmer,one dual(6"/9")and two 7 ` with connecting bridge element•Four, hot surface indicator lights Energy efficient pan size sensor > JP938SC Stainless steel(not shown) selects a 6'or 9'element to match the pan you are using. 938WC White on white (not shown) JP938CC Bisque(not shown) CD CD I GEPliOfiV �cu 30"CleanDesign Electric Cooktop o JP930SC Stainless steel •Frameless cooktop•Four ribbon heating elements:one 6",one dual(6"/9")and two 7"with connecting bridge element•Four hot surface indicator lights Flush Mount Installation creates 4, JP930TC True white (not shown) a stunning visual effect. �� a}: M30KC T rue bisque (not shown) INot available on stainless steel models) µ" JP93OCC Bisque(not shown) to „JP930BC Black on black(not shown) GEC fiW . . 30"CleanDogn Electric Coohtop JP350KC True bisque •Frameless cooktop•Four ribbon heating elements:one dual(6r'/9"),two 8"and Bridge Element for total one 6"•Four hot surface indicator lights cooking flexibility. JP350SC Stainless steel(not shown) EK 7, JP350TC True white(not shown)JP350WC White on white(not shown) JP350CC Bisque(not shown) ' JP350AC Almond on almond(not shown) s JP350BC Black on black(not shown), Fr:J4 G 30" C1eanDesign Electric Cooktop a5 6"/9'Dual Element saves �i' JP energy nd provides more � .. 340WC White on white 9Y p -, •Frameless cooktop•Four ribbon heating efficient cooking. elements:two 6"and two 8"•Hot surface indicator light JP340BC Black on black(not shown) E c Not all features available on all models. a. .0 U For additional features,specifications and color availability,refer to page 194. r Q rangehoods.com Call 1-800-667-8721 anywhere in the US and Canada-www.rangehoods.com w 0 SPECIFICATIONS I/enti/ation Products ® RANGE •• Barcelona Collection 500 CFM Island Range Hood, 120 Volts, 2.8 amps, 60 hz. > DIMENSIONS Overall bottom projection-231/x" Height(Less Ducting)-11" Available widths-35'/x" > HOOD BODY All metal cold rolled or stainless,finished in powder coat paint or brushed stainless. > MOTOR High quality,efficient,permanently split capacitor motor.Rated 120 Volts,2.8 Amps. > BLOWER WHEEL Dual inlet,electronically balanced polymetric centrifugal blower wheel.52Y n"width 59 paddles. > LIGHTING 2-fully enclosed 40 watt maximum candelabra bulbs. DIMENSIONS > DUCTING OPTIONS 84'T Vertical-6"round duct adapter complete with polymeric back draft damper ensuring quiet operation. > FILTER Grease filter RF76,dishwasher safe,4 per unit mar.3 Ph" >35VT 'MOUNTING Ceiling mounted using supplied template.6"round ducting enclosed in metallic tubing.Install a min.22"to 25"from the cooking surface for best results.AVAILABLE FINISHES White,Black or Stainless Steel PERFORMANCE Static pressure 0" 0.05' 0.1" 0.15' 0.2" 0.25" 0.3" 0.35" 0.4" 0.45" 0.5" CFM 510 492 472 456 435 414 397 365 350 310 264 RPM 1876 1885 1896 1910 1965 1991 2010 2030 2058 2081 2112 WATTS 335 337 337 338 338 337 336 336 337 333 331 Air-Fang Barcelona Collection range hoods are tested in accordance with HVI test standard 916 for Air.77re Barcelona Collection hoods are Certified and Approved by Underwriters Laboratories to UL standard 507 Electric Fans and CSA standard C22.2 No.113 Electric Fans and Ventilators. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT &REMARKS R I .• 1 71 U.S.:820 Lincoln Avenue Canada:110 Glidden Road West Chester,Pennsylvania 19380-4466 Brampton,Ontario L6T 2J3 �., u Tel:(610)692-7400. 1-877-304-3785 Tel:(905)456-2033 Fax:(610)696-4648 Fax:(905)456-1015 Air King at ::rangehoods.com is a division of kitchen::accessories U N L I M I T E D Alicante Series - Island Range Hoods-by Air King Page 2 of 2 AK-ALI-CE-B stock 40" Chimney Extension $176 + Free s/h0 Black AK-ALI-CE-S Stock 40" Chimney Extension $246 + Free s/h 10 Stainless Steel Optional: Fitters Sold only with Hood order AK-BCCF-01 Stock Re-circulating pack(2 filters) $40 + Free s/h10 add to cart view shopping cart Order via our secure shopping cart or call ,-"'1.800.667.8721 Back to Air King Range Hoods I Other Brand Range Hoods I Other Brand Ductless Hoods Kitchen Accessories Home I Terms and Policies Kitchensource Rangehoods.com is a division of $kite hem. Ices of A CS ©Copyright 1996-2003 http://rangehoods.com/airking/ak-alicante.htm 09/22/2003 Alicante Series - Island Range Hoods-by Air King Page I of 2 ::ran eho ods•com Range Hoods by Air King ,;t.800.667,8721 Back to Air King Range Hoods I Other Brand Range Hoods I Other Brand Ductless Hoods Alicante Series Ceiling Mount Range Hoods The Alicante Series range hood. This island range hood provides a refined elegance to any kitchen with an Island cooktop. I Series Features: 500 C FM centrifugal blower i • Very P silent operation: 59dbA ,3 ' • 23 gauge cold rolled steel • For ceilings 8' to 9' High �r • 4-position sliding speed control 2 position sliding light control . Two 40-watt showcase bulbs N ' • Telescoping chimney for easy installation Vertical or Ductless ducting options • Mounting: Ceiling mount • Available in brushed Stainless Steel or Black and White powder coated finishes • Ductless operation requires the addition Click for a larger image of a charcoal odor filter(not included) •Requires 6"Round Duct-Not Included • Optional Chimney Extension available •Bottom of hood should be 22"-25""above cooktop • Optional Backsplash available • Size: 36" • 120V, 2.8 Amps, 60 Hz • 65.3 Ibs • 5-Year Warranty • Ships Via Fed-Ex or UPS • Backsplash Accessories Click here for specifications (PDF 87k) Installation Instructions (PDF 164k) Order Online by Adding to the Shopping Cart or Call us at 1.800.667.8721 N Tax E AK-AL136W Stock 35 1/2"W x 23 5/8" D x 31 1/2-42 1/2" H $1335 + Free s/h 0 White AK-AL136B Stock 35 1/2"W x 23 5/8" D x 31 1/2 -42 1/2" H $1335 + Free s/h 0 Black AK-AL136S stock 35 1/2"W x 23 5/8" D x 31 1/2 -42 1/2" H $1695 + Free s/h 10—Stainless Steel Optional: Chimney Extensions for Ceilings 9'to 12' Sold only with Hood order AK-ALI-CE-W Stock 40" Chimney Extension $176 + Free s/h 0 White http://rangehoods.com/airking/ak-alicante.htm 09/22/2003 Corporate Office 11 North Court Brownsville, TN 38305 1-877-460-6457 Anchor Architectural Products Sales&Marketing Office 3106 Pleasant View Drive Manheim, PA 17545 1-877-653-5852 FAX 717-653-2726 Towel Bar with Posts AH-515 Extruded seamless aluminum bar. Triple coat- ed:first coat is a special epoxy base for maxi- mum adhesion and rust resistance.The second coat is a co-polymer of resin with superior r' adhesion and tough impact resistance. The third coat is a co-polymer of resin with speci- fied color throughout. O $1/411 5/16'..0 To Order, Call Toil-free 1-877-653-5852 09/08/2003 14: 18 FAX 5087466678 KROSSOO IaOO2/002 • • �; �, 0 otanaara uonrig>Jrations spec"'Dimensions A.6,c, 0 as regwred. Anchor Architectural .Dirnen,Wail arefr m t tedi(38mm)- Dimensions are from centerline to centerline of tube and eowk from well to centerline of tube. :orporate oftice CL Conterline. U North Court , Brownsville, TN 38305 a 1-877.460.8457 ales a Marketing Office 115 West Park Circle Drive, 9102 a Wheaton, IL 60187 877-65 3-5852 a FAX 603.5680919 TOWEL B^Ft 1,0100. Towel bar/grab bar. Triple coat- ed; first coat Is a special epoxy base for maxi- mft adhesion and rust resistance.The second coat is a copolymer of resin with superior adhesion and tough impact resistance. The ITEM DESCRIPTION third coat is a co-polymer of resin with specl- fied color throughout. AT18100 18" Towel Bar AT24100 24" Towel Bar AT30100 '30" Towel Bar AT36100 36" Towel Bar A (38 rnm) offset Dimension A 12" (300mm). 16" (410mm). 18" (460mm), 24" (61omm). 30" (760mm), 32" (BIOmm), 36" (9 iomm), 42" (1070mm), 48" (1220mm) Custom sizes are available to suit special requirements. Call Toll-free 1.877.653-58522 Custom sizes and configurations are available to suit special requirements. Please Specify Standard Configurations Specify Dimensions A,11,C,D as required. Typical wall clearance 1 1/2'(38mm).,Anchor Architectural Products Dimensions are from centerline to centerline of tube and from wall to centerline of tube. ?rporate Office CL Centerline. North Court • Brownsville, TN 38305 • 1-877-460-6457 Sales&Marketing Office 115 West Park Circle Drive, #102 • Wheaton, IL 60187 877-653-5852 • FAX 603-588-0919 (12 5 m m) Qty. Req'd Bar Diameter Finish&Material Twe Grip • Flange Style --Aside Corner Rail Comments Call Toll-free 1-877-653-5852 and r-ninficurations are available to suit special requirements. Please Specify @ Standard Configurations SIIIKY A,B,C,11 as required. Typicaf wall clearance 1 1/2' ochor Architectural Products Dimensions are from centedine to centerline of tube and from wall to centerline of tube. arporate Office IL' Centerline. , North Court • Brownsville, TN 38305 • 1-877-460-6457 Ales &Marketing Office 115 West Park Circle Drive, #102 • Wheaton, IL 60187 877-653-5852 • FAX 603-588-0919 CN4/ C-4/ A A= 12 " to48 " (305 to 1220 MM) Qty. Req'd Bar Diameter Finish &Material Grip AFlange Style traight Grab Bars Comments Call T4611-free 1-877-653-5852 Custom sizes and configurations are available to suit special requirements. Please Specify Corporate Office 11 North Court Brownsville,TN 38305 1-877-460-6457 Ancho[ Architectural Products Sales& Marketing Office 3106 Pleasant View Drive Manheirn, PA 17545 1-877-653-5852 FAX 717-653.2726 Paper Holder AH 51 4 Surface mounted with concealed screw applica- tion.Includes mounting plates and #8 x 1-1/4" screws. Posts are constructed of die cast zinc alloy(Zamak).Triple coated:first coat is a spe- cial epoxy for maximum adhesion and rust resistance. The second coat is a co-polymer of resin with superior adhesion and tough impact resistance.The third coat is a co-polymer of resin with specified color throughout.The roller is plastic with spring tension 63/491 51/2" '* 7 16 y 9 To Order, Call Toll-free 1-877-653-5852 Corporate Office 11 North Court Brownsville,TN 38305 1-877-460-6457 Anchor Architectural Sales& Marketing Office 3106 Pleasant View Drive Manheim, PA 17545 1-877-653-5852 FAX 717-653-2726 Double Robe Hook AH510 Surface mounted with concealed screw applica- tion. Includes mounting plates and #8 x 1-1/4" screws. Constructed of die cast zinc alloy (Zamak).Triple coated: first coat is a special epoxy base for maximum adhesion and rust resistance.The second coat is a co-polymer resin with superior adhesion and tough impact resistance.The third coat is a co-polymer resin with specified color throughout. 11/2 1 7/811 5/16111 21/1611 To Order, Call Toll-free 1-877-653-5852 TM Custom Match Cabinet Bodies i Bodies available in 1,5 and 30 packs f /! T CM818, CM ,''CMBSM19 CP818,CPB24 CPBASIB Metal Recessed Body, Metal Surface Mount Body, Plastic Recessed Body,Fixed Plastic Recessed Body, Adjustable Shelves Adjustable Shelves Shelves Adjustable Shelves •Available in 14"wide x 18" •.Available in 15"wide •Available in 14"wide •Available in 14"wide high or 14" wide x 24"high !x 19"high x 18" high or 14"wide x 24" x 18" high •Adjustable plastic shelves; 2 `2 adjustable glass shelves high •2 adjustable clear plastic in 18"body,3 in 24"body White enamel finish • Fixed white plastic shelves; shelves •White enamel finish 1 2 in 18"body,3 in 24"body .Molded in white high impact • Molded in white high impact polystyrene polystyrene Surface Mount Adapters 7 �f Nk ��. { CW819W,CWB25W CWB19D,CW025D SM1418 Metal Body Surface SMPB1418 Plastic Body White finish Wood Body, Oak finish Wood Body, MountAdapter Surface MountAdapter Adjustable Shelves Adjustable Shelves • Converts recessed • Converts recessed •Available in 15"wide •Available in 15"wide 18" metal body to 18"plastic body to x 19" high or 15"wide x 25" x 19" high or 15"wide x 25" surface mount surface mount high high •White enamel finish •White enamel finish •Adjustable wood shelves; 1 •Adjustable wood shelves; 1 SM1424 Metal Body Surface SMPB1424 Plastic Body in 19"body,2 in 25" body in 19" body,2 in 25" body MountAdapter Surface MountAdapter .,, •Converts recessed • Converts recessed 24" metal body to 24"plastic body to surface mount surface mount •White enamel finish •White enamel finish 'i I i t Custom low f Framed f em -. rc -�"u ._ y 3+• ' v f f0; i '# y. I I \ `h� _ r 9YO is N.. W'1/ -G ! j'. 4k t.•(��,*`st ye.nreu..�.m__f \ A.r t r',, f fit•fit." ��' M: i w 'r t $ y x �y W 'm CSD107(White) ! CSD108 CSD111 CSD114 CSD123(Natural Finish) •White wood frame for a •Stainless steel framed mirror, •White PVC framed mirror, • Genuine wood frame with classic look,reversible i reversible reversible rosette corners,reversible . 163/4"W x 263/4"H • 16'/8"W x 265/4"H • 16'/8"W x 263/8"H • Frame painted White or \-T �__... Natural finish • 175/8"W x 27"H iJ • � _ - _ � I s a t r r '„�._,....__. ' v n y, 1/x' •,:„ i CSD115 CSD116 CSDi17 CS0118 • Brass framed mirror, •Natural limestone in molded • Natural limestone in molded •Natural limestone in molded reversible frame,reversible frame,reversible arched frame,not reversible* • 161/2"W x 265/a"H •The took of tied reeds • "Prairie" look of cut stone •Art Deco arch fits any bath j • 171/2"W x 271/2"H • 173/4"W x 275/8"H • 173/4"W x 325/8"H 'Can be reversed by unscrewing door back,flipping 180°and re-attaching. St" Pi 0 l� too 3 f E Panels v ' Panels"are constructed of 10 gauge(135)steel °nelve; p wire, woven mta 2 x 1"rectangular mesh i 3 I, and secutely'welded to,a 1-'/4'x 1 V4"x'/e" mesh.T i steel angle.frame:Frames have,- ,, 7/ 11 a ( slotted holes for mounting to posts arid' Cyl�in°d x- i adjacent"panels Panels tree to six feet wide RU r have one 114"x 3/-4"-stiffener welded to the " All erect'). frame. Wider panels have two stiffeners. mauntui�` Posts'' grade two i ' Posts are made of 2"x 2"x 14 gauge (,083) " are 3/a'•"•Wep steel tubirig.Base'plates,'of 2"x 7"x;'14`' steel Finish xn at with two round holes for.floor Nanplated anchoring,are welded to each. A decorative , acrylic ena- cap 14tack welded to the top:Posts are, with eac-h or a ' drilled with''fix`Boles toacce t hardware for: d ." mounting"panels'and doors.Hole spacing is ®pt1O Y set to leave a 3-'/4 weep space below the :.' Paxtitioiis;mad 1 I panels Posts have a 2" 6- ti above the tiona,using an solid partii6 panels be re p laced DOOTS J, Solid clew view. Doors are constructed of 1D gauge (.135 steel polycarbonate ma wire,woven into 2""x 1"rectangular mesh-.:" also available and securely welded 1 I/4'x 1i/4'x 3A6' steel �111111111@iai gem N ' 1 IN a. u Storage Lockers Wire Crafters'woven wire storage lockers are made of the same in grade materials as our style 840 partitions.The units work R individually,or as a group. , 5 Both single and double tiered lockers are available.The single tier,or walk in style " j (pictured at near right),has a full 3'0"x 7'6" door. The"double tier unit(pictured far right), { i comes with twa 3'0""x 3'9"doors and a solid sheet metal divider,panel::Either locker may ' be configured in 3' 4' or,5' depths.Optional t top,back;and boftom pane ls are available _ The basic locker,"a three sided unit,is de signed to back""up,to an existing wall. Add ono; k r units,'are two sided, and are"designed to fit ` z , j " next to a basic unifor in the corner of a room. WireCrafters,Inc. { 6208 Strawberry Lane Each locker is supplied with a"prehung door,;; Louisville,KY-40214-2900: panel,wall panels)and all hardware.Double!' tier lockers 6691 include a solid 502-363- sheet metal; " r 502-361-3s57(FAX) divider panel All lockers have padlock III j 1-800-626-1826 Request Locker Brochure" 1 2�4 yP 25 ye lity HORIZONTAL i • i , ' r 1 6200 &6300 Series 611 t 1 t U.S.P.S"&Canada Approved Not U 5 P S'&Canada Approved U.S.P.S.8 Canada Approved `. r d i a k, n { r, ti`s FRONT LOADING 5200 SERIES FRONT LOADING 6001 SERIES Each 9040 mailbox consists of 3 to 9 f" 11—Iy� Access to compartments..s from the,front REAR,LOADING,6101 SERIES menu enclosed within a wall box. T" through a hinged master,door One"door is These models are particularly suited for private of heavy gauge galvanized and i ' 4 require dlor a control bock which secures the.. distribution such as'campus:lrost offices,mill Access for loading is gained by un`? master frame and cannot be used for mail taxy installations hospitals and othei installs U.S.P.S.control lock and pivoting distribution.The master door may be hinged d lions where mall is handled internally,' menu forward. on the right(standard)or left side SPECIFICATIONS . MODEL 9041-12 MODEL 6210. COMPARTMENT SIZE Can be ordered with 1 to 3 fixed / The 6210 is composed of all size A doors. •,5 high x;3'1: wide-x 15"deep(standard) panels with 38 names in each pane, HS6210 has a 4-point[ocleing system..-- DOOR LOCK MODEL 9042-3 MODEL 6230 •5-pm cam type with 2 keys(standard) Can be ordered with outgoing mad �ro The 6230 is the same as.the 6210 except it 0.0 ptional Locks' which is located in the last door o contains one or more multiple size doors.A i" r . DOOR IDENTIFICATION MOUNTING METHODS l orderH0 la y out must accom an y al s. S6Z3 •Sla r x 2"number slot,with plastic window , . � •Recessed in wall:6'h"depth re has a 4-point locking system. (standard) box projects'h") REAR LOADING 6300 SERIES j Optional identification Semi-recessed in 9343 mountuiq Access to compartments is from the rear A lift 0 FINISH' depth required(mailbox projects' I, L off rear cover is,supplied as standard with an, \ •Full surface in 9341 mounting E, optional lunged fear cover available The rear •628 natural anodized aluminum(standard)-'`� projects 6 1 ; j cover maybe omitted on non-U S.P.S.installs " •0 fional finishes bons.All doors are usable for mail distribution SNAP-ON TRIM. / SPECIFICATIONS i F COMPARTMENT SIZE + x MODEL 6310 •'hb"x 1'Ir"extruded aluminum • ,� 15"high x 5"wide x 6 deep . k: The 6310 is composed of all size'A"doors. HS6310 has a 4-point locking system. DOOR LOCK MODEL 6330 �• •5-pin cam type with 2 keys 1 •Optional locks The 6330 is the same as the 6310 except it contains one or more multiple size doors A DOOR IDENTIFICATION I N1 4 layout must accompany ail orders.HS6330 Name and number slots m has a 4 point locking system. ' holder(standard) W •Optional Identification x# ✓` \ ' \\ j FINISH SUPPLIED BY BOMMER two points each,top and bot- plied by customer for installa- •628 natural anodized alumin um: COMBINATION LOCK(672-01) tom,and by reinforced contin- tion with spring latch type •Optional finishes } uous interlocking extrusions at housing.Cylinder numbers list- L s y; 3-digit,single dial type with 9 4 y spring latch and automatic the pivot side.The five-pin ed include special adaptation IN • - t throw off.For dormitories or lock is available with 1,000 made by cylinder manufacturer. I \� other installations not serviced key changes- Not compatible with 660-06 Not U.S.P.S.Approved ' window or size"1"door. `� by the Postal Service. Note:Available only for Series Each mailbox consists of 3 to, SPRING LATCH TYPE LOCK(671-04) RS6200 and BS6300 mailboxes. , ments enclosed within await; Includes 5-pin tumbler cylinder SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER Assembly No. Pins Manufacturer ., box and compartments are co 670-08 with 2 keys and spring REMOVABLE CORE LOCK nine 6 Best heavy guage galvanized and 14 , latch housing.Can be supplied Complete assembly,adapted by A7117 7 Best providing both durability in 1,000 different key 6o6o-1z6n5A 5 Falcon rust.Access for loading is g, y lock manufacturer to fit mailbox 6060-12606A 6 Falcon Not compatible with 660-06 doors.Supplied by customer for 6060-12607A 7 Falcon ing a control lock and piro.i 1 window on size"1"door, installation b Bommer. ments forward. ' 8� y Cylinder No. Manufacturer 4-POINT LOCKING SYSTEM 954 Falcon Z+ KEYED-IN CYLINDERS 4101 Sargent COMPARTMENT SIZE: Provides added protection 20-069 Schlage • 15' high x 3'/:"wide x 4 - Special cylinders keyed into 145 Westock g against break-ins.When c1Blo Yale building keying system,sup 9 locked,the door is secured at 20-0106 Medeco "' 34 • i �1 e �P Vertical Units Recesse• Units postal Authorities Subject to 4&ici al of Loca1 Postal Authorities U S P S Approved `. � •1� i Eyy F'g 4 k 5 - MODEL 491 FRONT COLLECTION MODELS 4 4fi5-5, ! G: G NODEL 462 ` G MODEL 463,',. •Reressed'6':°;in wall(projects'h'.') 4654 465-7 '~ `sizes to match height of�+, : •Mounting Frames for 491 •Available in heights compatible inn#h all '. 6200J6300 Series mailboxes 498 Semi iecessed.4"in wall(projects 3").: front and real`loading honzontal mailboxes i �P 499 Surface mounted(projects 6'/.) TID ELS •For pnva#e 466 use only 466 G; 7 US.P.S.lock(standard) .` SPECIFICATIQNS •Barrie construction as the'front collection units ! r ling latch no.671-04 or 671-02 DOOR LOCK except fora.sohd front panel of Y. aluminuiii tylirider by others •;Prepared for,ti S P S.lock(standard) and a lift off fear cover nf'/�,aluminum i .: •Optional 5 pin cam lock(no master keying) SURFACE MOUNTED UNIT MODEL 467 ded aluminiva(stan dard) '' CONSTRUCTION Same as 465J466 Senes with the following ! 1 •Extsu&d aluminum door'/3"'thick- frame., exceptions ON iunum door 1132' truck •Ext uded aluminum .Ui- is surface-mounted 1 ` um frame and tnm 'Galvanized and chromated steel compartment •Coinparhnent:constmction aluminum I 'alum compartment IDENTIFICATION • y_: y Umt is.firrnished one size on1 I hi h Fiontplate is engraved, LETTERS",(standard) +Dimensions 2D3/6 wide x 12'/:"deep x 39" ION •Optional(as speofied),1"high' ' 9h is engraved"LETTERS'(standard) ' \ giNISH as erified 1"hi '. ` SPECIFICATIONS )' g fi •528 natural anodized aluminurri(standard)' . i •Optional f3nuhes s DOOR`LOCK anodized aluminum(standard] f\ epared for U.S P S 1oc7t{standard) LETTER SLOT,SIZE •Dptlonal{ 5 pin cam lock{no master keying) { fini ties •'Jz _High x.ifl"rude<(wth anti-theft mail t i CONSTRUCTION SLOT SIZE deflector) .j minovaI door rs'Ja'n'aluminupi,swings on a a 11'11 wide{with anti theft mail DIMENSIONS \\ contuiuous huge and vanes ui height from • ` � •Frame 1$"l�s"lugh 7[13'!P"wide` 101Y. to 27�J s•' \ �; •Compartment 1b%4_high x 11'/x"wide .•, .Compartment is of the same tonstructron as P •WaAitout 17l�6 high x 11'/a"wide x 6'/:"deep the'fi200 6300;6001`and 6101 Senes horizon f \ tal mailboxes,except for a. 'hq rear cover ;g 'roved r P • _ P • •Hopped door is'/< thickalumiirum; UNRED STATES MAIL •The:fmnt plate surrounding the h0 dWris' t PPm IT IDENTIFICATION 0 U.S.MAIL •Hopper door is engraved LErrERS AND -MAIL TIM TN.BIINDLES 1 ACTION SPECIFICATIONS •The front plate surrounding the hopper door 5s. CONSTRUCTION engraved ll S.`MAIL LEi3'ER$OX f face plate and hopper doors FINISH doors may be 1,2 or 3 doors wide 'Exluded aluminum , .62g xiatural anodized aluminum(standard) •Thin wall liner included with model 403` •Optional ltiishes turai anodized aluminum(standard) 3 FINISH ` BUNDLE OPENING j i j ? a nal finishes •628 natural anodized aluminum{standard) •Mail chute is'/e' track all CATION ' •Uptianal finishes minuet with an opening,. and IDENTIFICATION - whir]i w311 permit aliundle three hopper face plates engraved. „. S7ATES MAIL"in 2"high letters r •Slot door 3s engraved"if S MAIL.in 1' 6'/a"x 11'/:x,4"'to drop in', ' 7 °PPerface plate engraved U.S.MAIL" letters(standard) the b9-x.,,Opening is protect-} letters •Optional(as specifie'd)' ed by inside baffle plate to ., Irs are engraved in 1' high letters : DIMENSIONS' prevent removal of mall Ilk�' NING •France Size-.Vh high x 13'wide from box through deposit Per door opening Door Size-4 high x 11 wide - opening. o enin will. a 6'/e X 11'/z'x 4" •Wall Ghtout-4'la"high x 11% wide 1 s y 3 � c do 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN 407 aI SECTION 09900-PAINTING PAINT PT -Walls:Eggshell or Flat Finish, according to the client's preference. Woodwork and hollow metal frames in satin finish. Number of coats as specified by the Architect. Paint colors will be specified using Benjamin Moore colors,if a manufacturer other than Benjamin Moore is used please submit samples of all paint colors to WDC for approval. SECTION 09951-WALL COVERING VWC3 21" or 27" wide vinyl coated wallpaper priced in single metric rolls and sold in double metric rolls(60.75 sq. ft.) with straight across or random match with vertical pattern repeats up to 26" to be selected from the following manufacturers: York,F. Schumacher,Greeff,Waterhouse, Gramercy. COTTAGES AND APARTMENT UPGRADE PACKAGE CARPET: Shaw Residential pattern Cedarhurst R 100%nylon available in 12' and 15'widths laid over Tred-Mor series 221b density 1/4" premium contract cushion. BATHROOM FLOOR TILE: American Olean pattern Stoney Creek 12"x12"ceramic tile laid in 0* diamond pattern. KITCHEN AND ENTRY FLOORS AS AN UPGRADE TO SV2: Amtico International Inc. 100%vinyl,pattern Stripwood 3"x 36"with tick finish installed according to the manufacturers recommendations. The Upgrade Package is a separate from the contract and will be offered by the Owner at an additional cost to the prospective resident. Pricing for these upgrades should be by unit price. ROCKRIDGE NORTHAMPTON MASSACHUSETTS Page #3 GENERIC FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND 11 /03 /03 Wellesley Design Consultants, Inc., 66-70 Union Square, Suite #201, Somerville, MA 02143, (617)623-1122 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN [x]06 EM ENTRY MAT Manufacturer: Van Dijk Entry Carpet,Berber Design. Color: #7 Charcoal Description: 6'-7" & 13'-2" wide. 3 year surface warranty, mold and mildew resistant,crush resistant,naturally anti-static and cleaned by vacuuming or hosing. Distributed by Compass Flooring Solutions (1-800-641-2667). SECTION 09650-RESILIENT FLOORING VCT Manufacturer: Armstrong Vinyl Composition Tile: Standard Excelon, 1/8"Gauge, 12" x 12" or similar approved Colors: SHEET VINYL FLOORING SV1 —Manufacturer: Armstrong Industries Pattern: Stencilcraft, no-wax flooring. 6' wide goods.Residential grade resilient sheet flooring Colors: to be selected This product is to be used in the residential apartment and cottage bathrooms and the residents will be offered a choice of 3 colors. SV2—Manufacturer: Armstrong Industries; Pattern Solarian. Highland Park 12' wide roll Colors: to be selected This product is to be used in the residential apartment and cottage Kitchens, Entries and Sunrooms and the residents will be offered a choice of 3 colors. SV3 Manufacturer: Amoco Luxury Vinyl tile, 12"x12", 12"x18" installed according to the manufacturers instructions. Selections will be made from the Tilewood,Norwegian and European . "* Slate or Concrete patterns PAINTED CONCRETE PC BASE VB Vinyl Base - Manufacturer: Johnsonite,4"x 1/8" Straight Base with carpet and Cove with hard surface floor. WD/PT Painted Wood, Satin Finish see finish schedule and legend for paint color CB Carpet Base 4" high carpet base with bound top edge. Use CP3 Manufacturer: Shaw Industries Style name: Origins BL-50110 Color Description: 12' wide, 38 oz. Tip-Sheared Cut/Loop Pile, Fibre Content: 100%Dupont Antron Legacy BCF Nylon Type 6.6,Finished Pile Thickness: .155 in Gauge; 1/8" Stitches Per Inch: 12. Primary Backing: Polypropylene Secondary Backing;Actionbac,Density: 8,825 oz per cubic yard, Weight Density: 335,350, Electrical Propensity: Less than 3.5 KV,Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Class 1, Smoke Chamber: Less than 450,ADA Conformance. ROCKRIDGE NORTHAMPTON MASSACHUSETTS Page #2 ' GENERIC FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND 11 /03/03 Wellesley Design Consultants, Inc., 66-70 Union Square, Suite #201, Somerville, MA 02143, (617)623-1122 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN 05 POW- SECTION 09688 - CARPETS All Common Area carpets will be direct glue down. CP-1 Field carpet Manufacturer: Collins and Aikman pattern Botanica 100% Dupont Antron Lumena on 60" roll goods/Powerbond 5/64" gauge, pile height 0.187" Yarn dyed with Ensure soil Protection CP-1 Border carpet Manufacturer: Collins and Aikman pattern Plexus Accents 100%Dupont Antron Lumena on 60"roll goods/Powerbond. 1/10" gauge, pile height 0.171" Yam dyed with Ensure soil Protection. CP-1 Price alternate: Manufacturer: Durkon Fortress 35,Custom printed patterned broadloom; Base Carpet: 8' up to 15' wide. 35oz. 5/64 gauge cut pile, 12.5 stitches per inch, 100% Spun Durkron Nylon with Duralon attached cushion Pile Height 1/4" or .025" high. For border and field locations see Flooring Layout Drawings ID 1.1a, ID 1.1b, ID 1.2 and ID 1.3 RS: Reducer Strip by Johnsonite: color to be selected. CP 2 Manufacturer: Lees Commercial Carpet Pattern- Check-Up. DS296 Color: Description: 260Z Antron Legacy BCF level loop with Unibond backing and Duracolor,tufted, level loop. 5/64 inch gauge with 7.7 stitches per inch., .156 average pile height. Comes in 12' goods. 3 Different colors would be selected for the project. This carpet must be installed according to the approved manufacturers instructions and certain substrates require a special sealer. Note: This carpet is specified for installation on stairs. RS: Reducer Strip by Johnsonite: color to be selected. CP3 Manufacturer: Shaw Industries (Contract) Style name: Origins BL-50110 Color ; Description: 12' wide,38 oz.Tip-Sheared Cut/Loop Pile, Fibre Content: 100% Dupont Antron Legacy BCF Nylon Type 6.6,Finished Pile Thickness: .155 in Gauge; 1/8" Stitches Per Inch: 12. Primary Backing:Polypropylene Secondary Backing;Actionbac,Density: 8,825 oz per cubic yard,Weight Density: 335,350, Electrical Propensity:Less than 3.5 KV,Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Class 1, Smoke Chamber: Less than 450,ADA Conformance. RS:Reducer Strip by Johnsonite,color to be selected CP4: Apartment and Cottage- carpet to be laid over a pad Manufacturer Shaw Industries (Residential) Style -XV011-EV011 (residential quality carpet) 12' wide. 100%Nylon w/R2X Soil and Stain resistance and Softbac Platinum Residents will offered the choice of up to 3 different carpet colors. All carpet in apartments to be laid over Tred-Mor series 221b density 1/4" premium contract cushion. ROCKRIDGE NORTHAMPTON MASSACHUSETTS Page #1 GENERIC FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND 11 /03 /03 Wellesley Design Consultants, Inc., 66-70 Union Square, Suite #201, Somerville, MA 02143, (617)623-1122 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN Q04 Rockridge, Northampton, MA: Finish Schedule Page 3 EGA Architects,Wellesley Design Consultants, Inc.Inferior Design(617)623-1122,fax(617)623-T720 November 3 2003 Doors Full Wall Wall Border Room 0 Room Name Floor Base Trim Frames Height Above Below and/or CIO. Remarks Wall Rall Roil Accent TYR BEDROOM CP4 VB PT PT PT See Arch. COTTAGE RCP Dwgs. TYP, CLOSET CP4 VB PT Pr PT See Arch. COTTAGE RCP Dwgs. TYR BATHROOM 9V1 VB PT PT PT See Arch. COTTAGE RCP Dwgs. Floor r: Typ. Unit TYP.UNIT ENTRY SV2 VB Pr PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. TYP.UNIT KITCHEN SV2 VB PT PT Pr See Arch. RCP Dwga. TYP.UNfT LIVING ROOM CP4 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. P.UNfT SUNROOM SV2 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. TYP.UNIT BEDROOM CP4 VB Pr PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. TYP.UNIT CLOSET CP4 VB Pr Pr PT See Arch, RCP Dwgs. TYP.UNIT BATHROOM SV1 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. A 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN X03 Rockridge, Northampton, MA: Finish Schedule Page 2 EGA Architects,Wellesley Design Consultants,Inc.Interior Design(617)623-1122,fax(617)623-7720 November 3 200; Doors Full Wall Wall Border Room # Room Name Floor Base Trim Frames Height Above Below and/or C19• Remark@ Wall Rall Ra11 Accent 10100 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT Pr PT PT See Arch. IRCP Dwga. 10200 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT FT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 10300 CORRIDOR CP1 WD11"T FT PT FT PT FT See Arch. RCP DWgs. 10400 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT Pi PT PT Pr PT Sea Arch- RCP Dwge_ 10500 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT PT PT SeEA RC 10600 CORRIDOR CPI WD/Fr PT PT PT PT PT Se RC 10700 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT& PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. EM CB RCP Dwga. 10800 CORRIDOR CP1 CB PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwge. 10900 CORRIDOR CPI CB PT FT PT FT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 11000 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT FT PT Fr FT PT See Arch, EM &CB RCP 11100 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT FT Fr PT See Arch. &CB RCP DwgB. 11200 CORRIDOR CP1 CB FT PT PT FT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 11300 CORRIDOR CPt WD/PT Pr FT Pr PT PT See Arch. EM &CB RCP Dwgs. 11400 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. &CB I RCP Dwgs. 11500 CORRIDOR CP1 CB PT PT PT PT FT See Arch. RCP Dwga. 11600 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT Pr PT PT FT FT See Arch. EM &CB RCP DWgs. 11700 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/FT FT PT PT PT PT See Arch. 8CB RCP Dwgs. a Floor e: 2. Second 02005 RES.LAUN. VCT VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 02007 ELEC. VGT VB Fr FT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 02009 HSKP. VCT VB FT PT FT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 20000 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. &CB RCP Dwgs, 20100 CORRIDOR CPI WD/PT Fr PT Fr FT PT See Arch. &CB RCP Dwgs. 20200 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. 803 1 RCP Dwgs. 20300 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT FT PT See Arch. &CB RCP Dwgs. Floor 1i: 3. Thlyd 636W LIBRARY CP3 WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 03005 RES.LAUN. VCT VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs, 03007 ELEC_ VCT VB FT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwga. 03009 HSKP. VCT vB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 30000 CORK GP1 WD/PT PT PT PT FT PT See Arch. &GB RCP Dwgs. 30100 CORRIDOR CP1 WD/PT FT FT FT PT PT See Arch. &CB RCP Dwgs. 30200 CORRIDOR CPI WDIPT PT FT PT I PT Pr See Arch. &CG RCP Dwga. 30300 CORRIDOR CPI WD/FT FT PT PT PT PT See Arch. &CB !RCP Dwgs. Floor B: Typ. Cottage r ENTRY CP4 VB PT PT FT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. KITCHEN SV2 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP s. LIVING ROOM GP4 VB Pr PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. LAUNDRY SV2 VB PT PT PT See Arch_RCP Dwgs. 10/30/03 14:18 FAX +6176237720 WELLESLEY DESIGN Z02 Rockridge, Northampton, MA: Finish Schedule Page 1 EGA Architects,Wellesley Design Consultants, Inc.Interior Design(617)623-1122,fax(617)623-7720 November 3 2003 Doors Full Wall Wall Border Room Y Room Name Floor Base Trim Frames Height Above Below and/or C19. Remarks Wall Rall Rail Ascent Floor #: 0. Ground 00DD0 CORRIDOR CP2 CB PT PT Fr See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00001 RESIDENT STORAGE PC None PT PT PT See Arch, RCP 00002 RECREATION ROOM CP2 VB PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwge. 00003 GENERAL STORAGE PC None PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00004 FITNESS ROOM CP2 VB PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00004a STORAGE VCT VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00005 RESIDENT STORAGE PC None PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00006 MECHANICAL PC None PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 000068 ELECTRICAL PC None Pr PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs, 00007 E_M.R. PC None PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00100 CORRIDOR CP2 CB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 00200 CORRIDOR CP2 CB PT PT PT See Arch, RCP Dwgs. ELEV. ELEV.#2 CP1 See Arch. RCP Dwgs. STAIR STAIR#1 CP2 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. STAIR STAIR 0 2 CP2 VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. Floor #: 1. First 01001 VEST. EM WD/FT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01002 MULTI-PURPOSE CPI WD/PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01003 LOBBY CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01004 MULTI-PURPOSE SV3 WD/PT PT PT Pr PT See Arch, RCP Dwgs. 01005 RES.LAUN. VCT VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01006 MARKETING OFFICE CP3 WWK PT PT PT See Arch, RCP Dwgs. 01007 ELEC. VCT VB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01008 TOILET SV3 WD/FIT PT PT VWC See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01009 HSKP. VCT VB PT PT Pr See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01010 MAIL SV3 WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01012 STORE SV3 WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch, RCP Dwqs. 01014 COUNTRY/KITCHEN SV3 WD/PT PT FT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01016 PARLOR CPI WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch_ RCP Dwge_ 01018 DINING CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01020 DINING CP1 WD/PT PT PT FT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01022 DINING CP1 WD/PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01024 SITTING CPI WD/FT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 01026 PRIVATE DINING 7P7 WCVPT PT PT PT See Arch, RCP 01026 WAIT STAFF SV3 VB PT PT PT See Arch. �' RCP Dwgs. 01030 LOUNGE CP1 CB PT PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs, 01032 LOUNGE CP7 CB PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. 10000 CORRIDOR GPI WD/PT FT PT PT PT PT See Arch. RCP Dwgs. APPENDIX C GENERIC FINISH SCHEDULE LEGEND OIR ILLY, T,r9k., BOT X.Si 0K tI14 ASS0C1,tTEtS, IATC ENvjRANMENTAL AND GEOTE.CHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING B-3 page 1 Or 1 PAOJBCT Rpgt OM LOCA77ON Natbtmtptw,MA moylla NO. 11zoe 91 01 uR AMO CONTA&MOR IfOREBW I 7afiNincl DATE STAR76D DATE F114J31MV scabowd Envimmlomw prillillt ID/1 '03 IDIJV03 DRalmo squaldmxf couri.EnoN DEPTH GROD141)SURFACE ELEV.(A) 8.3] 3' R!k TYVB BIT Fbllw Stan AQ9W SRE&nTr OF CORBBARREL 140.Sam k x VI'MIST• W-1—N2 TIME FIRST COWL HR CAMORANIX vnmfiT DROP W4TPRI.I3V$L .) Non SAMPLER 2'O.D.Split Spoon Rod A.0 5111-O.TA) BORING SA O%= V&JCJrr DkOP LOCA770N Ca Ara HAMMER Wely •6 ]P wi2lin ENGINE2W0P0L0GIST Chia Sueac SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PEFETR. REC, TYPE/ D&fiCf.COtrA7f01'l Som REMARKS . Axs4r. xm. NO. DESCRIM ON RI,/61N. 7YJ?SOI1. LW415 14714 S-1 Top 4.DarkDto-riTOFS00. Fjoetomedwm (7-7) BoMyn 10^.Broom,fine to mudium SAND,link fine 11 wd.wa S t 5 42150 for 4- &74 3-2 V4,diet am.ROCK n little mw t0 medium me and apt.wa (3••T7 S.T BEDROCK 10 13 x0 2s Ramrkm look 1.Orilliob mimal mcotmtacd bctw=thrcc mrd 5.5',K ntoocrwo locatiara within 30 W ra&ua of Lorin;locviou,appmmly on Wmck uiu -- ---- LOG OF BONG B-2 shw z of z Pw' No. )t208 OI Ol ,tom 8ARIPI.ES DEPTH PJ61'iVAL Pxcw TYPE! pXSCX=ON SOIL. RiwAxt" Fl• RESIST. IN. NO. P99MI!'TIOIY SL6IlY• }146 t0 medium SAI4D ]0 M M3114 14124 -1-7 Mefam do=light brown At to medium SAND,bate sift dry (39.37) 17n02a21 16114 S3 Dame->;sh►6,owa,fine to medium SAND,tilde ate dry (3Zt3dg Pad of exploati00 U 34' 35 40 45 so 55 , ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGATEEIUNG CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING B-2 PW 1 01 2 PROA= Mwk lddp LOCATION Nonham ea.MA FRCOCT 100 71706 61 01 ==R40 c0)1TRAMVR fORE)AAN left Nits DATE STAICTED DATI FMMD SabomdPavir6nment■1Arnim )WIG03 W16103 DRII1U)ObtMgPMtM COMpl>DRONDPp7H GROUND30MACEFLEV.(R) D-33 54' I>ATtN TYpli DrP ffqllv-SpmAyaer SZZE&TYPE OF CORD 13ARM Nn.SMOC 6 11NDIST. CASNO 724P FIRST COWL, lot CA4INGH4MMI, WEIGHT DROP WATERLFM . SANIlbFR 2"o.D.Spht Spon Roo A,)S/S'O.n. DORU10 SAUJIM WEIGHT PROP LOCATION fonkreAmeWilding HAMMM 9 fay 14D 30"Wiroboe PNGU7EER/GEoLOG13T CA1nSuum 601PLAS sAMPLJGS bePre FEM"X I 1RX0 T"W DESCxAMM 1w RbMAfilCS *T. RESEtr. lit NO. DESCRn"rl0r( sl.r6m. Torsm 2!2/3/3 17/24 S•1 Jr p4-:Dnklnrnm,orlanicTOPWIL MamumSAND (8'•2) Ron=on Ytry io0K Ag tt wcmm,fine to medium SAND;litdc&x aa.Pl.usa At,dry 5 6/721/13 6,34 $.2 Medium drnsc,bm",mcdimn SAND,]tut eoarsc sen4 and tom ded grand,trot Klt,dry (Stir) l=W0 kr 5" 10(24 S-3 TOP 6-:640M dglor,;plgtta,mediuM SAKDp little cause smd mad tmmded grand,trace:&,dr3 11` (0'.12) R-Um a":R-w..ram SAND,some silt,dtY fine w medium SAND 13 I)IIS,J7,IP 14,24 S4 Mediumdmtglisldlwrrn,Lw10mediba MQ4DftcsltyM tzs•-1�) 20 5,1b14,14 1 624 SS 61t6 u1q genre ljgyc ptown,(me to mediam SAM little salt,dry (2dz2� 25 6/11,19,16 1&24 Sd M&hL?d dft9t,lilk UWN6.004 W Wdltmt50Zk SO=sib6dry (2s-2n lktaak0. "` LOG OF BORING B-1 SSeet 2 of z "00 31:208 01 Ot 9AfdPILE$ MIN PENElR. Arr— 77iRF/ DFSCRIM7ON SOIL RMARSB FP. RE=. IN. NO. DFSCRVnON 81/61N• FMC SAND 30. 172012O/Z5 3-7 P-M.amwrt,bne saw,Jwk sik hyas,d y(—plc dP ate) C7P-3Y3 Pod of-vluatim at 32' 33 40 45 50 53 U l u Ji OWEILLY, TALBOT a&'� OKUN ASS't CIA LEIS, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNiCAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING 11-1 Fa. I OA 2 FMT Rock RLdbe LOCATION Nonhndptona.MA PROJECT Na 11011 01 01 DRU M(-ONTgAC•M Fi]ZVM cff9tsh DATE3TARTM DATEF14LSMM ScebttardA�r+irOrnnmtal �� 10116103 10/16103 DMLINO P.QUW NWT OOb=10N DFPM GROMM "ACIE ELEV.(IL) B33 3T DATUM TYP7L BA• HOIIUW;tam Au cr SIZE&TYFE OF CORE BARREL No.Sem e 7 C7NDIST. CASII'10 TJMB 1.1.857 CCWL W CASINGILINM RrBiQ4T DROP WATER LBVEL . None SAMKM 2.O.D. 't 9pom Rod A 15/t"O.D. Domry SAMFLER 1VfilOdCT DROP 'LOCATION smil el eaov of a bu(141. N43AMER Safety 140 30 airs lint ENOWEE rl WL0013T Geis 3braw 9AI111 Es SAMPLES DEFTH YRIM17d. C. TM/ DESCRA.7i.OA SOO. 11 IARICS IT RESIST. I NO. DESCRIPTION AV4 RL TopsOB. 3116/W 14x4 S-1 Top v.Dark bmwn,owuic TOF30IL Mclimo SAND Bv11om 107_Medirme dma.bra—,fine to m-&—SAND,t—silt,dry 5 1822W/74 1614 S•2 TOp 3':810vA Got SAND lad SILT.Lltic gavel,dry Dattom 11,%Widitmt drasq lot brown,m"um SAMiNtde*oast amd,m-&d Davcl Item itlt,�� 10 13/16117/23 1724 S3 Medlivm dwsr light brown,medium SAM lim tour%vt r0oetled Fmi@,tram silt,dry (IP-M 15 50(au s, 0 25MMM 17/24 SA ldedimn d1m,W bmwn,0ledi=SHIM,llnl6 e0813e Seam-rtnmdcd gravel,trace silt, (16-ig9 taccwbblc,dp 20 2919122119 IV24 S.5 Vey dmw,light bmvn,mediamt SAM,lilgecok a 9374rouodrdpavd,vKcsal, (217-22) lrxe cobbtS dry 25 29 Tint SAP03 17!19129130 16/24 9-6 1#act.MlWn,6Dt5AND,IIIdtNIrSCkand.1it11eGnegravd,inrrsit>,My v 7iemwksa > LIMITATIONS 1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein. The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in the report and not on wieRti£c tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the time and budgetary constraints imposed by the client. The work described in this report was carried out in accordance with the Statement of Terms and Conditioas attached to our proposal. 2.The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based i-a part upon the data obtained from widely spaced subsurface explorations. The nature and extent of variations between these explorations may not become evident until construction. If variations then appear evident, it may be necessary to reevaluate the recommeridation.s of this report. 3.The generalized soil profile described in the text is intended to convey trends in subsurface conditions. The boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been developed by interpretations of widely spaced explorations and samples; actual soil transitions are probably more erratic. For specific information, refer to the boring logs. 4.In the event that any changes:in the mature, design or location of the proposed structures are planned,the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or verified in writing by O'Reilly,Talbot & Okun Associates Inc. It is recommended that we be retained to provide a general review of final plans and specifications- 5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client. Reliance upon the report and its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners. tAAd AE MP rt�� _ T ter► u 1 z� z 0 Nm O $ 2: a " o w o� 4 O G L7 fr h c � o ROCK R1UGE RETIREMENT COMMUNITY USGNED M r,r rAAm eT: con '* a fl NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS SCALE 1H FEET c,frA= BY: Am oaTE pcT. 27,soos y po l p °— SITE FLAN o• so 60' Illy oTr.rro,txleet d orsa b ^r '•r'." .. ^�n !lf`r>t,._C�C.1__(`T!?.+fit?_1 n i n { i,Yll �/ �t-� Ci/f'V`,�,-� ay��'q�Y"'i�q4`q,A.•�+� ;err. 9 + ,� - .-•''7;��r�P r +�, 4`0`6 Lt.' ,' .'AS►5:.,,. � �: -try top w f, V- , lo 12-1 fz � fJ}r`� (ln_ •' {.. ., � •/-G�. F•�h} r'r`vrsvi. yr ' icy._ - r , '.c •� �FiR�t:� K,n �rj� � t ����=�l�� � �'�'t, �eX� v;�'�p�<t^Y,ac�•.se�t1:�`�ks j `� . .� t 5�.' bmRc Wo PWA) ,. I,�—r� [�3�,�'C;.M `'�'Mf' /' �'.� 1 ) �rF�l '�°�•as,�, Y R. - 1:�.�T'f�l. -yr�f �G. �)1�;: j1'�s��'���� rS� � •,7,�v, a f f .3;. � ��1 l 'L�n \\ a..f h t 'Sj �� .w� a�Ia7• C .� t �� • � f ..fad .\\. • • - r _ f U I U 1'dA•-4iJ I'JJ-',iVJI.) UDC ._:J cVVJ i�•Ut,' .V'.: Geotechn.ical Recommendations ' ? Rockridge Retirement Home O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun �-- i j q S S O C ? A T E S j If you have any questions,please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned. Sincerely yours, O'Reilly,Talbot&Okun Associates,Inc. C!" /Ashley .N& ie 'cz lVlichW� Ib t,P.E. �/ P j ct Engineer 1 Principal c: Rob Job=ort-Johnson&Seaman Engineering,Inc. Attachments: Site Locus,Site Plan,Linxitatioxis,$oriag Logs FN1200\1208 EGA Archij=\01 Rockridge Retiremwt Proj\61 GeorechUtDaiidge Rmiremmt Geotech Report Page 5 Geotechnical Recommendations T Rockridge Retirement Home O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun —' [ a s s 0 C I n T 6 S ] AOW system be installed. These drains should either be designed to flow under gravity or connected to a sump in the basement,which can be pumped if groundwater collects in the perimeter drainage system. Earthwork Considerations We anticipate that earthwork for this project will include the excavation of up to 10 feet to complete the basement, excavations for utilities, and placement against basement galls and footings. Two fill types are recommended, Sand and Gravel for beneath footings and floorslabs, and granular fill against basement walls. Grain size distribution requirements are presented on Table 1. Any debris fill or organic soils which might be present should be removed from beneath the proposed building. Fill placed beneath footings, floorslabs and pavements should be densified to at least 95% of the Modified Proctor dry density as defined in ASTM D1557, Method C. Pill should be placed in lifts of no more than 12-inches and compacted with at least four passes with a vibrating drum roller (minimum of 3,000 pound weight). To facilitate compaction, the moisture content of the material should be maintained at or near the optimum moisture content. Table 1 Grain Size Distribution Requirements Size Sand and Gravel Granular Fill Percent Finer by Weight 4inch 100 loo 1/2 inch 50-85 No. 4 40-75 — No. 10 •-- 30-90 No.40 10-35 10-70 No. 100 — No.200 0-8 0-15 Page 4 Geotechnical Recommendations T Rockridge Retirement Home O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun �— '�—► [ A S S O C I A T E S ) 1 sand and gravel fill be designed for a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 4,000 pounds per square foot. We anticipate that settlements of footings and slabs, bearing on imported fill, should be small and largely elastic in nature. We anticipate that maximum settlements would be on the order of 1/4 inch or less and would occur relatively quickly after load application (during construction). We recommend that spread footings be embedded a minimum of 48 inches below the final ground surface for frost protection. Conventional spread footings shall be at lease 18 inches wide for continuous footings and at least 24 inches wide for isolated footings. All other applicable requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code should be followed. Seismic Considerations Earthquake loadings must be considered under requirements in Section 1612 and 1805 of the Sixth Edition (February 1997) of the Massachusetts Building code. Section 1612.4.2 covers lateral forces imposed on structures from earthquake shaking and Section 1805.3 relates to the liquefaction potential of the underlying soils. The underlying soils would be considered Class S2 under Table 1612.4.1. Therefore, an "S" factor of 1.2 should be used to compute lateral forces for the building. The liquefaction potential of the medium dense, fine to medium sand encountered at the site was considered. Based upon density, the saturated sand would not be considered susceptible to liquefaction. Exterior basement walls should be designed to resist dynamic lateral earth forces in accordance with Section 1612.4.9 of the Building Code. The seismic earth forces should be applied as an inverted triangle over the height of the wall and added to the static lateral pressures. The seismic pressures should be modeled as an inverted triangle with a maximum value of 11xH at the top of the wall (where H is the vertical height of the wall). For purposes of the calculation,a total unit weight of 125 pounds per cubic foot should be used for the backfill against the basement wall. Basements Static lateral earth pressures may be imposed against basement walls_We recommend that an equivalent fluid density be used for the design of basement walls. Assuming the walls are structurally braced and not free to deflect, we recommend that a pressure of 55 pcf be used. No groundwater was encountered at a depth of 32 feet in the borings, however we recommend that the basement be damp proofed and that provisions be made to collect any groundwater which may accumulate against the sides of basement walls. To control surface water infiltration against basement walls, we recommend that a perimeter drainage Page 3 Geotechnical Recommendations fi Rockridge Retirement Home O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun 4--49CCEIDIMMW--4 I A 3 S 0 C : A 7 c 3 ] 1 Soil samples were collected using a 2-inch diameter split spoon sampler driven 24-inches with a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches (Standard Penetration Test or SPI). Samples were collected at the ground surface, at a depth. of Evc feet and at five foot intervals thereafter. The cumber of blovrs required to drive the sampler each b inches was recorded. The stimdard peoctradon resistance is The number of blows required to drive the sampler the middle 12 inches. Soil properties, such as relative density, are related to the SPT blow count. SOIL CONDITIONS Soil boring logs are attached. No significant amounts of fill,peat or deleterious materials were observed in the borings. Approximately four inches of organic topsoil was present at the ground surface in each boring. Subsurface conditions were generally similar in borings B-1 and B-2. In these borings,the topsoil layer was underlain by medium dense, medium sand to depths of 25 and 11 feet, respecrively. The medium sand was inrurn underlain by dense,fine sand with some silr layers in boring B-1 and underlain by medium dense to dense, fine to medium sand with trace silt in boring B-2. Drilling refusal was encountered in boring B-3 at a depth five feet, on what is believed to be bedrock.Fragments of weathered rock were present in the bottom of the sampler.Soils above bedrock at this location consisted of a medium dense to dense,fine to medium sand with some silt. No groundwater was encountered in borings B-1 or B-2 at the maximum depth explored (32 feet).In boring&3,the soils just above the bedrock surface were wet,likely indicative of perched groundwater on the bedrock surface. Therefore, it appears UgUely that groundwater will be encountered during construction of the congregate *builduag basement. GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES In general, subsurface conditions are favorable for the proposed construction. The significant georechnical issues for the proposed construction addressed in this report are foundation type,bearing capacity and settlement. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS The following recommendations are provided for the assumed construction described above. . . The proposed buildings can be founded on normal spread footing foundations bearing on the medium dense sand deposits encountered in the boring. These granular deposits are suitable for support of normal spread footings, provided they are de asi£iied prior to placement of the footing concrete. We recommend that footings on the medium dexase Page 2 U I V 1 iaJ.•'-FlJ 7'✓V '✓C.,J'J IJ�i. �v �'✓'...J i J'�' EnvironmentalSafetyHealthGeotechnical T O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun f- Bri0ge Street [ A 3 5 0 C I A T E 5 } Suite Soo Springfield,MA 01103 Tel 413 788 6222 J1208-01-01 Fax 413 7e8 8830 October 27,'003 � rl oa@oto-�nvcom Mr.W alter Barkus New England Deaconess 80 Deaconess Road Concord,Massachusetts 01742-4199 Re: Geotechnical Investigations and Recommendations Rockridge Retirement Project Northampton,Massachusetts Dear Mr.Barkus: This report provides geotechnical recommendations for the proposed additions to the Roclzridge Retirement Community on North King Street (Route 5) in Northampton, Massachusetts. A Siie Locus is provided as Figure 1. A Site Plan is provided as Figure 2. Our geotechuical study was based upon three soil borings, and included the full-time observation of the borings, review of the logs and soil samples, engineering analyses, and preparation of this report. This report is subject to the attached limitations. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION We understand that the proposed construction consists of a 9,000 square foot (approximate footprint),three story,wood-framed congregate building with twelve,single story detached cottages. The congregate building will have a single story basement, Each of the cottages will also be constructed of wood and will be of slab-on-grade construction. We understand that the first floor of the proposed structures will be near the existing ground surface. Therefore,any fills should be less than five feet and the maximum cuts for the basements will be on the order of eight feet. SUBSU"ACE INVESTIGATIONS Subsurface investigations consisted of three soil borings, designated B-1 through B-3. The borings were performed by Seaboard Environmental Drilling on October 16, 2003. Boring locations are shown on Figure 2. Boring B-1 was located in the southeast corner of the congregate building. Boring B-2 was located in the northwest portion of the congregate building, and boring B-3 was located near the center of the cottages in the western part of the site. The locations of the borings were limited by on going clearing operations. Borings B-1 and B-2 were adyanced to a depth of 32 feet. Boring B-3 encountered drilling refusal at a depth of 5.5 feet,on what appears to be bedrock. Several attempts were .Made to advance the boring deeper in the vicinity of this boring. At each location, drilling refusal was encountered at approximately five feet, indicating that bedrock is present at about five feet below ground surface. APPENDIX B GEOTECHNICAL REPORT NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:36AM P1 BKO 1216 POO VA June 24, 2003 I, Christine Skorupski, City Clerk of the City of Northampton, hereby certify that the above Decision of the Northampton Planning Board was filed in the Of£ic, of the. City Clerk on June 2 , 2003, that twenty days ve. elapsed I nce uch filing and that no appeal has been filed in this t r.o ° Attest: City C3.esk City of Northampton �] EGISTYA �P:IANNE L.D0x0HUR 8 318 9627 FROM : NE DEACONESS RSSOC I AT I ON C CEO) FABX O. : 9-;t P G O Aug. 28 2003 10:34RM P7 12 lannin—Board -Decision _- City of Northampton ?wile No.:PL-N-2003-0069 Date: June 2, 2003 Pursuant to Massachusetts General Laws(MGL),Chapter 40A.,Section 11,no Special Permit with Site Plan,or any extension, modification or renewal thereof,shall take effect until a copy of the decision bearing the certification of the City Clerk that twenty days have elapsed after the decision has been filed,or if such an appeal has been riled that it has been disinlssed or denied,is recorded in the Hampshire County registry of Deeds or Land Court,as applicable and indexed under the name of the owner of record or is recorded and noted on the owner's certificate of title_The fee for such recording or registering shall `^_p,id by the�'r,'ze=a's�a=..i':3111icarit It ia-the•owner'or applicant's responsibilityis pi-ek.up the ccy*dr3: l yeti i��, va�'d3:i C;d� Clerk and record it at the Registry of Deeds.(Please call the City Clerk prior to picking up the decision.) The Northampton Planning Board hereby certifies that a Special Permit with Site Plan Approval(major project)has been GRANTED and that copies of this decision and ail plans referred to in it have been filed with the Planning Board and the City Clerk. Pursuant to Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 40A,Section 15,notice is hereby given that this decision is filed with the Northampton City Clerk on the date below. If anyone wishes to appeal this action,an appeal must be filed pursuant to MG1.Chapter 40A,Section 17,with the Hampshire County Superior Court or the Northampton District Court and notice of said appeal filed with the City Clerk within twenty days(20)of the date of Chat this decision was filed with the City Clerk. Applicant: New England Deaconess Association-N.King Street&Coles Meadow Road DECISION DATE: May 22,2003 �V ✓! '� i e t DECISION FILED WITH(,THE CITY CLERK: June 2, 2003 ell A ociate Membez) Y 1 ' I CERTIFICATE OF SERVICE. Pursuant to M.G.L. Chapter 40A, Section 11, X, Angela Dion, Board Secretary, hereby certify that I caused copies of this Decision to a mailed, postage= prepaid, ro the Appl.ic' arit .k Owner `on .June 2, 2003_ F the. City Clerk on June 2 , 2003 , that twenty days ve. elapsed nce uch ling and that no appeal has been filed in this t Attest: r; i-y .r I A,k City of Northampton gA1�p9H R.E,, EGISTER . ���•r,r A.TfT7L 7. rnTTlILiTTt,' FROM : NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:34AM PG BK0121b FIG 090 Planning Board - Decision . City!of Northampton Hearing No.: PLN-2003-0069 Date:June 2,2003 Properties and the majority of wooded areas on site will be maintained in their existing state,providing a natural sound and sight buffilr between the development and adjacent parcels. 8. Tl' requested uae;.r.i:J prrnrw; 3na conva,.a ;;3f; ,y of vehicular and pedestrian movement within the life and on adjacent streets,minimize traffic Impacts on the streets and roads.in the area because walkways have been incorporated into the site layout that will link the various buildings,parking areas and outdoor use areas together thereby allowing visitors and residents to circulate around the site with minfrnial contlict with vehicle routes. A 4'wide sidewalk will be located along the North King Street frontage_ All existing and proposed buildings on the slie will be directly accessible to emergency vehicles. - C. The requested use will promote a harmonious relationship of structures and open spaces to the natural landscape,existing buildings and other community assets in the area because the applicant has made an effort to design the building so that it Is compatible with adjacent buildings located on the site. The proposed project will preserve the existing wooded/of and will be well-buffered from the abutting properties and streets. 0. The requested use will not overload,and will mitigate adverse impacts on, the City's resources including L're effect on the City's wafer supply and distribution system,sanitary and storm sewage collection and treatmentsystems,Fire protection,streets and schools because the proposed sanitary sewersystem will discharge to the City's system during off-peak hours to accommodate the proposed ' expansion and additional stormwater runoff generated by the expansion. E. The requested use meets any special regulations set forth in the Zoning Ordinance as listed in Sections 5.2, 10&11. F, The requested use bears a positive relationship to the public con venlence or welfare by providing housing for the elderly_ The use will not unduly impair the integrity of the character of the district or adjoining zones because the expansion of the existing use is in keeping with the existing wooded,low-density.,residential character of the neighborhood. The use will not be detrimental fo the health,morals or general welfare. The use is in harmony with the general purpose and intent of the ordinance. ,;A0W-G, The requested use will promote City planning objectives to the extent possible by providing inFll on an existing nursing care site and will not adversely effect those objectives,as defined in City master plans or study plans adopted under M_G.L. Chapter 41,Sections 81-C and D. In addition,in reviewing the Site Plan submitted,the Planning Board found that the application complied with the following technical performance standards_ 1. There will be no new curb cuts, with one curb cut to be closed at an agreed upon time in the future. 2. Pedestrian,vehicular and bicycle traffic are Separated onslto to the extent possible. COULD NOT OEROGATE BECAUSE: FILING DEADLINE: MAILING DATE* HEARING CONTINUED DATE: DECISION DRAFT BY: APP!AL DATE: 3!2012003 41312003 61512003 REFERRALS IN DATE HP ARING DEADLINE DA7 E: NEARING CLOSE DATE: FINAL SIGNING BY: APPEAL DEADLINE: 327/2003 5/11/2003 512212003 512712003 612212003 F7P3TADVERTISING DATE: HEARING DATA; VOTING DATE DECISION DATE; ; 327/2003 41102003 5!22/2003 6/2/2003 SECOND ADVERTISING DATE; HEARING TIME: VOTING DEADLINE: DECISION OFADLINE: 41312003 7.00 PM 81912003 8192003 MEMBERS PRESENT: VOTE: Frandy Johnson votes to Grant ` \ r I Julie Hooks Davis votes to Grant George Kohout votes to Grant Keith Wilson v - otes to Grant :-r 1-•• - ` I I I I Pau/D/er»and votes to Grant L,��„•„�_._—J Kenneth Jodrie votes to Grant David Wilensky votes to Grant i ION MADE BY; SECONDED BY: VOTE COUNT: DECISION! Frandy Johnson Keith Wilson 7 Approved with Conditions MINUTES OF MEETING: Minutes are available 1,n the Office of Planning &- Development_ FROM NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:33AM P5 8 0121b 0 8 q Planning Board - Decision City of Northampton ieating No.: PLN-2003-0069 Date:June 2, 2003 service from North King Street;or that the applicant submit a plan for periodic flushing of the water line and receive Northampton DPW Water Department approval ofsald plan; e. As offered by the applicant verbally during the public hearing,documentation that the water use will not adversely affect other water users In the North King Street/Coles Meadow Road area and �.. receive,.�rtr:a,r,n ton;+"PW wis2Er ap;::r:a va)ci•aa?;2 svbrrlftal. 7. AD existing vegetation between ten feet westerly of the new access road to the cottages and Coles Meadow Road shall remain and sh4ll'6e protected during construction_ The developershall replace any of this vegetation damaged during construction, 8. Lights should create no more than 3.0 candle fee4 and the lighting plaalphotometric plan shall be revised prior to Issuance of the building permit to show this, FINDINGS_ The Planning Board GRANTED the Special Permit with Site Plan Approval(major project)based on the following plans and information submitted with the application and as amended by any conditions attached to this permit, Unless otherwise noted,'all plan sheets identified below are prepared for Rockridge of Laurel Park-North King Street;Northampton,MA, prepared by Coler&Colantonio_,dated March 6,2003. 1, Existing Conditions,Abutter&Zoning Plan-Sheet No.EC-1; _ 2, 'Grading&Utilities Plan'Sheet No. GU I'� 3, 'Grading 8 Utilities Plan'Sheet No. GU-2; — ` •. ! t 'U;i 4. "Cottage Grading Detail'Sheet No.GU-3;' 5. -Grading Detail Plan-Sheet No_GU-4; S. 'Layout B Materials Plan' Sheet No.L-1; 7. 'Layout&Materials Plan'Sheet No.L-2; a� 8. 'Cottage Layout Detail'Sheet No.L-3; 9. 'Layout Plan' Sheet No.L-4; 10. 'Planting&Lighting Plan"Sheet No.PL-1; 17- -Planting&Lighting Plan-Sheet No_PL-2; 12 'Planting Details'Sheet No. PL•3; 13. 'Construction Details' Sheet No,D-1; 1a. 'Construction Details'.Sheet No,D-2; 15. 'Construction Details"Sheet No.D-3; 16. 'Construction Details'Sheet No.D-4; 17. 'Construction Details"Sheet No.D-5; 18, 'General Notes" Sheet No. GN-1; 19. -Building Elevations" 20_ 'Entry View" 21. 'Cottage Apartment View- ,'2. 'Rockridge Assisted Living Faciltiy,Northampton,MA' Drawing No.WN,prepared by Cooper Lighting,dated April 1,2003. In Granting the Special Permit with Site Plan Approval,the Planning Board determined that. A. The requested use, to construct a 37,427 sq.ft.addition and 12 one-bedroom attached cottages,protects adjoining premises sgainst seriously detrimental uses because the proposed buildings will be designed to blend with and complement the existing buildings. Landscaping plantings will be incorporated into the parking area and loading area to screen them from adjoining streets and residential G9oTMS©2003 Des Louribm Municipal Solutions,Inc. FROM : NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. : 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:32RM P4 0K0121bPG088 Planning Board - Decision iiUl� I� • ^ i��� I ,,, '* 9 City of Northampton Hearing No,: PLN--2003-0069 etc:7276Pg:88 Page: 1 of 4 Date:June 2,2003 Reoorded: 08/24/2003 01:22 PM APPLICATION TYPE: SUBMISSION DATE Pe Special Permit with major Site Pl "/2003 Applicant's Name: Ownees Name: Surveyor's Name: NARK` NAME COMPANY NAME: New England deaconess Assoc. NEW ENGLAND DEACONESS ASSOCIAT ADDRESS: ADDMSS -- " ADDkklcss: 60 Deaconess Rd COLES MEADOW RD ' TOWN: STATE ZIP CODE: YOWN: STATE; ZIP CODE TOWN: STATE: ZIP CODE: CONCORD MA 01742 NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 PHONE NO_' FAX NO.; PHONE NO_ FAX NO_ PIAONE NO_ FAX NO_ EMAIL ADDRESS: rh"k ADDRESS; EMAIL ADDRESS: Site Information: i° r2 ;' Vt5 ( , STREET NO.: SITE ZONING; �I 25 COLES MEADOW RD SR TowN: sECr1oN of I3YlAw: Section 5.2, 10 & 11 NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 1 MAP: ALOCK IOT: MAP OATS ACTION TAKEN: ( I 1 13 073 001 Approved With Conditions 1 _ J!f o ok: Page:541 127 NATURE OF PROPOSED WORK: Renovation/expansion of Existing 61 bed congregate assisted living and Alzeheimer care facility Into 76 bed facility plus 12 arrached elderly assisted living cottages- KARDSNIP: CONDITION OF APPROVAL: 1. Maintenance of the stormwater management facilities shall be in accordance with the Stormwater FINDINGS: Operatlon and Maintenance Plarr(pgs-11-13)included in the submittal.Reports showing proof of inspections and necessary cleaning by a qualified professional shall be submitted to the Office of Planning&Development no later than May 15 and November 15 each year. 2.Prior to the issuance of a building permit, the applicant must submit a full fire protection narrative to the Fire Department for approval. Hydrant spacing must be in accordance with National Fire Protection Standards_ 3- To provide partial mitigatian of area-wide traffic impacts as a result of the project and as offered by the applicant verbally during the public hearing,when the current occupant of the home on the corner of Coles Meadow Road and North King Street leaves the home,the applicant shall close the curb cut on Coles Meadow Road closest to North King Street 4- To provide partial mitigation of area-wide traffic impacts as a result of the project,prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy,the applicant shall either build a minimum 4'wide sidewalk along the North King Street frontage within the Mass Highway right-of-way or on the applicant's property. 5- To mitigate the applicant's absorption of some of the existing sewerage capacity and as offered by toe apprcanL the develop-shall allow Laurel Park users to discharge their sewage into SMH#4 at no charge,as long as developer's engineers and the Northampton DPW agree such discharge will not have adverse impacts on New England Deaconess Association's sewerage system and the City's sewerage system and if DEP Issues the necessary discharge permits. 6. Pr1oHo the issuance of a building permit,the applicant must submit revised plans showing: a. All turns in water lines have thrust blocks; b. The size and typo of proposed water lines and documenting that the water line type complies with DPW standards; c. Clear stormwater/drainage flow paths; d. As offered by the applicant verbally during the public hearing,the dead-end water line either be looped to water/It1es in Laurel Park,.North Kinq Street,Coles Meadow a„ad, fir,r.t«>, . �- FROM NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. : 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:32AM P3 Y------------------------------------------- Official Receipt for Recording in: Hampshire County Registry of Deeds 33 King St. Northampton, Massachusetts ui060 Issued To: MSF MORSE 6 SACKS 31 TRUMBULL ROAD NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 Recording fees F------------------------------------------« Document Recording Description Number Book/Page Amount «----------------------------------------- -* COPIES 15.00 Collected Amounts ------------------------------------- -* Payment Type Amount y------------------------------------------* Charge Account $5.00 $5.00 Total Received : $5.00 Less Total Recordings: $5.00 Change Due $.00 Your Current Account Balance is: ($112.00) Thank You MARIANNE DONOHUE- Register of Deeds By: Shari M RecelptN Date Time 0034210 06/24 /2003 01:43p FROM NE DEACONESS ASSOCIATION CCEO) FAX NO. : 978 318 9627 Aug. 28 2003 10:31AM P2 ... MORSE & SACKS ATTORNEYS AT LAW 31 Trumbull Road Northampton, MA 01060 .luly 17, 2003 Wayne Feiden, Director Planning and Development / City Hall 210 Main Street - Room 11 Northampton, MA 01060 RF. New i=ngi;rasl Association Planning hoard Decision Dear Mr. Feiden: Enclosed is a copy of the Planning Board Decision which was recorded in the Hampshire County Registry of Deeds, Book 7276, Page 88, on June 24, 2003. A Special Permit with Site Plan Approval has been granted. Please contact me if you have any further questions or comments relative to this matter.. . Very truly yours, MORS & CKS Harle M. acks HMS:dly:Enclosure cc: David Thompson, Jr., Coler & Colantonio, Inc., One Sugarloaf Street, South Deerfield, MA 01373 2- ,.. N 'Kl f713�� 47 J13�k3 3r'f x C{Stl�tsf lY• Al: oo '� T �N « ��,,����•rQ9i. �eti?��� •R�d�'��.''�S7r5: ,;4,:•a4i�.!�:. Q:1N\new england deaconess\zoning\July 17 Planning Board Decig�on.rjoc Telephone (413) 584-1287 In Connecticut (860) 745-0045 Facsimile (413) 584-0453 E-mail-- lawemorseandsacks.com HARLEY M. SACKS" ALvERTus J. MORSE (1872-1949) ALvF:nTUS D. MORSE (1904-198z) JOHN M. 9.C1i,AUC-HUN- 'Also Aumnn� (N New YORK MARK A. TANNER' `A so Aomrrren iN CoNNEcncJr 0000* APPENDIX A PLANNING BOARD DECISION specification sections. Final connections between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made under the direct supervision of the company. END OF SECTION 16760 Door Entry Access System 16760-3 11/03/03 F. RECORD DRAWINGS: Submit under provisions previously mentioned: an accurate drawing(s) and description indicating actual locations of detection and signaling devices, controllers, end-of-line devices and all other components. G. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Submit under provisions previously mentioned: operations data including operations instructions and manuals (at least three sets to Owner). 2. Maintenance Data including maintenance and repair procedures. H. Local representative for system specified is : Com-Tel-Alarm Engineering, 1514 Memorial Drive, Chicopee, MA, 01020, telephone number: 1-413-533-1862. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Any substitute manufacturers shall be approved by the Architect and Engineer. 2. Others may be submitted for consideration under the provisions previously mentioned. 3. The systems and devices named are designated to define type and quality. Other systems may be submitted for consideration. 4. All components shall be UL listed and/or labeled. B. TELEPHONE CONTROL PANEL 1. Telephone control panel shall be surface wall mounted enclosure, 36 Tenant AeGIS MS 79036. 2. Tenant access control panel shall be stainless steel, flush mounted, 50 tenant/50 access code with ASP 1-AC telephone surge protector. III . EXECUTION A. Install system in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide cabling to door controller/strike. C. Wiring for the door entry system shall adhere to the requirements of relevant Door Entry Access System 16760-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16760 DOOR ENTRY ACCESS SYSTEM I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. DOOR ENTRY ACCESS SYSTEM: Furnish and install complete functional door entry access system including but not limited to main control panel (DECP) located at telephone backboard, tenant access control panel (TACP) located at main entry, cabling to telephone backboard and connections to door controller(furnished and installed by others). C. RELATED WORK: Sections 16005 through 16010, and Sections 16110 - Raceways, 16120 - Wire and Cable D. SUBMITTALS: Submit the following under requirements and in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 1 Specifications and further instructions in this electrical specification: 1. Device data: provide data sheets for each item of equipment, with ratings descriptions and finishes and colors. 2. Shop Drawings: indicate layout, actual (not typical) wiring diagrams, cabling and dimensions. 3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 4. One line diagram: submit a one line diagram of the system proposed. Submittals indicating typical riser diagrams will not be accepted. E. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in access control systems with at least five (5) years experience. 2. Installer shall be a company specializing in access control systems with at least three (3) years experience. Door Entry Access System 16760-1 11/03/03 must be run from the controller box to the computer. 6. A telephone modular jack shall be provided next to the computer for modem operation. 7. For LARD operation, an outside telephone line should be provided with modular jack at the computer. E. RADIO INSTALLATION 1. The base radio shall be a Moxon SM4150 (VHF), SM4450 (UHF) or SM2450 (UHF) and shall be equipped with an MD-4000 desk microphone. The base radio should be installed several feet away from the CAT computer. The antenna shall be installed as high as possible to afford maximum range. The antenna shall be at least 50 feet from the CAT computer or other electronic equipment such as a wireless receiver or DCM's to avoid complications from induced RF. Care should be taken to see that the antenna is at least 25 feet away from any CAT System wiring. The output power of the base radio should be adjusted to the lowest usable level. The base radio shall be provided with its own 450 volt/amp back-up battery power supply and shall not be allowed to share the computer's back-up power supply. 2. If the base radio is to be equipped with a phone patch for LARD (Last Alarm Auto Dial) or for intercom to hand held radio connection, the base radio shall be modified for COR (Carrier On Relay). COR shall go high upon carrier detection a minimum of 5 volts. 3. Hand held radios shall be Vertex VX-10 with DTMF keypad, spare battery and charger. 4. Installing company shall be responsible for procuring the FCC sight license. END OF SECTION 16754 Emergency Call System 16754-10 11/03/03 III . EXECUTION *• A. INSTALLATION 1. Install all components and complete system as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and install the proper trim plates or adapter plates to enable the installed systems stations to properly match the wall conditions. B. SYSTEM TESTING: Test each component and complete system for proper operation, including the various modes. Perform correctional work when required. C. OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION: Instruct nursing and maintenance staff personnel in complete operation, including actual staff use of system by authorized distributor personnel. Arrange timing of each session in writing to best coordinate with staff working hours. D. SYSTEM CABLING 1. Use of wire nuts shall not be allowed. Wire to wire connections shall be made with Telephone Company approved gel filled low voltage crimp connectors. 2. Data buss connections between the Central Computer and the individual Data Control Modules (DCM) shall be 4 conductor stranded 22 gauge twisted pair with overall foil shield and drain wire and three additional 4 conductor, 22 gauge stranded with no shield. The latter should all be three separate cables and not a 12/22#. 3. Wire for the apartment AC-M Master Assistance Call Switch shall be 4 conductor 22 gauge to call switches. J/WP jacks and J/NS jacks. Wiring from the AC-M to smoke detectors, door switches or other devices requiring only a signal circuit shall be 2 conductor 22 gauge. 4. Wire for intercom shall be 2 conductor, 18 gauge, with foil shield and drain wire. 5. The FA403 wireless receiver consists of the actual receiver (about 5"X3") and a controller box with hinged lid. The receiver connects to the controller with 4 conductor 22 gauge stranded with overall foil shield and drain wire. Also, a 4 conductor 22 gauge stranded with overall foil shield and drain wire must be run from the controller box to the computer. If the system is totally wireless and has LAAD (Last Alarm Auto Dial), an additional 4/22# stranded with OOW overall foil shield and drain wire plus two 4/22# stranded non-shielded cables Emergency Call System 16754-9 11/03/03 normally closed, magnetically actuated and hermetically sealed in a glass tube. B. WIRELESS EQUIPMENT 1. All wireless equipment shall operate at no less than 900 MHz and shall employ spread spectrum transmission protocol. Each pendant or transmitter shall transmit each individual alarm no less that 24 times per alarm with each transmission on a different frequency. All pendant and transmitters shall send in a periodic supervisory test signal every minute and a pendant failure alarm shall be generated if a test signal is not received within a user definable time window of 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours or 12 hours. If the battery is low for any wireless transmitter or pendant it shall send in a report identifying the device with the lower battery. All wireless equipment shall have a true-line-of-site- range of at least 2,500 feet. 2. FA525 Intelligent Wireless Repeater: Each wireless repeater shall be housed in a NEMA waterproof housing and shall have a back-up battery power supply. The FA526 shall be supervised for lower battery, tamper and supervisory 60-second test signal. 3. FA403 Serial Receiver: The Serial Receiver shall be provided to decode pendant and transmitter alarm signals providing an ASCII output for the CPU. It shall be microprocessor based. The serial receiver shall be capable of communicating with the CPU via RS232 serial communications. The CPU shall be capable of receiving input from multiple serial receivers. 4. FA203S Wireless Pendant Transmitter: The pendant shall be easy to use and shall employ a neck cord for carrying. 5. FA205S Wireless Pendant Transmitter: The pendant shall be easy to use and shall employ a belt clip for carrying. 6. FA210 Universal Transmitter: The universal transmitter shall provide standard screw down terminals for connecting any open/close dry contact such as switches or other equipment. It shall have a tamper detect cover. It shall be available in ivory or brown. 7. FA21OW Window/Door Transmitter: The universal transmitter shall provide standard screw down terminals for connecting any open/close dry contact such as switches or other equipment. It shall have a tamper detect cover and a built in reed switch for using directly on doors and windows with accompanying magnet. It shall be available in ivory or brown. Awftl Emergency Call System 16754-8 11/03/03 A. EQUIPMENT 1. DCM - Data Control Module: The field Data Control Modules (DCM) shall be microprocessor controlled by device resident software and shall be capable of processing events in stand alone mode should the CPU cease to function. Each DCM shall consist of a battery back-up power supply, a removable microprocessor control card and a motherboard with up to 29 card slots capable of accepting any combination of zone input cards, courtesy check-in control cards and relay output cards. The AC outlet powering the DCM shall be fitted with an AC surge protector noise filter. 2. ROS — Relay Output Cards: Relay outputs shall be available to operate other equipment. Relays may be software activated by alarm inputs or by DTMF tones from hand held radios. Relays may be latching or momentary with a user definable momentary duration of up to 9,999 seconds (2.78 hours). The system shall also be capable of providing a "following" relay closure, which begins with DTMF tone activation and ends with DTMF tone cessation for controlling motorized equipment, spotlights or other remote devices requiring a manual momentary closure. Each relay shall be SPDT and shall provide either a normally open or a normally closed output. 3. Remote Video Display: The system shall be capable of transmitting a video signal from the facilities security camera (CCTV) system to a roving staff person equipment with a video receiver and hand held color (black and white) ' monitor. The receiver and monitor shall be powered by a rechargeable sealed lead-acid battery and shall be worn on the staff person's belt. DTMF tones from a hand held radio shall provide control of the camera switcher and motorized pan/tilt camera positioning units. 4. AC-M Master Assistance Call Switches: Master switch shall provide a central wiring point with standard screw down terminals and shall be fused. Each wall mounted master assistance call switch shall be equipped with a brass ball chain to provide a positive grip (smooth cords shall not be allowed). The chain shall be draped through and "eye" hook located directly below the switch allowing the switch to be pulled from an angle. The switch plate shall have a red LED that lights to indicate type switch has been activated. The AC- M shall mount in a 4S box with a single gang plaster ring. 5. AC-01 Assistance Call Switches: Each wall mounted assistance call switch shall be equipped with a brass ball chain draped though an"eye" hook located directly below the switch allowing the switch to be pulled from an angle. The switch plate shall have a red LED that lights to indicate the switch has been activated. The AC-01 shall mount in a single gang back box. 6. Courtesy Check-In Door Contact Switch: Door contacts shall be flush A*1W_ mounted on the side of the refrigerator. Contacts shall be of the reed type, Emergency Call System 16754-7 11/03/03 assignable up to 26 of the available 999 time zones. In addition, the system shall allow for up to 999 user defined holidays and each alarm input zone shall be independently assignable up to 26 of the available 999 holidays. 8. Manual Zones: The system shall allow arm and disarm of any defined group or groups of alarm input devices by use of either a maintained keyswitch(es) or a numeric digital keypad(s). The system shall allow for any number of groups or any number of devices in any group within the confines of the number of available hardware zone inputs. I. COURTESY CHECK-IN SYSTEM OPERATION 1. The system shall continually monitor check-in contact switches located within each Independent Living Unit. Each day, at a user-defined time, the system shall automatically display all courtesy check-in locations which have not reported in that day. Reports shall also be available through manual request by the operator and each report run during the day will include up-to-the-minute check-in status which will allow indication of late check-ins. Check-in reports shall include the tenants' names, phone numbers, the date and time of the report and the total number not reporting. 2. The Check-in software shall allow for putting a tenant on "Vacancy". The Living Unit will cease appearing in the daily list of those not checked in. As soon as the Living Unit contact switch is activated, the Living Unit will once again and automatically be included in the check-in watch. At the operator's request, a report shall be generated either on the video display or by printout of the vacancy status of facility Living Units. 3. At a predetermined time each morning, the system shall automatically reset all check-in contact switches to a non-reported status in preparation for daily activation by tenants. 4. In the case of power failure or system reset, the check-in zones shall remain in their last active state for verification of activation and shall only be reset manually or automatically at the predetermined reset time each morning. 5. The system shall provide, at a centrally located attendant console, instantaneous alarm annunciation of any and all activations of emergency switches or smoke detectors located in individual apartments and common areas. The system shall differentiate between alarm types. 6. The Check-in System shall include motion detectors located in the apartments. II. PRODUCTS Emergency Call System 16754-6 11/03/03 b. The system shall indicate all alarms including those occurring simultaneously. Alarm indication shall be audible and visual. Each occurrence of an emergency alarm or event shall require an acknowledge and then a reset. Each event shall be stored and printed in English format for later verification. Log entries shall include: 1) ALARM ACTIVATED: Type, time, date, location 2) ALARM ACKNOWLEDGED: Type, time, date, location, identity of person acknowledging by radio 3) ALARM RESTORED: Type, time, date, location 3. Audible Indication: Audible alarm indication shall be by synthesized speech and shall be operator silenced by the stroke of an individual key or the pushing of a number sequence on any hand held radio equipped with a DTMF keypad, which shall cause the computer to log the identity of the person acknowledging the alarm. The system shall have the capability to capture the radio base station and automatically page for help through the use of a synthesized voice feature. The voice announcement shall indicate the type of alarm and the location. The console shall continue to announce until acknowledge or with a portable radio, shall continue to broadcast the alarm type and location until it is acknowledged by pressing the staff identity code on any hand held radio keypad. 4. Visual Indication: Visual alarm indication shall be on an industry standard 25 line by 80 column color CRT display of apartment or zone location, type of event and tenant's name. 5. Information Display: System software shall allow for 1) the difference between the types of inputs, 2) the assigning of tenant name and phone number or common area location descriptive data to each appropriate input for display on the color monitor during activation. System software shall allow for the storing and subsequent displaying of tenant emergency medical data. This data shall include but not be limited to tenant's nearest relative, physician, hospital or health care facility, emergency health data, etc. A printout of the tenant information screen shall be available on demand. 6. History Database: The system shall store the previous 100,000 alarm/events on the hard drive. The archival records shall be available for search by user defined parameter to include date, time, location or type of alarm. 7. Time Zones: The system shall allow for up to 999 user defined time zones for the purpose of shunting or de-activating an alarm input zone for specified wl%, times on specified days. Each alarm input zone shall be independently Emergency Call System 16754-5 11/03/03 definable time zones and holiday zones for shunting alarm activation which shall be independently assignable by zone. Zones shall be capable of being independently defined as normally open or normally closed. 7. Output Relays: The system shall be capable of providing at least 3,500 relay outputs. 8. Model: The system shall be equipped with a telephone modem and remote communications capability for remote diagnostics and upgrading. 9. Two Way Radio: A base radio and hand held portable radios with DTMF keypads should be included with the system. Radios shall be available for "every day use" by the maintenance and security personnel, but shall be capturable by the system upon any occasion of a reportable event. The system shall allow a hand held radio to activate relays for controlling facility equipment. 10. Last Alarm Auto Dial (hand held radio to telephone connect): Upon command from any hand held radio, the system computer shall be capable of automatically looking up and then dialing the telephone number of the apartment that was last to generate any alarm condition. Also, the carrier of the hand held radio shall be able to call any apartment whether or not an alarm had been received from it by simply entering the apartment number (i.e. 121). The system shall be capable of allowing the carries of a hand held radio to call out on a telephone line and to receive incoming facility telephone calls. 11. Intercom: Activation of an apartment assistance call switch or smoke detector shall cause an intercom path to open between the apartment and the central console. The conversation on the part of the tenant will be"hands free". 12. Speaker Phone: The system shall be capable of providing hands free speaker phones for apartments. Upon receiving a defined number of rings, the speaker phone shall answer requiring a touch-tone code from the caller to activate a two-way voice conversation. The speaker phone shall have the capability of being deactivated by the caller upon receiving a defined touch tone code. 13. Pagers: The system shall have the capability of transmitting an alpha numeric alarm description to a proprietary on-site paging system. It shall be capable of assigning user definable groups of pagers to any alarm input zone. J. ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION a. General: The system shall provide at a centrally located attendant console, instantaneous alarm annunciation of any and all activations of emergency switches or smoke detectors located in individual apartments and common areas. The system shall differentiate between alarm types. Emergency Call System 16754-4 11/03/03 I. OPERATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 1. General Scope of Operation a. Provide system equipment specified, installation and necessary control wiring. The initial installation shall include all computer hardware and peripheral equipment, data collection equipment and detection devices for a completely operable system in accordance with these specifications. b. The system shall be totally solid state (except for output relays and certain isolation components), shall be microcomputer based and use digital communication. Provide monitoring and control for intrusion alarm, signaling, assistance call (both hardwired and or wireless, courtesy check- in (passive automatic check-in), room smoke detector and intercom. c. The central console shall be located in the Administration area. 2. Back-Up Power Supply: The system shall be of module design to allow future expansion with the minimum of hardware and or software additions. The system shall be equipped with battery standby for system operation during commercial power outages and the system shall instantly revert to the batteries upon the loss of 60 Hz, 120V supply. When commercial power is restored, the system shall revert back to the 120V, 60 Hz supply and be fully operational without any operator intervention or manual restart procedures. JAOW 3. Trouble Supervision: A trouble condition shall be generated when the CPU or any Data Collection Module (DCM) experiences AC failure or a low battery condition or if any field electronic equipment should fail. If the CAT System main computer should "lock up", a watchdog timer shall reboot the system automatically or provide notification to stag via announcement over the 2-way radio and/or telephone line digital voice dialer. 4. Remote Display Terminal: The system shall allow for a Remote Monitor Station with a monitor and functional keyboard. The display shall act as a duplicate central station to display all information and alarms. 5. Central Console: The system console shall be equipped with a keyboard and VGA video monitor for displaying all active emergency conditions, system data, Courtesy Check-In and other reports; as well as entering and modifying tenant data. A printer shall provide a hard copy record of all events. The console shall also be used for system testing and service. The system computer shall be equipped with a hard disk device for data storage and at least one floppy disk drive for data loading and backup. 6. System Zones: The system capacity shall handle at least 7,000 hardwired 00%, monitoring zones and 64,000 wireless transmitter monitoring zones with user Emergency Call System 16754-3 11/03/03 information required to properly operate the equipment and system. G WARRANTY 1. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be fee from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and material required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. H. FACTORY SERVICES 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. 3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. 4. Complete maintenance and repair service for the emergency call system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. 5. As part of the submittal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, test and repair described below. Include also a quote of unscheduled maintenance/repair, including hourly rates for technician's trained on the equipment and response travel costs. The rates and cost shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. a. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semi-annual basis. A preventative maintenance schedule shall be provided which describes the protocol for preventative maintenance. The schedule shall include: b. Systematic testing, examination and adjustment of all call system components. Oak Emergency Call System 16754-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16754 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. WORK INCLUDED 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of a complete computerized Alarm and Courtesy Check-In Monitoring System. The system shall be zoned by type of alarm by apartment or common area location, electrically supervised, connected, tested and left in first class operating condition. 2. The system shall be CAT System manufactured by CISCOR (Convergent Integrated Systems Corporation), 2411 S. Classen, Norman, Oklahoma, 73071, (405) 447-4955. Any substitute manufacturers shall be approved by the Architect, Engineer and Owner. C. RELATED WORK: Section 16111 — Raceways, Section 16135 — Boxes and Section 16120—Wires and Cables. D. SYSTEM CONFORMANCE APPROVALS: Underwriters Laboratories shall list all system components for the intended purpose and use. E. SUBMITTALS: Include manufacturer's names(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to- point diagrams and conduit layouts. F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawing, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturers name(s) including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation which gives in detail the Emergency Call System 16754-1 11/03/03 D. Guarantee: The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring '` free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. E. Fire Alarm Inspection and Testing Agreement: 1. Provide a Fire Alarm and Testing Agreement with a minimum of three (3) inspections per year. Upon completion of each inspection and test, a report listing actual devices checked will be turned over to the Owner. 2. Provide separate price for agreement. Acceptance of agreement is Owner's option. 3. The agreement shall provide: a. Scheduled inspections and tests (3). b. Replacement of defective component parts (except batteries) at no cost. c. Travel expense and labor charges for emergency service calls. d. Replacement of fixed temperature thermal detectors activated during test. OOW. END OF SECTION 16721 001b. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-10 11/03/03 shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15, 30, 75 or 110 Candela.All horn/strobe shall be installed to ADA guidelines. 6. All UL 1971 Listed strobe appliances shall be verified to meet FCC Part 15, Class B and incorporate low temperature compensation to insure the lowest possible current consumption. 7. The combination horn/strobe appliances shall be installed indoors and flush mounted. They shall mount to standard electrical hardware requiring no additional trim plate or adapter. The appliance shall be finished in a textured red color. I. MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS 1. Furnished and installed by others,wired by Electrical Contractor. J. GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR 1. Furnish and install a graphic annunciator in a location approved by the Northampton Fire Department. Graphic annunciator shall include keyed system reset and silence switches, audible/visual trouble indication and lamp test. K. DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR 1. Existing digital communicator shall remain and shall be connected to new fire alarm control panel. III. EXECUTION A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions all wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the erection of the complete system as described herein and as indicated on the drawings. B. All wiring shall be in conduit and of the same approved type as used for electric light and power wiring, and shall meet the requirements of all national, state and local electrical codes. The sizes of the different wires shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Color code shall be used throughout. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall test free from grounds or crosses between the conductors. FPL cable may be used in locations approved by the Northampton Fire Department. C. Final connection between the control equipment and wiring system shall be made under direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-9 11/03/03 other system devices. Should a problem occur on a particular wire run, it will not affect other wire runs. H. AUDIOVISUAL ALARM SIGNALS 1. Furnish and install combination speaker/strobes and strobes as shown on plans. 2. The notification devices shall be Wheelock Series AS Audible Strobe Signals and companion DSM Sync Modules, or approved equals. Series AS Audible Strobe signals and DSM Sync Modules shall be UL 1971 listed for indoor fire protection service. The devices shall be designed for 2-wire operation and shall provide either a continuous horn/strobe signal with a constantly applied voltage from a conventional Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or synchronized 3. The devices shall be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation (when used with the DSM Sync Modules). DSM Sync Modules shall incorporate two input circuits for power connection from the FACP: one for the strobe circuit and one for the audible circuit. A single 2-wire output shall control both the audible and visual appliances. Upon activation of the audible silence function at the FACP, the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation. The DSM dual circuit version shall provide the capability of "daisy-chaining," i.e., the ability to interconnect multiple DSMs for synchronous horn and strobe operation on multiple circuits. Interconnection capability shall be for a maximum of 20 circuits. Rated average current requirement for the DSM 12/24 shall be 0.020/0.038 amperes. Dual circuit DSM Sync Modules shall be capable of handling a load of 3 amperes per circuit @ 12 or 24 VDC. 4. The horns shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective service and the strobes shall be UL 1971 Listed signaling devices for the hearing impaired. Each electronic signal shall provide CODE-3 HORN audio signal. Sound output at 10 feet shall be field selectable for 90, 95 or 99 dBA. The HIGH anechoic dBA measurement at 10 feet at the alarm HORN SETTING shall be 101 dBA minimum for MT and 99 dBA voltage. Operating voltage shall be 24VDC. Strobes shall be Listed for 20-31 VDC input using filtered power or unfiltered power supply (full-wave-rectified). All models shall have provisions for standard reverse polarity type supervision and IN/OUT field wiring using terminals that accept#12 to #18 AWG wiring. 5. Combination horn/strobe signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry. Strobe shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the Listed input voltage (20 VDC-31 VDC) range. The strobe intensity Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-8 11/03/03 7. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. F. ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE 1. For conventional 2-wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Style B or Style D (NFPA-72 initiating device circuit) wiring supervision. 2. This type of addressable device module will provide power to, and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices as specified elsewhere and identified on plans]. The supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be as shown on plans. These modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel. G ADDRESSABLE OUTPUT MODULE 1. For alarm notification appliances, and other device control with Style Y or Style Z wiring supervision. 2. This type of addressable device will provide double pole double throw relay switching that can be used to connect: a circuit of alarm notification appliances to a power source; or activate a variety of controlled devices. The module will be available in either a Style Y or Style Z supervision version. In the Style Y supervised by an end-of-line device. In the Style Z version, the wiring will be looped back and connected to the module to allow continual operation of the controlled devices even if the wiring sustains a single break. These modules will communicate the supervised wiring status (normal, trouble) to the fire alarm control panel and will receive a command to transfer the relay from the fire alarm control panel. 3. The module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel for processing according to the program instructions. Should the module become non- operational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble signal, unique to the device, shall be transmitted to, and annunciated at, the control panel. 4. The module shall be capable of being programmed for its "address" location on the addressable device signaling line circuit. The module shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable detectors on the same addressable circuit. 5. All devices will be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel will be capable of indicating the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed). Should a device fail, it will not hinder the operation of 0""'' Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-7 11/03/03 2. The front of the station is to be hinged to a backplate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the OOW control panels. Stations which use allen wrenches or special tools to reset, will not be accepted. The station shall consist of high impact, red in color. 3. The addressable manual station shall be capable of field programming of its "address" location on an addressable signaling line circuit. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors or addressable monitor modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. 5. The addressable manual station shall be Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. listed. E. ALARM SENSORS and ADDRESSABLE SENSOR BASES 1. The addressable smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric type and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. 2. The addressable temperature sensors shall sense within a temperature range of 32°F to 158°F. The control panel will be capable of sensing either a set point of 135°F, or a rate-of-rise of [15°F] [20°F] per minute for fire sensing. For utility sensing, a set point may be chosen within the stated range and the control panel programming will be capable of using that information to determine specific response such as warning of failure of local temperature controls. 3. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications. 4. Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors, which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location, shall not be acceptable. 5. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. 6. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed. 'Omsk Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-6 11/03/03 11. Provide control panel transformers as required to supply stepped down AC , '"* voltage to the power supply modules. They shall be internally mounted and rated at 250 VA, with secondary output of 21.5 VAC. 12. Provided terminal connectors and harnesses for field connections of remote annunciators, or for the modules' auxiliary contacts. Each connector shall have provisions for at least sixteen (16) separate points, and shall be fastened securely on the rack enclosure. B. SMOKE DETECTORS 1. The Photoelectric type detector shall be a plug-in unit which mounts to a twist-lock base, and shall be UL listed. 2. The detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall contain no radioactive material. They will use a pulsed infrared LED light source and be sealed against rear air flow entry. 3. The detector shall fit into a base that is common with both the heat detector and ionization type detector and shall be compatible with other addressable detectors, addressable manual stations, and addressable Zone Adaptor Modules on the same circuit. The detector shall also fit into a non-addressable base that is capable of being monitored by an addressable Zone Adaptor Module. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors or Zone Adaptor Modules which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. C. THERMAL DETECTOR HEAD 1. Thermal detector heads must be UL listed and shall be combination rate-of- rise and fixed temperature (135°F) type, automatically restorable. D. PULL STATIONS 1. Addressable pull stations shall contain electronics that communicate the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide power to the pull station. The address shall be set on each station. The stations shall be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering shall be raised and painted white. The station shall mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be double action as identified by the schedule on the prints. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-5 11/03/03 2. Fire Alarm Control Panel: Notifier NFS640 microprocessor based, 2 loop, analog addressable, monitoring and control system. 3. A control module shall be provided to act as a central processing and indicating location for the fire alarm system. It shall include acknowledge, reset, LED test and trouble signal silence switches, annunciator trouble, system trouble and earth LED's and a trouble sonalert. The control module shall also be provided with an alarm resound feature to permit subsequent alarms to resound the signals. 4. Provide a battery charger module complete with high rate indicator and charger failure LED's. Charger shall be the automatic current limited type equipped with fuse protection and both high and trickle charge capability. 5. Provide sealed lead-calcium batteries built into the control panel with capacity to supervise the system for (60) hours then sound the alarm signals for (10) minutes. 6. Provide 2 wire alarm initiating circuit modules with two (2) electrically supervised, normally open circuits, monitoring for alarm (shorts), trouble (opens), and ground faults. The modules shall provide alarm and trouble LED's, LED test (from control), alarm annunciator outputs, and alarm resound with flasher acknowledge (from control). They shall also be equipped with zone test/disconnect switches. They shall allow the mixing of smoke detectors, heat detectors, flow switches and other initiation devices on the same zone, without the use of limiting resistors at manual stations and detec- tors, and without using a separate source of power for the detectors. The module shall be completely pluggable for ease of servicing, with a 50 Ohm maximum line resistance. 7. Provide pluggable relays and their bases as required, complete with terminals for contractor wiring for control of external equipment. 8. Provide two 2-wire signal circuit modules for control and supervision of the alarm horns and visual signals. Each signal circuit shall have a trouble LED and fuse. Supervision shall be provided for opens, shorts, and earth grounds. 9. Provide a drill switch in or at the fire alarm control panel. 10. Provide adequate power supply modules supplying five amperes each of continuous filtered power, or eight amperes each intermittent, of the proper voltage. The power supply shall be capable of furnishing the system power, and power for devices such as smoke detectors, auxiliary relays, door holders, etc. It shall contain a normal power LED, battery trouble LED, and power supply trouble LED, all viewable on front of enclosure. Capability of connecting a voltage regulator shall be included. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-4 11/03/03 of the complete system and modify the system to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 14. Shop drawings submitted for review shall include but shall not be limited to itemized list of equipment, quantities, dimension drawings of all equipment, mechanical characteristics of all equipment, electrical characteristics of all equipment, sequence of operation of each item and complete system, one line drawing, and riser diagram. Typical wiring diagrams shall not be submitted and will not be accepted as meeting the above wiring diagram requirement. The riser diagram shall include conduit sizes, conductor sizes, and number of conductors in each conduit. 15. Failure to meet the above requirements shall be cause for rejecting the system when submitted. 16. Provide three brochures for the Owner that shall contain complete written operating instructions, floor plans, wiring diagrams, and maintenance instructions. 17. Operation: The activation of any manual fire alarm station, or the automatic actuation of any thermal detector, system smoke detector, or any other approved alarm initiating device shall immediately result in the following: a. The Northampton Fire Department shall be notified via the existing digital communicator. b. The zone in alarm shall readout on the display unit at the main Fire Alarm Control Panel and at the remote annunciator. c. All audible alarm signals shall sound and all strobes shall be activated. d. All visual alarm signals shall flash. e. If alarm signals are silenced for any reason they shall automatically resound if another alarm zone is tripped. f. In the event of a commercial power interruption the system shall automatically transfer to an emergency standby battery source. II. PRODUCTS A. EQUIPMENT 1. See fire alarm legend on drawing for additional details. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-3 11/03/03 e. Alarm devices, including strobes, exterior beacon and connection to Northampton Fire Department Central Station via existing digital communicator for automatic notification. 7. Provide new system complete as indicated on drawings and in these specifications. Final system shall be complete, tested and operable, as well as approved by state and local officials. 8. The System including, but not necessarily limited to operation, functions, material, supervision, devices, equipment, and installation shall be designed, manufactured, installed, and tested in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of the following: a. Town of Northampton Fire Department. b. Commonwealth of Massachusetts, State Fire Marshall and Dept. of Safety. c. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, (FM) Factory Mutual System Publication. d. National Fire Protection Association, including Standards No. 72A, No. 72B,No. 90A, 72E, and others. e. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Fire Protection Equipment List. f. The 2000 International Building Code Fire Protection Systems Chapter 9. 9. All equipment shall be listed by UL for fire alarm detection systems and shall be by one manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of complete fire alarm systems. 10. Refer to NFPA Codes and Standards for applicable fire system terms and definitions. 11. The word "manufacturer" as used in this article, Fire Alarm System, is the person or entity who engineered, designed, developed, tested, and fabricated the fire alarm control panel which is the major component of the fire alarm system. 12. The installation shall be supervised, checked and guaranteed as to performance by the manufacturer. The manufacturer or authorized representative shall provide engineering supervision without claim for extra compensation. 13. Initial tests and adjustments shall be performed under this Section. Furnish all equipment necessary and perform all Work required to determine the operation Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. Standards and Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards and NEC. 2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA No. 72-series of standards. 3. FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories which are FM-approved. 4. UL Labels: Provide fire alarm and detection system components which are UL-listed and labeled. 5. ADA Compliance: Provide equipment and mounting to ADA guidelines. 6. General: Provide a new addressable, microprocessor based fire alarm system for the facility, including but not limited to: a. Approvals from and coordination with the Northampton Fire Department. b. Initiating devices such as pull stations, heat and smoke detectors, flow and tamper switches (furnished and installed by sprinkler contractor, wired by EC. c. Interconnections to elevator equipment with heat detectors at top and bottom of elevator shaft and at elevator pit to shut down the elevator before sprinkler heads go off(shunt trip breaker for elevator). d. Interconnections to elevator equipment with smoke detectors at each stop, top of elevator shaft and elevator machine room for initiation of elevator recall and control of elevator damper. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16721-1 11/03/03 END OF SECTION 16621 Emergency Generator 16621-11 11/03/03 exploded views specific to this model must be included. III. INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all fuel connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer. B. SERVICE 1. Supplier of the electric plant and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in the trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service personnel on 24 hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. 2. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available. C. Warranty: The standby electric generating system components, complete engine- generator and instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of 12 months. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer's option, free of charge for travel and labor. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support. Startup and Checkout D. The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to assist with installation and set-up, and to checkout the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: 1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time. 2. Verification of engine parameters within specification. 3. Set no load frequency and voltage. 4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. 5. Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and #OW* voltage are within specification by using building load. Emergency Generator 16621-10 11/03/03 c. A DPDT relay shall be socket mounted in the generator control panel and operate on engine start and run for customer connection. d. A solid state printed circuit board shall monitor the battery condition and illuminate individual lamps on the generator control panel and supply an output voltage for remote monitoring of either high battery voltage or low battery voltage conditions. 6. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit: a. Provide an alarm annunciator panel for remote mounting with the following signals indicating status and possible malfunction. The annunciator must have the capability of programming the audible alarms as follows: 1. LAMP LEGEND LIGHT AUDIBLE a) Pre-Alarm High Water Temperature yellow selectable b) Pre-Alarm Low Oil Pressure yellow selectable c) High Coolant Temp/Low coolant Level red yes d) Low Oil Pressure red yes e) Low Coolant Temperature yellow selectable f) Low Fuel yellow selectable g) High Battery Voltage yellow selectable low h) Not in Auto red yes i) RPM Sensor Loss red yes J) Overspeed red yes k) Low Battery Voltage yellow selectable 1) Overcrank red yes m) Generator Power yellowyes n) Normal Utility Power greenno o) System Ready green no p) Alarm Switch Off red no q) Generator Running green no r) Battery Charger Failure yellow selectable b. The panel shall have an ALARM switch that when moved to the OFF position silences the audible alarm. A TEST-RESET switch must be included to verify the lights are functional and reset any condition after it has cleared. c. The annunciator must be suitable for flush mounting. E. Owner's Manuals: Three (3) sets of owner's manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment. General operating „ instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts Emergency Generator 16621-9 11/03/03 generator set by the manufacturer. It shall contain panel lighting, a fused DC circuit to protect the controls and a +/-5% voltage adjusting control. This panel must be able to be rotated 90 degrees in either direction for current installation. 2. Safety shutdown monitoring system shall include solid state engine monitor with individual lights and one common external alarm contact indicating the following conditions: Overcrank shutdown, Overspeed shutdown, High Coolant Temperature (Low Coolant Level shutdown), Low Oil Pressure shutdown. Monitoring system shall include lamp test switch for permanent magnet sensor. If there is a failure in this circuit, the engine must shutdown immediately and illuminate a Loss of RPM Sensor shutdown. 3. The engine-generator set shall contain a complete engine start-stop control which starts the engine on closing contacts and stop the engine on opening contacts.A cyclic cranking limiter shall be provided to open the starting circuit after eight attempts if the engine has not started within that time. Engine control modules must be solid state plug-in type for high reliability and easy service. The engine controls shall also include a 3-position selector switch with the following positions: OFF/MANUAL/AUTO. 4. Engine instrumentation shall consist of an oil pressure gauge, coolant temperature gauge, DC ammeter and an engine run hourmeter located on the unit control panel. 5. The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer's facility: a. The panel mounted voltage adjuster must have a shaft lockin device to avoid accidental misadjustment. b. A thermostatically controlled circuit shall monitor the engine coolant temperature and illuminate a low coolant temperature lamp on the generator control panel and supply an output voltage for remote monitoring, if the engine coolant temperature falls below the manufacturer's recommendations. A thermostatically controlled circuit shall monitor the engine coolant temperature and illuminate a high coolant temperature prealarm lamp on the generator control panel and supply an output voltage for remote monitoring, if the engine coolant temperature rises above the manufacturer's recommendations. A pressure controlled circuit shall monitor the engine oil pressure and illuminate a low oil pressure prealarm lamp on the generator control panel and supply an output voltage for remote monitoring, if the engine oil pressure falls below the manufacturer's recommendations. Emergency Generator 16621-8 11/03/03 breaker. 2. One step load acceptance shall be 100% of nameplate kW rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 100 paragraph 5-13.2.6. The engine generator set shall be so designed that voltage dip upon application of nameplate kW/kVA shall not exceed 12.5% with recovery to stable operation within 2 seconds. The generator set and regulator must sustain at least 90% of no load voltage for 10 seconds with 250% of rated load at near zero power factor connected to its terminals. 3. A solid state voltage regulator designed and built by the engine-generator set manufacturer must be used to control output voltage by varying the exciter magnetic field to provide + or - 1% regulation during stable load conditions. Should an extremely heavy load drop the output frequency, the regulator shall have a voltage droop of 4 volts/hertz to maximize motor starting capability. The frequency at which this droop operation begins must be adjustable, allowing the generator set to be properly matched to the load characteristics ensuring optimum system performance. Additional rheostats for matching generator voltage, droop, and stability characteristics to the specific load conditions must be available. 4. The voltage regulator must contain a limiting circuit to prevent output voltage surges in excess of 125% of rated voltage during generator set operation. On loss or near loss of the sensing signal, the voltage regulator must shutdown to prevent an overvoltage condition from occurring unless the specific application requires 300% of rated current be allowed to flow through the electrical distribution circuit(s) for ten (10) seconds. Voltage regulators not capable of both modes of operation are not acceptable. LED indication will be provided on the regulator to monitor the sensing (yellow), excitation (green) and output circuit (red). 5. A NEMA 1 panel that is an integral part of the generator set must be provided to allow the installer a convenient location in which to make electrical output connections. An isolated neutral lug must be included by the generator set manufacturer to ensure proper sizing. 6. The electric plant shall be mounted with vibration isolators on a welded steel base which shall permit suitable mounting to any level surface. 7. Two thermal magnetic UL listed main line circuit breakers rated at 50 and 300 amps shall be mounted in the generator enclosure. D. CONTROLS 1. All engine alternator controls and instrumentation shall be designed, built, wired, tested and shock mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure to the engine- Emergency Generator 16621-7 11/03/03 208 volts, thermostatically controlled and sized to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature. d. Generator strip heater, 120 volts, for high humidity. 8. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit: a. The engine will be supplied with a single exhaust outlet and muffler with super critical exhaust silencer. b. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be of critical grade. It shall be gas-proof, seamless, stainless-steel, flexible exhaust bellows with threaded NPT connections. The engine exhaust silencer shall be coated to be temperature and rust resistant, with integral condensate drain, rated for critical applications. Exhaust noise shall be limited to 85 dBA as measured at 10 feet in a free- field environment. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed. The muffler and included hardware shall be shipped loose by the generator manufacturer. c. The manufacturer will supply its recommended flexible fuel line to connect the engine to the external fuel source. On stationary applications it shall match the fuel fitting on the unit base rail and have braided stainless **elk steel covering with brass fittings. d. Fuel transfer tank of 224.3 gallons, double wall subbase fuel tank with a 120 volt motor driving an appropriately sized positive displacement pump. Tank shall be equipped with float switch, level gauge, and low fuel level alarm contacts to be connected to remote annunciator. e. Weatherproof sound attenuated enclosure shall be constructed of rugged steel, cleaned, phosphated and electrocoat painted inside and out with rust inhibiting primer and exterior coat of Manufacturer's standard color. Side panels shall be lockable and easily removed for servicing. Top mounted exhaust silencer with rain shield over the exhaust opening. C. ALTERNATOR 1. The alternator shall be a 4-pole rotating field type, 12 lead, wired for three phase, 60 Hz rated at 100 KW with a brushless permanent magnet exciter. The stator shall be gear drive connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment. The generator shall meet temperature rise standards for class "H" insulation and conform to MIL-1-24092, Type "M", class 155. All leads must be extended into the AC connection panel. The alternator shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection and an automatic reset field circuit Emergency Generator 16621-6 11/03/03 engine shall have a replaceable oil filter with internal bypass and replaceable elements. Engine coolant and oil drain extension must be provided to outside the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. A fan guard must be installed for personnel safety. 3. The engine shall have a battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote 2-wire starting shall be by solenoid shift, electric starter. 4. Engine speed shall be governed by electronic isochronous governor to maintain alternator frequency within .5% from no load to full load alternator output. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%. 5. Sensing elements to be located on the engine for low oil pressure shutdown, high coolant temperature shutdown, low coolant level shutdown, overspeed shutdown and overcrank shutdown. These sensors are to be connected to the control panel using a wiring harness with the following features: wire number labeling on each end of the wire run for easy identification, a molded rubber boot to cover the electrical connection on each sensor to prevent corrosion and all wiring to be run in flexible conduit for protection from the environment and moving objects. 6. The engine shall have an engine mounted, thermostatically controlled waterjacket heater to aid in quick starting. It will be of adequate wattage as recommended by the engine manufacturer. The contractor shall provide proper branch circuit from normal utility power source. 7. Provide the following items installed at the factory: a. Provide an automatic dual rate battery charger manufactured by the engine-generator set supplier. The automatic equalizer system shall monitor and limit the charge current to 10 amps. The output voltage is to be determined by the charge current rate. The charger must have a maximum open circuit voltage of 35 volts and be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable. Provide a battery pad heater. b. A heavy duty, lead acid battery set shall be provided by the generator set manufacture of adequate voltage and amperage capacity to start and operate the engine. Provide all intercell and connecting battery cables as required. c. Provide block heater as recommended by the Manufacturer, to operate at Emergency Generator 16621-5 11/03/03 preventative maintenance service on the equipment furnished. This service contract shall be provided at no additional charge to the Owner for a period of 2 years from date of start up of the generator set. At the Owner's option, the service contract shall be renewable on a year-to- year basis, thereafter,with costs being paid by the Owner. II. PRODUCTS A. The standby generator set shall be rated continuous standby (defined as continuous for the duration of any power outage) 208Y/120 Volts, three phase, four wire, .8 power factor, 100 kW, 125 WA, 347 amperes at 500 feet altitude, 85°F (29°C). 1. The generator set shall be capable of starting motor loads with a maximum voltage dip of 15%. 2. Vibration isolators (spring type) shall be provided between the engine- generator and heavy-duty steel base, or between the base and the floor. 3. The generator must start and be fully"on-line" in ten (10) seconds or less. B. ENGINE "w"" 1. The prime mover shall be 366 cubic-inch-displacement delivering 166 hp at a governed speed of 1800 rpm. The engine shall be equipped with the following: a. Engine-driven or electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6 feet, with fuel filters, electric solenoid fuel shut-off valve, and a fuel distribution system. b. 12 volt positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor. c. Full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick, and oil drain. d. The engine shall be turbocharged and aftercooled, fueled with #2 diesel, with six (6) cylinders, liquid cooled by unit mounted radiator,blower fan, water pump, thermostat, and radiator duct flange. This system shall properly cool the engine in 105 degree F ambient temperature with 0.5 inches water static pressure on the fan. There shall be a visual means for determining engine coolant level. 2. There shall be an intake air filter with replaceable element. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The Emergency Generator 16621-4 11/03/03 5) Rated Power. 6) Power. 7) Upon request, arrangements to either witness this test will be made, or a certified test record will be sent prior to shipment. c. Site Tests: An installation check, start-up, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: 1) Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected. 2) Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery charger, generator strip heaters, remote annunciator, etc. 3) Start up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to- line voltage, and phase rotation. 40PW 4) Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote- automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. An external load bank shall be connected to the system if sufficient building load is unavailable to load the generator to the nameplate kW rating. 5. WARRANTY a. The emergency generator system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for 1 year or 2,000 hours, whichever occurs first, from the date of the site start-up. Optional 2-year and 5-year warranties shall be available upon request. 1) Service Contract: The engine-generator distributor shall furnish factory trained personnel and maintain a 24-hour parts and service capability, and show, at time of submittal, that they are regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to semi-annually inspect and test run the engine to perform manufacturers recommended Emergency Generator 16621-3 11/03/03 transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel. Differentiate between factory-installed and field-installed work. 4. To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site tests. a. Design Prototype Tests: Components of the emergency system such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests since the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and preproduction models, which will not be sold, shall have been used for the tests. Prototype test programs shall include the requirements of NFPA 110 and the following: 1) Maximum power(kW). 2) Maximum motor starting(kVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip. 3) Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method per NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40. 4) Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. 5) Voltage regulation and generator transient response. 6) Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load. 7) Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. 8) Three-phase short circuit tests. 9) Alternator cooling air flow. 10)Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses. 11)Endurance testing. b. Final Production Tests: Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: 1) Single-step load pickup. 2) Transient and steady--state governing. 3) Safety shutdown device testing. 4) Voltage regulation. Emergency Generator 16621-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16621 EMERGENCY GENERATOR I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. It is the intent of this specification to secure an emergency generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings, and specifications herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the latest version of the National Electrical Code in force, along with all applicable state and local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production of a national firm that manufactures the generator and controls, transfer switch, and assembles the standby generator sets as a 40W matched unit so that there is one-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen. Specifications are based on the Caterpillar Olympian D100P1 diesel generator set. The specifications are intended to indicate desired operation, features and quality, and are not intended to be exclusive or proprietary. Other acceptable manufacturers are Onan/Cummins and Kohler. These may be bid if documentation and specifications are submitted to the engineer. 2. Specifically, the generator shall provide 100 kW standby at .80 power factor (PF), provide 208Y120 volts, three phase, Y connected, with fuel setup for diesel fuel. It shall come set up for diesel with all necessary and required accessories and options, battery charger (10 amp dual rate), two main line circuit breakers of 50 amp/3 pole for emergency life safety panels, and 300 amp/3 pole for general emergency/standby power, control console, remote annunciator and flex connections to the generator for all utilities. Provide a 224.3 gallon sub base fuel tank for 24 hour operation under full load, with all necessary and required accessories and options. 3. Submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set, the Emergency Generator 16621-1 11/03/03 .40^1 B. High-Intensity-Discharge-Lamp Ballasts: Provide HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and makes as recommended by lamp manufacturer, which properly matches lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for which lamps are designed. Exterior wall mounted HID fixtures at exit doors shall have quartz restrike circuitry and lamps and be wired from emergency Life Safety power for exit door emergency lighting. C. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings. III. EXECUTION A. Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation," NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Clean exterior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. C. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for exterior lighting fixtures. D. Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and after energizing branch supply circuitry, apply electrical energy to lighting fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. E. Replace defective and burned-out lamps for period of one year following the time of Substantial Completion. F. At time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in exterior lighting fixtures that are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15% (but not less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. G. Refer to Division-1 sections for replacement/restoration of lamps in exterior lighting fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16512 Exterior Lighting Fixtures 16512-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16512 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of exterior building lighting fixtures. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. FA 1, LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. 3. UL Compliance: Provide exterior lighting fixtures that are UL-listed and labeled. 4. Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring. 5. Exterior wall mounted lights are on the emergency generator for Life Safety required emergency lighting. Provide hot and cold quartz restrike capability in exterior wall lights and provide appropriate incandescent lamps for restrike option. 6. Coordinate exact locations and mounting heights of all exterior lights with Architectural site plans and building elevations. II. PRODUCTS A. See Light Fixture Schedule. Any proposed substitutions must be submitted ten (10) days in advance of the bid due date for consideration. No substitutions will be accepted after the bid date. Manufacturer's representatives and distributors must be prepared to provide fixture unit prices. Manufacturer's representatives and distributors who do not provide fixture unit prices as requested shall be excluded from consideration of fixture pricing. Exterior Lighting Fixtures 16512-1 11/03/03 Others shall have rapid-start, high power factor, low-noise type ballasts. All ballasted fixtures shall have built-in overcurrent protection. Compact Ow fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless high power factor ballasts are called for. Compact fluorescent lamps shall have "end of life" protection. 2. Lamps: Provide lamps as specified. If lamp substitutions are proposed, they shall be submitted for approval ten (10) days prior to bid due date for consideration. Lamp substitutions must be exactly equivalent to specified lamps for consideration. Several lamps specified have no substitute (that I am aware of). III. EXECUTION A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated; in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. Coordinate light fixture locations with Architectural drawings and reflected ceiling plans. In the case of inconsistencies or questions, verify with Architect and Engineer. Comply with NEMA, NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation" pertaining to installation of interior lighting fixtures. B. Fasten fixtures securely to structural support members of building; and check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb. Fixtures in lay-in ceilings shall be directly supported to building structure from at least two opposite corners with jack chain or solid wire that will support the fixture independently. C. Clean fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. D. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. E. At date of substantial completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures that are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect or Engineer. Furnish stock of replacement lamps amounting to 10% (but not less than one lamp in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. F. Refer to Division-1 sections for replacement/restoration of lamps in interior lighting fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 16511 Interior Lighting Fixtures 16511-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to lamp materials, lamp ballasts and transformers, and interior lighting fixtures. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to lighting equipment. 3. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. POW, 4. UL Labels: Provide interior lighting fixtures that have been UL-listed and labeled. 5. NFPA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70) as applicable to installation and construction of interior lighting fixtures. 6. Provide interior lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; comprised of, but not necessarily limited to, the following components: lamps, lamp holders, reflectors,ballasts, starters and wiring. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURER: See Light Fixture Schedule. Any proposed substitutions must be submitted ten (10) days in advance of the bid due date for consideration. No substitutions will be accepted after the bid date. Manufacturer's representatives and distributors must be prepared to provide fixture unit prices. Manufacturer's representatives and distributors who do not provide fixture unit prices as requested shall be excluded from consideration of fixture pricing. B. INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 1. Ballasts: Provide electronic ballasts for most fluorescent fixtures as noted. Interior Lighting Fixtures 16511-1 11/03/03 7. Reports: Maintain a written record of observations and tests. Report defective materials and workmanship and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. F. DEMONSTRATION 1. Training: Furnish the services of a factory-authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in the operation, maintenance and adjustment of transfer switches and related equipment. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction scheduled 7 days in advanced. END OF SECTION 16495 Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-6 11/03/03 torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B. D. GROUNDING: Make equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated and as required by the NEC. E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Manufacturer's field services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise field tests. 2. Preliminary tests: Perform electrical tests as recommended by the manufacturer and as follows: a. Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels with insulation resistance tester, including external annunciator and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. 3. Field tests: Give 7-day advance notice of the tests and perform tests in presence of owner's representative. 4. Coordinate tests with test of generator plant and run them concurrently. 5. Tests: As recommended by the manufacturer and as follows: a. Contact resistance test: Measure resistance of power contacts for ATSs, NATs, and BP/ISs. Resolve values in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between adjacent poles exceeding 50 percent. b. Operational tests: Demonstrate interlock, sequence and operational function for each switch at least 3 times. 1. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATSs and of emergency source with normal source available. 2. Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source of ATSs. 3. Verify time-delay settings and pick-up and drop-out voltages. 6. Test failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements. Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-5 11/03/03 Commercial Buildings (Gray Book) *- g. NEMA Standard ICS 2-447 Automatic Transfer Switches. G. WITHSTAND RATINGS 1. The ATS shall be rated to withstand the available rms symmetrical short- circuit current at the ATS terminals (22,000 AIC minimum for ATS-1 and 10,000 AIC minimum for ATS-2). 2. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37.90a-1974) and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance with the proposed NEMA Standard ICS 1-109. The control panel shall conform to the test requirements of UL 991 for transient over voltage, electromagnetic susceptibility, and electrostatic discharge. H. MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY 1. Submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied: schematic, wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set and the transfer switch. 2. Each transfer switch shall be provided with an operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions. 3. Each automatic transfer switch and generator set shall be warranted by the generator set manufacturer for one year from the date placed in service. III. EXECUTION A. Install automatic transfer switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS: Match the type and number of cables and conductors to the control and communications requirements of the transfer switches used. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to the owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. C. CONNECTIONS: Tighten factory-made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints, mounting and grounding. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment �Pw manufacturer's published torque tightening values. When manufacturer's Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-4 11/03/03 INOW a. Plant exerciser, 7-day no load AOW b. Solid state, 2-amp, floating 12- or 24-volt battery charger c. 3-phase sensing on the normal source E. OPERATION 1. Source Voltages a. Normal source single-phase voltage sensing shall be fixed at 70 percent for dropout and 90 percent for pickup. b. Emergency source single-phase sensing shall be fixed at 85 percent of rated voltage and 95 percent of rated frequency. 2. Time Delays a. Time delay for engine start to inhibit initiation of transfer for momentary source outage shall be fixed at 3.0 seconds. b. Time delay for transfer back to normal shall be fixed at 5 minutes. 3. A toggle test switch shall be provided to simulate a normal-source failure. 4. A set of gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 28 vdc shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal when the normal source fails. F. COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS 1. The ATS shall conform to the requirements of: a. UL 1008--Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches b. NFPA 70--National Electrical Code, including use in emergency and standby systems in accordance with Articles 517, 700 c. NFPA 99--Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities (with respect to monitoring and alarm) d. NFPA 110--Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems e. IEEE Standard 446--Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems (Orange Book) .40M. f. IEEE Standard 241--Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-3 11/03/03 protected by arcing contacts. 4. Neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor terminal plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided. 5. All contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be conveniently removable from the front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power conductors. 6. The contact transfer time shall not exceed one-sixth(1/6) of a second. C. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Automatic transfer switches not intended for continuous duty or repetitive load transfer switching are not acceptable. 2. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric-discharge lamps, electric heating, and tungsten-filament lamp load. 3. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the rms symmetrical short circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans. D. TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL SYSTEM 1. The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The module's sensing and logic circuitry must use a solid-state design for maximum reliability and minimum maintenance. The control module shall have a polarized disconnect plug to enable the control module to be disconnected from the transfer mechanism for routine maintenance. 2. All printed circuit boards for the control module must be conformal coated on both sides for environmental protection. 3. The control module must be mounted separately from the transfer mechanism unit for safety and ease of maintenance. Interfacing relays must be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust cover. 4. The control module shall include lamps to indicate normal or emergency source switch position and normal and emergency source availability. These lamps shall be visible when the enclosure door is closed. 5. The control module must be able to be upgraded with the following options: Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16495 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. It is the intent of this specification to secure automatic transfer switches that have been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, and site tested, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings and specified herein. Provide one 70 amp, 208Y/120 volt, three pole ATS (ATS-2) for the Emergency Life Safety system (panels and circuits for lighting); and one 400 amp, 208Y/120 volt, three pole ATS (ATS-1) for the other emergency power system (heat, etc.). The ATS shall consist of an inherently double-throw power transfer switch unit and a control module interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international firm which manufactures the generator, controls, and transfer switch. The company selected will assemble the standby generator set and system as a matched unit so that there is one-source responsibility for warranty, parts and service through a local representative with factory-trained personnel. II. PRODUCTS A. These specifications are based on the ASCO 300 series,A300 37091C/14AA, and A300 340091C/14AA, 208Y/120V automatic transfer switch. Other acceptable manufacturers include ONAN/CUMMINS and KOHLER. B. MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1. The ATS shall be furnished in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. 2. All moveable parts of the operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanical contact with the main contacts during the transfer operation without the use of separate mechanical interlocks. 3. All main contacts shall be of silver composition. The main contacts shall be Awft Automatic Transfer Switch 16495-1 11/03/03 B. SERVICE-ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARDS and PANELBOARDS: Provide dead-front safety constructed factory-assembled service-entrance circuit breaker type Switchboards and panelboards in sizes and ratings indicated. Labeled for service-entrance use. C. POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 1. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement shown. Equip with aluminum bus bars or copper bus bars in damp or hazardous environments, and full-size neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case main and branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide a bare uninsulated grounding bar suitable for bolting to enclosure. Provide panelboards fabricated by same manufacturer as enclosures, and which fit properly with enclosures. 2. Provide split-buss configuration where required to accommodate panic shut-down circuits and continuous power circuits. Contractor option to provide separate panel for constant power. III. EXECUTION A. Install panelboards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Anchor panelboards tightly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are mechanically secure and permanently affixed. C. Provide electrical connections within enclosures. Do not make connections in wireways or raceways. Wire continuous from breaker to first normal outlet. D. Fill out (type) panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work. END OF SECTION 16470 Panelboards 16470-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with UL Stds Nos. 50, 67, 869 and 1053. Provide panelboards which have been UL- licensed and labeled, and with additional UL markings indicating special usage, where panelboards are constructed for that purpose. 2. NEC and NEMA Compliances: Comply with NEC and NEMA Stds Pub No. 250,No. PB 1, No. PB 1.1. 3. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical panelboards, enclosures and 40*- ancillary components, of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where more than one type of component meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not otherwise indicated for an application, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURER: Provide panelboards of one of the following (for each type of panelboard and enclosure): 1. Challenger 2. Electrical Equipment Div., GTE Corp. 3. General Electric Co. 4. I.T.E. Siemens-Allis. 5. Square D Co. 6. Westinghouse Electric Corp. Panelboards 16470-1 11/03/03 NNW 2. Ground Plates: Sheet copper plate, 20 gage x 36" x 36", with 2 cable attachments for 1/0 or 2/0 cables. F. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONNECTION ACCESSORIES: Provide elec- trical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. III. EXECUTION A. Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. All raceway conduit systems shall have an equipment grounding conductor pulled in with the other conductors. Each joint and termination must be tight to insure electrical and mechanical continuity. C. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. D. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. E. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 3 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 3 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 16450 Grounding 16450-3 11/03/03 II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grounding products of one of the following(for each type of product): 1. B-Line Systems Inc. 2. Burndy Corp. 3. Crouse-Hinds Co. 4. Electrical Components Div.; Gould Inc. 5. General Electric Supply Co. 6. Ideal Industries, Inc. 7. Lyncole 8. Thomas and Betts Corp. B. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 1. Rigid steel conduit. 2. Electrical metallic tubing. 3. Flexible metal conduit,Type 2. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Rigid metal conduit fittings. 6. EMT fittings, Type 1. 7. Flexible metal conduit fittings. 8. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings. C. CONDUCTORS: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All grounding conductors shall be stranded. D. BONDING PLATES, CONNECTORS, TERMINALS and CLAMPS: Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications. E. GROUND RODS AND PLATES 1. Ground Rods: Solid copper, 5/8" dia. x 10'. Grounding 16450-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. Provide grounding for all circuits and systems including but not limited to: Building electrical service entrance, pad mount transformer, building structure, water piping, telephone system, other systems and circuits as required. 2. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEC Article 250, pertaining to electrical grounding systems. 3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. Provide grounding products which are UL-listed and labeled. 4. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. 5. Submittals: Submit shop layout drawings of grounding systems and accessories including, but not limited to, ground wiring, ground rods, and plate electrodes. 6. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 7. Provide raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections "Raceways" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings," in accordance with the following listing: Grounding 16450-1 11/03/03 7. Markal Company. 8. National Band and Tag Co. 9. Panduit Corp. 10. Seton Name Plate Co. B. NAMEPLATES: Provide nameplates for panelboards, relays, time switches, contactors, photocontrol switches, motor disconnect switches, remote switches, and motor starters designating equipment controlled and function, as well as emergency power control relays designating circuits and rooms controlled. C. DIRECTORIES: A typed circuit directory shall be provided for every load center, panelboard and circuit breaker panel. The directory shall be permanently mounted in plastic covered frame in each cabinet or panel. III. EXECUTION A. Nameplates shall be laminated black or gray plastic with engraved 1/4-inch high white letters. Nameplates shall be secured by means of screws or rivets, adhesive shall not be used exclusively. Other types of nameplate identification shall not be acceptable. END OF SECTION 16195 Electrical Identification 16195-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. Provide nameplates, panel schedules and electrical identification in a neat and permanent fashion at all panels equipment and control boxes. Conduit systems shall be identified for fire alarm and to distinguish between system wiring. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 969. 3. NEC and NEMA Compliances: Comply with NEC and NEMA Std No.'s WC-1 and WC-2. 4. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI Std A13.1. 5. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURER: Provide electrical identification products of one of the following (for each type marker): 1. Brady, W.H. Co. 2. Cole-Flex Corp. 3. Direct Safety Co. 4. George-Ingraham Corp. 5. Griffolyn Company. Aow 6. Ideal Industries, Inc. Electrical Identification 16195-1 11/03/03 C. Where field adjustable circuit breakers are specified and/or used, the EC shall be responsible for performing a power analysis and inventory in accordance with the Manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations, using the Manufacturer's representative as necessary, to determine the optimum values of the field adjustable settings, and shall set the breaker(s) accordingly. D. Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. E. Test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits, prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 16180 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16180-3 11/03/03 b. General Electric Co. c. GTE Sylvania Inc. d. I.T.E. Siemens-Allis. e. Square D Co. f. Westinghouse Electric Corp. 2. Fuses: a. Bussmann Div.; McGraw-Edison Co. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. General Electric Co. d. Gould, Inc. e. Reliance Fuse Div.; Federal Pacific Electric Co. f Ware Fuse Corp. B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of frame size indicated, or as required. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole, and with A.I.C. minimum fault-current limiting protection, and ampere ratings as indicated on plans. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Provide push-to-trip button on cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for bolt-on mounting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40°C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated. Breakers used for switching lights or for HVAC equipment shall be so rated (switch duty or HACK). III. EXECUTION A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. Overcurrent Protective Devices 16180-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16180 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. Provide switch rated breakers for frequently switched branch circuits (especially lighting) and HACR rated breakers for HVAC equipment. 2. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to overcurrent protective devices. 3. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 489, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures." Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled. 4. Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. 5. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated or as required, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS: Provide overcurrent protective devices of one of the following (for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device): 1. Circuit Breakers: a. Challenger Overcurrent Protective Devices 16180-1 11/03/03 7. Westinghouse Electric Corp. B. FABRICATED SWITCHES 1. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy- duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, 60 Hz, 3-blades, 3-poles, solid neutral; and incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and who operating position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA type 1 or 3R as required for service and location. 2. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, as recommended by switch manufacturer, of classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. III. EXECUTION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches for use with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 16170-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. 3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches." 4. Refer to Mechanical Specifications for additional information regarding disconnects and switches for mechanical equipment. In general, the Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnects and service switches for mechanical equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish starters, timers and other operating devices which shall be installed and wired by E.C. E.C. shall provide conduit from control devices to equipment for control wiring by others. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS: Provide disconnect products by one of the following (for each type of device): 1. Crouse-Hinds Co. 2. Cutler-Hammer Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. GTE Sylvania Inc. 5. I.T.E. Siemens-Allis 6. Square D Company. Circuit and Motor Disconnects 16170-1 11/03/03 building materials, dirt, and debris. C. Install galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished spaces. D. Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is completed. E. Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is completed. F. Test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-3 11/03/03 MW 9. Wiremold Company. AOW B. RECEPTACLES 1. Heavy-Duty Duplex: Provide spec-grade duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back and side wiring,NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ground-Fault Interrupter: Provide spec-grade, duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters; termination grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, 20-amperes rating, 120-volts, 60 Hz;with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R. C. PLUGS AND CONNECTORS 1. Plugs: Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, 3-wire grounding, armored cap plugs, parallel blades with cord clamp, and 0.4" cord hole; match NEMA configuration with power source's. 2. Connectors: Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, bakelite-body armored connectors, 3-wire grounding, parallel blades, double wipe contact, with cord clamp, and 0.4" cord hole,match NEMA configuration to mating plug's. D. SWITCHES 1. Snap: Provide spec-grade flush single-pole toggle switches, 20-amperes, 120/277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle, and side-wired screw terminals. E. WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES Wall Plates: Provide single-switch and duplex outlet high abuse nylon wall plates for single, duplex and combination wiring devices for types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide engraved wall plates for dedicated computer and emergency receptacles. III. EXECUTION A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation". B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess Wiring Devices 16140-2 11/03/03 mom SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES I, GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with UL 20, 498 and 943 and provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL-listed and labeled. 2. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. 3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and specific-purpose wiring devices. 4. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors and electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds Pub No. WD 1. Provide ivory color devices and high impact nylon wall plates except as otherwise selected; color selection to be verified by Contractor with Architect/Engineer. See drawings for model numbers. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURER: Provide products of one of the following (for each type of wiring device): 1. Adalet-PLM, Scott and Fetzer Co. 2. Allen-Bradley Co. 3. AMP Products Corp. 4. Appleton Electric Co. 5. Harvey Hubbell Inc. 6. Pass and Seymour Inc. 7. Square D Company. 8. Thomas and Betts Corp. Wiring Devices 16140-1 11/03/03 III. EXECUTION A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. C. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. E. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. F. Provide grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective grounds,where indicated for installed electrical boxes. END OF SECTION 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135-4 11/03/03 c. Burndy Corp. A"*K d. Crouse-Hinds Co. e. O-Z/Gedney Co. f. RACO, Inc. g. Steel City/Midland-Ross Corp. h. Thomas and Betts Co., Inc. B. FABRICATED MATERIALS 1. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. 2. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option. 3. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit ends, cast-metal faceplates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, including faceplate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners. 4. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equip with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. 5. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded conduit entrance-ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. 6. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, with conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, and offset connectors; of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. 001* Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135-3 11/03/03 e. O-Z/Gedney Co. f. Pyle-National Co. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes: a. Adalet-PLM Div., Scott and Fetzer Co. b. Appleton Electric Co. c. Bell/Rodale Div.; Square D Co. d. GTE Corporation. e. Keystone Columbia, Inc. f O-Z/Gedney Co. g. Spring City Elect Mfg Co. 4. Floor Boxes: a. Bell/Rodale Div.; Square D Co. b. Crouse-Hinds Co. c. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. d. Nelson Electric Co. e. Pyle-National Co. f. Spring City Electrical Mfg Co. g. Steel City/Midland-Ross Corp. 5. Conduit Bodies: a. Appleton Electric Co. b. Crouse-Hinds Co. c. Gould, Inc. d. Killark Electric Mfg Co. e. O-Z/Gedney Co. f. Spring City Electrical Mfg Co. 6. Bushings, Knockout Closures,Locknuts and Connectors: a. Appleton Electric Co. b. Atlas Technologies, Inc. Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std Nos. 50, 514 and 886. Provide electrical boxes and fittings that are UL-listed and labeled. II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS: One of the following(for each type of box and fitting): 1. Interior Outlet Boxes: a. Adalet-PLM Div., Scott and Fetzer Co. b. Appleton Electric Co. c. Bell/Rodale Div.; Square D Co. d. Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. e. Pass and Seymour, Inc. f. RACO, Inc. g. Steel City/Midland-Ross Corp. 2. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: a. Bell/Rodale Div.; Square D Co. b. Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. c. Gould, Inc. ., d. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135-1 11/03/03 III. EXECUTION "* A. Install cables, wires, and wiring connectors as indicated, in accordance with recognized industry installation practices. Comply with applicable portions of NEC and NEMA standards and with NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Coordinate with other work including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to interface installation of wires/cables with other work. C. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, insulation resistance, and for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. D. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16120 Wires and Cables 16120-3 11/03/03 2. Connectors: OPW a) AMP, Inc. b) Burndy Corp. c) Eagle Electric Mfg Co., Inc. d) Gould, Inc. e) Ideal Industries, Inc. f) O-Z Gedney Co. g) Pyle National Co. h) Thomas and Betts Co. i) 3M Company B. WIRE: Provide wires of types, ratings, materials and sizes as indicated for each service. Select from the following those wire construction features required for proj ect: 1. Material: Copper. ., a. TYPE THWN: For dry and wet locations, 75°C (167°F) max operating temp. b. TYPE THHN: For dry locations, 90°C (194°F) max operating temp. c. TYPE XHHW: Maybe used for service entrance and main feeders. C. CABLE: Wire cable may be used for low voltage wiring only (class 2 or 3). Use plenum rated cable or run in conduit in plenum ceiling areas. Provide factory-fabricated cables of types, sizes, ratings, materials, and jacketing/sheathing as indicated for each type service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and NEC standards. Select from the following those construction features required for project: 1. Material: Copper. a. Conductors: Stranded (AWG 18 and larger). b. Conductors: Concentric-lay-stranded (standard flexibility). Wires and Cables 16120-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to wires/cables and connectors; provide products which are UL-listed and labeled. 2. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of cables, wires and connectors. 3. ASTM Compliance: Comply with ASTM B 3 pertaining to conductor materials. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20°C (68°F). II. PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURER: Provide products of one of the following (for each type of wire/cable and connector): 1. Wire and Cable: a) Cable Division; U.S. Steel Corp. b) General Cable Corp. c) Phelps-Dodge Corp. d) Electrical Rome Cable Corp. e) Southwire Co. f) Standard Wire and Cable Co. g) Triangle PWC, Inc. h) Wire and Cable Dept; General Electric Co. i) Wire and Cable Div.;Anaconda Industries, Inc. Wires and Cables 16120-1 11/03/03 supported with cable hangers. AM- END OF SECTION 16110 OOW Raceways 16110-4 11/03/03 D. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations/heights. ;Aow E. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. F. Install PVC-coated conduit and fittings in highly corrosive atmospheres, and elsewhere as indicated. G. Only one hanger for pipes and conduits 3 inches to 6 inches in diameter shall be suspended from any one joist. Where more than one hanger is required, distribute the load to adjacent joists with unistrut or equivalent channel iron. Hanger spacing is assumed to be 10 feet maximum. Pipes and conduits larger than 6 inches in diameter shall not be suspended from steel joists. IV. SPECIFICS A. Use rigid steel conduit for all underground raceway sweeps and bends, up poles or exposed above ground and through or in concrete and masonry. B. I.M.C. may be used for underground raceway sweeps and bends, exposed or in concrete for secondary cable (below 600 volts) on runs less than 200'. C. Plastic PVC Schedule 80 may be used only for straight runs below ground. D. All interior wiring shall be in conduit. Approved MC cable with separate ground wire may be used only for short length (< 8') whips through studs and whips to lighting fixtures. EMT shall be used for most runs, particularly overhead. E. Install liquidtite flexible conduit for motor connections outside and Greenfield or MC for interior connections, and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration, and also use Liquidtite where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: 1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Subjected to water spray. 5. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. 6. Connections to the Generator F. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. G. Fire Alarm, Telecommunication, Cable TV and Telephone cable shall be Raceways 16110-3 11/03/03 2. Intermediate Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-581. '""` 3. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408. a. Use Type 1 fittings for raintight connections. b. Use Type 2 fittings for concrete tight connections. c. Use Type 3 fittings for other miscellaneous connections. 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3. a. EMT Fittings: FS 2-F-408. b. Use Type 1 fittings for raintight connections. c. Use Type 3 (set screw type) fittings for other miscellaneous connections. 5. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, of the following type: a. Type 2: Zinc-coated steel. Separate ground must be pulled. 6. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. 7. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style A. B. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS 1. Conduit,Tubing, and Duct Accessories: a. Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. III. EXECUTION A. Install electrical raceways as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work. C. Coat underfloor metal raceways with bitumastic type protective coating prior to placing concrete. Raceways 16110-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. 2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. 3. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. 4. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. 5. Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for raceways. Use rigid non-metallic conduit for underground raceways only in 1" or larger. Do not use in or through concrete or masonry, or for bends or sweeps. II. PRODUCTS A. METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1. a. Use rigid for all underground sweeps and vertical risers, in or through poured concrete, or in hazardous or security locations. Raceways 16110-1 11/03/03 C. MANUFACTURER: Provide products of one of the following: ' 1. Access Doors: a. Birmingham Ornamental Iron Co. b. Karp Associates, Inc. c. Milcor Div.; Iryco, Inc. d. Jay R. Smith Mfg, Co. e. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2. Floor Doors: a. Babcock-Davis Associates, Inc. b. Bilco Co. c. Karp Associates, Inc. I11. EXECUTION A. Install access units as required, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and in compliance with NEC, to ensure that access doors fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including substrate construction work as necessary to interface access door, excavating, painting and concrete work with other work. END OF SECTION 16051 Electrical Related Work 16051-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16051 ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. UL Compliance: Where UL fire-resistance rating is indicated for construction penetrated by access units, provide UL- listed and labeled units, except for those units which are smaller than minimum size requiring ratings as recognized by governing authority. 2. Except where access is indicated as work of another section, provide access to concealed electrical equipment, adequate for operation and maintenance. Provide access doors of types indicated, except where removable-plate type or other suitable type of access unit will provide adequate access. Awk- 3. Provide locked units where indicated. Where located in a painted surface area, provide units primed for painting; otherwise, provide polished chrome or stainless steel units, unless another type of finish is indicated. Provide UL- labeled fire-resistant units where required. Provide access for applied finish material where indicated. II. PRODUCTS A. DOOR CONSTRUCTION: Welded steel ground smooth, 16-gage frames and 14-gage panels, 175° swing, spring hinges, cam locks, 5-pin/disc cylinder lock where indicated. B. FLOOR DOOR CONSTRUCTION: 1/4" minimum welded steel ground smooth and reinforced for 300 lbs. per sq. ft loading, raised pattern floor plate, anchors for casting in concrete, brass/bronze hinges with stainless steel pins, snap-type inside latch with removable handle and inside lever handle where applicable; gasketed and drained where indicated. Electrical Related Work 1605 1-1 11/03/03 5. Maintenance procedure for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 6. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. G WARRANTIES 1. Refer to the Division 1 Section: SPECIFIC WARRANTIES for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements, 2. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16, into a separate set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. 3. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. H. CLEANING 1. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning. 2. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps. H. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) III. EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 16010 Electrical Requirements 16010-6 11/03/03 E. RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. 2. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details; Change Orders; concealed control system devices. 3. Mark Specifications to indicated approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. 4. At the completion of the work, electronic files of the original contract drawings shall be provided to the Electrical Contractor. This contractor shall edit these files to show any and all of the changes to the original documents until the drawings represent an accurate record of all work as actually installed. Furnish two (2) sets of these electronic drawing files (AutoCad R14 or 2000) and one set of reproducible hard copies of these record drawings to the Architect. 5. After approval, the record drawings shall become the property of the Architect. 6. Final payment shall be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings. F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals. 2. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information: 3. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts. 4. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Electrical Requirements 16010-5 11/03/03 10. This Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping and sealing of electrical penetrations. All electrical penetrations through fire rated assemblies shall be firestopped by the Electrical Contractor (EC) in accordance with products specified by the Architect under Section 07800. All electrical penetrations through smoke rated assemblies and all non-rated floor penetrations shall be sealed by the EC in accordance with products specified by the Architect under Section 07800. See Architectural Drawings for locations of fire and smoke rated assemblies. If no products are specified, EC shall use 3M products and follow 3M recommendations and details for appropriate assemblies. D. ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS 1. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and supplementary) and Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures. 2. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted and stamped "Approved" by The Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples" section of AIA Document A201. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed. 3. Product Options and Substitutions: Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and the Division 1 Section "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION" for " requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions. 4. PRODUCT LISTING a. Provide all information requested. b. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated. c. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items. 5. NAMEPLATE DATA: Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. Electrical Requirements 16010-4 11/03/03 C. CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of electrical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment. It also specifies the firestopping and sealing of partition and building element penetrations. 2. Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements for cutting and patching. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting and patching mechanical equipment, components, and materials. 4. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 5. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations. 6. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. 7. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; b. remove and replace defective Work; c. remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; d. remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing; e. install, relocate, or remove equipment and materials in existing structures; 8. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. 9. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. Electrical Requirements 16010-3 11/03/03 g. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. For lights and devices, coordinate exact locations with Architect. h. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. i. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components. j. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior overhead and underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. k. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the engineering, design and provision of seismic restraint systems for all conduits, wireways, and equipment as required by 2000 International Building Code Section 1621.3 and Table 1621.3. The EC shall provide mounting hardware and provisions for mounting electrical equipment to resist lateral loads due to seismic disturbances as designed by an engineer specializing in this field. The EC shall provide all required seismic restraint for all conduits in excess of 2 inches in diameter, fire protection equipment, emergency and/or standby electrical systems, motor control centers, bus ducts, switchgear, transformers, panelboards, lighting fixtures, and other equipment, in accordance with the 2000 IBC. The EC shall provide the necessary vibration isolation to eliminate excessive vibration from being transmitted from equipment to structure. 1. There are several "Fire Walls" as defined by 2000 International Building Code 705. Coordinate all penetrations of these structures with Architect and GC to conform to IBC requirements. m. Provide expansion fittings on raceways and conduits at building expansion joints. 4. Specifically, coordinate electrical power with Granite State Electric; CATV with local CATV Provider; telephone with Verizon; and Fire Alarm with Northampton Fire Department. Electrical Requirements 16010-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS le GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS a. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. ROUGH-IN 1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Coordinate with equipment drawings, and architectural drawings and details, as well as all mechanical drawings. 2. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 15 for rough-in requirements. 3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS a. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. b. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. c. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations. d. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. e. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. f. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials. Aw%�. Electrical Requirements 16010-1 11/03/03 mill 111 Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged for the project to provide inspections, tests, interpretations, reports and similar services. Standards and Regulations: Industry Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect on performance of the work as if copied directly into contract documents or bound and published therewith. Standards referenced in contract documents or in governing regulations have precedence over non-referenced standards, insofar as different standards may contain overlapping or conflicting requirements. Comply with standards in effect as of date of contract documents,unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 16007 Definitions and Standards 16007-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16007 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS DEFINITIONS General Requirements: Provisions of Division-1 Sections, General Requirements, apply to the entire work of the Contract. Indicated: Shown on drawings or written into other portions of contract documents. Approved by Architect/Engineer: In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of contract documents. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. Installer: Entity(firm or person) engaged to install work,by Contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled in work they are engaged to install. Specification Text Format: Imperative language is directed at Contractor, unless otherwise noted. Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements: Most stringent (generally)requirement written directly into contract documents is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for decision before proceeding. Minimum Requirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply (within specified tolerances), or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer before proceeding. Abbreviations, Plural Words: Abbreviations, where not defined in contract documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, determined by recognized grammatical rules,by the Architect/Engineer. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of contract documents. Definitions and Standards 16007-1 11/03/03 AOW II. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) III. EXECUTION A. ALTERNATES 1. E1 —The Electrical Contractor shall carry in the bid as "Add Alternate E1" all electrical work associated with installing a humidifier "H-2" in a cottage unit. The cost shall be carried as a per unit cost. END OF SECTION 16005 Summary of Work 16005-5 11/03/03 communicator. 10)Remote graphic annunciator located at the Main Entry, or in a location approved by the Fire Department. i. DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: Provide a cabling infrastructure. Provide raceway systems as shown, with 4" square backbox at all jack locations, 3/4" conduit up inside wall to above accessible ceiling, jacks, plates, cabling, patch panels, terminations and testing for data system. Provide conduit and cabling to connect to existing system. j. TELEVISION SYSTEM: Provide RG6/QS coax cable distribution system for cable TV. Provide boxes, jacks, covers, conduit, wireways, and cable to a head end location with plywood backboard for final connections. Provide 3" conduit and cabling for connection to existing system. k. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM: Provide a cabling infrastructure. Provide raceway systems as shown, with 4" square backbox at all jack locations, 3/4" conduit up inside wall to above accessible ceiling (with bushed end and pull string), jacks, plates, cabling, patch panels, terminations and testing for phone system. System equipment, hardware and software by others. Provide 4" conduit and cabling for connection to existing system. 1. EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM: Provide a complete and functional wireless emergency call system including but not limited to: control consoles, emergency call remote actuators, pull switches, intercom connection, speaker phones and pagers. m. DOOR ENTRY ACCESS SYSTEM: Provide a complete and operational door access system. Tenant access control panel shall be located at the main entry. All door access functions shall be through the telephone system via the tenants telephone. The door access system for the cottage wing shall consist of entry stations (4) at each entry and apartment stations in each apartment. The system shall not be controlled through the telephone system. n. SOUND/PAGING SYSTEM: Provide speakers with backbox, amplifier and power supply to connect to existing system in Building #1. Provide all cabling and equipment for a complete and operational system. o. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain an accurate set of drawings indicating deviations from the contract documents and accurately showing the installed locations of underground conduits and concealed or remote equipment. These "as built" drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Aow* upon completion of the work. See specifications for additional details. Summary of Work 16005-4 11/03/03 1) See Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for additional information on scope of electrical power and connections required. Generally, the Mechanical Contractor is responsible for furnishing control wiring, starters and other control devices for mechanical equipment. Disconnects and switches for mechanical equipment shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor who shall install and wire same unless otherwise noted. g. LIGHTING 1) Provide interior and exterior lighting as indicated on contract documents. Emergency lighting in corridors, stairs, other common spaces, exterior exits, and any other spaces requiring emergency lighting by applicable codes, shall be provided by selected fixtures powered by the emergency back-up generator) and self-contained emergency battery units. Exterior wall mounted fixtures shall have quartz restrike lamp option. 2) Provide all Exit and emergency lighting systems as shown and as required by Codes. h. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: Provide an addressable fire alarm system with the following components: 1) Initiating devices and circuits 2) Alarm systems, devices and circuits. 3) Additional power supplies and batteries as required. 4) Duct smoke detectors. E.C. shall furnish and wire duct smokes detectors. M.C. shall install them. Duct smoke test/indicator switches shall be located at the fire alarm control panel, or as directed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 5) Magnetic door hold opens shall be furnished and installed by door hardware contractor,wired by E.C. 6) Connections to HVAC equipment for Fire Department operation at FACP. 7) Power and connections for sprinkler system components. 8) State and local approvals. AWW_ 9) Connection to Northampton Fire Department via existing digital Summary of Work 16005-3 11/03/03 Temporary power shall be run to accommodate work in all areas and at the least shall provide a quad, 120volt receptacle on a dedicated 20 amp circuit for every 10,000 sq. feet of work area. Provide a temporary panel for adequate power where required. Power shall be available such that the longest extension cord required shall be no longer than 100 feet. c. SITE WORK: Coordinate required site work with CM and Utility Companies. See Drawing ES1. d. SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 1) Provide all secondary electrical work from existing 3000 amp, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire switchboard located in the basement in the existing building. 2) Main Building (Building#2) a) Provide secondary feeders from main switchboard to 400 amp, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, main lug apartment distribution panelboards "ADP" located on first, second and third floors. Provide feeders to apartment loadcenters "API" from distribution panelboards. b) Provide secondary feeder from main switchboard to 600 amp, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, main lug distribution panelboard "DP2" and feeders to sub-panels. c) Provide secondary electrical emergency feeders from 100 Kw, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire emergency generator. Emergency feeders shall consist of a life safety branch and equipment branch. 3) Cottages (Building#3) a) Provide secondary feeders from main switchboard to 400 amp, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, main lug distribution panelboards "CDP1" and "CDP2" located in corridors. Provide feeders to cottage loadcenters "CPI" and"CP2". e. EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR: Provide an emergency power generator, set up diesel fuel, 100 Kw continuous output for emergency life safety (lighting, etc.), and emergency power (heating, etc.). Provide separate automatic transfer switches and emergency power distribution systems and circuits. f. POWER: Provide all required general and specific power circuits. A*'` Summary of Work 16005-2 11/03/03 SECTION 16005 SUMMARY OF WORK I. GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Contractor shall also be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for work of this Section. B. SUMMARY 1. IDENTIFICATION: Project is the Rockridge Assisted Living Facility, located in Northampton, Massachusetts. Refer to the Architectural specifications for further information and abbreviated identification of the work of the project. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Requirements of the work are contained in the contract documents, and include cross-references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. Electrical Contractor shall be familiar with Mechanical Drawings and relevant Mechanical Specification Sections. Electrical Contractor shall also be familiar with Architectural drawings and details before roughing in boxes. 3. WRITTEN SUMMARY: Contractor to provide complete in-place electrical systems as shown on drawings, described in specs, and as needed for a complete and proper installation, tested and in compliance with all federal, state and local codes. The incomplete description of the work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: a. Provide all permits, certificates and licenses as required. This Contractor shall include in their bid all charges required by the Electric Power Company to provide temporary power to the facility. The Owners shall deal directly with the Utility Company for charges related to permanent power. b. Provide temporary service; power and lighting as required. This shall include but not be limited to temporary lighting for an average of 10 foot candles with a max. to min. ratio of 5 in all work areas using at least quartz floods and preferably metal halide floods. Provide 25 foot candles in areas being sheet rocked, or where any finish work is to be done. Temporary lighting shall cover all areas of work including ceilings, walls and floors where required by the CM/GC for proper work conditions. Summary of Work 16005-1 11/03/03 C) The DDC system shall include at least the following parameters: Awk, Leaving air temperature F Space temperature and setpoint F Freezestat status(with alarm) (REFER TO ADDENDA FOR REMAINING CONTROL SEQUENCES) owft Automatic Temperature Controls Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15900-10 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 B) Other radiation shown on drawings shall be controlled by a 24v .,, two position, N.O. Belimo automatic control valve with a wall mounted dual temperature thermostat. g. REF-1 thru 4 Control: A) Index exhaust fans with appropriate zone occupied/unoccupied cycle through the DDC network. B) Fans shall operate continuously at low speed during the occupied cycle and shall be off during the unoccupied cycle. C) Sequence two speed relay at fan with associated toilet room light switches. Fans shall operate on high speed when any light switch is in the on position. h. Smoke Detectors: A) This contractor shall wire from duct mounted smoke detectors (furnished by E.C.)to shut-down air handling units. i. RTU/HC/Radiation Control: (Typ. all cooling only rooftop units) AVW A) RTU is a packaged rooftop unit with factory controls including economizer cooling with enthalpy control. B) This contractor shall furnish and install a unitary controller to operate the system as follows: 1) Fan runs continuously and O.A. dampers position to scheduled minimum O.A.% during the zone occupied cycle. RTU fan cycles during zone unoccupied cycle with O.A. damper closed and all heating coil control valves open to maintain reduced unoccupied temperature setpoint. 2) Cooling: RTU unit operates per factory packaged controls (economizer or two stage mechanical cool). Economizer operates subject to factory low limit control to be adjusted to 55 F by this contractor. 3) Heating: Cooling cycle of RTU unit is locked out. N.C. (spring-type) 2-way heating coil valve modulates as required to maintain space thermostat setting in conjunction with radiation. Furnish a freezestat laced on heating coil to de-energize unit and open control valve if discharge air temperature drops below 40 F(adj.). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls EGA,P.C. 15900-9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 D) Heating hot water supply and return temperatures and domestic hot water in heat exchanger temperature shall be reported and alarmed on the DDC system. b. Boiler Room Combustion Air Control: A) When any boiler module fires, the ACD in the (low) combustion air assembly shall open proportionally to the appliance heat output.When burners are off the ACD shall be closed. B) Whenever boiler room temperature rises above reverse acting thermostat setting,ACD shall open. (Closed below setpoint). C. Pump Control: A) This contractor shall furnish a variable frequency drive complete with 5% impedance input line reactors to operate heating pump P-3 (or standby pump P-4). Lead pump designation shall be automatically alternated monthly. When heating is enabled through the DDC system, the lead pump shall start and ramp up to speed required to satisfy a supply to return differential pressure setpoint necessary to achieve flow in all terminals. (Sensor location and setpoint to be determined during system balancing.)If lead pump fails, power shall automatically switch to standby pump and an alarm shall be generated. Alm*- B) Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Pump Control: Through the DDC system,the pump shall be enabled to run continuously. d. CH&UH Control: A) Unit fan shall cycle as required to maintain thermostat setting. Thermostat shall be integral or remote as indicated on plans. Furnish remote sensors only where indicated in cottage corridors and sequence these heater through the DDC system. B) Furnish each unit with a two position automatic control valve and sequence valves shut above 60F (adj.) outside air temperature. e. Freezestats: A) All freezestats shall be auto-reset type but latched through the DDC network to require manual reset. f. Finned-Tube Radiation Control: A) Radiation shown on drawings to be controlled by a SCV (self- contained valve), shall have a line size Macon NTZ-1335000 valve with remote bulb, or approved equal. Valve and installation by Mechanical Contractor. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls 15900-8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 5. Thermostats shall be provided of the type and with the characteristics required to provide the sequence of control specified. 6. Water control valves shall be suitable for 125 psi working pressure and 5 feet maximum pressure drop. All control valves shall be provided able to shutoff 100%against the maximum anticipated head pressure. 7. Dampers (automatic): All automatic control dampers (ACD) shall be supplied by the ATC-CM except dampers that are in an integral part of the supply/exhaust fan unit. a. The necessary linkage between the damper operating mechanism and the motor in all necessary interconnecting linkages between sections shall be of sufficient strength so as to prevent buckling or sagging during any of their functions. All linkages shall be so installed and so designed to prevent all play except that absolutely necessary to eliminate friction. b. Use as many operators as required for the damper. Where two or more are used, they shall move in unison by the use of pilot positioners on the damper actuator. 8. Sequence of Controls: a. Heating Boiler Sequencing and Hot Water Supply Reset Control: A) The modular boiler plant shall be enabled to operate through the DDC System. This contractor shall install, wire and make fully functional a prefabricated boiler sequencer (furnished with boilers) to maintain a common hot water supply (HWS) temperature subject to outside air temperature reset schedule and generate domestic hot water. B) The temperature of the common boiler hot water supply shall be varied on an inverse straight line ratio with outdoor air temperature; namely, as outdoor air temperature rises, the hot water temperature being delivered shall gradually reduce and vice versa. Reset schedule shall be: 140 F water at 60 F O.A.T. to 200 F water at 0 O.A.T. C) This contractor shall wire a motorized control valve (furnished with boilers) on the heating water side of the domestic hot water heat exchanger to operate per the manufacturer's instructions. Valve closes to dedicate one half of boiler plant to domestic hot water generation until heating load requires additional input to maintain supply water temperature. Valve closes at any time to maintain domestic hot water(priority). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls 15900-7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. General: a. The control units shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratory (UL) against fire and shock hazard as a single system appliance unit. b. Coordinate dedicated electrical circuits with surge suppression for each controller with the electrical contractor. H. General Notes: 1. All relays shall be silent acting. 2. All temperature set points, thermostats, temperature controllers, etc., shall be adjustable. If the control point is not stated, control range of devices shall be suitable for the intended service. 3. Fresh Air and Exhaust Air Dampers: Automatic Control Dampers, furnished by the Control Contractor shall be single or multiple blade as required. Dampers shall be installed by the sheet metal contractor under the supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the sheet metal contractor. All damper frames are to be constructed of#13 gauge galvanized sheet metal and shall have flanges for duct mounting. Damper blades shall not exceed 6 inches in width. All blades are to be of corrugated type construction, fabricated from two (2) sheets of #22 galvanized sheet steel, spot welded together. Blades are to be suitable for high velocity performance. All damper bearings are to be made of nylon. Bushings that turn in the bearings are to be oil impregnated sintered metal. Replaceable butyl rubber seals are to be provided with the damper. Seals are to be installed along the top, bottom, and sides of the frame and along each blade edge. Seals shall provide a tight closing,low leakage damper. Leakage and flow characteristic charts must be submitted to the engineer prior to approval of the dampers. 4. Thermostats/temperature sensors shall be securely mounted where they will maintain average temperatures accurately. Thermostats shall have adjustment capability where indicated and day/night buttons (to return to occupied set point) where indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls 15900-6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 G. Direct Digital Control(DDC)System: 1. Function: a. DDC controllers shall be used to achieve the following functions: 1) Boiler plant start/stop (supervision of prefab. controller to be furnished by the boiler manufacturer.) 2) Occupied/unoccupied schedule(zone)control. 3) Pump start/stop/alternation control. 4) Air handling unit control. 5) Exhaust fan control(where indicated). 6) Report: - HWS,HWR temperatures - boiler status - outside air temperature and humidity - pump operating status - Major air handling system operating status, supply air temperature,return/exhaust air temperature - Exhaust fans status (those noted in sequence of operation). 2. System Architecture: a. A fully functional, state of the art personal computer system front end shall be furnished complete with a full complement of the ATC-CM's graphics-based building management software for installation where directed by the Owner.) b. Furnish a modern interface with the system to permit ATC-CM off-site access. Automatic Temperature Controls Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15900-5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Guarantee:(Supplement of Guarantee and other Contract Documents) * 1. A complete workable system shall be provided. The entire temperature control system shall be kept in proper operating condition for two (2) years from the date of final certificate in this project at no additional cost to the Owner. The ATC- CM shall submit written evidence to the Engineer that his office is satisfied with the installation to the extent that it was installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings. 2. All system components shall be guaranteed against damage from any transient electrical impulse which may be delivered through connections to the building electrical and/or communication systems. 3. Guarantee shall include a minimum of two (2) preventative maintenance checks per year(for two years). The preventative maintenance checks shall include: a. Calibration check of control devices provided by this trade. b. Check all water reset schedules, set points, etc., and all sequence of operation in systems with control provided by the trade. C. Perform all maintenance required on control devices provided by this trade. d. These maintenance checks shall be performed in the company of the Owner's maintenance representative and a representative of the Mechan- ical Contractor, so that at the end of the two (2) years, they are thor- oughly familiar with the maintenance and operation requirements of the various systems and devices.The maintenance checks shall be performed by a factory trained field service engineer in the regular employ of the ATC-CM. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner during this two year period. e. All necessary control work and associated materials and labor shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner during the guarantee period. 4. Programmed Maintenance: a. Upon completion of the two (2) year guarantee period, the Control Con- tractor shall submit to the Owner, an agreement to provide the necessary programmed maintenance, to keep the various control systems in proper working condition. b. This programmed maintenance agreement shall fully describe the main- tenance work to be performed and shall advise the cost of this work during the guarantee period,as well as for subsequent years thereafter. Automatic Temperature Controls Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15900-4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 6. Sizing: All instruments, damper motors, automatic valves, etc., shall be of sufficient size and capacity to perform their function as intended and shall be suitable for the use expected as proven by previous installations. The proper sizing of this control equipment shall be the direct responsibility of the ATC-CM and all pertinent data deemed necessary for the purpose will be secured from these plans and specifications and the Contractor. E. Instruction and Adjustment:Upon completion of the project,the control contractor shall: 1. Completely adjust, ready for use, all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators,relays,etc.,provided under this section. 2. Furnish two (2) instruction manuals covering the function and operation of the control systems on the project for the use of the Owner's operating personnel. Instructions shall include a "cookbook" step-by-step guide to enter the computer system, view all set points, change set points and leave system. (These instructions shall be submitted for review and approval.) The installing foreman shall be provided for instruction purposes. The ATC contractor shall secure a written statement from the owner acknowledging that the instruction given was complete and satisfactory. 3. Adjustment: The ATC-CM shall adjust and calibrate the complete system to obtain the sequence of operation specified for all controlling devices. If required to meet field conditions, make further set point changes from indicated or specified set point to insure continuous satisfactory automatic control in operation of the systems.Secure authorization of the Engineer before making any changes. 4. ATC Sequence Check: This contractor shall notify the mechanical contractor of the completion of system installation and calibration, and schedule through him the performance of an ATC sequence check by the Testing and Balancing subcontractor. a. Provide a technician who is thoroughly familiar with the project and the ATC program to work with the balancing contractor in verifying total system operations. b. Should systems be found incomplete or not performing per specification, the ATC contractor shall correct deficiencies and the Testing and Balancing Agency shall recheck until all sequences have been verified. All expenses incurred as a result of the ATC contractor's failure to complete and test his work prior to this sequence check, shall be borne by this ATC contractor. C. Refer also Section 15011.17 and 15011.J Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls 15900-3 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 milli, I b. Provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. C. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting link- ages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. d. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification problem has been eliminated. e. Provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. C. Electric Wiring: All electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the temperature control system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. (See also Section 15010 1.21.) D. Submittal Brochure: The following shall be submitted for review: six(6)copies each are required. 1. Control drawings with detailed wiring diagrams, including bill of material and verbal description of operation for all systems. 2. Panel layouts and name plate lists for all local and central panels. 3. Valve and damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. 4. Data sheets for all control system components. 5. Nomenclature: All shop drawings of flow diagrams of temperature control systems shall use the same nomenclature as on drawings and show on flow diagrams for each item and adjacent to the item the following designations where applicable. a. N.C. Normally Closed b. N.O. Normally Open C. D.A. Direct Acting d. R.A. Reverse Acting Rockridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls EGA,P.C. 15900-2 EGA Project No.:10213 11/3/2003 15900-AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM A. Furnish and install as hereinafter specified, a complete direct digital control (DDC) system as manufactured by Siemens Landis Division, Invensys, Johnson Controls, Honeywell or Andover Controls. Independent control contractors are hereby excluded regardless of their affiliations with the major control system manufacturers. 1. The control system shall be installed by competent mechanics and electricians regularly employed by the manufacturer of the control equipment (ATC-CM). All significant control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. Where wiring is subcontracted, a qualified representative of the control contractor (of record) shall perform weekly inspections of the installation to prevent delays and ensure conformance to the design intent. Submit monthly progress reports to the mechanical contractor after rough-in begins and until all sequences are complete and independently verified perfect (per Section 15010 and 15011). 2. The control system shall consist of all electric relays, thermostats, temperature transmitters, controllers, automatic valves, dampers, damper operators, switches, control panels, and other accessory equipment along with a complete system of electrical wiring to satisfy the intent of the specification and provide a complete and operable system. All control equipment shall be fully proportioning, unless noted otherwise. B. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated contractor under the supervision of the control contractor: 1. The Heating Contractor shall: a. Install automatic valves and separable wells that are specified to be supplied by the control contractor. b. Furnish and install all necessary valved pressure taps, water, drain, and overflow connections and piping. C. Provide, on magnetic starters furnished, all necessary step-down trans- formers and auxiliary contacts, with buttons and switches in the required configurations. 2. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall: a. Install all automatic dampers. Rocicridge—Northampton,MA Automatic Temperature Controls EGA,P.C. 15900-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15870-OUTLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GRILLES,REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS AND LOUVERS A. Furnish and install grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers of size, type and quality indicated. B. Provide neoprene or similar gasket on face flange of all grilles,registers and diffusers. C. Grilles,registers and diffusers shall be as manufactured by Metal Aire or approved equal. D. Exact location of all grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers shall be coordinated with architectural details,reflected ceiling plans and shop drawings. END OF SECTION 15870 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Outlets EGA,P.C. 15870-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 AOW 7. Dimensions of acoustically lined ductwork shown on plans are inside dimensions of the duct after the lining has been installed. 8. Flat seam construction shall be employed where standing seam may present a hazard. 9. Paint the visible interior of all ducts or register boxes in back of all grilles and registers with two(2)coats of dull black paint. C. Flex Duct: 1. Flexible duct shall be rated for applicable pressure classification. Product shall be Buckley Flexmaster "Type 2" insulated for air conditioning or acceptable substitution. D. Dampers: 1. Fire dampers shall be installed where shown and/or required by all applicable codes. Dampers shall be out of air steam type and UL listed for duration required. 2. Ceiling dampers shall be installed where shown and/or required by all applicable codes. Dampers shall be single or double blade, round or rectangular as required and be adjustable for volume control. E. Residential Dryer Exhaust Ductwork: 1. Dryer exhaust ductwork shall be aluminum with all fittings sealed with RTV watertight. Neatly tape joints after sealing to reinforce. No screws or rivets shall be used. Rough edges shall point in direction of flow. Provide cleanouts as required to maintain entire length of vents. END OF SECTION 15840 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ductwork 15840-2 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15840-DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all ductwork, grille boxes, plenum chambers, dampers, and all auxiliary work of any kind necessary to make the various air handling systems of the building complete and ready for satisfactory operating. B. Throughout construction, all open end supply/return air ductwork (including GRD's) shall be sealed with tape/plastic until building is free of dust. (All air handling equipment shall not be operated until building is clean.) PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Low Pressure Ductwork: 1. Furnish and install all ductwork, grille boxes,plenum chambers, dampers, and all auxiliary work of any kind necessary to make the various air handling systems of the building complete and ready for satisfactory operating. 2. Ductwork, except where otherwise specified, shall be made of the best grade galvanized iron, constructed in accordance with the recommendations of the ASHRAE Guide,and SMACNA Guide, latest edition. 3. Volume dampers shall be furnished and installed as shown or required for balancing the systems. Dampers operators shall be of the quadrant type provided with approved operating and locking device mounted outside the duct in accessible location (clear of insulation). Install handles to indicate position of damper blades. 4. Ductwork layouts as shown on the drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible; the right is reserved to vary the runs and sizes of ductwork and to make offsets where necessary to accommodate conditions arising at the building. 5. Flexible connections shall be installed at the inlet and outlet of each fan and in main runs of ductwork where indicated. Flexible connections shall be 30 oz. glass cloth with neoprene coating on each face. 6. Thoroughly seal all joints to SMACNA Seal Class V—2"w.g.with mastic sealer equal to Hardcast "FlexGrip". Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ductwork 15840-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15820-FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide fans of type indicated on the drawings or approved equal by Greenheck, Penn, Acme or Cook. B. Capacities and types of fans shall be in accordance with fan schedules as shown. Fans shall have direction and arrangement to suit space conditions, unless otherwise directed, they shall conform to the layouts shown. C. Fan assembly shall be mounted on resilient mounts for quiet operation. D. Vibration isolation mounts and expanded metal belt guards shall be provided for all fans as required. E. Provide unit mounted on-off sentinel switch for each unit. Provide remote mounted pushbutton stations with pilot lights where indicated. AVW END OF SECTION 15820 opb- Rockridge—Northampton,MA Fans EGA,P.C. 15820-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 how 15800-AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All general work of this section is specifically subject to the General Conditions for the entire project. B. Furnish labor and materials to complete the installation of the air handling systems shown on the Drawings,specified herein,or both,as follows: 1. Thermal and acoustic insulation for all systems. 2. Sheet metal work and accessories. 3. Air handling equipment-supply/exhaust/return. 4. Testing and adjusting of systems. 5. Protective painting. 6. All electric motors and magnetic starters and controls required for equipment. 7. All control and interlock wiring required to complete the installation. Power wiring and indicated disconnects by Electrical Contractor. 8. Automatic Temperature Controls. 9. Grilles,registers, diffusers and louvers. END OF SECTION 15800 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Air Distribution EGA,P.C. 15800-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15740-TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Radiation: Vulcan, Sterling,Argo or approved equal,of capacity scheduled on drawings. Furnish with enclosure, access doors, and all trim required for complete installation. Furnish all enclosure and trim with factory baked enamel finish (color selection by Architect). B. Cabinet Heaters: Trane "Force-flo" or approved equal. Coordinate location with G.C. Units shall be two (2) speed with internal thermal overload protection and motor starter. Furnish with T.A. filters and factory applied baked-on enamel finish. (Color selection by Architect.) C. Unit Heaters: Trane or approved equal, of capacity indicated, hot water type, with unit mounted disconnect switch,fan inlet screen,and adjustable discharge louver. D. Fan Coil Units: Magic Aire or approved equal of capacity scheduled on drawings. Coordinate exact unit locations with the general contractor. END OF SECTION 15740 AWW Rockridge—Northampton,MA Terminal Units EGA,P.C. 15740-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15710-HOT WATER SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish all equipment and specialties of configuration, model and manufacturer indicated. Equal components by Taco are acceptable. PART 2-PRODUCT 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Air Venting Devices-Automatic/Manual: 1. For cabinet heaters, coils, and radiation (unless otherwise shown on Drawings), provide manual/air vents - screwdriver pattern. Manual vents shall be installed with not less than 3" nipples. Furnish 1". B. Relief valves shall be Bell and Gossett,ASME rated,for duty intended or equal. C. Expansion tanks and air eliminator accessories: 1. Furnish and install expansion tanks and air separators of capacity shown on plans as manufactured by Bell& Gossett or Taco. END OF SECTION 15710 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Hot Water Specialties EGA,P.C. 15710-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15700-LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All general work of this section is specifically subject to the General Conditions for the entire project. B. Furnish labor and materials to complete the installation of the heating systems shown on the drawings,specified herein,or both,as follows: 1. Hot water boilers, circulating pumps,piping and accessories. 2. Thermal insulation for all systems. 3. Radiation,cabinet heaters,coils and unit heaters. 4. Testing and adjusting of systems. 5. Protective painting. AOW 6. All electric motors and magnetic starters and controls required for equipment. 7. All control and interlock wiring required to complete the installation. Power wiring and indicated disconnects by Electrical Contractor. 8. Automatic Temperature Controls. END OF SECTION 15700 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Liquid Heat Transfer EGA,P.C. 15700-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15630-BOILERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Congregate Building Boilers: 1. Furnish and install two (2) modular boiler/burner units equal to Hydro Therm MR-PV1200B each with 835,000 BTU/hr water net IBR rating with 1,200 MBH natural gas input. B. Features: 1. Intermittent pilot with electrically energized vent dampers. 2. Unit shall be furnished complete with all standard "water" trim. 3. Accessories shall include the following items: 1) U.L. listed and certified low water cut-offs as required by applicable codes. 2) Operating and high limit aquastats. 3) Approved natural gas trains including any required regulators and controls shall be provided with units for installation by P.C. 4) Factory-supplied supply and return piping headers. 5) One (1) Trim MC domestic hot water heat exchanger and required fittings including domestic hot water priority automatic control valve. 6) Model `S8' electronic outdoor reset step controller for installation under Spec. Section 15900. 4. Install pipe, vent and wire units in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Provide blow-down valves for low water cut-offs and boiler drains. C. (Refer to equipment schedule sheet for cottage heating system specifications.) how END OF SECTION 15630 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Boilers EGA,P.C. 15630-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15617—BREECHING AND METAL CHIMNEY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Breeching from boilers to prefab metal chimney shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with screwed and sealed joints. B. Breeching shall be adequately braced with angle frames and hangers. Insulate breeching per Section 15180. C. Cleanout doors shall be provided as required to enable easy cleaning of entire length of breeching. D. Metal chimney from boiler room shall be equal to Metalbestos Model QC furnished complete with all required accessories, including insulated thimbles at attic and roof penetration,roof flashing,storm collar and all support hardware. E. Terminate above roof at code required height and provide weather cap. F. Vents and makeup air piping between condensing gas-fired hot water heaters and concentric roof vents assemblies (to furnished with heaters) in cottages shall be Sch. 40 PVC. Install in strict accordance with heater manufacturer's guidelines. low END OF SECTION 15617 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Breeching and Metal Chimney EGA,P.C. 15617-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15614—NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The entire installation shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 54 and 248 CMR Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code which are hereby included in and shall form part of this specification. B. Provide distribution system within buildings to all fixtures and equipment requiring gas including all mains, branches, risers, drips, shut-offs and all other required parts. Connect to all equipment and appliances indicated and/or specified as requiring gas for their operation. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Refer to Specification Section 15060 for piping material. END OF SECTION 15614 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Natural Gas Piping EGA,P.C. 15614-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 1.17 PIPE SLEEVES,ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide proper sleeves to accommodate pipes passing through walls, floors, partitions, and provide escutcheons at exposed finished surfaces pierced by pipes. B. Extend sleeves 1'/z" above finished floor and pack space between pipe and sleeve as recommended in NFPA 13. C. Seal all penetrations through rated assemblies to equal or exceed the applicable rating and per applicable UL details. 1.18 VALVES AND GAUGES A. Control valves for sprinkler system shall be listed for the appropriate service wiring of each tamper switch to an alarm provided by Electrical Contractor. B. Provide approved gauges as required per NFPA 13 and approving authority. C. Tamper switches furnished and installed by Sprinkler Contractor shall be wired by Electrical Contractor. 1.19 VALVE SEALS,TAGS AND CHARTS A. Provide copper wire and approved seal for each manually operated shut-off valve required to be sealed in open position. B. Provide identification signs of standard design, fastened securely at designated locations as per NFPA 13. C. Provide brass tags about 2" in diameter; stamp with designating number, secure with 12 gauge copper wire to spindle of all control valves. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 15500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sprinkler System-15500 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.12 PIPING CONNECTION A. Sprinkler Contractor's work shall begin at a new, flanged 6"water entrance to be provided in the new building basement mechanical room. This contractor shall coordinate required thrust protection at the new entrance with the site contractor. 1.13 DRAIN AND TEST CONNECTIONS A. Install horizontal piping graded to low points and in manner to make it possible to test and empty entire system; provide valves and piping of sizes and in locations as indicated and in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13. B. Extend drain valve discharge pipes to points suitable for drain outside.Terminate pipes so that dis- charge will be visible. Use sight drain fittings if necessary. 1.14 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Finished ceilings (except where noted below) — white pendants with matching metal escutcheon. Where installed in suspended tile ceilings heads shall be CENTERED IN TILE and escutcheons shall permit the replacement without disturbing head. 2. Finished ceilings in all commons areas including corridors—Concealers with white covers. opwk 3. Concealed and unfinished areas-standard brass finish. B. Furnish extra sprinkler heads packed in suitable container along with sprinkler wrenches,per code. C. SPECIAL NOTE: This contractor must have full regard for the Architect's intent to rearrange any exposed piping and/or heads to achieve aesthetic requirements. Extra heads and piping necessary to suit the desired placement shall be provided at no additional cost. Final layout shall comply with NFPA 13. 1.15 PIPING MATERIALS,FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Sprinkler system piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 13. 1.16 ANCHORS,SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Support sprinkler piping from building structure by means of hangers, inserts, etc., as required by NFPA 13. B. Hangers shall be clevis type or split ring supported from structure. C. All piping and equipment shall be secured against seismic forces per NFPA 13 and BOCA. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sprinkler System-15500 Page 4 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 00*1. B. Any apparatus that requires excessive service during the first year of operation shall be considered defective and shall be replaced. C. This contractor's guarantee shall not exclude (and thus shall include) consequential damage resulting from installation and/or material defects. 1.09 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Any questions regarding specifications shall be addressed to the Architect before the bids close. After the closing of bids, the Architect's interpretation of the meaning and intent of drawings and specifications shall be final. 1.10 APPROVALS A. The Sprinkler Contractor shall obtain approval of the layout of his work from the local fire department,Owner and Architect. B. After satisfactory final inspection and test by the approving authority,a copy of the letter of accep- tance shall be filed with the Owner and Architect. 1.11 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Under this contract, a complete (new) combination wet/dry sprinkler system shall be provided to cover new construction including a three-story plus partial basement(congregate)building and an attached single story (cottage) building. The Northampton Fire Department (Tel. 413-587-1032) will consider a(detailed)proposal to provide dry system coverage throughout the new single story building and connecting corridor subject to limitations ofNFPA 13. B. This contractor shall also remove existing sprinkler system coverage in the dining `sun room' to be demolished and provide new coverage in the new dining room addition. Sprinklers in this area (existing building side of new fire wall)shall be fed from the existing sprinkler system. C. All spaces shall be protected per requirements of NFPA 13 including cold attics. The entire sprinkler system shall be designed for applicable hazard standards. The intent is for all sprinkler piping to be concealed within general construction unless specifically accepted by the Architect. Under no circumstances shall wet sprinkler piping be installed above third floor sheetrock ceilings that form the underside of the building insulation envelope. D. A new 6"water entrance is to be provided in the mechanical room of the new building basement by the site contractor for use by this contractor.This entrance will be fed from a new 8"line being installed from an existing municipal water main in Coles Meadow Road as indicated on project site drawings. This contractor shall assume that sufficient water flow will be available at a minimum residual pressure of 60 PSI(at base of riser)to support this system. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sprinkler System-15500 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.:10213 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. After contracts have been awarded, submit to the Architect for approval,previous to purchase or fabrication, shop drawings showing layout of entire system, sprinkler heads, valve stations and alarm appurtenances, etc. Since completed sprinkler system plans must be submitted to Northampton before issue of building permits,this contractor must be prepared to expedite preparation of plans and calculations including necessary coordination with the Northampton Fire Department and all other authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Sprinkler equipment shall be new and conform to the standards established in these Specifications, and selected from"List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials",published annually by UL and shall bear UL and Factory Mutual approved stamps or labels where required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Uniformity-Unless otherwise specified, equipment or materials of the same type or classification used for the same purpose,shall be the product of the same manufacturer. 1.06 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat, mechanical appearance when completed. Work not approved by the Owner and/or Architect shall be replaced by the Sprinkler Contractor without additional charge. B. All piping, in general, shall be run as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with the building walls and other pipes, and be neatly spaced. Check closely with other trades to prevent interferences. No claims will be allowed for extra work caused by failure to coordinate with others. 1.07 TESTS AND FLUSHING A. After completion, subject sprinkler system to tests required by and in the presence of representatives of local fire department and Architect. Conduct, duration, and other details not covered by agencies'requirements, shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Provide instruments, equipment, and pay expenses incurred in making test; obtain approvals, certificates. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. The Sprinkler Contractor shall leave the entire sprinkler system installed under this contract in proper working order and shall without additional charge, replace any work or material installed which develops defects within one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner and Architect. Sprinkler System-15500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 In *40* 15500-SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. All work of this section is specifically subject to the general requirements for the entire project. Refer to applicable portions of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15010. All aspects of the work shall comply fully with the requirements of NFPA 13. The entire installation shall be as required to meet Insurance Service Office(ISO)standards. 1.02 INTENT A. Furnish and install all labor and materials including all incidentals required to provide a 100% approved automatic sprinkler system to cover the new construction and minor interface to the existing building as shown on architectural progress drawings and as specified herein. 1.03 CODES AND PERMITS A. All work under this contract shall comply fully with requirements, rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction. B. Any work done which has to be changed to conform with regulations and codes shall be done at the Sprinkler Contractor's expense. C. Any conditions noted in these specifications which would be contrary to such regulations shall be brought to the attention of the Architect before work is installed. D. Permits and fees shall be obtained and paid for by this Sprinkler Contractor. E. The sprinkler system scope of work shall include,but not be limited to,the following: 1. Drain and test connections. 2. Sprinklers,piping and fittings. 3. Pipe sleeves,escutcheons,supports,hangers,inserts. 4. Valves and gauges. 5. Valve seals, tags and charts.All valves in the sprinkler system shall have permanent tags indicating their purpose. A legend shall be placed at the main shut off valve indicating location of shut off valves and inspection test valve(s). 6. A complete set of working drawings and hydraulic calculations. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sprinkler System-15500 EGA,P.C. Page i of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 �,,w 15460-PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 FIXTURES A. All fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true to line, angles, curves and color, smooth,water tight, and complete in every respect. B. Fixtures shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Fixtures are given as a typical standard and they, or their equal shall be furnished, set and connected in a neat and workmanlike manner. 1. All fixtures shall be set,connected and tested. 2. Make all water, waste, vent soil and other service connections to fixtures as indicated. 3. Set,furnish,connect and test all necessary fittings. C. Thoroughly clean all fixtures prior to final acceptance. All plated or polished fittings, pipes and appliances shall be coated with vaseline immediately after installation and shall be highly polished and free from all marks and foreign substances as directed by the Architect. D. All fittings, escutcheons, faucets, traps, exposed piping (including inside cabinets) etc., shall be brass,chrome plated over nickel plate with polished finish. E. All hanger visible nuts shall likewise be chrome plated over nickel plate. F. Fixtures and trim shall be as scheduled on drawings or pre-approved equal. G. Fixture color shall be white(where applicable). END OF SECTION 15460 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Plumbing Fixtures 15460-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 larger traps shall be of the material specified for the piping system to which they are connected. All exposed fixture traps are to be as specified under the fixture schedule and or to match equipment tailpieces supplied by others. 1.06 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts for cast iron pipe shall consist of tapped extra heavy cast iron ferrule, caulked into the cast iron fittings, and extra heavy brass tapered screw plug with solid hexagonal nut. The cleanout plugs shall comply with the plumbing code and shall have American Standard pipe threads. Cleanouts turning out through wall and floors shall be made by long sweep ells or "Y" fittings and 1/8 inch bends; into these caulk the following: 1. At the heel of each vertical storm or sanitary drain install a "Dandy" cleanout. B. In all finished floor areas, cleanout covers shall be concealed, suitably marked and identified(exactly)on as-built drawings. 1.07 WATER SYSTEMS STERILIZATION A. Chlorination Method: 1. Fill the system or any part thereof with a water solution containing 50 parts per million (ppm) available chlorine and let it stand for 24 hours before flushing and returning to service. 2. During the chlorination process,all valves and accessories shall be operated. 3. After chlorination, the water shall be flushed from the line at its ends until the replacement water when tested shall be found equal chemically and bacterio- logically to tests of the permanent source of supply. Submit to the Owner and Architect written verification that all procedures and tests, here specified, have been performed and that water at the building outlets on test will be found identical to the source water. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. For piping materials, valves and methods of installation, refer to previous Specification sections. END OF SECTION 15400 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Plumbing EGA,P.C. 15400-3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 AOW 1. Short 1/4 bends,common offsets and double hubs will not be permitted. 2. Short"Tee-Wye" fittings are to be used in vertical piping only. C. Drains shall be run at minimum grade of 1/8" per foot downward in the direction of flow unless otherwise indicated. Branch connections to stacks from fixtures shall pitch 1/4" per foot. Attention is called to the strict necessity of maintaining the ceiling heights established. 1.04 VENT SYSTEMS A. Complete systems of ventilating pipes shall be installed from the various new plumbing fixtures and other equipment to which drainage connections are made. 1. Ventilating pipes shall be connected to the discharge of traps as shown. 2. Carry vents individually to a point above the ultimate overflow level of the fixtures before connecting with any other vent pipe; in general, this will be approximately 3'- 6" above the finished floor. 3. Branches shall be arranged to pitch back to fixtures. Ow B. Individual vent pipes shall be collected together in branch vent lines and connected to vent stacks in general,paralleling soil and waste stacks. 1. Wherever possible, vent stack offsets shall be connected to adjacent soil stacks for the purpose of draining condensation. 2. Where possible, the waste of a fixture shall be connected to the base of each vent stack for the purpose of washing out any scale or dirt which may accumulate. 3. The soil stack may be used to wash out the heel of the vent. C. Tops of all soil and waste stacks shall be extended as additional ventilating pipes. 1. Pipes smaller than 4" size shall be increased to 4" by means of approved in- creasers before passing through the roof. 2. The tops of all ventilating stacks shall collect together and run through the roof in series of larger pipes as shown on the drawings. 1.05 TRAPS A. Traps shall be of brass or cast iron of weight, material and type conforming to the piping system in which it is installed. Traps shall be of plain pattern, having a seal of not less than 21/2', not greater than 4" except as noted on the drawings. All concealed 2" and Rockridge—Northampton,MA Plumbing EGA,P.C. 15400-2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15400-PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The General Conditions of these specifications apply to each and every contractor or other persons supplying material or labor entering into this building and/or premises, directly or indirectly. B. Furnish labor and materials to complete the installation of the plumbing systems as shown on the drawings,specified herein or both as follows: 1. System of sanitary and waste drainage and vents from each fixture to points of connection as indicated. 2. Systems of cold water distribution,and hot water distribution,to all fixtures from mains where indicated. 3. Fixtures as specified and/or indicated. 4. Roof drainage system. 40"* 5. Thermal insulation for all systems. 6. Testing and adjusting of all systems. 7. Natural gas distribution system. 8. Protective painting. 1.02 WATER SYSTEMS A. Water distribution systems shall supply water to all fixtures and other water consuming equipment and hot water heating equipment. Valved outlets for the use of other trades shall be furnished and installed complete. 1.03 SANITARY SEWER AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Complete system of sanitary sewer and drainage shall be provided. The system shall include all risers, branches with all pipes, fittings, hangers, anchors, plumbing fixtures, special fixture wasters,etc.,to make the system complete. B. Branch connections shall be made with "WYE" and long "Tee-Wye" fittings. All fittings "Oak, shall conform to code requirements. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Plumbing EGA,P.C. 15400-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 ow 15181 -ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Acoustic duct lining shall be applied where indicated on the drawings. PART 2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Acoustic lining shall be 1/z" thick Rubatex, R-180OFS elastomeric (neoprene) duct liner, or approved equal. Lining shall meet the life safety standards of NFPA 90A and 90B and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1071, ASTM G-21, ASTM G-22, and UL 181, for resistance to microbial growth and air erosion. Dimensions of lined ducts shown on the drawings are the inside dimensions of the duct after the lining has been installed. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Duct lining shall be adhered to metal duct with full coverage of a fire retardant adhesive, as recommended and/or supplied by the manufacturer. Install liner and adhesive in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions including proper cleaning of ductwork. Transverse joints shall be compression fit and butted without gaps. All leading edges shall be installed with metal nosings. B. The mechanical contractor shall furnish and install access doors in all acoustically lined ductwork for visual inspection and cleaning of liner. END OF SECTION 15181 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Acoustic Insulation 15181-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 Pipe Size Insulation Thickness HW mains 1" HW,CW and recirc. '/z" F. Insulate water and drain lines under public lavatories (fixture P-2CH only) and counter sinks designated for use by the handicapped with Handi "Lav-Guard" preformed insulation system(white). G. Insulate air conditioning `M' copper condensate piping (above slab) and all PEX heating and domestic hot water piping (below slab) with 1/z" Armaflex or equal closed cell product. H. Insulate 4"dia.residential cloths dryer vent in cold attic with 1-1/2"duct wrap. 1. Insulate air conditioning ductwork exposed above roof with 1" rigid fiberglass board neatly finished with .045" EPDM rubber membrane. Install and seal per manufacturer's recommendations. J. Insulate boiler breeching with 1" thick high temperature fiberglass. Finish with white rewettable fiberglass cloth. Furnish removable sections on insulation at all cleanouts. END OF SECTION 15180 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Thermal Insulation EGA,P.C. 15180-2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15180-THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide all insulating materials required for piping, mechanical equipment and sheet metal work. The execution of the work shall be by an experienced insulation contractor in strict accordance with the best practice of the trade and the intent of the specifications. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., Knauf, Johns- Manville Co.,or approved equal. B. Insulating materials, jackets, adhesives, accessories and applications shall develop a system having a UL rating with a flame spread of not over 25,a fuel contributed rating of not over 50 and a smoke developed rating of not over 50. C. Heating Supply & Return Piping: Cover all piping and hot water heating piping specialties with molded, heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with ASJ/SSL. Adhere and seal end joint strips and overlap seams with proper mastic to provide continuous vapor barrier jacket. All fittings shall be insulated with precut fiberglass formed fittings with pre-molded PVC jacket mechanically fastened,including unions,couplings,flanges, and air separator. Cover any exposed piping insulation with full PVC jacket screwed as required to prevent abuse. Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Up to 2" 1 21/z" and Larger 1.5" D. Insulate all supply/return/exhaust ductwork in cold attics, fresh air intake ductwork, unlined air conditioning supply ductwork and concealed horizontal roof leaders and drain sumps externally with 11/z" foil faced .75 PCF fiberglass insulation. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on ductwork with all circumferential joints butted together and longi- tudinal joints overlapped 2". Staple longitudinal joints securely and foil tape all joints air tight. E. Domestic Hot, Cold and Recirculating Hot Water Piping: Cover all piping with molded, heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with ASJ/SSL. Adhere and seal end joint strips and overlap seams with proper mastic to provide continuous vapor barrier jacket. All fittings shall be insulated with precut fiberglass formed fittings with premolded PVC jacket mechanically fastened. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Thermal Insulation 15180-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 AOW 15160-EXPANSION COMPENSATORS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Expansion compensators shall be as manufactured by Keflex, or approved equal, and shall be sized for expansion indicated or required. B. Anchors shall be designed to suit job conditions and located where indicated on drawings or directed. C. Expansion joints, loops and anchors shall be provided as required to control expansion and allow pipes to move from anchor points to expansion points. END OF SECTION 15160 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Expansion Compensators and Anchors EGA,P.C. 15160-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15140-PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Inline Pumps: 1. The contractor shall furnish and install pumps as scheduled on the plans. 2. The pumps shall be single stage,vertical split case design, in cast iron and bronze fitted construction. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. 3. The impellers shall be of the enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced and keyed to the shaft and secured with a suitable locknut. 4. The pumps shall employ a mechanical seal, with a carbon seal ring and Remite (or equal) seat. S shaft sleeve shall be furnished under the complete wetted area of the mechanical seal. 5. The bearing frame assembly of the pumps shall be fitted with oil lubricated, bronze journal bearings and a hardened alloy steel shaft. 6. A flexible coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor. 7. The motor shall be resilient mounted, equipped with oil lubricated journal bearings. 8. The pumps shall be factory tested, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. A set of installation instructions shall be included with the pump at the time of shipment. 9. Pumps intended for use with domestic water shall be of bronze construction. PART 2—PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Pumps shall be as manufactured by Taco,Bell&Gossett or approved equal. END OF SECTION 15140 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pumps EGA,P.C. 15140-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 00W 15101 -TAGS AND CHARTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Attach to each valve a 2" brass tag on which shall be stamped designating letters and numbers 1/2" high filled with black enamel. Letters designate service. 1. The tags shall be securely fastened to the handle or spindle of the valve by a brass chain. 2. Furnish four(4)schedules of valves so tagged,mounted in bound booklets. 3. One (1) copy of such schedules shall be mounted in glazed frames located in the Boiler Room or where directed. B. Provide nameplates for all equipment, motor starters, push button stations, pilot light stations or control points, and any other points in the building deemed necessary to the Architect. 1. Nameplates shall be fabricated from black Bakelite with white recessed letters permanently secured with screws. 2. Nameplate schedule and sample shall be submitted for approval. 3. Coordinate identification of exhaust fan switches provided by the electrical contractor. C. Provide permanent labels on all pieces of mechanical equipment designating the unit tag as it is shown on mechanical drawings. Labels shall be conspicuous but out of normal sight lines. D. Once finished ceilings are placed, this contractor shall, using as-built drawings, mark locations of all major valves,controls and equipment. Markings shall be suitable and only as approved by the architect and owner. PART 2—PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Tags shall be as manufactured by "Seton"or approved equal. END OF SECTION 15101 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Tags and Charts EGA,P.C. 15101-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 AM*- G. Approved strainers shall be installed in the inlet connections to equipment and automatic control valves to protect all apparatus or any automatic character whose proper function would be interfered with by dirt on the seat or by scoring of the seat. Strainers shall be as manufactured by "Watts" or approved equal. H. Valves used in domestic water lines shall be bronze construction appropriate for potable water applications. END OF SECTION 15100 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Valves and Cocks 15100-2 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 „ 15100-VALVES AND COCKS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide shut-off valves to isolate sections of piping, every fixture, and equipment. Valves shall be at inlet and outlet, to permit removal for repairs without interfering with the remainder of the system. B. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. Provide ball, check, balancing cocks, plus air vents and other type of valves as required for complete and proper valving of the entire installation, to control flow, shut-off, prevent backflow, provide drainage and control pressure and temperatures. C. Valves shall be as manufactured by Watts,Apollo,Nibco or Milwaukee Valve Co. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Application: 2” and smaller-Ball valves for flow control and/or tight shut-off shall be all bronze construction,stainless steel ball, extended S.S. stem with threaded ends, 150 swp, with blow-out-proof stem design,equal to Milwaukee#BA-100S. B. Application: 2-1/2" and larger — Butterfly valves for flow control and/or tight shut-off shall be 200 psi,C.I.body,S.S.stem,equal to Milwaukee#MW122B. Grooved falves for installation directly in mechanically joined piping are acceptable provided that they are of the best commercial quality. C. Check valves 21/2' and less shall be bronze horizontal swing check, 125 swp, equal to Milwaukee #509(T). Check valves 3" and larger shall be iron body, bronze trim, 125 swp,equal to Milwaukee#F-2974. D. Drain valves to be installed at low points in piping and as otherwise required to completely drain piping system and equipment. Drain valves shall be ball valves of size as shown or required,in no case smaller than 1/2" I.P.S.with male thread for hose. E. Balancing valves shall be Bell & Gossett Circuit Setters Model CB and OP, or approved equal, tight shut-off, packed under pressure, size as scheduled on the drawings and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Pressure reducing valves for water shall be of anti-siphon check type with built-in strainer. Bell and Gossett Model No. F-3 or approved equal. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Valves and Cocks 15100-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15064- SLEEVES AND FLASHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Pipes passing through rated construction shall be fitted with pipe sleeves, the inside diameter of which shall be at least 1" greater than the outside of the pipe passing through it. Annular spaces are to be sealed with approved material and methods. All penetrations through rated construction shall be installed per UL details to maintain the applicable rating especially at building fire walls. B. Exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings shall be fitted with one-piece chromium plated heavy gauge wrought brass escutcheons large enough to go over such covering, fitting same snugly and securely held in place. Submit sample of escutcheon to Architect for approval. C. Sleeves through concrete floors shall project 1" above finished floor and be provided with extended escutcheon. D. Vents passing through the roof shall be provided with a prefabricated boot and flashing base compatible with the roofing system. Coordinate with general contractor. (G.C. to prime and paint all exposed portions of vent pipes to match adjacent finishes.) END OF SECTION 15064 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Sleeves and Flashing EGA,P.C. 15064-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15063 -IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Identification shall be provided on all new piping that is exposed as well as all concealed locations such as crawl spaces, service tunnels, shafts, and above removable ceilings in which piping may be viewed. 1. Furnish and affix approved adhesive bands identifying the service and direction of flow of the various piping systems. 2. A set of such bands shall be affixed to each pipe not less than 40' and there shall be at least one set of identifying bands. 3. Each set shall consist of one band on which the name of the service is printed and one band on which is printed a black directional arrow. B. Identification bands shall have adhesive backing. Submit same for approval. 1. The name of the service shall be printed in black letters not less than 2" high for 3" pipe and larger; 1" high for pipe 21/2' and smaller. 2. Bands shall be applied where they can be read with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe or duct. 3. Bands shall be applied only after finish painting is completed. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Identification bands shall be as manufactured by "Seton" or approved equal. END OF SECTION 15063 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Identification of Piping 15063-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 * And as specified in NFPA 13 Section 4-6.4.3 D. Restraining devices shall be provided to limit horizontal and vertical motions to prevent component resonance and to prevent overturning. END OF SECTION 15062 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Equipment Supports EGA,P.C. 15062-3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All mechanical piping, ductwork and equipment shall be constructed and installed to resist seismic forces per the BOCA National Building Code. B. Exemptions: 1. All components (except in emergency facilities) are exempt from seismic treatment in Northeastern Vermont, Northern New Hampshire and Northern Maine where peak accelerations are predicted to be less than .10g. (See BOCA code map for precise boundaries.) 2. All components (except sprinkler and fuel gas piping) are exempt from seismic treatment in occupancies other than Assembly greater than 300 occupancy, Educational greater than 250 occupancy, Business (college) greater than 500 occupancy and emergency facilities(including Institutional-incapacitated)greater than 50 occupancy. 3. All piping (except sprinkler and fuel gas piping) hung 12" or closer to structure or smaller than 21/z" in diameter (11/4' diameter in mechanical rooms) is exempt from seismic treatment. 4. All ductwork hung 12" or closer to structure or less than six (6) square feet in cross section is exempt from seismic treatment. C. Except where exempted above, all piping, ductwork and equipment shall be constructed and installed to resist lateral and/or longitudal seismic induced forces as follows: HVAC and Plumb. Piping: Emergency Occ. .15 x Wt.of filled pipe Assembly Occ. .10 x Wt.of filled pipe Other Occ. .05 x Wt.of filled pipe Fuel Gas Piping: All Occ. ,45 x Wt.of filled pipe Sprinkler Piping: All Occ. .45 x Wt.of filled pipe* Ductwork: Emergency Occ. .15 x Wt.duct Assembly Occ. .10 x Wt.duct Other Occ. .05 x Wt.duct Mechanical Equipment: Emergency Occ. .45 x Wt. equipment Assembly Occ. .30 x Wt. equipment ,, •., Other Occ. .15 x Wt. equipment Rockridge—Northampton,MA Equipment Supports EGA,P.C. 15062-2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 15062-EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide suitable and substantial hangers and supports for all piping, ductwork and equipment by Grinnell, Carpenter and Patterson Inc., Central Iron Manufacturing Co., or an acceptable substitution. B. Support horizontal piping in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe Material Max. Horizontal Spacing Max.Vertical Spacing Copper tubing 6' 10' 11/a" &smaller Copper tubing 10' 10' 11/2' &larger PVC pipe 4' 4' � . Steel pipe 12' 15' C. Piping,ductwork and equipment shall not be hung from the work of other trades. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIAL A. Hangers shall be of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported. All materials, except pipe rollers, shall be wrought or malleable iron or steel. Hangers shall be adjustable wrought type. B. Hangers and pipe clamps used on copper piping shall be solid copper or copper plated. Where tube is in contact with dissimilar metal,protect with shield or plastic cover. C. The intention is to provide supports which in each case shall be amply strong and rigid for the load,but which shall not weaken or unduly stress the building construction. D. Hangers for pipes up to and including 4" shall be swivel ring, split ring, wrought pipe clamp,band,or adjustable wrought clevis type. E. Hangers for pipes above 4" shall be standard clevis or roller. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Equipment Supports 15062-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 .., 15061 -PRESSURE TESTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PRESSURE TESTS A. All piping shall be pressure tested before being covered or concealed. This contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for said test. B. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect's representative. C. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work progresses, but no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested. D. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing operation shall be removed or other wise protected during the operation. E. All defects and leaks observed during the tests shall be corrected and made tight in an approved manner and the tests repeated until the system is proven tight. F. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or on account of the tests. G. All pressure piping shall be tested hydrostatically at a pressure of at least 11/z times the maximum operating pressure,but not less than 80 psi. H. Soil, waste and vent systems shall be tested by filling systems with water from lowest point to highest point. Water shall be allowed to stand for two hours during which time there shall be no loss or leakage. I. All gas piping shall be air tested to 80 psi. END OF SECTION 15061 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pressure Tests EGA,P.C. 15061-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 B. Pipe lines shall be run parallel and spaced to permit proper covering. C. Manufactured shock absorbers by Wade or Zurn shall be installed on top of all hot and cold water risers on the upfeed system,on all individual hot and cold water fixture branch connections. Groups of fixures may be served by one properly sized shock absorber. D. Piping, fittings, valves, supports, hangers, etc., exposed to view shall be painted. This provision shall apply to all piping from the point that it leaves the wall to the point of final connection to the fixture. E. Any exposed piping and trim showing tool marks shall be removed and replaced with new materials without additional cost. F. Riser control valves shall be provided on all risers. Drain valves shall be provided at the heel of each riser inside of shut-off valves. G. Main shut-off valves shall be installed at each water connection at all tanks and other pieces of equipment. H. Valves shall generally be provided on all main branches from risers to groups of fixtures and access doors shall be provided to all such valves not readily accessible. I. Piping shall pitch to low points. All low points and any pockets caused by changes in elevation required by structural or other interferences shall be provided with drain valves. J. Branches to individual fixtures shall be of sizes as shown in the Fixture Schedule on the drawings. K. Vacuum breakers and back flow preventers shall be installed on all equipment and fixture connections as required by code and/or local ordinances. L. Connections to equipment such as tanks,pumps, etc.,shall be made with flanged or union connections. M. Where hot and cold water supply pipes connect to a combination supply fitting with a shut-off valve on its discharge,or the combination supply fitting is equipped with manual or thermostatic mixing valve, each hot and cold water supply pipe shall be equipped with a composition disc swing check valve ahead of the supply fitting. END OF SECTION 15060 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF PIPING(PLUMBING) A. Offsets will be permitted only where required to permit the pipes to follow walls, when standard fittings shall be used. B. All risers shall be erected plumb and true and shall be parallel with walls and other pipes and be neatly spaced. C. All rough-in piping, underground or concealed in floors/wall construction, shall be installed before the construction is closed up. D. Horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, shall be kept as high up as possible and close to walls. Consult with other trades so that grouped lines will not interfere with each other. E. The arrangement, positions, connections, etc., of pipes, fixtures, drains, valves, etc., shown on the Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible; the right is reserved by the Architect to change the locations, etc., to accommodate any conditions which may arise during the progress of the work without additional cost. The responsibility for accurately laying out the work rests with the contractor. F. Piping shall be installed concealed in building construction in all finished areas. w 1. Special precaution shall be taken in the installation of concealed piping to see that said piping is properly installed. Should it be necessary to correct piping so installed, this subcontractor shall be held liable for associated repairs to general construction and the work of other trades as well as the correction of his piping. 2. The plumbing contractor must have full regard for the extent to which piping must be installed THROUGH structural members due to available clearances. G. Pipe shall not be bent, flattened or otherwise injured either before installation or during installation. H. Connections to fixtures shown to be installed concealed in building construction shall, in general, be carried concealed to a point above floor at wall (near fixtures), where they shall break out and rise exposed to fixtures, all as required and approved. I. Reducing fittings, unless otherwise approved in special cases, shall be used in making reduction in size of pipe. Bushing will not be allowed unless specifically approved. 3.05 WATER PIPING CONSTRUCTION DETAILS(PLUMBING) A. Pipe shall be supported as called for under"Hangers". Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. The drawings indicate generally the size and location of piping, and while sizes must not be decreased, the right is reserved to change runs and sizes of pipes in order to accommodate conditions on the job. 1. Any pipes not indicated on the drawings shall be sized as directed and run where directed. D. Piping shall be properly graded to insure easy circulating and prevent noise and water hammer. Water piping shall pitch upward in the direction of flow, except the water piping located above finished ceilings which may be run level. 1. Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction in all portions of pipe work to prevent undue strain on piping, fixtures or apparatus connected therewith. E. Vent all high points and drain all low points in hot water heating system as required to achieve perfect water circulation. F. All piping 2" and larger shall be hung from the top chord of bar joist only, and at panel points where possible. 3.02 PIPE JOINTS AND FITTINGS (HEATING) A. All pipe joints and fittings shall be in accordance with the Schedule as herein specified. B. Fittings for use on steel pipe shall be screwed iron or welded fittings of type and weight as scheduled. C. Flanges on steel pipe shall be screwed cast iron or welded type of type and weight to match the piping on which they are installed. 1. Gaskets shall be ring type 1/16" thick of compressed fiber and special compound suitable for service intended,factory cut for 125 lb.flange size. D. Flexible metal hose connectors shall be as manufactured by "Flexonics" or approved equal. 3.03 SOLDERING PIPE A. Fittings in copper tubing shall be wrought copper for sweat solder joints. Joints in copper water piping shall be made with solder, per schedule. Flux shall be "Handy Flux" or "Aircosil Flux" or approved equal. No borax or alcohol mixtures or resin or similar paste fluxes shall be used. Care should be taken to see that no surplus flux is on the inside of the pipe when the joint is completed. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings EGA,P.C. 15060-4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 Sanitary Waste Building 11/z" &up PVC Solvent Sch.40 Vent& Roof Drain (Residential) Sanitary& Roof Underground All PVC Solvent Sch.40 Drain (Residential) Natural Gas(3) Building All Malleable Screwed 150# Iron Condensate Building All Wr. Copper Soldered(2) Std. (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Condensate Building All PVC Solvent Sch.40 (Residential) Notes: (1) Water supply and return piping shown run below slab shall be continuous lengths of PEX tubing of required pressure and rating. PEX tubing used for domestic hot and cold water supply at cottages shall be approved for potable systems. (2) No solder containing lead shall be present on the site. (3) Natural gas piping shall be welded where mandated by the local gas utiltity. Hub & Spigot drain piping system shall be Tyler Pipe "SV" with "Ty-Seal" gaskets and lubricant,or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF PIPING(HEATING) A. All piping shall be properly supported or suspended on stands, clamps, hangers and the like,or approved design and made as directed. 1. Supports shall be designed to permit free expansion and contraction while minimizing vibration. 2. The mechanical contractor must have full regard for the extent to which piping must be installed THROUGH structural members due to available clearances. B. Screw threads shall be cut clean and true; screw joints shall be made tight without caulking and without red or white lead. Bushings shall not be used. 1. All pipe two inch(2")or less shall be reamed after cutting to remove all burrs. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-3 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 Heating Building 21/2' & Steel Flex Roll Sch. 10 Supply &Return Larger Groove 2.04 SCHEDULE OF PIPE MATERIALS (PLUMBING) Service Location Size Material Type Weight C.W. Building All Copper(1) Hard L H.W. Building All Copper (1) Hard L Sanitary Waste Building 11/2' & up C.I. No Hub Std. Vent&Roof Drain (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Sanitary& Roof Underground All C.I. Hub &Spigot Std. Drain (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Sanitary Waste Building 11/2' & up PVC Tube Sch.40 Vent&Roof Drain (Residential) Sanitary& Roof Underground All PVC Tube Sch.40 Drain (Residential) AONK Natural Gas(3) Building All Steel Screwed Sch.40 Condensate Building All Copper Hard M (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Condensate Building All PVC Tube Sch. 40 (Residential) 2.05 SCHEDULE OF PIPE FITTINGS(PLUMBING) Service Location Size Material Type Weight C.W. Building All Wr. Copper Soldered(2) Std. H.W. Building All Wr. Copper Soldered(2) Std. Sanitary Waste Building 11/2' & up C.I. S/S Clamp No Hub Vent&Roof Drain (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Sanitary& Roof Underground All C.I. Hub & Spigot Std. Drain (Commercial as determined by local plumbing inspector) Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-2 EGA,P.C. 11/312003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15060-PIPE AND PIPE FIT°l INGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All piping shall be installed in accordance with governing codes and in a workmanlike manner. B. The run and arrangement of all pipes shall be approximately as shown on the drawings and as directed during installation and shall be as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls and other pipes,and be neatly spaced. C. Arrange work to avoid all interference with the work of all other trades. Consult with other contractors, and coordinate the location of their work with that of the others. PART 2- PRODUCT 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS- GENERAL A. Steel pipe shall be lap welded or seamless with maker's name rolled on each length equal to ASTM-A-53 of weight specified. B. Copper tube shall be seamless,hard or soft equal to ASTM-1388 to type specified. C. Cast iron soil pipe shall be standard weight coated cast iron soil pipe. Each length shall bear the maker's name, weight per foot and size cast thereon. Fittings and traps shall be similarly marked. 2.02 SCHEDULE OF PIPE MATERIALS(HEATING) Service Location Size Material Type Weight Heating Building 2" & Copper (1) Hard Tube L Supply&Return Smaller Heating Building 21/2' & Steel Mech. Sch. 10 Supply & Return Larger Joint 2.03 SCHEDULE OF PIPE FITTINGS &FLANGES(HEATING) Service Location Size Material Type Weight Heating Building 2" & Wr. Copper(1) Soldered L Supply& Return Smaller Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15060-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 lop H. At completion of all testing and balancing, leave all equipment systems, components, etc.,adjusted within the limits of installed equipment and to meet all design requirements. Mark all set points of all dampers and valves with distinguishing marks. If requested, conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer. I. Within 15 days after completion of testing and balancing, submit to the Engineer for review three copies of the testing and balancing results on approved forms. Include a warranty period of 90 days during which time the Engineer may request a recheck or readjustment of any part of the job. J. All reports shall clearly indicate the following minimum information: 1. Air - System name, rated and actual HP, BHP, voltage, amperage, fan rpm, suction, discharge and total static pressures, total system flow rate, individual terminal flow rates. Terminal readings must show location, make, model and size of register, grille, or diffuser. Include a static pressure profile of all AHU's components. 2. Water - Pump full flow and no-flow suction and discharge pressures, rated and actual amperage, voltage, and TDH. Calibrated balancing device readings will indicate location, size, setting, differential pressure, and rated and actual gpm. Provide results of valve manipulation on domestic hot water system including timed waiting periods at all system extremes. 3. ATC Sequence Check: Report shall include a paragraph by paragraph review of the sequences of controls specification, noting either "operates as specified" or detailing any deviations or deficiencies. a. Should systems be found incomplete or not performing per specification, the ATC contractor shall correct deficiencies and the Testing and Balancing agency shall recheck until all sequences have been verified. All expenses incurred as a result of the ATC contractor's failure to complete and thoroughly test his work prior to this sequence check,shall be borne by the ATC contractor.) END OF SECTION 15011 Testing&Balancing Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15011-2 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15011 -TESTING& BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 TESTING AND BALANCING A. Procure the service of an independent testing and balancing agency that specializes in the testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning and domestic hot water recirculation systems. B. Both the air and water systems will be done by the same agency. C. Work shall not begin until the agency has been notified in writing that all systems have been completed, cleaned and placed in full working sequence by the Mechanical Contractor. Clean filters are to be installed by Mechanical Contractor prior to start of balancing work. D. Test, balance and adjust all air moving equipment, terminals, supply, return and exhaust systems. Work together with the ATC Contractor to adjust set points of out- side/return/exhaust dampers where applicable. E. Test,balance and adjust all water systems to provide scheduled flows to all terminals and eliminate noise. Adjust and test the domestic hot water recirculation system to ensure flow to all branches and minimize wait times. F. When all control systems and preliminary testing and balancing are complete, this contractor,with the cooperation of the ATC contractor, shall perform an independent test of all systems for specified sequences of operation. 1. The test shall include all operations as specified in Section 15900, "Sequence of Controls". 2. All dampers, valves, and similar appurtenances shall be visually or physically confirmed to operate as specified. Operating and safety devices such as aquastats and freezestats shall be verified operational. 3. All interlocks between equipment shall be confirmed to operate as specified. 4. This contractor shall provide the ATC contractor with operating setpoints as well as alarm setpoints such as dirty filters,high/low limits,etc.,as required. 5. Report findings per J.below. G. Perform all tests in accordance with standard procedures such as those outlined by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) and/or Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,Inc.,(SMACNA). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Testing&Balancing EGA,P.C. 15011-1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 1.20 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROL A. Provide suitable starting and controlling equipment as specified for installation under Electrical Division. B. All controllers shall be products of Allen-Bradley, Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Westinghouse,Square D or approved equal. C. Starters shall be equipped with the required number of auxiliary contacts for control functions specified and shall be provided with a 120V step-down transformer for the ATC contractor's use where necessary. D. Neon type pilot lights shall be built into the covers of all the starters. E. Motors shall have overload protection in each ungrounded leg. F. Starters for mechanical equipment shall be installed by the electrical contractor as and where directed by the mechanical contractor. 1.21 ELECTRIC WIRING A. All power wiring to the motor starters, or to the terminal blocks of prewired motor control cabinets, and between the motor starter and electric motor (except where specified to be provided by factory wiring as part of the equipment) will be provided under the Electrical Division of this specification. B. All control wiring including interlock wiring between starters, wiring of remote controllers, pilot lights, relays and all temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and similar controls and accessories shall be installed and wired under this division. Refer to electrical drawings for instances where empty conduit is to be provided by the Electrical Contractor for controls by the Mechanical Contractor(i.e.to air-cooled condensing units). C. All wiring shall conform to the requirements of the Electrical Division of the specification except as follows: All low voltage control wiring run within mechanical rooms or where otherwise subject to damage shall be run in conduit. All other low voltage control wiring may be run without conduit provided that this wiring is installed neatly and frequently attached to and concealed within general construction to the full satisfaction of the engineer. D. All electrical work not shown on the electrical drawings but necessary for proper operation of mechanical equipment shall be the responsibility of this contractor. END OF SECTION 15010 General Requirements Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15010-10 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 AVI` F. Door frame shall be 22 gauge steel, or stainless steel, and provided with a 2" wide metal lath plaster bond on the perimeter of the frame where panels are installed in plaster work. G. Doors shall have continuous hinge and screw driver operated cam type lock. Doors shall swing a full 180 degrees. H. All parts of doors shall have a shop coat of metal primer smooth and ready for finish painting,except for stainless steel doors. I. Provide fire and/or smoke rated access doors where they are to be installed in rated construction. 1.18 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Certain items of equipment have been specified by manufacturer's name and model number. It is not the intent to limit the contractor to the equipment but to establish a type and quality required. The contractor may substitute equipment of equal quality and capacity and shall be responsible for any changes required to install the substitution. All shop drawings will indicate the substitution and any deviations from the original specification. B. Added support steel, anchors, braces, etc. required to permit the use of substituted equipment,shall be the cost and installation responsibility of this contractor. 1.19 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. All electric motors of sizes and type as specified for driving the equipment shall be provided under this Section. 1. All motors shall be of proper power and speed to suit the specified make of equipment. 2. If other makes of equipment are accepted, the proper adjustment of motor speed and power shall be included without additional cost. B. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start induction run or split phase type as approved for the service. C. All motors and accessories shall comply in all respects with NEMA Standards and rated for 40 degree C rise and 40 degree C ambient. D. All three phase motors shall be premium efficiency based on IEEE 112B test methods. Efficiency rating shall be stamped on nameplate and clearly marked on equipment. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-9 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 tanks, air handling units and similar equipment installed on concrete C. All boilers, pumps, g floor slabs shall have a 4" high concrete foundation except where otherwise indicated. D. When equipment is wet, the space between the rough foundations and base of equipment shall be filled with embeco grout by the Mechanical Contractor. E. All anchor bolts and devices required for equipment furnished under this division shall be furnished and installed. F. Structural steel supports and miscellaneous steel required for supporting and/or hanging equipment and piping furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. G. All foundations, anchor pads, piers, thrust blocks, inertia blocks and structural steel supports shall be built per template and reinforced as required for loads imposed on them. 1.16 TOOLS A. Furnish all special tools required for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Division. Ow,, B. The intent is to provide special tools only as required for operation and maintenance of the equipment and recommended by the manufacturer but not to include wrenches and similar tools normally available. C. All tools specified herein shall be turned over to the Owner and a complete list and receipt of same provided to the Architect. 1.17 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors to all concealed valves,traps,etc. B. Wherever this equipment is readily accessible through the removable ceiling, doors will not be required. C. The installation of the doors will be performed under the specifications of another trade, but the Mechanical Contractor will be held responsible for the accessibility of all valves, traps,etc. D. The size of the access doors shall be no smaller than 8" square or larger than 24" square. E. Doors shall be factory made of 22 gauge cold rolled steel, reinforced as required, except in shower and locker rooms where stainless steel doors with satin polish finish shall be used. Access doors shall be flush fitting type. General Requirements Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15010-8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.13 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. All excavation and backfilling required for piping installed under this Division will be performed by the General Contractor under the supervision of the Mechanical Contractor. B. The General Contractor will provide all necessary protection and pumping work required to keep the excavated areas free of water. C. The General Contractor will provide all necessary bracings and shoring required to protect the sides of the excavation. D. Furnish the General Contractor with all required information as to the locations, sizes, grades and elevations of all piping, equipment and foundations requiring excavation and be responsible for same. 1.14 PAINTING A. Generally all finish painting will be provided by the General Contractor except as specified herein: 1. All pumps, motors, tanks, heat exchangers and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel except where special finishes are otherwise specified herein. 2. All items scratched or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and painted to match the original finish. 3. Paint all exposed pipe,hangers,anchors,guides,cradles,structural steel supports, stands,etc.,with rust inhibitive paint. 4. Hangers, guides, and similar equipment that cannot be completely painted after installation shall be painted before installation. 5. Paint the visible interior of all ducts or register boxes in back of all grilles and registers with two(2)coats of dull black paint. 1.15 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Vibration isolation rails, bases, devices and concrete inertia blocks where mounted on concrete floor slabs shall have a 4" high foundation. B. All concrete foundations, anchor, pads, piers, thrust blocks, inertia blocks, and similar concrete work required will be provided by the General Contractor under the supervision of the Mechanical Contractor and in accordance with approved shop drawings which shall be prepared by the Mechanical Contractor. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements EGA,P.C. 15010-7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/2003 C. The ATC sequence check shall be performed in the presence of the engineer or his representative. 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work,keep a dedicated set of drawings marked up to record all deviations and changes from the contract drawings due to field conditions, change orders, amendments, revisions, addenda and other reasons to represent an accurate record of all work as actually installed. All sketches issued during the course of construction shall be copied onto full size sheets and added to this set and properly referenced on the full size drawings. Changes shall be added to this set no less than weekly. This set shall be made available for review by the engineer during periodic inspections. B. All deviations from the contract documents shall be approved by the Architect before installation. C. At the completion of the work, furnish to the Architect a complete reproducible copy drawing set developed under A. (above).The intent is to have an accurate and continuous record of all work as actually installed. D. After approval,the record drawings shall become the property of the Owner. E. Final payment will be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The General Contractor will provide openings in walls, floors, roof, ceilings and partitions to receive pipe lines,plumbing fixtures and other apparatus. 1. Advise the General Contractor of the exact size and location of all chases and openings required for the installation of work covered under this Division. 2. Advise the General Contractor of the size and location of all openings required to permit the entrance of all equipment to its proper location within the building. B. All sleeves shall be furnished by this contractor and securely set as required for piping passing through walls,floors,roofs,ceilings and partitions. C. All anchors and inserts shall be furnished and securely set as required for piping and equipment furnished under this Division. D. Structural steel and other structural members and slabs shall be cut only when and where approved by the Architect. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements EGA,P.C. 15010-6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/312003 7. Hot water heater and specialties. 8. Piping,valves and fittings. 9. Plumbing fixtures. 10. Gas specialties. C. If the submittals differ from the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Mechanical Contractor shall make specific mention of such difference in the letter of transmittal with a request for substitution. D. All submittals shall be complete and contain all required detailed information. E. The work described in any shop drawing submittal shall be carefully checked by the Mechanical Contractor for all clearances, field conditions and proper coordination with all trades on the job. F. Each submitted shop drawing shall be certified by the Mechanical Contractor and the General Contractor that all conditions on the job have been checked and no conflict exists. No shop drawings will be reviewed without such certification. .. 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Furnish manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment furnished under this Division. B. Each manual shall be suitably and neatly marked to identify the particular equipment furnished and shall include lubricating charts. C. All instructions and charts shall be bound in appropriate cover binders properly indexed, identified,and titled to provide three complete manuals. D. Completed manuals shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. 1.10 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS(ATC) SEQUENCE CHECK A. This contractor shall be responsible for the scheduling and coordination of his subcontractors, specifically the Testing and Balancing Agency and the ATC subcontractor, for the performance of an ATC sequence check on all HVAC systems sequenced in section 15900,"Sequences of Operation". 1. ATC installation and preliminary testing and balancing shall be complete prior to the scheduling of the ATC sequence check. . B. This contractor shall notify the engineer 48 hours prior to the scheduled performance of the ATC sequence check. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 A.,,, 3. Automatic Temperature Controls. 4. Supply/exhaust fans, grilles, registers, diffusers, louvers, accessories and sheet metal work. 5. Sanitary waste,vent and roof drainage piping. 6. Water piping. 7. Plumbing fixtures and final connections. 8. Miscellaneous-itemized. B. Each of these categories shall include all necessary appurtenances and its proper share of labor, miscellaneous expenses, overhead,profit, etc., and shall, if necessary, be corrected and be proportioned to meet the approval of the Architect as a true and proper subdivision of the contract. C. When approved, three copies of the Schedule will be returned to the contractor and two copies will be retained by the Architect to serve as a basis for making out and checking applications for payment. „ 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit detailed shop drawings for all field assembled equipment including ductwork, piping, and other distribution services located in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas where space conditions are tight or complex in nature and require close coordination with the work of this trade and/or work of other trades on the job. B. Manufacturer's data, shop drawings and/or samples giving full information as to dimensions, materials, performance data and all other information pertinent to the adequacy of the equipment shall be submitted for all apparatus, including but not limited to the following: 1. Pumps and accessories. 2. Fans,grilles,registers,diffusers,and accessories. 3. Heating,ventilating and air conditioning equipment. 4. Sheet metal specialties. 5. Automatic Temperature Controls. 6. Thermal insulation and acoustic insulation. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all work performed and materials and equipment installed to the full extent required by the drawings and specifications to be free from inherent defects. B. Any materials or equipment which are corroded or otherwise damaged, through the Mechanical Contractor's failure to properly operate and maintain the installation during construction or testing,shall be replaced prior to final acceptance. C. Keep the work in repair and replace any defective materials, equipment or workmanship upon notice from the Architect or Owner's Representative for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. See Two(2)Year Guarantee period for Automatic Temperature Control System and Control Devices. D. Materials or equipment requiring excessive service during the first year of operation shall be considered defective. E. The date of acceptance shall be that which appears on the Architect's certificate of final payment. 1.06 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Refer to the General Supplementary and Special Conditions for timing and coordination of the work. B. Schedule the work accordingly and coordinate schedule with other Contractors to prevent delays. C. COORDINATION DRAWINGS ARE REQUIRED IN ALL AREAS WHERE SUBSTANTIAL CONFLICTS MAY OCCUR BETWEEN THE WORK OF DIFFERENT TRADES. Computer files of piping and ductwork floor plans will be provided for use by the mechanical and sprinkler contractors to fulfill these requirements for coordination drawings. It is intended that HVAC, plumbing and sprinkler contractors each manipulate the base drawings provided to show his systems coordinated with that of others in applicable areas prior to the actual construction. 1.07 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Within 30 days after the acceptance of the contractor's proposal and as a condition precedent to the first payment, submit to the Architect/Engineer five copies of a subdivision of the total amount of the Contract into the following categories: 1. Heating,ventilating and air conditioning equipment,specialties and piping. 2. Thermal insulation. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-3 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. All pressure vessels shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the applicable regulations of the state and the ASME codes and shall be equipped with all appurtenances required by the aforesaid codes. C. Specific code criteria for this project includes,but is not limited to the following: 1. Massachusetts State Building Code,Sixth Edition(MBC) 2. Massachusetts Standards for Assisted Living Residences 651 CMR, 1999 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations, 2002 Edition(MAAB). 4. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings & Facilities(ADA). 5. Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines, 1998 Revisions Edition 6. NFPA 101,Life Safety Code,2000 Edition 7. NFPA 13,Sprinkler Systems,latest Edition 8. International Mechanical Code,2000 Edition 9. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code 10. Zoning Ordinances: City of Northampton,Massachusetts,2001 11. Group Classification MBC(Chapter 3) Basement A-3 (Assembly) First Floor B (Business) A-3 (Assembly) R-2 (Assisted Living Facility)per 780 CMR 310.1 S-2 (Low Hazard Storage) Second Floor R-2 (Assisted Living Facility)per 780 CMR 310.1 Third Floor R-2 (Assisted Living Facility)per 780 CMR 310.1 Note 1: The residents in assisted living are capable of self-preservation and therefore fall under Assisted Living Facilities and do not fall under the I- 2 use group. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-2 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 15010-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. All work of this section is specifically subject to the General Conditions for the entire project. B. Provide all items, articles,materials, operations, or methods listed, mentioned, scheduled on the drawings and/or specified herein including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for their completion. 1.02 INTENT A. The intent of the specifications and drawings is to call for finish work, tested and ready for operation. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or service not specified or indicated but necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation shall be provided. C. The drawings are generally diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate the general arrangement of equipment and piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Architect. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall, at all times,keep a competent foreman in charge of the work and shall facilitate its inspection by the Architect. 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. All work shall comply with applicable portions of all state or local laws,ordinances,rules and regulations of local utility companies and fire departments and all other authorities having jurisdiction. B. Nothing contained in these specifications or indicated on the drawings shall be construed to conflict with applicable portions of any laws,ordinances,rules and regulations. Rockridge—Northampton,MA General Requirements 15010-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 oil 15000—ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 ALTERNATES A. Values to be added to the base contract for the work itemized below shall be entered on the Contractor's bid form. B. Alternate numbers and descriptions: M1 The mechanical contractor shall furnish a per unit price to install a steam humidifier (H2) in cottages as detailed on drawing M-9. Price shall include all related work including installation,piping and controls. END OF SECTION 15000 Alternates Rockridge—Northampton,MA 15000-1 EGA,P.C. 11/3/2003 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures,either within finished cars or in place of finished cars,to protect finishes from damage. 1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 2. Provide protective coverings,barriers,devices,signs,and other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the A"k field to the shop,make required repairs and refinish entire unit,or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION 14240 Hydraulic Elevators-14240 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 9 of 9 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinders; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 1. Provide well casings as necessary to retain walls of well hole. B. Install cylinders in protective casings within well hole or casing. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well hole or casing and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing. Fill void space between protective casing and cylinder with corrosion-protective filler. 1. Align cylinders and fill space between well casing and protective casing with fine sand. C. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit floor with 4 inches (100 mm) of nonshrink,nonmetallic grout. D. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure- borne noise from elevator system. E. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cement fittings. F. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. G. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum,safe,workable dimension at each landing. H. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch(6 mm),up or down,regardless of load and direction of travel. I. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators,perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner,Architect,and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. Hydraulic Elevators-14240 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 8 of 9 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.:10213 5. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. 6. Security Features: None. 7. Car Enclosures: As follows: a. Inside Width: 80 inches(2032 mm). b. Inside Depth: 51 inches(1295 mm). C. Inside Height: 88 inches(2235 mm). d. Front Walls: Brushed stainless steel with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Brushed stainless steel. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Reveals: Enameled steel. h. Door Faces(Interior): Enameled steel. i. Door Sills: Aluminum. j. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling. k. Handrails: Brushed stainless steel at side and rear walls. 1. Floor prepared to receive carpet(specified in Division 9 Section"Carpet"). 8. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Width: 42 inches(1067 mm). b. Height: 84 inches(2134 mm). C. Type: Single-speed side sliding. d. Frames: Enameled steel. e. Doors: Enameled steel. f. Sills: Aluminum. 9. Hall Fixtures: Brushed stainless steel. 10. Additional Requirements: As follows: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with brushed stainless-steel frame. b. Provide protective blanket hooks in car and one complete set of full-height blankets. 11. Number of Stops:4 12. Floor-to-Floor Heights: a. Basement Level to First Floor: 10'-0". b. First Floor to Second Floor: 10'-0". C. Second Floor to Third Floor: 10'-0". 13. Entrance Frame: 8" throat drywall type. Note: Elevator shaft is 2 hour fire rated wood construction consisting of 2 layers 5/8" type X6WB over 2x6 wood studs on elevator side and 2 layers 5/8"Type X6WB over''/1"resilient channels on the outside of the shaft. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ate* A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine Hydraulic Elevators-14240 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 7 of 9 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with a uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor- controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. 2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), lighting,and ventilation. 1. Floor finish is specified in another Section. 2. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire- retardant-treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing complying with NEMA LD 3, Type BKV and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less,when tested according to ASTM E 84. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush,hollow-metal construction. 6. Sills: Extruded metal,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)thick. 7. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 8. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails. 2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following: 1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed steel sheet. 2. Enameled-Steel Doors and Transoms: Flush,hollow-metal construction. 3. Sills: Extruded metal,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)thick. 4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. 2.8 PASSENGER ELEVATORS A. Elevator No.: 2. 1. Type: Under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Rated Load: 2500 lb(1135 kg). 3. Rated Speed: 100 fpm(0.51 m/s). 4. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator with hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent,nonyellowing translucent plastic. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard semi recessed car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door,if not otherwise indicated. C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification,instructions for use,and battery backup power supply. D. Fire Department Communication System: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for fire department communication system. E. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars,provide illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. G. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows,but provide single arrow at terminal landings. 1. Place lanterns in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches(1829 mm)above finished floor. a. At manufacturer's option,for single elevators or for only two cars in a group, lanterns may be located in car doorjambs instead of entrance jambs. 2. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. a. At manufacturer's option,audible signals may be placed on each car. H. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations with text and graphics according to ASME A17.1,Appendix H. Coordinate with sign subcontractor. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 1. Provide dielectric couplings at plunger/cylinder units. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785 joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section. F. Protective Cylinder Casings: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not Iess than 1-inch(25-mm)clearance from cylinder,and extending above pit floor. G. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 1. For freight elevators, provide special heavy-duty units where indicated for power truck loading, designed to withstand impacts and wheel loadings indicated. H. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures,car doors,hoistway entrance doors and frames,and signal equipment as indicated: 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304,with No.6,nondirectional satin finish. 2. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M may be used for door frames. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366/A 366M, or hot-rolled steel sheet,ASTM A 569/A 569M,with factory-applied rust-inhibitive primer. 4. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications; color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products. 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. Passenger Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. 1. Single Elevator: Provide"selective collective automatic operation"as defined in ASME A17.1. B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features,provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their doors and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered to a pre-selected floor, open their doors and shut down. Cars that are below the pre-selected floor are lowered to the next lower floor, open their doors and shut down. Systems include rechargeable batter and automatic recharging system. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Include 24-hour-per-day,7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services,obligations,conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: I. Thyssen Krupp(formerly Dover Elevator Co.)-Basis of Design. 2. Fujitec America,Inc. 3. Montgomery KONE Inc. 4. Otis Elevator Co. 5. Schindler Elevator Corp. 6. Schumacher Elevator Co. 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard pre- engineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following: 1. Pump, with fan-cooled squirrel-cage induction motor, mounted on top of oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick,glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended in tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with solid-state starting. 4. Provide variable-voltage variable-frequency motor control. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout- proof housing at pump unit. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing,machine room layout,coordination with building structure,relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, including emergency generator,as shown and specified,are adequate for elevator system being provided. D. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated,recommended parts inventory listing,emergency instructions,and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. E. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal,unrestricted elevator use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A 17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators." 1. Seismic Risk Zone: Project is located in Zone 2. C. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG)." 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or fastened to wood framing for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 SECTION 14240-HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for excavation to accommodate plunger-cylinder assembly. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. C. Pit ladders. 4. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field painting of hoistway entrances. 5. Division 9 Section "Carpet" for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Division 16 Sections for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 7. Division 16 Sections for telephone service to elevators. 8. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect switches at machine room door and standby power source, and connection from auxiliary contacts in disconnect to controller. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual,unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Hydraulic Elevators-14240 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 0011 SECTION 12500-WINDOW DRAPERIES/BLINDS AND TRACK PART 1 -SCOPE 1.1 Work of this Section is included in the Interior Design Contract. General Contractor is to provide all blocking as required to install window drapery and window blind hardware. Provide for electric tracks at the second story windows at the main entrance lobby. END OF SECTION 12500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Window Draperies/Blinds and Track-12500 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 1 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips,and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet(3 nun in 2.4 m). D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1, For Wood Frame Construction: Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch(25- nun)penetration into wood framing,blocking,or hanging strips. 2. For Metal Stud Construction: Fasten wall cabinets through back,near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through comer blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed . clamping devices designed for this purpose. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12356 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Kitchen and Bath Casework-12356 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1. Grade: HGP for flat countertops. 2. Grade: HGP for post formed countertops. 3. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. 2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9,of type,material, size,and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. B. Hinges: Concealed European-style hinges. C. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. D. Wire Pulls: 3"chrome similar to Ives No. 36 E. Pull out tray below sink. 2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION A. Face Frames: Frameless. B. Door and Drawer Fronts: 5/8" thick particleboard with melamine-laminate faces and backs, and PVC edge banding. Provide same grade, pattern, color and texture of plastic laminate for backs as for faces. Doors style to indicate stile and rail with raised panel in rectangular configuration. C. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Melamine-laminate-faced particleboard. D. Shelves: 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)thick particleboard or''/z-inch-(12.7-mm-)thick plywood. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), backsplash,and end-splash style: 1. Front: Rolled. 2. Backsplash: Curved or waterfall shape with scribe. 3. End Splash: Square edge with scribe. B. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 1/4 inches(19 mm)thick, 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Kitchen and Bath Casework-12356 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen casework. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Cabinets: Fleur de Lys, Kitchens International, Inc. -White satin lacquer frameless square, raised panel cabinetry. 2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Formica Corp. b. Laminart. C. Nevamar Corp. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.;Specialty Products Div. f. Wilson: Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2 COLORS,TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Unless otherwise selected or indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. 5/8"thick melamine board with PVC edge banding. B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: 1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density particleboard complying with ANSI A 208.1, Grade M-2; with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. a. Provide thermoset decorative overlay on both sides of shelves,dividers,drawer bodies,and other components with two semi-exposed surfaces. b. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with semiexposed edges. C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Kitchen and Bath Casework-12356 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing ?ow the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following materials;in sets showing the full range of color,texture,and pattern variations expected: 1. Plastic laminate for casework finish, 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm). 2. Plastic laminate for countertops,8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm). 3. One unit of each type of exposed hardware. E. Samples for Verification as follows: 1. One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors and drawers, but without countertop. 2. One full-size,finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors and adjustable shelves. 3. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm). F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers'casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions." C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated,comply with the following standards: 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. 2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A 161.2. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed, wet- work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Kitchen and Bath Casework-12356 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 12356—KITCHEN AND BATH CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced kitchen cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate-faced vanity cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 11 Section"Residential Appliances" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework. 2. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as"semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid-surfacing material. 4. Cabinet hardware. B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Kitchen and Bath Casework-12356 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 P. Wall Oven;UL listed,Country Kitchen. emu` 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number: JKP20WF. 2. Type:27"built-in single electric oven. 3. Cleaning: Self cleaning. 4. Color: White. 5. Options:None. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. 00"` C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11451 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 K. Cooktop:Electric,built-in,30". Kitchen 3-2a. 1. Basis-of-Design Product:GE;Model number: JP326WV. 2. Type: 30"electric,four burner, side controls,UL listed. 3. Color:White. 4. Options:None. L. Dishwasher: Built-in, undercounter, automatic dishwasher, 18" width, with hot-air and heat off drying cycles, sliding dish racks and removable silverware basket,UL listed. Kitchen 3-2a. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number: GSS1800Z. 2. Number of Wash Cycles: 4. 3. Tub and Door Liner: Polypropylene. 4. Dish Racks:Nylon coated. 5. Color: White. 6. Options:None. M. Cooktop: Electric,built-in,2111,Kitchen 1,2a 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number:JP202D 2. Type: 21"electric cooktop,21",2 burner,front. 3. Color:White. 4. Options:None. N. Refrigerator/Freezer: Top freezer,cycle defrost. Kitchen 1,2a. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number:GFRI2AAM. 2. Type:Top freezer/refrigerator. 3. Defrosting: Cycle. 4. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic copolymer. 5. Capacity: 11.7 cu.ft. 6. Color:White. 7. Options:None. O. Clothes Washer/Dryer: 27" freestanding, stackable in cottages; built-in side-by-side in common resident laundry rooms. 1. Washer Basis-of-Design Product:GE;Model number WSXH208A. 2. Washer Type:Front loading,automatic. 3. Washer Capacity: 2.7 cu. ft. 4. Washer Color:White. 5. Washer Options:None. 6. Dryer Basis-of-Design Product: GE Model number DSXH43EA. 7. Dryer Type: Electric,front-loading,automatic. 8. Dryer Capacity: 5.7 cu. ft. 9. Dryer Color:White. 10. Dryer Options: Stacking kit. NOTE: if requested by cottage resident to replace stacked washer/dryer with an accessible washer/dryer, then the following may be installed: 1. Equator EZ2512CEE Slimline washer/dryer combo. 2. Equator EZ3612CEE washer/dryer combo. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Disposal: UL listed. Kitchen 3,3-2a,Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE GFC3250F. 2. 1/3 HP motor. 3. Stainless steel construction. 4. Continuous feed. 5. SS Flange,sink stopper,drain connector. F. Cook Top: Electric,UL listed. Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number: JP350WC. 2. Type: Electric frameless cook top. 30". Ceramic glass. 3. Options:None. G. Wall Oven:UL listed;Kitchen 3-2a. 1. Basis of Design Product:GE;Model number: JTP18WD. 2. Type: 30"built-in single electric oven. 3. Cleaning: Self-cleaning. 4. Color:White. 5. Options: None. H. Undercounter Microwave:UL listed. Kitchen 1,Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number:JEM25WY. 2. Type: Countertop. 3. Capacity: 0.9 cu.ft. 4. Wattage: 800 watts. 5. Color: White. 6. Options: Under cabinet mounting kit. I. Refrigerator/Freezer:Top freezer, frost-free,21.8 cu.ft. Kitchen 3,3-2a. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number:GTS221BM 2. Type:Top freezer/refrigerator. 3. Defrosting:No-frost. 4. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic copolymer. 5. Capacity:21.8 cu. ft. 6. Color: White. 7. Options:None. J. Range Hood: 30",Non-vented. Kitchen 2a,3-2a,Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE Model number:JN347X. 2. Type: 30"standard, non-vented. 3. Fan Controls: 3 speed. 4. Color: White. 5. Options:None. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 11/3!03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Amana Refrigeration,Inc. 2. Frigidaire Appliance Company. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Hotpoint. 5. Kitchen Aid,Inc. 6. Maytag Corporation. 7. Whirlpool Corporation. 8. White-Westinghouse. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Electric Range: With four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler,UL listed. Kitchen 3-2a. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number JSP34WW. 2. Width: 30 inches(762 mm). 3. Type: Slide-in. 4. Oven Cleaning: Self. 5. Color: White. 6. Options:None. NOTES: Range comes standard with a trim package for square edge countertop. Coordinate with countertop supplier. Design intent is to have continuous counter backsplash behind slide-in range. B. Microwave Oven/Exhaust Hood: UL listed. Kitchen 3. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE Spacemaker;Model number JVM1441WD. 2. Type:Convection Microwave,recirculating exhaust(300 CFM)built-in,over range. 3. Capacity: 1.4 cu.Ft. 4. Wattage: 950 W. 5. Color: White. 6. Options:None. C. Refrigerator/Freezer: Side-by-side refrigerator with optional icemaker,UL listed. Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number GSS 20 DBP. 2. Type: Side-by-side. 3. Defrosting: Cycle defrost. 4. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic copolymer. 5. Capacity: 19.8 cu. ft. 6. Color:White. 7. Options:Ice maker;GE Model Number:IMSSS. D. Dishwasher: Built-in, undercounter, automatic dishwasher, sized to replace 24-inch- (610-mm-) base cabinet, with hot-air and heat-off drying cycles, sliding dish racks with removable silverware basket,UL listed. Kitchen 3, Country Kitchen. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE;Model number GSD2030FWW. 2. Number of Wash Cycles: 4. 3. Tub and Door Liner:Polypropylene. 4. Dish Racks:Nylon coated. 5. Color:White. 6. Options:None. loW Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 Page 3 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential 00W appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated in the schedules. Other manufacturers'appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions." D. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: 1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1. G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Electric Range: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner elements. 2. Microwave Oven: 10-year limited warranty for in-home service on defects in the magnetron tube. 3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. 4. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty against deterioration of tub and door liner. 5. Clothes Washer: 10-year limited warranty for in-home service on the inner wash basket and outer tub, and five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the balance suspension system and drive transmission. 6. Disposal: 5-year for in-home service. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on the product named. AMP%, Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment, including ranges,cooktops,and wall ovens and microwave ovens. 2. Range hoods. 3. Refrigerator/freezers. 4. Dishwashers. 5. Clothes washers and dryers. 6. Apartment disposals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for plumbing connections to residential OOK appliances. 2. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage plumbing connections to residential appliances. 3. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks and waste disposers. 4. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. B. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations shown on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from multiple manufacturers. 1. Provide products from the same manufacturer for each type of appliance required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Residential Appliances-11451 Page 1 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Assisted Living Cottages-%Bath Room; Type 2a Shower Curtain Rod By Shower Manufacturer Shower Grab Bar By Shower Manufacturer Surface mtd. Paper Holder Anchor AH514 White Robe Hook Anchor AH510 White Towel Bar/Grab Bar 24" Anchor AT24100 White Grab Bar 42"(2) N.I.C. Shower Vertical Grab Bar Anchor Type 30" White Medicine Cabinet Body Nutone CMB 2 White Medicine Cabinet Door Nutone CSD10 8 White Mirror 33"X 36"by Section 08800 White Added Shower Grab Bar Anchor Type A 18" Assisted Living Apartment%Bath Room; Type 4 Shower Curtain Rod By Shower Manufacturer Shower Grab Bar By Shower Manufacturer Surface mtd.Paper Holder Anchor AH514 White Robe Hook Anchor AH510 White Towel Bar/Grab Bar Anchor AT24100 White Grab Bar 42"(2) N.I.C. Shower Vertical Grab Bar Anchor Type A 30" White Medicine Cabinet Body Nutone CMB24 White Medicine Cabinet Door Nutone CSD 108 White Mirror 33" X 36"by Section 08800 White Added Shower Grab Bar Anchor Type A 18" Typical Single Toilet Room Recessed Paper Towel/Waste Disp. Bobrick B-685 Chrome Grab Bars 42"(2) Bobrick B-36903 SS Soap Dispenser Bobrick B-6206.99-42" SS Robe Hook Bobrick B-819 SS Mirror 24" x 36"by Section 08800 END OF SECTION 10801 ,mow Rockridge-Northampton,MA Toilet and Bath Accessories-10801 Page 4 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Schedule: Assisted Living Apartment-3/Bath Room; Type 1, 1a Item Manufacturer Number Finish Shower Curtain Rod By Shower Manufacturer Shower Grab Bar By Shower Manufacturer Surface mtd. Paper Holder Anchor AH514 White Robe Hook Anchor AH510 White Towel Bar/Grab Bar 24" Anchor AT24100 White Grab Bar 24" Anchor Type A 24" White Grab Bar 42" Anchor Type A 42" White Medicine Cabinet Body Nutone CMB24 White Medicine Cabinet Door Nutone CSD108 White Mirror 32"x 34"by Section 08800 Added Shower Grab Bar Anchor Type A 18" White Assisted Living Cottage-'/o Bath Room;Type 2 Shower Curtain Rod By Shower Manufacturer Shower Grab Bar By Shower Manufacturer Surface mtd.Paper Holder Anchor AH514 White Robe Hook Anchor AH510 White +. Towel Bar/Grab Bar 24" Anchor AT24100 White Grab Bar 24" N.I.C. Grab Bar 42" N.I.C. Medicine Cabinet Body Nutone CMB24 White Medicine Cabinet Door Nutone CSD108 White Mirror 32"x 36"by Section 08800 Added Shower Grab Bar Anchor Type A 18" White Assisted Living Cottages-%Bath Room;Type 3 Surface mtd.Paper holder Anchor AH514 White Robe Hook Anchor AH510 White Towel Bar/Grab Bar 24" Anchor AT24100 White Grab Bar 24" N.I.C. Grab Bar 48" N.I.C. Medicine Cabinet Body Nutone CMB24 White Medicine Cabinet Door Nutone CSD108 White Mirror 32"X 36"by Section 08800 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Toilet and Bath Accessories-10801 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,those indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Provide residential quality toilet accessories as scheduled for apartment bathrooms, and commercial quality at employee lockers and common area toilet rooms. B. Products: Nutone,Bobrick,Anchor as scheduled. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Toilet and Bath Accessories-10801 Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section"Mirrored Glass" for frameless mirrors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options,and frdshes for each type of accessory specified. B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation,and finish requirements. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions,and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Accessory requirements,including those for materials,finishes,dimensions,capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Other manufacturers' products with equal characteristics may be considered. See Division 1 Section"Substitutions." Rockridge-Northampton,MA Toilet and Bath Accessories-10801 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 'Apok, C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint; paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 10605 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 Page 6 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Wire Mesh Storage Lockers: Anchor wire mesh storage lockers to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through bottom panel framing. Shim panel framing as required to achieve level and plumb installation. 1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Anchor wire mesh storage lockers to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows: a. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. b. For hollow masonry anchorage,use toggle bolts. C. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. d. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. e. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3. Attach adjacent wire mesh storage lockers to each other through side panel framing. 4. Install doors complete with door hardware. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. B. Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 G. Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as wall panels, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8- inch(32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles on 4 sides; with wire mesh welded to framing. Include door strike and padlock hasp. 1. Horizontal Stiffeners for Single-Tier Doors: 3/4-by-1/4-inch(19-by-6-mm)steel flat bars. 2. Hinges: Full-surface type, 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (64-by-64-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per single-tier door;bolted,riveted,or welded to door and jamb framing. H. Finishes:Baked-enamel finish. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger- size components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. Provide bolts, hardware, and accessories as required for complete installation. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and remove spatter. B. Wire Mesh Storage Lockers: Fabricate initial storage locker with front and two sides. Fabricate additional storage lockers as add-on units,designed to share one side with initial storage locker. 1. Fabricate wall panel and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. 2. Prehang doors in factory. 2.6 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish wire mesh items after assembly. 2. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Nongalvanized Surfaces: Prepare nongalvanized surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed wire mesh items: 1. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of wire mesh items, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for shop painting. D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard one- coat, baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil(0.025 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 Page 4 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11. Wire Crafters,Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510(ASTM A 510M). B. Steel Plates,Channels,Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. E. Square Steel Tubing: Cold-formed structural-steel tubing,ASTM A 500. F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc(galvanized)or A60(ZF180)zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating designation. G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a , ** sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.4 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS A. Unit Sizes: 1. Width: 3'2". 2. Depth: 3'9". 3. Height: 90 inches. B. Mesh: 0.135-inch-(3.5-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-by-2-inch(25-by-50- mm)rectangular mesh. C. Wall Panels: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angle framing on top, bottom, and back sides, and 3-by-1/8-inch (76-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel flat bar framing on front side; with wire mesh welded to framing. 1. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch(32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles or 3/4- by-1/4-inch(19-by-6-mm)hot-rolled steel flat bars. D. Backs: 0.0269-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet, where lockers are placed back to back or away from a wall. E. Tops: Not required. F. Horizontal Dividers/Shelves: Not required. Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 3 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire mesh items with care and necessary protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure area for products delivered to Project site. 1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of construction contiguous with wire mesh items by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish location dimensions and proceed with fabricating wire mesh items without field measurements. Coordinate wall, column, floor and ceiling construction to ensure that actual location dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for wire mesh items supported or anchored to permanent construction. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Acorn Wire&Iron Works,Inc. 2. California Wire Products Corporation. 3. G-S Company(The). 4. Indiana Wire Products,Inc. 5. Jesco Industries,Inc. 6. King Wire Partitions,Inc. 7. Miller Wire Works,Inc. 8. Newark Wire Works Inc. 9. SpaceGuard Products. 10. Standard Wire&Steel Works. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 ' SECTION 10605 -WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following items fabricated from wire mesh: 1. Storage lockers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying for wire mesh partition doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terms below shall be as defined in ASTM E 2016: 1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions,with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections. 2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for wire mesh items. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." R Wire Mesh Partitions-10605 ockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,and maintain postal specialties. Refer to Division 1 Section"Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 10550 Postal Specialties-10550 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 7 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. I. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where recessed units will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. 1. Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of **- dissimilar metals. 2. Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Install horizontal apartment mailboxes with center of tenant-door lock cylinder not more than 67 inches (1702 nun)above finished floor and bottom of lowest compartment not less than 28 inches(711 mm)above finished floor. 1, Arrange compartments in groups, with not more than 35 and not less than 4 compartments operated by 1 master lock. C. Collection Boxes: Install collection boxes with bottom of mail slots not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) above finished floor. Align with apartment mailboxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain written final approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection. 3.4 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Key Cabinets: Wall-mounted,metallic-coated steel cabinet with pivoting, key-holding panels and side- hinged door equipped with five-pin tumbler, cylinder door lock and concealed, full-length flush hinge. Finish cabinet,panels, and door with baked-enamel finish. Provide key control system consisting of key- holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. 1. Capacity: Keys for 150 percent of the number of apartment mailbox locks. 2. Cross-Index System: Consisting of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes,with true lines and angles, square,rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs,and safe to touch. B. Mill joints to a tight,hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used,seal external rivets before finishing. D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed AOW and contact surfaces. E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding,warping,or misalignment. F. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.7 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish postal specialties after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 00W Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 Page 5 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 6. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested units, with cardholder for tenant's identification behind each compartment. a. Provide cardboard identification tab with space for printing tenant name and apartment number. 7. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. 8. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet. 9. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 COLLECTION BOXES A. USPS-Approved,Front-Loading, Collection Boxes: Consisting of single compartment with fire-resistant cushion bottom, enclosed within recessed wall box, with mail slot to receive mail. Provide access to compartment for collecting mail from front of unit. Comply with USPS Publication 16. 1. Available Products: a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Co.,A Florence Company;2600F5-150,2600175-65. b. Bommer;465-7. 2. Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed on USPS's "Approved Sources List." 3. Mounting:Recessed. 4. Overall Height: Sized to match height of 7(seven)horizontal apartment mailboxes. 5. Compartment Door and Frame: Fabricated from 'A"(6mm)thick metal plate with opening not less than 12 by 20 inches (305 x 508mm) and not more than 18 by 30 inches (457 x 762 mm). Equip door with lock and concealed,full-length,flush hinge on one side. a. Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 6. Mail Slot: Fabricated from 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)thick metal plate, with 11-inch-wide by 1-1/4-inch- (279-mm-wide by 32-mm-)high opening,protected by inside hood and hinge flap,and with inside baffle to prevent removal of mail from box. 7. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet. 8. Identification: Engrave face of unit with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters as follows: "U.S. MAIL LETTER BOX"on 2 lines at top or bottom of unit. 9. Schedule-Card Holder: Provide recessed or surface-mounted holder for schedule card in center of bottom front portion of unit. Fabricate of same material and finish as front of unit. 10. Mailbag Rack: Provide internal rack system for supporting mailbags within unit. 11. Material and Finish: Aluminum,anodic finish; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide accessories fabricated by same manufacturer as apartment mailboxes. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36B 36M,copper alloy UNS No. C28000(muntz metal, 60 percent copper). F. Die-Cast Brass: ASTM B 176,copper alloy UNS No. C85800. G. Steel Anchor Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55,hot-dip galvanized. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. 2.3 HORIZONTAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES A. USPS-Approved,Front-Loading,Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from rear of unit with accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-4B. I. Available Products: a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Co.,A Florence Company;2600 Centurian Series. b. Bommer Industries,Inc.;6300 Series. C. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation;Supreme Series. d. Jensen Industries;90 Series. e. Meta-Lite,Inc.;Spad System. f. Salsbury Industries;3600 Series. g. Security Manufacturing Corporation;900 Series. 2. Mail Delivery: USPS. 3. Compartments: Number and size of compartments as follows: a. Type A: Inside dimensions not less than 5 inches high by 6 inches wide by 15 inches(127 mm high by 152 mm wide by 381 nun) deep. Provide 82 (plus 2 for post office) compartments,2 x 7 high by 6 wide. 4. Front Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; with master door lock and concealed, full-length, stainless-steel piano hinge on one side. Fabricate master door to remain open while mail is deposited. a. Master Door Lock:Prepare master door to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 5. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from aluminum sheet reinforced with vertical stiffeners. Equip each compartment door with lock, tenant identification, and concealed, full-length, flush hinge on one side. a. Tenant Identification: 2-inch-wide by 5/8-inch- (51-nun-wide by 16-mm-) high, clear- plastic cardholder set in recessed slot in face of compartment door. Provide cardboard strip and self-adhesive numbers. b. Compartment Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder spring-latch-type locks capable of at least 1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size,profiles,and dimensional requirements of postal specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section"Product Requirements." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver lock keys to Owner with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed postal specialties with wall construction. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Key Blanks: Furnish not less than 1 for every 2 locks or fraction thereof, of each type of compartment door lock installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled,ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation;or electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet,ASTM A 591/A 591M,Class C coating. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304. A Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 Page 2 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 001 SECTION 10550—POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Horizontal apartment mailboxes. 2. Collection boxes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for each type of postal specialty. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and ± " attachments to other work. 1. Include identification sequence for compartments. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch (150-by- 150-mm)square Samples. E. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations,signed by product manufacturer. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. H. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain postal specialties through one source from a single manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Postal Specialties-10550 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed,unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation,clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.6 SCHEDULE Cabinet Type ui Extin g 'shers FE-1 FE-2 Type ABC Type K Drawin D si nation Brackets Only FE-1-B FE-2-B Extinguisher Only FE-1-CO Semi Recessed Nonrated Extinguisher Only FE-1-C1 Semi-Recessed 1-hour rated Extinguisher Only FE-1-C2 Semi-Recessed 2-hour rated Extinguisher&Valve FE-1-VC0 Recessed Nonrated Extinguisher&Valve FE-1-VC1 Recessed 1-hour rated Extinguisher&Valve FE-1-VC2 Recessed 2-hour rated END OF SECTION 10520 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 8 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two- coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils(0.05 mm). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective,or undercharged units. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated and otherwise at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches(1372 mm)above finished floor to top of cabinet. 2. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches(1372 mm)above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure,square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets,square and plumb. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces,square and plumb,at locations indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RATED VALVE CABINETS A. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 7 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Color: Manufacturer's standard black or red. C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. a. Orientation: Vertical. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type,trim style,and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)thick,fire-barrier material. a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,minimum 1/2 inch(13 mm)thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered,welded, and ground smooth. 2.7 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil, grease,mill scale,rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 4 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 6 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. a. Exposed flat trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) of/<to 5/16 inch. 4. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 5. Door Material: Sheet steel. 6. Door Glazing: Flat acrylic sheet,bronze transparent color. 7. Door Hardware: Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type,trim style,and door material and style indicated. a. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. b. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 8. Accessories: a. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked enamel finish. b. Identification: Letting complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing and location. 1) Identify fire extinguishers in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 2) Location: Apply to cabinet glazing. 3) Application Process:Pressure sensitive vinyl letters. 4) Lettering color: White. 5) Orientation:Vertical. C. Alarm:None. 9. Finishes: a. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel paint for exterior door and trim and cabinet interior. Color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End&Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries,Inc. 8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. Potter Roemer;Div.of Smith Industries,Inc. B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked- enamel finish. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 5 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3103 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Cabinet Types: CO,Cl,C2; Suitable for extinguisher only. 1. Cabinet Construction: a. CO:Nonrated b. Cl: 1-hour rated. C. C2: 2-hour rated. 2. Cabinet Material: Enameled steel. 3. Semirecessed cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls to unit style of trim indicated; with one piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge(backbend). a. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch backbend depth. 4. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 5. Door Material: Steel sheet. 6. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet;bubble-type;bronze transparent color. 7. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style,and door material and style indicated. a. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. b. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 8. Accessories: a. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked enamel finish. b. Identification: Letting complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing and location. 1) Identify fire extinguishers in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 2) Location:Apply to cabinet glazing. 3) Application Process:Pressure sensitive vinyl letters. 4) Lettering color:White. 5) Orientation:Vertical. C. Alarm:None. 9. Finishes: a. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel paint for exterior door and trim and cabinet interior. Color as selected from manufacturer's full range. C. Cabinet Types: VCO,VC I,VC2;suitable for hose valve and fire extinguisher. 1. Cabinet Construction: a. VCO:Nonrated. b. VC 1: 1-hour rated. C. VC2: 2-hour rated. 2. Cabinet Material: Enameled steel. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 4 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type II,Class 1,Form 1,Quality q8,Mesh ml (diamond), 6 mm thick. 1. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I,Class 1,Quality q2,3 mm thick,double strength. J. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). K. Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End&Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries,Inc. 8. Kidde Fymetics. 9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 10. Modem Metal Products;Div. of Technico. 11. Moon American. 12. Potter Roemer;Div. of Smith Industries,Inc. 13. Watrous;Div.of American Specialties,Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,Appendix B. C. Wet-Chemical Type FE-2: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity, with potassium acetate-based chemical in stainless-steel container;with pressure-indicating gage. D. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container Type FE-1: UL-4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b (4.5-kg) nominal capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fire End&Croker Corporation. 2. General Accessory Mfg. Co. 3. JL Industries,Inc. 4. Kidde Fyrnetics. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Modern Metal Products;Div.of Technico. 7. Moon American. 8. Potter Roemer;Div.of Smith Industries,Inc. 9. Watrous;Div. of American Specialties,Inc. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 Page 3 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated,and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304. D. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, 3mm thick. E. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). F. Break Glass: Clear float glass,ASTM C 1036,Type I,Class 1,Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick,single strength. A00'" G. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048,Kind FT, Condition A,Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 10520-FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. b. Fire hose valves. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping sealants at fire-rated cabinets. 2. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets. 3. Division 13 Section"Fire-Suppression Piping"for hose systems,racks,and valves. 4. Division 15 Section "Commercial Kitchen Hoods" for fire extinguishing systems provided as part of commercial kitchen exhaust hoods. 5. Division 16 Section"Interior Lighting" for fire extinguisher location lights. 6. Division 16 Sections for low-voltage wiring for fire-protection cabinet alarms. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required for fire- protection cabinets,prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches(150 by 150 mm)square. C. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fire Protection Specialties-10520 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 MUN 11 a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler where required for wood species used. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd-or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. B. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first varnish coat. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler where required for wood species used. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. C. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd-or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. END OF SECTION 09912 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 22 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. F. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: One finish coat over a primer. Generally used for all GWB ceilings. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. ate" 2. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer. Generally used for all GWB painted walls in public use areas. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 3. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer. Generally used for all GWB painted walls in service areas. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 4. Wall Covering Finish: a. Primer:Interior gypsum board primer. b. Wallcovering:Under provision of Section 09720—Wallcovering. B. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: I. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a wood undercoater. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: , ►►, 1, Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 21 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11 13/03 L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling,such as laps,irregularity in texture,skid marks,or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over cement fiber siding: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. See Section 07460 for shop primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum soffit board: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior gypsum soffit board primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint. C. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 20 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush,roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed and visible from the exterior and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Roof-top equipment. 2. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. G. Electrical items to be painted include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Panelboard and breaker box covers. 2. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,runs, sags,ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent(Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity,brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. I. Provide satin finish for final coats. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 19 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40"k, 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil,grease, dirt,loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes will be indicated in the paint schedules. Schedules will be provided by interior designer/architect during construction. 1 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas,as required,to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Finish doors on tops,bottoms,and side edges the same as faces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions,sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 18 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40%, B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item,provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse,allow to dry,and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,ends,faces, undersides,and back sides of wood,including cabinets,counters,cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required,backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 17 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Dulux Paints;none required. 4. Kelly-Moore;none required. 5. M.A.B.Paint;Paste Wood Filler. 6. Pittsburgh Paints;none required. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore;Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Coronado;3601-Line Quick-Seal Alkyd Stain. 3. Dulux Paints; 1700-XXX WoodPride Interior Solventbome Wood Finishing Stain. 4. Kelly-Moore;McCloskey Stain. 5. M.A.B.Paint;Wood Stain 062 Line. 6. Pittsburgh Paints;77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. 7. Sherwin-Williams;Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series. C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore does not recommend using product under polyurethane coatings. 2. Coronado; 81-10 Dual Seal. 3. Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore;2164 E Z Sand Alkyd Q.D. Sealer. 5. M.A.B.Paint;Minit Dri Sanding Sealer 037-005 Line. 6. Pittsburgh Paints;6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish. 7. Sherwin-Williams;Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or polyurethane- based clear varnish. 1. Benjamin Moore;Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre No.435. 2. Coronado;67-100 Polyurethane Liquid Plastic Satin Varnish. 3. Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore;2050 Kel--Aqua Stain Base. 5. M.A.B.Paint;Rich Lux Water Based Satin Polyurethane. 6. Pittsburgh Paints;77-7 Rez Varnish,Interior Satin Oil Clear. 7. Sherwin-Williams;Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 16 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Dulux Paints; 1516-XXXX Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1630--Kel-Cote Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint;Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss 403 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi-Gloss Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). F. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Gypsum Board and Plaster: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No.M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1700 Kel-Guard Gloss Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint;Rich Lux Architectural Bright White Enamel 026-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). G. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No.M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1630--Kel-Cote Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 5. M. A.B.Paint;Rich Lux Architectural Bright White Ename1026-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel 1335W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 2.8 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore;Benwood Paste Wood Filler No.238. 2. Coronado;none required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 15 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Satin Eggshell Enamel 405 Line: Applied at a dry film Roft thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils(0.032 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 32-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 nun). 3. Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 nun). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1649 Acrylic-Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 1685 Dura-Poxy Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). For use in lieu of 4 above for a semigloss finish over interior wood. 6. M.A.B.Paint;Fresh Kote Latex Semi-Gloss 410 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams;ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No.M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado;414 Line Super Kote 5000 Acrylic High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 5. M. A.B. Paint;Rich Lux Architectural High Gloss Latex Enamel 022-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-374 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). For use in lieu of 6 above for a high-gloss finish over ferrous and zinc-coated metal. 8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). E. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No.271: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 2. Coronado; 27-Line Super Kote 5000 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 14 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils(0.061 mm). F. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1700 Kel-Guard Gloss Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 nun). 5. M.A.B.Paint;Rust-O-Lastic Finish Coating 074 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 nun). 7. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No.275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Flat Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 450 Pro-Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Flat 402 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No.274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 2. Coronado; 30-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). For use in lieu of 4 above for a low-luster finish over interior. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 13 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils(0.028 mm). 2. Coronado; 12-Line Supreme Acrylic Semi-Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Acrylic Latex Trim Enamel 024 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams;A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado;414 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Finish 043 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Iess than 2.4 mils(0.061 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior High Gloss Latex Enamel A85 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). For use in lieu of 7 above as the finish coat over exterior wood trim only. E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Finish 043 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 12 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry look film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073-189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams;primer not required over this substrate. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS B50WZ30: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). Use this in lieu of "T' above over galvanized metal surfaces under alkyd finishes. 2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 2. Coronado;8-Line Supreme Acrylic Latex Flat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2200-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1205 Color Shield Exterior Flat Acrylic House Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex House Paint 409 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 2. Coronado; 408-Line Supreme Acrylic Satin Exterior: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Eggshell 405 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). edHide Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic Latex: 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series Spe Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-400 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM m Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). For use in lieu of 6 above for a low-luster acrylic finish over zinc-coated metal. 8. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House &Trim Paint A82 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). mow. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 11 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Latex Undercoat 037-154: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less IAOP*., than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer 1328W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). Use this in lieu of"7" above under semigloss acrylic-enamel finishes. E. Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex- based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No.245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 2. Coronado; 78-11 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 1120-1200 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 985 Flo-Cote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils(0.064 mm). 5. M. A.B. Paint; Rich Lux Latex Undercoater 037-154: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-6 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). F. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No.M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 4. Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). Use this in lieu of"3"above under semigloss alkyd-enamel and full-gloss acrylic-enamel and alkyd-enamel finishes. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 6. M. A. B.Paint;Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer 073-132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). G. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No.M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than ee 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). Rackridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 10 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 4. Kelly-Moore;971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not "`" less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint;Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No.253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 rn n). 4. Kelly-Moore;971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 nvn). 5. M.A. B. Paint;Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). C. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No.253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 3210-1200 Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 247 Chem-Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 5. M.A.B.Paint;Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd-or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 2. Coronado; 78-11 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 3210-1200 Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore;975 Acry Plex Interior Latex Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). offw Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 9 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No.M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 nun). 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). Use this in lieu of"5"above under full gloss acrylic-enamel coatings. 6. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073-189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams;primer not required over this substrate. 9. Sherwin-Williams;Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). For use under full-gloss acrylic-enamel finishes. G. Exterior Aluminum Primer under Acrylic Finishes: Factory-formulated acrylic-based metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No.M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 4. Dulux Paints;4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank& Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). Use this in lieu of"3"above under full-gloss acrylic-enamel finishes. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 6. Kelly-Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). Use this in lieu of"5" above under full gloss acrylic-enamel coatings. 7. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073-189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 8. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 9. Sherwin-Williams;primer not required over this substrate. 10. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W 1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils(0.064 mm). Use this in lieu of"9"above under full-gloss acrylic finish. 2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.030 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3030-1200 Bond-Prep Interior/Exterior Waterborne Pigmented Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 8 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 I. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 nun). 4. Kelly-Moore; 255 Stain--Lock II Stain Resistant Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Latex Primer Coat 056-958: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). D. Exterior Wood Primer for Alkyd Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 2. Coronado; 5-11 Supreme Collection Oil House Paint Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2110-1200 Ultra-Hide Durus Exterior Alkyd Primecoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 220 Weather Shield Exterior Alkyd Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils(0.058 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Latex Primer Coat 056-958: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.039 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W42: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). E. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No.M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank& Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.048 mm). Use this in lieu of"4"above under full gloss acrylic-enamel coatings. 6. M. A. B.Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer 073-132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils(0.051 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). F. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 7 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3103 EGA Project No.: 10213 6. M. A. B. Paint; Block Kote No. 1000 Acrylic Latex Block Filler 064-145: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 12.0 mils(0.305 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils(0.152 to 0.318 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils(0.203 mm). 2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore;Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer No. 066: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils(0.018 mm). 2. Benjamin Moore;Moore's Alkyd Masonry Sealer No.077: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.7 mils(0.069 mm). Use this in lieu of"1" above over mineral-fiber reinforced cement panels. 3. Coronado; 48-I1 Elast-O-Meric Acrylic Masonry Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). 4. Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 247 Chem-Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils(0.048 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Lok Tite Latex Masonry Primer 056-125: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils(0.076 mm). 9. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Exterior Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). Use this in lieu of"8" above over mineral-fiber reinforced cement panels. B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils(0.046 mm). 2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). 3. Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils(0.041 mm). 4. Kelly-Moore; 250 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils(0.043 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Lok Tite Latex Masonry Primer 056-125: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils(0.036 mm). C. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 6 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 �* PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore&Co.(Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company(Coronado). 3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers(ICI Dulux Paints). 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co.(Kelly-Moore). 5. M. A. Bruder&Sons,Inc. (M.A.B.Paint). 6. PPG Industries,Inc.(Pittsburgh Paints). 7. Sherwin-Williams Co.(Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint- material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Products list is comprehensive;not all products listed are used on this project. 2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block fillers. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No.285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils(0.206 mm). 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Latex Block Filler No.M88: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils(0.206 mm). Use this in lieu of 1 above under high gloss finishes. 3. Coronado; 946-11 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.4 mils(0.214 mm). 4. Dulux Paints;Bloxfi14000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils(0.178 to 0.368 mm). 5. Kelly-Moore; 521 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0 mils(0.254 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Aw"* 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L), as appropriate, of each material and color applied. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. I. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing,and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. I. After color selection,Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit three Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Painted Wood: 8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples for each color and material on hardboard. b. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) Samples of natural- or stained- wood finish on representative surfaces. C. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch-(100-mm-) square Samples of flat metal and long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq,m). oww b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification,performance rating,or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving"for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 2 Section"Cement Concrete Pavement" for traffic-marking paint. 3. Division 5 Section"Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 4. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 5. Division 5 Section"Metal Pipe Railings"for shop priming ferrous and galvanized pipe railings. 6. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 7. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 8. Division 8 Section"Wood Doors"for shop priming wood and hardboard doors. 9. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation of gypsum board. 10. Division 9 Section"Wall Coverings"for substrate sealer under wall coverings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 22 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 NNW SECTION 09912-PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces,except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exterior exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), exposed hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. Exposed foundation walls are not to be exterior painted unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Do not paint prefinished items,concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces,operating parts,and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. C. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Kitchen and bath cabinets and tops. f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. g. Elevator equipment. h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Painting(Professional Line Products)-09912 Page 1 of 22 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Match pattern 72 inches(1830 mm)above the finish floor. G. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles,blisters,and other defects. I. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams,perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 09720 40*_ Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wall Coverings-09720 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness,maximum moisture content,and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers,dirt,and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,cracks,and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 3. Metals: If not factory primed,clean and apply metal primer. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and comers. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install reversing every other strip,unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. A"*- E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps,no lifted or curling edges,and no visible shrinkage. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wall Coverings-09720 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate 00W appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation. 1. Provide a mockup for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with requirements in ASTM F 1141. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc(160 lux)is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS-Not Used PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining,strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application,as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting (Professional Line Products)" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. Wall Coverings-09720 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 09720-WALL COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section"Painting(Professional Line Products)"for priming wall surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance,and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- (1000-mm-) long section of wall covering from dye lot to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color,texture, and pattern required. 1. Mark top and face of material. D. Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule. E. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows,per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: Per Massachusetts Building Code for location indicated. b. Smoke-Developed Index:Per Massachusetts Building Code for location indicated. ^Wyk Rockridge-Northampton,MA Wall Coverings-09720 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch-in Installation." C. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12,"Carpet on Stairs." D. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. 2. Level adjoining border edges. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves,and similar openings. H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,nonstaining marking device. I. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. J. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive,seam sealer,and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 Carpet-09680 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 5 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. b. Carpet cushion manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks,ridges,depressions,scale, and foreign deposits. C. For wood subfloors, verify the following: rte" 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions,to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Carpet-09680 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 mow, B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY-NOT USED 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS-NOT USED PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.2 ENTRY MAT A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Carpet cushion manufacturer. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104,Section 11.3. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. A Rockridge-Northampton,MA Carpet-09680 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-(300-mm-)long Samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch-(150-mm-)square Sample. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch(150-mm)Sample. 5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions." D. Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to comply with the following requirements,using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 5,"Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." Rockridge-Northampton,MA Carpet-09680 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 pww SECTION 09680-CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Tufted carpet. 2. Carpet cushion. 3. Entry mat. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Alternates"for carpet upgrade. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type,color,and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations,types,and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type,repeat size,location,direction,and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type,color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type,color,and location of edge,transition,and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. 12. Type of cushion. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name,material description,color,pattern,and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch-(300-mm-)square Sample. Carpet-09680 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 AOhl 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars,marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09653 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Wall Base and Accessories-09653 Page 4 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks,holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. F. Job-Formed Comers: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration(whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Wall Base and Accessories-09653 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE VB Vinyl Base-Manufacturer:Johnsonite,4"xl/8"Straight Base with carpet and Cove with hard surface floor:Where carpet and hard surface flooring meet in the same space call for direction. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:As required by applicable codes for locations indicated. 2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering and joiner for tile and carpet. B. Manufacturer: Johnsonite. C. Material: Vinyl. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Wall Base and Accessories-09653 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 09653 -RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall base. 2. Molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches(300 mm)long,of each resilient product color,texture,and pattern required. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting,have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS-Not Used. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Wall Base and Accessories-09653 Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 K. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09652 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings-09652 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40W D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks,holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations for specific products used. B. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams;place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm)away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. '* D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces,permanent fixtures,and built- in furniture including cabinets,pipes,outlets,edgings,thresholds,and nosings. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces,door reveals,closets,and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. H. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 1. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated,cove floor coverings 6 inches(152 mm)up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. J. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings-09652 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40"* D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations,including painting,have been completed. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS-Not Used PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do ++ not use solvents. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings-09652 Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 09652-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings, with and without backings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230- mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. 1. For heat-welding bead,manufacturer's standard-size Samples,but not less than 9 inches(230 mm) long,of each color required. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 70 deg F(21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F(29 deg C),in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period,maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings-09652 Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken,cracked,chipped,or deformed riles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture,cabinets,pipes, outlets,edgings, door frames,thresholds,and nosings,unless otherwise indicated. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals,closets,and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. G. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. H. Protect resilient products from mars,marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09651 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Floor Tile-09651 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1,36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Resilient Floor Tile-09651 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile(VCT). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 70 deg F(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C),in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period,maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations,including painting,have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS-Not Used Resilient Floor Tile-09651 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page I of 3 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SS-2 OOW A. Available Products: Armstrong Prelude ML, 15/16"Exposed Tee System. B. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate—duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge. 3. Cap Width: 15/16 inch. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish:Paint in color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 6. Wall Edge Trim: Shadowline or double step profile. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated,per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members,plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,countersplaying,or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum products hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers,use trapezes or equivalent devices. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,bent,or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,precise fit. G. Paint exposed cut edges that are visible with paint to match exactly that used by the tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09511 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Acoustical Panel Ceilings-09511 Page 5 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Thickness: 5/8 inch(15 mm). I. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL PANELS-TYPE AC-C A. Available Products 1. Armstrong:Cirrus Second Look II. 2. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Classification:Non-fire-resistant rated panels. 1. Type and Form: Type lII,Form 1-water-felted,mineral-base panels with painted finish. C. Color:White. D. LR:Not less than.85. E. NRC:Not less than 0.60,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. F. CAC:Not less than 35. G. Edge Detail: Tegular,Reveal;sized to flange of exposed suspension system members. H. Thickness: 3/4". I. Size: 24 by 48 inch. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: SS-1 A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong: Suprafine ML 9/16"Exposed Tee System. 2. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30(Z90)coating designation,with prefinished metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification:Intermediate—duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners:Butt-edge. 3. Cap Width:9/16 inch(15 mm). 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Paint in color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 6. Wall Edge Trim: Shadowline or double step profile. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Acoustical Panel Ceilings-09511 Page 4 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated;formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS—TYPE AC-A A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong: Cirrus Classic Step. 2. Substitution:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Classification:Non-fire-resistant rated panels. 1. Type and form: Type III,mineral based with painted finish:Form 1 modular. C. Color:White. D. LR:Not less than 0.83. E. NRC:Not less than 0.65,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. F. CAC:Not less than 33. G. Edge Detail:Reveal;sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. H. Thickness: '/4 inch(19 mm). 1. Size:24 by 24 inches. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS—TYPE AC-B A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong: Fine Fissured. 2. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Classification:Non-fire-resistant rated panels. 1. Type and Form:Type I11,Form 2,water-felted,mineral based with painted finish. C. Color:As selected from manufacturer's full range. D. LR:White color—0.84. E. NRC:Not less than 0.55,Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. F. CAC:Not less than 33. G. Edge Detail:Reveal; sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Acoustical Panel Ceilings-09511 Page 3 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Massachusetts Building Code. Ato'` D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of 100 sf for each type of ceiling grid and acoustical panel ceiling. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undistributed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 1.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer than 10. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 1.0 percent of quantity installed,but not fewer than 10. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 2.2 GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard:Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung,"unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.016-inch(2.69- mm)diameter wire. E. Seismic struts and seismic clips,if required by applicable codes. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Acoustical Panel Ceilings-09511 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Coordinate Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels,and special moldings. C. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, for each exposed molding and trim,and for each color and texture required. D. Product test reports. E. Research/evaluation reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class B materials,when tested per ASTM E 84. a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: Acoustical Panel Ceilings-09511 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from the according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions,but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by rile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection,remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on waterproof, crack-suppression membrane over concrete, gyperete and wood;cement mortar bed(thickset);TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1A. 1. Tile Type:Refer to Generic Finish Schedule. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout. 3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation:Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units;thin-set mortar;TCA W244 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type:Refer to Generic Finish Schedule. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.' B. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA W245 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type:Refer to Generic Finish Schedule. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout. END OF SECTION 09310 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ceramic Tile-09310 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, left- and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex- portland cement grouts),comply with ANSI A108.10. 2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts,comply with ANSI A108.6. 3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). C. Metal Edge Strips/Marble Thresholds: Install metal edge strips at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. At door openings from tiled rooms install marble thresholds in thin set method. D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). Ceramic Tile-09310 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 8 of 9 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work,and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions,bumps,and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern,unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,unless otherwise indicated. I. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between the sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Lay out rile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ceramic Tile-09310 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 a. Bostik;Chem-Calk 550. . b. Mameco International,Inc.;Vulkem 245. C. Pecora Corporation;NR-200 Urexpan. d. Tremco,Inc.;THC-900. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Available Products: a. Bonsal,W.R.,Company;Grout Sealer. b. Bostik;CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. C. C-Cure;Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products;Surfaceguard Grout Sealer. e. Jamo Inc.;Matte Finish Penetrating Sealer. f. MAPEI Corporation;KER 004,Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. g. Southern Grouts&Mortars,Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. h. Summitville Tiles,Inc.; SL-15,Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. ow i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.;TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials,water,and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. I. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of file installation standards for installations indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ceramic Tile-09310 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals,Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corporation. 3. Bonsal,W.R.,Company. 4. Bostik. 5. C-Cure. 6. Custom Building Products. 7. DAP,Inc. 8. Jamo Inc. 9. LATICRETE International Inc. 10, MAPEI Corporation. 11. Southern Grouts&Mortars,Inc. 12. Summitville Tiles,Inc. 13. TEC Specialty Products Inc. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4,consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry,redispersible,ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. C. Water-Cleanable,Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI Al 18.3. D. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1,Type I. E. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, color as indicated, for use with tile joints of 1/8" or wider. F. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, for use with tile joints of 1/8" or narrower. G. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7,color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)and wider. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints,unless otherwise indicated. C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O. 1. Available Products: Ceramic Tile-09310 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 5 of 9 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, 40W blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend. 2.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10,selected from the following: B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and fabric reinforcement. 00W 1. Available Products: a. Custom Building Products;Trowel&Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. LATICRETE International Inc.;Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. C. MAPEI Corporation;PRP M19. d. Summitville Tiles,Inc.;S-9000. 2.5 THRESHOLDS A. Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to '/z inch or less,and finish level to match fore of threshold. B. Refer to Section 01230-Alternates. C. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with a boned finish. 1. Description:Uniform,fine to medium grained white stone with grey veining. 2.6 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: A#W"` Ceramic Tile-09310 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 4 of 9 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from k contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS-Not Used PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 000%�, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. B. Refer to Generic Finish Schedule Legend for products. 2.2 PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types,compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements,unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part I "Definitions"Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in"Setting and Grouting Materials"Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics,provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: ``t"*- 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ceramic Tile-09310 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch(150-mm)lengths. 4. Stone thresholds in 6"lengths-See Alternates. E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. F. Product Certificates: For each type of product,signed by product manufacturer. G. Qualification Data: For Installer. H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and-grouting product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: "** 1. Waterproofing. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Metal edge strips. 4. Stone thresholds. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms,under cover,and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. "*. D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Ceramic Tile-09310 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Stone and/or solid polymer thresholds installed as part of the installations. 4. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations. 5. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units and glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. 3. Division 1 Section"Alternates". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499)plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details,and locations of expansion,contraction,control,and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and fmish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. Ceramic Tile- Rockridge—Northampton,MA I of 9 Page of 9 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 00%1 G. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces;maintain an airtight and smoke- tight seal; and comply with manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent. H. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 2 inches (51 mm) of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch-(12.7-or 15.9-mm-)thick,gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610 mm)o.c. and extend studs from the projection to the shaft-wall framing. END OF SECTION 09265 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies-09265 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 H. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading OPW conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners,or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 488. I. Acoustical Sealant: As recommended by gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer for application indicated and/or as specified in Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies." J. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I,unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated,manufacturer's written installation instructions,and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing. 2. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim,furnishings,and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway door frames,provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. D. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices,elevator call buttons,elevator floor indicators,and similar items. E. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. F. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies-09265 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions,room temperatures, and ventilation specified in Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies" PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. American Gypsum Co. 2. G-P Gypsum Corp. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 5. Substitutions:Under provisions of Section 01330. 2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645. 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. C. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch (25.4-mm) thickness and with moisture-resistant paper faces. D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36,core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. I. Edges: Tapered. E. Accessories: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. F. Gypsum Wallboard Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies." G. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies-09265 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3103 I. Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate each gypsum AOW board shaft-wall assembly do not negate fire-resistance rating. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that substantiate required fire- resistance rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly. D. Acoustical-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency substantiating required STC rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."and/or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual.." B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies indicated to have STC ratings,provide assembly materials and construction complying with requirements of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing work "* related to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Fasteners proposed for anchoring steel framing to building structure. 2. Sprayed fire-resistive materials applied to structural framing. 3. Elevator equipment, including hoistway doors,elevator call buttons,and elevator floor indicators. 4. Wiring devices in shaft-wall assemblies. 5. Doors and other items penetrating shaft-wall assemblies. 6. Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing. 7. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat on leveled supports off the ground to prevent sagging. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies-09265 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 09265-GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shaft enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Shaft-wall firewall. 4. Horizontal enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for applying and finishing panels in gypsum board shaft- wall assemblies. low 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: 1. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies capable of withstanding the full air-pressure loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort,and end-reaction shear causing track(runners)to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. 2. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for horizontal duct enclosures capable of spanning distances indicated within deflection limits indicated. 3. Air-pressure loads and deflection limits are 5lbs/sf and L/120. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. B. Fire-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency substantiating each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly's required fire-resistance rating. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies-09265 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. Where required control joints are not indicated, install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. See 2.7 Trim Accessories. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints,except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges for surfaces receiving medium or heavy texture finishes or heavy wallcovering. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where indicated. NOTE: Level 5 is not used on this project unless required to cover flaws in substrate workmanship. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings,Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. END OF SECTION 09260 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 Page 13 of 13 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints,unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically(parallel to framing)or horizontally(perpendicular to framing)with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Follow fastening method used for fire-rated test assemblies. F. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12- inch-(300-mm-)long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturers written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches(300 mm)O.C. 4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) O.C. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches(300 mm)O.C. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. G. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports,with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. H. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at all locations where indicated to receive tile. 2. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers,tubs,and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 3. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners,attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise,attach trim according to manufacturers written instructions. AOW Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 Page 12 of 13 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces(above ceilings, etc.),except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.ft. (0.7 sq.m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts,pipes,and conduits. K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Floating Construction: Where feasible,including where recommended in writing by manufacturer,install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(304.8 mm)o.c.for vertical applications. O. Space fasteners in panels that are the substrates a maximum of 8 inches(203.2 mm)o.c. 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. For fire rated ceiling assemblies,ceilings must be continuous and unbroken by metal wall track for non-rated partitions. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally,unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on doorframes;install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. G. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (600 mm) O.C. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches(600 mm)o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed,hold insulation in place with methods as required. H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113103 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754,and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or,if none available,with United States Gypsum's"Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. I. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior concrete or masonry walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch(3 mm)from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch(13 mm)short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2.10 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation/Fire Resistant Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Sound Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. NOTE: Shear walls utilizing plywood panels require foil faced insulation batts. Refer to UL directory for listed UL assembly. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation." F. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 13 11/3/03 EGA Project No.:10213 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10-glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas,use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,fasteners,and trim flanges, use drying-type,all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat,use drying-type,all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat,use drying-type,all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish,use drying-type,all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.;SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants,Inc.;Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.;BA-98. C. Tremco,Inc.;Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 Page 7 of 13 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Core: As indicated. C. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. (Note: This may be used at contractor's option in lieu of water-resistant gypsum backing board above.) 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, "Dens-Shield Tile Backer" manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Core: As indicated. 2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead(J-Bead);Use at exposed panel edges. C. L-Bead: Use where indicated. Use typically at window head;jamb. NOTE: "Drywall Zip Strip Bead": by Amico is preferred at these locations where adjacent surfaces can become marred or stained. d. U-Bead: Use where indicated. e. Expansion(Control)Joint: Use where indicated and as follows: 1) Ceilings: a) Install control joints in areas exceeding 2,500 s.f. b) Space control joints not more than 50 ft.o.c. c) Install control joints where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. 2) Partitions and Furring: a) Install control joints in partition and wall furring runs exceeding 30 feet. b) Space control joints not more than 30 ft. o.c. c) Install control joints in furred assemblies where control joints occur in base exterior wails. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges,used at curved openings. g. Metal Radius Form: Large metal radius inside corner form shall be model DIR 800/90 as manufactured by Milgo/Bufkin or equal. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead(J-Bead):Use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion(Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated and per A.2.e above. 2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36,manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.4 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular- type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated; ceiling surfaces; Contractor's option for use at non-fire-rated ceilings for framing at 24"o.c.where 5/8"regular gypsum wall board is to be used. E. Proprietary, Special Fire-Resistive Type: ASTM C 36, having improved fire resistance over standard Type X. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co.;FireBloc Type C. b. G-P Gypsum Corp.;Firestop Type C. C. National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond Fire-Shield G. d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels,FIRECODE C Core. 3. Thickness: As indicated. 4. Long Edges:Tapered. 5, Location: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M,with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Core: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm),Type X. C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. (Note: This maybe used at contractor's option in lieu of exterior gypsum soffit board above.) 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work includes,but is not limited to,"Dens-Glass Gold"by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Core: 518"(15.9 mm),Type X. 2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 13 EGA Project No.:10213 11/3/03 E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch(22.2 mm). G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web)or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)wide flange. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch(0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire,or double strand of 0.0475-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. J. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: As indicated-Typically used at interior non-fire-rated walls. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: As indicated and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113103 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems,Inc. C. Dale Industries,Inc.-Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries,Inc. e. MarinoWare;Division of Ware Ind. f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation. h. Unimast,Inc. i. Western Metal Lath&Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: Awo Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.;Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation;Drywall Furring 640 System. C. USG Interiors,Inc.;Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components,General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-(50.8-mm-)deep flanges. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch(0.79 mm). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 13 EGA Project No.:10213 11/3/03 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"and/or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." C. Gypsum Board Finish Mockups: Before finishing gypsum board assemblies, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following applications: a. Surfaces with texture finish. b. Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes. C. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturers written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 09260-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 5. Acoustical sealants. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum &' board assemblies. 3. Division 8"Sealants." 4. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Sheathing" for exterior installations over framing. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for framing, gypsum panels,and other components of shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,elevations,sections,details of components,and attachments to other units of Work. C. Samples: For the following products: I. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 0m* Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Board Assemblies-09260 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 13 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113103 B. Wash mirrored glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date for Substantial Completion. Wash mirrored glass by methods recommended in NAAMM publication and in writing by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water and glass cleaners free from substances capable of damaging mirrored glass edges or coatings. END OF SECTION 08814 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 AOW 2. Proceed with mirrored glass installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 GLAZING A. General: Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer and with referenced GANA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface. C. Mastic Spot Installation System: Install mirrored glass units with mastic as follows: I. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrored glass and backing material. 2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface. 3. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch(3 mm)between back of mirrored glass and mounting surface. D. For wall-mounted mirrored glass units, install permanent means of support at bottom and top edges with bottom support designed to withstand mirrored glass weight and top support designed to prevent mirrored glass from coming away from wall along top edges. 1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrored glass units. 2. For metal clips,place a felt or plastic pad between mirrored glass and each clip to prevent spalling of mirrored glass edges. 3. Where indicated,install bottom and top clips symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. I. Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water. 2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. ,0. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 FABRICATION A. Mirrored Glass Sizes: Cut mirrored glass to final sizes and shapes to suit Project conditions. B. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Treat edges as indicated below. 1. Rounded polished edge. 2. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 3. Require mirrored glass manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene,70 to 90 Shore A hardness. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored glass by spot application, certified by both mirrored glass manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrored glass will be installed. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ,per a. Gunther Mirror Mastics. b. Palmer Products Corporation. D. Mirror Bottom Clips: Single hole or slotted hole felt lined channel clips, 5/8" wide rounded exposed face,nickel plate finish. E. Mirror Top Clips: Single hole or slotted hole felt lined channel clips, 5/8" wide rounded exposed face, nickel plate finish. F. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. G. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrored glass units are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. .� 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 ills 011 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Silvered Mirrored Glass: Written warranty,made out to Owner and signed by mirrored glass manufacturer agreeing to replace silvered mirrored glass units that deteriorate as defined in"Definitions" Article,f.o.b.the nearest shipping point to Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. American Mirror Company,Inc. 2. Carolina Mirror Company. 3. Donisi Mirror Company. 4. Gardner Glass Products. 5. Gilded Minors,Inc. 6. Lenoir Mirror Company. 7. Stroupe Mirror Co.,Inc. 8. Sunshine Mirror. 9. Virginia Mirror Co.,Inc. 10. VVP America,Inc.;Binswanger Mirror Products. 11. Walker Glass Co.,Ltd. 2.2 FLOAT GLASS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass, flat), class, quality, and other properties as indicated below: L Clear Annealed Float Glass: Class 1 (clear),Quality q2(mirror). a. Thickness: 6 mm. 2.3 MIRRORED GLASS A. Silvered Mirrored Glass: Annealed, clear float glass with successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system complying with FS DD-M-411. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of mirrored glass and mirror mastic certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test Reports: From an organic protective coating manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and adhesion with organic protective coating applied to silvered mirrored glass. Include organic coating manufacturers' interpretation of test results relative to performance and recommendations for use of mastics with organic protective coating. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirrored glass installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Mirrored Glass: Obtain mirrored glass from one source for each type of mirrored glass indicated. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GANA's "Glazing Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. E, NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's "Mirrors,Handle with Extreme Care,Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." F. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to organic protective coating manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of adhesive with mirrored glass coating. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun,or other causes. B. For silvered mirrored glass, comply with mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing,and handling mirrored glass as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrored glass until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 '" SECTION 08814-MIRRORED GLASS PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Silvered mirrored glass. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section"Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Silvered Mirrored Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning silvered mirrored glass contrary to mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration,black spots,and clouding of the silver film. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide mirrored glass that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication,and installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Silvered mirrored glass. Include description of materials and process used to produce mirrored glass that indicates source of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. 2. Mirror mastic. 3. Mirror hardware. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sections,details,and attachments to other Work. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products,in sizes indicated below: 1. Mirrored glass, 12 inches(300 mm)square,including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. 2. Mirror clips. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Mirrored Glass-08814 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.12 GLAZING SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Where glazing sealants of this designation are required,provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. 790;Dow Corning. b. Silpruf;GE Silicones. C. U1traPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones. d. HiFlex 331;NUCO Industries,Inc. e. NuFlex 309;NUCO Industries, Inc. f. VP 275;Ohio Sealants,Inc. g. 864;Pecora Corporation. h. PSI-641;Polymeric Systems,Inc. i. Omniseal; Sonneborn,Div of ChemRex,Inc. j. Spectrem 1;Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS(nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,galvanized steel,and wood. 7. Applications: All applications requiring wet glazing. END OF SECTION 08800 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 12 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.9 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is required, provide Type I (transparent glass,flat),Class 1 (clear)glass lites complying with the following: 1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass: Annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass liter and to comply with performance requirements. 2. Uncoated Clear Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: Kind HS(heat strengthened). 3. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT(fully tempered). B. Application: Interior applications in non-fire-rated assemblies. Glass thickness and strength as required for code compliance and performance requirements. 3.10 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Insulating Glass: Where glass as designated below is required, provide low-emisivity insulating-glass units complying with the following: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm.minimum. 2. Thickness of Each Lite:4 mm.minimum. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Indoor Lite:Type I(transparent glass, flat),Class 1 (clear)float glass. a. Annealed. b. Kind HS(heat strengthened),Condition C(other coated glass). C. King FT(fully tempered),Condition C(other coated glass). 5. Outdoor Lite: Type I(transparent glass, flat)float glass. a. Annealed. b. Kind HS(heat strengthened), Condition A(uncoated surfaces). C. Kind FT(fully tempered),Condition A(uncoated surfaces). 6. Low-Emisivity Coating or Film: Sputtered on third surface or low-emisivity coated film suspended in the interspace. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 74 to 76 percent. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.31. 9. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.32 to 0.33. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.66. B. Application: Exterior applications in factory glazed windows and doors and in other exterior job site glazed applications. Glass thickness and strength as required for code compliance and performance requirements. 3.11 WIRE GLASS SCHEDULE A. Wire Glass:Where wire glass is required,provide as listed under Part 2—Products. B. Application: Interior application where installed in fire-rated doors, windows, and sidelights as part of a fire-rated assembly. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING(WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING 40M* A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system,unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction,but not less than once a month,for build-up of dirt,scum,alkaline deposits, or stains;remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,accidents,and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed,could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches(1270 mm)as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape,use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to J ambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING(DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 AOWAI�, C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side walking). 2.11 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard,to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present,for compliance with the following: r I. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. A"" Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 for each liquid-applied, chemically Apll curing sealant for type,grade,class,and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape,where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips,complying with ASTM C 542,black. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick;of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired,polished both sides),and as follows: a. Mesh m2(square). 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered)where safety glass is required. B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. C. Sealing System: Dual seal,with primary and secondary sealants as follows: 1. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 2. Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl. 3. Polyisobutylene and polyurethane. D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.6 SPECIALTY GLASS A. Crackle Glass 1. The glass used as the middle layer of the entry door vestibule door insulated glazing shall be either crackle or overshot glass with the Huntington at Nashua logo etched onto it, as indicated. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 Page 6 of 12 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to the following: 1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass: a. AFG Industries,Inc. b. Ford Glass Division C. Guardian Industries d. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford e. PPG Industries,Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Wire Glass: a. Ashai Glass Co./Ann Glass Corp b. Central Glass Co,LTD C. Nippon Sheet Glass Co.,LTD d. Pilkington Glass,LTD 3. Manufacturers of Heat-Treated Glass: +� a. AFG Industries,Inc. b. Guardian Industries C. Saint-Gobain/Euroglass d. Spectrem Glass Products e. Viracon,Inc. 4. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass: a. AFG Industries,Inc. b. Guardian Industries Corp. C. PPG Industries,Inc. d. Spectrem Glass Products e. Viracon,Inc. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass, flat),Quality q3 (glazing select);class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at manufacturer's option. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class,kind,and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. Glazing-08800 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 5 of 12 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." K. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories,Inc. 3. National Accreditation and Management Institute. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,temperature changes,direct exposure to sun,or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,condensation,or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F(4.4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants. 1 Glazing gaskets. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. D. Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548. G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. H. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. I. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements,permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to 780 CMR 24. J. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;deterioration of glazing materials;or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Determine glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in various size openings, but not Iess than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)required to meet the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness and Strength: Select glass in thickness and strength to comply with 780 CMR 24 for zone 3 and exposure C requirements of 780 CMR 16. 2. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing at locations as required by 780 CMR 2405. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: Determine in accordance with 780 CMR 24 in selecting glass thickness and strength. 4. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites:Not less than 6 mm. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a nominal 1/2- inch-(13-mm-)wide interspace. 2. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program,expressed as Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F(W/sq. in x K). 3. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. AOW- Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section"Mirrored Glass." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture,or film on interior surfaces of glass. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Glazing-08800 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set CBDa—Storage Lock w/closer-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 '/s"x 4 '/2" 4 1 Storage Lock Schlage D80PD x ATH 606 1 Closer w/hold arm LCN 1461-3049CNS 4 2 Flush Bolt Ives 458 4 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected 1 Locking Astragal Pemko 3443 DPK 4 Set CBDb-Storage Lock w/closer-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 ''/z"x 4 '/z" 26D 1 Storage Lock Schlage D80PD x ATH Knurl handle 630 1 Closer w/hold arm LCN 1461-3049CNS 26D 1 set Flush Bolt Ives 357 26D 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected 1 set Astragal Pemko 29310 DPK 26D Set CBEa-Closet Mag.Latch-SL-NOT USED Set CBEb-Closet Mag.Latch-DL-NOT USED Miscellaneous Hardware Set M1 -Memory Box-NOT USED Set M3 -Commons Bifold-NOT USED Set M4a-Commons Pocket Door-DL-NOT USED Set M5 -Bar Pass Thru Windows-NOT USED Set M6-Sliding Window at HCC-NOT USED Set M7-Med.Prep Refrigerator Lock-NOT USED Set M8-Resident Storage Locks 42 Cylinder Locks Schlage B461P 606 END OF SECTION 08711 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 28 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set C4Da-Classroom Lock w/closer-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4/2" 4 1 Classroom Lock Schlage D70PD x ATH 606 1 Dummy Trim Schlage D 170 x ATH 606 1 set Flush Bolts-self latching Ives 356/357 4 2 Closers w/stop arms LCN1461 4 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set C4Db-Classroom Lock w/closer-DL 2 Spring Hinge Stanley 2060 4'/�"x 4'/z" 4 4 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 1 Classroom Lock Schlage D70PD x ATH 606 1 set Flush Bolts-self latching Ives 356/357 4 Set CSAa—Entrance Lock-SL-NOT USED Set CSAb—Entrance Lock-SL-NOT USED Set CSAc-Entrance Lock-SL-NOT USED Set C7Ca—Entrance Lock w/closer- SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 %2"x 4 ''/2" 4 1 Entrance Lock Schlage D50PD x ATH 606 1 Closer LCN 1461-3077CNS 4 1 Wall Stop Ives 401 4 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected 1 Threshold Pemko 236D DKB Set C7Cb-Entrance Lock w/closer- SL-NOT USED Set CBAa—Storage Lock-SL-NOT USED Set CBAb—Storage Lock-SL-NOT USED Set CBBa—Storage Lock-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 '/2"x 4 ''/z" 4 1 Storage Lock Schlage D80PD x ATH 606 2 Flush Bolt Ives 458 4 2 Floor Stop/Hold Ives 446 4 Set CBCa—Store Lock w/closer-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 '/2"x 4 '/z" 4 1 Storage Lock Schlage D80PD x ATH 606 1 Closer LCN 1461-3049CNS 4 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set CBCb—Storage Lock w/closer-SL-NOT USED Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 27 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set CICb—Passage w/closer-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 '/Z"x 4 ''/a" 26D 1 Passage Set Schlage D10D x ATH 630 1 Closer LCN 1461-3077CNS 26D 1 Floor Stop Ives 436 26D 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set C1Da-Passage w/closer-DL-NOT USED Set C2A-Double Swing Privacy rivacy-SL 1 set Pivots Stanley DAP-3 4 1 Emergency Door Stop Stanley ES-1 4 1 Privacy Set Stanley D40xATH 606/625* 1 Double Lipped Strike Stanley DLS-1 4 1 set Gasket NGP A635 - *Split finish 606/625: Chrome on bath side. Set C2Aa—Privacy_SL-NOT USED Set C2Ab—Privacy-SL-NOT USED Set C2C—Privacy w/closer- SL-NOT USED Set C4B-Classroom Lock-DL +. 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/2"x 4'/2" 4 1 Classroom Lock Schlage D70PD x ATH 606 1 Dummy Trim Schlage D 170 x ATH 606 2 Flush Bolts Ives 356/357 4 2 Door Stops Ives 445 4 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set C4Ca—Classroom Lock w/closer-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 '/z"x 4 '/Z" 4 1 Classroom Lock Schlage D70PD x ATH 606 1 Closer LCN 1461-3077CNS 4 1 Floor Stop Ives 436 4 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set C4Cb-Classroom Lock w/closer-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 ''/Z"x 4 '/z" 26D 1 Classroom Lock Schlage D70PD x ATH 630 1 Closer LCN 1461-3077CNS 26D 1 Wall Stop Ives 401 26D 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 26 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set X16Ca-Exterior Storage w/Closer-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/2" 4 1 Storage Lock Schlage L80PD x ACC 606 1 Electric Strike Von Duprin 6111 (Fail Secure) 4 1 Closer w/Stop Arm LCN 4111 Interior Side 4 1 Threshold Pemko 255x226DFGS DKB 1 Sweep Pemko 345DP DKB 1 Weatherstrip Pemko S88D DKB Set X16Da-Exterior w/Closers-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 1 Storage Lock Schlage L80PDxACC 606 1 Dummy Latch Schlage L170 ACC 606 2 Closers w/Stop Arms LCN 4111 Interior Side 4 1 set Flush Bolts-self latching Ives 356/357 4 2 Sweep Pemko 345 DP DKB 1 Threshold Pemko 255x226 DFGS DKB 1 Weatherstrip Pemko S88D DKB Set X17D-Assembly Egress-DL-NOT USED Set X21C-Interior Stair Delayed Egress w/Key Pad- SL-NOT USED Set X22C-Delayed Egress w/Key Pad-SL-NOT USED Set X25C—Exterior Egress w/Key Pad/Card Reader Combo-SL-NOT USED Set X26A-Corridor Doors,DL, Same Swing,HCC-NOT USED Set X27A-Exterior Egress-Wander Guard-DL-NOT USED Set X28A-Ext.Delayed Egress,Wanderguard,Key Pad-SL-NOT USED Common Doors Set C1Aa—Passage-SL-NOT USED Set C 1 Ab—Passage-SL-NOT USED Set CIAc-Passe-SL-NOT USED Set C1Ba—Passage-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4 ''/z"x 4 1/2" 4 1 Passage Set Schlage D l OD x ATH 606 2 Dummy Trim Schlage D 170 x ATH 606 2 Flush Bolt Ives 458 4 2 Overhead Stop Ives 436 4 Set C1Ca—Passage w/closer- SL-NOT USED Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 25 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set X4D Same Swing Fire and Smoke w/Magnetic Hold-Open- DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/2"x 4'/z" 10 2 Exit Device Von Duprin 9947L-07-F 4 2 Closer LCN P1461(pull side) 4 2 Magnetic Holder Rixson 990 4 1 Astragal Pemko 29310DPK DKB 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set X5C—Kitchen Push Smoke Door-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/2"x 4'/2" 32D/4 1 Door Bolt Schlage B660 630/606 1 Closer LCN P4111 32D/4 I Push Plate Ives 8200 3.5"x15" S32D/4 I Pull Plate Ives 8303-0 S32D/4 1 Armor Plate Ives 8400 30"x34"(push side) S32D/4 1 Floor Stop Ives 436 32D/4 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected * Stainless Steel Finish to face Service side of door;Bronze finish to face Commons side. Set X5Cb-Kitchen Push Smoke Door-SL-NOT USED Set X11C-Exterior From Stair Egress- SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley Fbb179 4'/2"x 4'/2" 4 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 9957 Exit Only 4 1 Closer LCN P1461-3077CNS 4 1 Threshold Pemko 273 x 4AFG DKB 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected 1 Sweep Pemko 315 DN DKB Set XI ICa Exterior From Stair Egress-SL-Fire Exit Hardware and Key Pad Entrance-NOT USED Set X13D-Exterior Receiving-DL-NOT USED Set X15F Auto Swing Outside Vestibule Doors-DL-NOT USED Set X15G-Terrace Door-SL-NOT USED Set 15Ca-exterior Classroom w/Closer- SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/2"x 4'/2" 4 1 Classroom Lock Schlage L70PD x ACC 606 1 Closer w/Stop Arm LCN 4111 Interior Side 4 1 Threshold Pemko 255/226DFGS DKB 1 Sweep Pemko 345DP DKB 1 Weather Strip Pemko S88D DKB Set X16Ba—Exterior Storage-DL -NOT USED Owl- Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 24 of 28 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Set U11 -Unit Bath-Double Swing Privacy 1 set Pivots Stanley DAP-3 3 1 Emergency Door Stop Stanley ES-1 3 1 Privacy Set Stanley F40xACC 605/625 1 Double Lipped Strike Stanley DLS-1 3 1 set Gasket NGP A635 - *Split finish 605/625 on all unit baths: Chrome on bath side. Set 12A Mechanical Closet-SL 2 Butt Hinge Stanley RD 1900 3'/z"x 3'/z" 3 1 Cylinder Lock Schlage B 160N 605 1 set Gasket Pemko S88D As selected I Threshold Pemko 168D As selected Set 12B Mechanical Closet-DL 4 Butt Hinge Stanley RD RD 1900 3'/�"x 3'/z" 3 1 Cylinder Lock Schlage B 160N 605 2 Flush Bolts(in head) Ives 144 3 1 set Gasket Pemko S88D - 1 Threshold Pemko 168D - Exterior/Exit/Security Doors Set X1C—Interior to Stair Egress-SL-Fire Exit Hardware 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 1 Exit Device Von Duprin 99L-F x 07 4 1 Closer LCN P1461 (pull side) 4 1 Wall Stop Ives 401 4 1 set Door Gasket Pemko S88D DKB Set X1Ca-Interior to Stair Egress-SL 3 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 1 Passage Set Schlage D l OD x ATH 606 Satin Brass 1 Closer LCN P 1461 4 1 Floor Stop Ives 438 4 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected Set X 1 Cb-Interior to Stair Egress-SL-NOT USED Set X31) Opposite Swing Fire and Smoke Doors w/Magnetic Hold-Opens-DL 6 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 2 Exit Device Von Duprin 9947Lx07-F 4 2 Closer LCN P 1461 (pull side) 4 2 Magnetic Holder Rixson 990 4 1 Astragal Pemko 375DR DKB I set Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected AOMI Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 23 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Set U2A-Unit Bath Swing-SL 2 Butt Hinge Stanley RD 1900 3'/z"x 3'/z" 3 1 Privacy Set Schlage F40 x ACC 605/625* 1 Hinge Stop Ives 69 3 *Split Finish 605/625 on all Unit Baths: Chrome on bath side Set U3A-Unit Bedroom Swing-SL 2 Butt Hinge Stanley RD]900 3'/2"x 3'/2" 3 1 Privacy Set Schlage F40 x ACC 605 1 Hinge Stop Ives 69 3 Set U313-Unit Bedroom Swing-DL-NOT USED Set U4A-Unit Swing Latch-SL 2 Butt Hinge Stanley RD 1900 3'/z"x 3'/2" 3 1 Passage Set Schlage F10 x ACC 605 1 Hinge Stop Ives 69 3 Set U413 -Unit Swing Latch-DL-NOT USED Set U5A—Unit Swing Mag.Catch-SL 2 Butt Hinge Stanley RD 1900 3'/2"x 3'h" 3 1 Dummy Trim Schlage F170 x ACC 605 1 Magnetic Latch Ives 323 3 1 Hinge Stop Ives 69 3 Set USAb-Unit Swing Mag.Catch-SL-NOT USED Set U513—Unit Swing Mag.Catch-DL 4 Butt Hinge Stanley RD 1900 3'/2"x 3'/2" 3 2 Dummy Trim Schlage F170 x ACC 605 1 Magnetic Latch Ives 327 3 2 Hinge Stop Ives 69 3 Set USBb-Unit Swing Mme. Catch-DL-NOT USED Set U7A-Unit Pocket- SL-NOT USED Set U8A-Unit Lock Pocket- SL-NOT USED U813-Unit Lock Pocket-DL 1 48"Opn'g Track Set Stanley 40-3903 - 2 Sliding Door Pull Ives 990 3 2 Sliding Door Bolt Ives 42 3 Set U IOB-Health Care Unit Entry-DL-NOT USED look- Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 22 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches(75 mm)from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ., 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Products: Hardware Groups: Set 00—Hardware by Door Manufacturer Unit Doors Set U I E-Unit Entry Swing- SL 2 Spring Hinge Stanley 2060 4'/z"x 4'/z" 4 1 Butt Hinge Stanley FBB 179 4'/2"x 4'/z" 4 1 Corridor Lock Schlage L9456Px10-072 MER 606 1 Knocker/Viewer Ives 2-3122 x 2 4 1 Hinge Stop Ives 69 4 1 Carpet Threshold Pemko 2360 DKB 1 Door Gasket Pemko S88D As selected AOW Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 21 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level,plumb,and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or,if not indicated,above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. 2. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 20 of 28 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.19 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 605: Bright brass,clear coated,over brass base metal. 2. BHMA 612: Satin bronze,clear coated,over bronze base metal. 3. BHMA 623: Light-oxidized statuary bronze,clear coated,over bronze base metal. 4. BHMA 624: Dark-oxidized statuary bronze,clear coated,over bronze base metal. 5. BHMA 625: Bright chromium plated over nickel,over brass or bronze base metal. 6. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel,over brass or bronze base metal. 7. BHMA 627: Satin aluminum,clear coated,over aluminum base metal. 8. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum,clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. 9. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel,over stainless-steel base metal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 19 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 4. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH). oovbw B. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides,and accessories indicated. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide galvanized steel or anodized-aluminum door hardware. C. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA Grade 1;rated for minimum door weight of 640 lb(290 kg). D. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb(91 kg). E. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb(91 kg). 2.17 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. Henderson: P.C.Henderson Inc.;Div.of Hepworth PLC(PCH). 3. Johnson: L. E.Johnson Products,Inc.(LEJ). 4. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH). B. Folding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of overhead rails,hangers, supports,bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Interior Doors: Provide door hardware for interior bifolding doors when not furnished as part of "'- door package. C. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 50 lb(23 kg). D. Multiple Folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 75 lb(34 kg). 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH). 2. Hager Companies(HAG). 3. HEWI,Inc. (HEW). 4. Ives: H.B.Ives(IVS). 5. NT Quality Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). 6. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). B. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated,or unless otherwise indicated. C. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 18 of 28 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Door Bottoms: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b. National Guard Products,Inc.(NGP). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.(PEM). B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL l OB or NFPA 252. F. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated,based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. H. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.15 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. National Guard Products,Inc.(NGP). 3. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc. (PEM). 5. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 2.16 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. Henderson: P.C.Henderson Inc.;Div.of Hepworth PLC(PCH). 3. Johnson: L.E.Johnson Products,Inc. (LEJ). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 17 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.13 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH). 2. Door Controls International(DCI). 3. DORMA Door Controls Inc.;Member of The DORMA Group(DC). 4. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ). 5. Hager Companies(HAG). 6. Ives: H.B.Ives(IVS). 7. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). 8. Norton Door Controls;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(NDC). 9. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). 10. NT Quality Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). 11. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div.of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 12. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). 13. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(SGT). 14. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). B. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. C. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. D. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. E. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. F. Electromagnetic Door Holders for Labeled Fire Door Assemblies: Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system. G. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate,provide overhead holders. H. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1;neoprene or rubber,minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch(16 by 19 mm);fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 1. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch(13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.14 DOOR GASKETING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Door Gasketing: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b. National Guard Products,Inc.(NGP). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.(PEM). A00%-. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 16 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Concealed Closers: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. Ao""` D. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers." E. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system. F. Power-Assist Closers: As specified in Division 8 Section Power Door Operators for access doors for the disabled or where listed in the Door Hardware Schedule. Provide electrohydraulic, electromechanical,and pneumatic types as indicated. G. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.12 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH). b. Hager Companies(HAG). C. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems,Inc. (IPC). d. Ives: H.B. Ives(IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). 00*• f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). 2. Plastic Protective Trim Units: a. Balco Metalines,Inc.(BAL). b. Hager Companies(HAG). C. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems,Inc.(IPC). d. Ives: H. B. Ives(IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). B. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Bronze: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm)thick;beveled top and 2 sides on commons' side of doors. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm)thick;beveled top and 2 sides;service areas;kitchen. 3. Rigid Plastic: 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic; beveled 4 sides. 4. Acrylic: 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick;beveled 4 sides. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws. D. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch(13 mm)less than door width on pull side,by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 15 of 28 EGA,P.C. l 1/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Astragals: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b. National Guard Products,Inc. (NGP). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.(PEM). B. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors,unless automatic or self- latching bolts are used. 2.11 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(AAH). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div.of Yale Security Inc. (CR). C. DORMA Door Controls Inc.;Member of The DORMA Group(DC). d. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). e. Norton Door Controls;Div.of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). f. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div.of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). g. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). h. Yale Security Inc.;Div.of Williams Holdings(YAL). 2. Concealed Closers: ,®r"* a. DORMA Door Controls Inc.;Member of The DORMA Group(DC). b. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). C. Norton Door Controls;Div.of Yale Security Inc.(NDC). d. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). e. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). f. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). g. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). 3. Electromechanical Closers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(CR). b. Norton Door Controls;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(NDC). C. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(RIX). d. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). e. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). 4. Closer Holder Release Devices: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(CR). b. DORMA Door Controls Inc.;Member of The DORMA Group(DC). C. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). d. Norton Door Controls;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(NDC). e. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). f. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). g. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). B. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 14 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum ' framing. C. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA Grade 1. D. Electric Strikes: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. 2.9 OPERATING TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH). 2. Hager Companies(HAG). 3. HEWI,Inc. (HEW). 4. Ives: H.B.Ives(IVS). 5. NT Quality Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ)- 6. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). 7. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH). B. Materials: Fabricate from aluminum,brass,bronze or stainless steel,as indicated. 2.10 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: Coordinators: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(AAH). b. Door Controls International(DCI). C. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ). d. Hager Companies(HAG). e. Ives: H.B.Ives(IVS). f. NT Monarch Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTM). g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). 2. Removable Mullions: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (AAH). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). C. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). d. NT Monarch Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTM). e. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). f. Von Duprin g. Yale Security Inc.;Div.of Williams Holdings(YAL). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 13 of 28 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be famished by Owner. 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock,provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three/Lock b. Master Keys: Five/Group C. Grand Master Keys: Five/Group d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five/Group e. Construction Master Keys:20 I. Key Control System: BHMA Grade 1 system, including key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish. 1. Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels and key envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides. Include single cylinder lock to lock all drawers. 2. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. 3. Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet,equipped with key-holding panels,envelopes, and cross-index system. 001k 4. Capacity: Able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks. 5. Cross-Index System: Set up by key control manufacturer,complying with the following: a. Card Index: Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. b. Computer Software: Furnish cross-index software for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual. 2.8 STRIKES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Electric Strikes: a. Locknetics Security Engineering;a Harrow Company(LSE). b. Security Door Controls(SDC). C. Von Duprin,Inc.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD). B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 12 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Key Control Systems: a. Key Control Systems,Inc.(KCS). b. Major Metalfab Co.(MM). C. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). d. Sunroc Corporation(SUN). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. 2. Key Control System: BHMA A156.5. C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade I is indicated. D. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight-or clover-type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. a. High-Security Grade: BHMA Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements of UL 437 (Suffix A). E. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard;finish face to match lockset;complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and usable with other manufacturers'cylinders. 2. Removable Cores: Core insert,removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. F. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores,as directed by Owner. b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. G. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated,provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to the same change key. a. Cylinders shall be master keyed. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 11 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 00,,, 1. Half-Round Surface Bolts: Minimum 7/8-inch(22-mm)throw. 2. Interlocking Surface Bolts: Minimum 15/16-inch(24-mm)throw. 3. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 1-inch(25-mm)throw;listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. 4. Dutch-Door Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch(19-mm)throw. 5. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch(19-mm)throw. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(AAH). 2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 3. Door Controls International(DCI). 4. Locknetics Security Engineering;a Harrow Company(LSE). 5. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). 6. NT Monarch Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTM). 7. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). 8. Von Duprin;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD). 9. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). B. Standard: BHMA A156.3. 1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. C. Certified Products: Provide exit devices listed in BHMA's"Directory of Certified Exit Devices." D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection,based on testing according to UL 305. E. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. F. Outside Trim: Lever and lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets,unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 2. Cylinders: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(AAH). b. Best Lock Corporation(BLC). C. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div.of Yale Security Inc.(CR). d. NT Falcon Lock Co.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTF). e. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). f Schlage Lock Company;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH). g. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 10 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Ao"k 1. Strength Ranking: 500 lbf(2224 N)as tested according to BHMA A156.23. 2. Inductive Kickback: Not more than 53-V peak voltage,as tested according to BHMA A156.23. 3. Residual Magnetism: Not more than 4 lbf (18 N) to separate door from magnet, as tested according to BHMA A156.23. B. Electromechanical Locks: Motor-operated locks of types and grades indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following: 1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. C. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Latches: Internal,battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc- dichromate-plated wrought steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators,and ability to program at the lock;type and function indicated. D. Exit Locks: Surface-mounted deadbolts or latchbolts; with battery-powered alarm that sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs;housed in metal case. Provide red-and-white pressure-sensitive lettering reading"PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND." 2.5 DOOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Surface Bolts: a. Door Controls International(DCI). b. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ). C. Hager Companies(HAG). d. Ives: H.B. Ives(IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). 2. Flush Bolts: a. Door Controls International(DCI). b. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ). C. Hager Companies(HAG). d. Ives: H.B. Ives(IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). f. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(RIX). g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). h. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). B. Surface Bolts: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. 1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) diameter rods of brass,bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2134 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches(2134 mm). C. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated,designed for mortising into door edge. D. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 9 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (AAH). b. Best Lock Corporation(BLC). C. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div.of Yale Security Inc.(CR). d. Door Controls International(DCI). e. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ). f. Hager Companies(HAG). g. Ives: H.B.Ives(IVS). h. McKinney Products Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(MCK). i. NT Falcon Lock Co.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTF). j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM). k. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). 1. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH). M. Simplex;Div. of UNICAN(SIM). n. Yale Security Inc.;Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). 2. Electromagnetic Locks and Latches: a. Door Controls International(DCI). b. Locknetics Security Engineering;a Harrow Company(LSE). C. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.;Div.of Yale Security Inc.(RIX). d. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). e. Von Duprin,Inc.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD). f. Yale Security Inc.;Div.of Williams Holdings(YAL). 3. Electromechanical Locks and Latches: a. Arrow Architectural Hardware;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(AAH). b. Best Lock Corporation(BLC). C. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;Div.of Yale Security Inc.(CR). d. Locknetics Security Engineering;a Harrow Company(LSE). e. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(SGT). f. Schlage Lock Company;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH). g. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings(YAL). 4. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Latches: a. Best Lock Corporation(BLC). b. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(SGT). C. Simplex;Div.of UNICAN(SIM). d. Yale Security Inc.;Div.of Williams Holdings(YAL). B. Bored Locks: Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 4000. C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Grade, 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 1000. D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches(70 mm),unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Electromagnetic Locks: Electrically powered locks of strength and configuration indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following: Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40W f. Rixson-Firemark,Inc.;Div. of Yale Security Inc.(RIX). g. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(SGT). h. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH). 3. Continuous Geared Hinges: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b. McKinney Products Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(MCK). C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.(PEM). B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 2. Interior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel,with steel pin. E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that,when tightened into a groove in hinge pin,prevents removal of pin while door is closed;for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. F. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following: 1. Electrical Contact: Exposed electrical contacts for transfer of power. 2. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle. 3. Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch. 4. Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle,and with concealed electrical monitoring switch. G. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors; wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES ••, A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 7 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 sue"' D. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule,and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Door Hardware Schedule is used to indicate design intent only. Supplier,in concert with his architectural hardware consultant,is responsible for a complete project and code compliance. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and *001- interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations,as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies(HAG). b. McKinney Products Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc.(MCK). C. Sargent Manufacturing Company;Div.of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (SGT). d. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH). 2. Pivots and Pivot Hinges: a. DORMA Door Controls Inc.;Member of The DORMA Group(DC). b. Hager Companies(HAG). C. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). d. McKinney Products Company;Div. of ESSEX Industries,Inc. (MCK). e. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTD). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system;i.e. interchangeable lock sets. 4. Address for delivery of keys. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required testing,inspecting,and certifying procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule,and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies,fire alarm system,access control system and building control system. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection,cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion,unless otherwise indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 Page 5 of 28 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. The contractor is responsible for hiring this consultant. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Qualifications: Experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications,by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)," and as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping,tight pinching,or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N)applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N)applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch(13 mm)high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf(67 N)to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key,tool,or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf(133 N)to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N)to open door to minimum required width. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch(13 mm)high. 3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,based on testing according to NFPA 252. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including,but not limited to,the following: Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 28 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings,both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit;unauthorized person wants to enter;unauthorized person wants to exit. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work,delivery schedules,and similar information has been completed and accepted. E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,indicating current products comply with requirements. H. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect,and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Aov,,, 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control and security system. C. Samples: For exposed door hardware of each type indicated below, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule. 1. Door Hardware: As follows: a. Hinges. b. Pivots. C. Locks and latches. d. Bolts. e. Exit devices. f. Cylinders and keys. g. Operating trim. h. Closers. i. Stops and holders. j. Protective trim. k. Door gasketing. 1. Thresholds. m. Miscellaneous items. n. As requested by Architect. 2. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work,within limitations of keying requirements. D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type,style, function,size, label,hand,and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA P.C. Page 2 of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for all areas,except residential grade in apartments for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Residential a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. �* C. Folding doors. d. Other doors to the extent indicated. 3. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 4. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame. 2. Division 8 Section"Access Doors" for access door hardware,except cylinders. 3. Division 8 Section "Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors" for entrance door hardware, except cylinders. 4. Division 10 Section "Wire Mesh Partitions" for wire mesh partition door hardware, except cylinders. C. Products furnished,but not installed,under this Section include the following. Coordinating,purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Cylinders for locks on aluminum and glass entrance doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware,indicating the following: Rockridge—Northampton,MA Door Hardware(Scheduled by Naming Products)-08711 EGA,P.C. Page I of 28 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust as required. B. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealant materials. C. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure windows are in acceptable condition at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08612 tow Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Fixed Windows-08612 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Aaw PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Weather Shield Direct-Set windows as manufactured by Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. of Medford, Wisconsin: Basis of design. Window section to include integral brick mold. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Superseal Manufacturing Company, Inc. with separate PVC brick mold and sill per Section 06200. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Frame: 1. Extruded unplasticized polyvinylchloride. B. Finish: 1. White. 2.3 GLAZING A. General: Provide insulating glass manufactured by the window manufacturer in compliance with IGCC Class CBA, tested in accordance with ASTM E774. Units provided with a dual seal consisting of polyisobutylene as the primary seal and polyurethane as the secondary seal. B. Glass Types: 1" insulated glass,Low E,with Argon Gas Fill. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install windows according to the manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop drawings to ensure proper installation and operation. B. Install window unit plumb, level and square with no distortion of frame members. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions and comply with Energy Star Homes Technical Standards. 1. If acceptable to manufacturer,seal frame and rough opening using low expansion foam. 2. If low expansion foam is unacceptable to manufacturer, fill perimeter frame to wall opening with batt insulation and backer rod and sealant. Unit must be sealed air tight. D. Apply approved sealant in accordance with Section 07900—Joint Sealers. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Fixed Windows-08612 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.4 PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION A. Window units shall comply with ANSI/NWWDA I.S.2 Grade 40 unless more stringent requirements specified. B. Air infiltration not to exceed 0.18 cfm per lineal ft. of perimeter crack tested at 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E283. C. No water penetration when tested at 4.43 psf Grade 40 according to ASTM E547 (ASTM E331 - Dade County). D. Window must withstand a wind load of 40 psf without damage to unit when tested according to ASTM E330. E. Insulating glass units must be manufactured and tested to meet requirements set forth in ASTM E774. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product listed. B. Manufacturer's product literature for all products and accessories furnished. C. Test reports confirming compliance with performance criteria listed in 1.4. D. Shop drawings and installation instructions. E. Maintenance data. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the storage and delivery requirements specified in Division 1. B. Store windows in a dry location,under cover,protected from weather. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Workmanship and Materials: 1 Year. B. Insulating Glass: 20 year limited warranty. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Windows shall be by same manufacturer as Section 08560-Vinyl Double-Hung Windows. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Fixed Windows-08612 Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 08612-VINYL FIXED WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl fixed windows. 2. Glazing. 3. Accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 4. Section 08800-Glazing. 5. Section 09900-Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM): I. ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 2. ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences. 3. ASTM E547 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 4. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtains and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference(Dade County Only). 5. ASTM E773 -Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 6. ASTM E774-Specification for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. B. National Wood Window&Door Association(NWWDA): 1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 8-88,Industry Standard for Wood Window Units. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 4-81, Industry Standard for Water Repellent Preservative Treatment for Millwork. C. National Fenestration Rating Council(NFRC): I. NFRC 100-91 -Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Fixed Windows-08612 Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11!3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 G. Applied Grilles: 1. Not used. H. Screens: I. Consisting of formed aluminum frames with baked-on acrylic coating, injection molded comer keys, 18x16 nylon mesh. 2. Frame finish:To match window frame finish. 2.3 GLAZING A. General: Provide insulating glass manufactured by the window manufacturer in compliance with IGCC Class CBA, tested in accordance with ASTM E774. Units provided with a dual seal consisting of polyisobutylene as the primary seal and polyurethane as the secondary seal. B. Glass Types: Low E, with Argon Gas Fill. C. Glazing Method: Insulating Glass. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install windows according to the manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop drawings to ensure proper installation and operation. B. Install window unit plumb, level and square with no distortion of frame members. Do not suspend unit from head nailing fin. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions and comply with Energy Star Homes Technical Standards. 1. If acceptable to manufacturer, seal frame and rough opening using low expansion foam. 2. If low expansion foam is unacceptable to manufacturer, fill perimeter frame to wall opening with batt insulation and backer rod and sealant. Unit must be sealed air tight. D. Apply approved sealant in accordance with Section 07900—Joint Sealers. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fill at contact points and at the weather stripping for smooth operation. B. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealant materials. C. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure windows are in acceptable condition at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08560 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Double-Hung Windows-08560 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Visions 2000 Double-Hung windows as manufactured by Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. of Medford, Wisconsin-Basis of Design. Window section to include integral brick mold. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Superseal Manufacturing, Co. with attached PVC brick mold and sill per Section 06200. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 VINYL DOUBLE-HUNG MATERIALS A. Frame: 1. Frame members shall be manufactured from unplasticized polyvinylchloride (uPVC). Frame corners shall be fusion welded and cleaned. Frame extrusion shall be designed to include no less than five individual chambers. 2. Frame shall have standard jamb depth of 2'/4"with an overall profile thickness of 3-1/32". 3. Frame includes integral brick mold profile. B. Sash: 1. Sash members shall be manufactured from unplasticized polyvinylchloride(uPVC). Sash corners shall be fusion welded and cleaned. Sash extrusion shall be designed to include no less than four individual chambers. 2. Sash shall be 1-3/8" in thickness. 3. Bottom sash must tilt in from the inside for cleaning purposes without removal of screens. C. Glazing: 1. Units shall have glass seated in bedding compound against sash exterior. 2. PVC glazing bead is dry glazed and snap fit to interior of the unit to allow re-glazing from the interior. D. Finish: 1. White. E. Hardware: 1. Self-contained block and tackle balance system. Zinc die-cast sash pins disengage sash for easy removal. 2. Zinc die-cast cam locks. Finishes:White. F. Weather Stripping: 1. Full perimeter,woven pile weather stripping with mylar fin applied to the sash. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Double-Hung Windows-08560 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.4 PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION A. Window units shall comply with ANSI/AAMA Class DH-R20 unless more stringent requirements are specified. B. Air infiltration not to exceed 0.10 cfm per lineal ft. of perimeter crack tested at 1.56 psf in accordance with AAMA 101V-86,2.1.2. C. No water penetration when tested at 5.25 psf according to AAMA 101V-86,2.1.3. D. Window must withstand a wind load of 30 psf without damage to unit when tested according to ASTM E330. E. Window units must comply with rating performance for a CRF of 55.46(standard insulating glass)when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1998. F. Insulating glass units must be manufactured and tested to meet requirements set forth in ASTM E774. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product listed. B. Manufacturer's product literature for all products and accessories furnished. C. Test reports confirming compliance with performance criteria listed in 1.4. D. Shop drawings and installation instructions. E. Maintenance data. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the storage and delivery requirements specified in Division 1. B. Store windows in a dry location,under cover,protected from weather. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Workmanship and Materials: I Year. B. Insulating Glass: 20 year limited warranty. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility, the window manufacturer is responsible for extrusion of vinyl frame and sash members, assembly of insulating glass and assembly of all sash and frames. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Double-Hung Windows-08560 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 08560-VINYL DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl double-hung windows with hardware. 2. Glazing. 3. Accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 4. Section 08800-Glazing. 5. Section 09900-Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. AAMA 1503.1-1998-Thermal Test for Condensation Resistance. 2. AAMA 101 V-86,2.1.2 -Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage of Exterior Windows. 3. AAMA 101V-86,2.1.4-Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows. 4. AAMA 101V-86, 2.1.3 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows. 5. ASTM E773 -Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 6. ASTM E774- Specification for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA): 1. ANSI/AAMA 101V-86-Specification for architectural windows and doors. C. National Fenestration Rating Council(NFRC): 1. NFRC 100-91 -Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Double-Hung Windows-08560 Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 A" 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds,dirt,and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section"Glazing"for cleaning and maintaining glass. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrance doors and door operators. Refer to Division 1 Section"Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 08461 AM"` Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 12 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 AV*` D. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions indicated. E. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing." F. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation. 1. Set framing members,thresholds,bottom-guide track system,and flashings in full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. G. Comply with air barrier sealing requirements of Energy Star Homes Technical Standards. H. Signage: Provide caution signs on each automatic entrance door,visible from both sides of door. Mount caution signs with centerline 58 inches(1475 mm)above finished floor. 1. Emergency Breakaway Panels: Provide emergency breakaway sign visible to egress side of each automatic entrance door and sidelite that has emergency breakaway capability. Mount signs adjacent to lock stile with centerline between 36 and 60 inches(900 and 1525 mm)above finished floor. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspector: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrance doors and prepare test and inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. 1. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weathertight closure, and complying with requirements in BHMA A156.10. B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts. C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. D. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 a. Top Beam: 48 inches(1219 mm). b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches(610 mm). 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High-Performance Organic Finish(2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support,and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrance doors plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints,condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws,finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements,wind loads,or vibration,use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,assembly, finishing,hardware application,and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp,straight,and free of defects or deformations. OW 4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from the building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers,including adjusting and testing. E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated,according to GANA's"Glazing Manual." F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory- installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding weather stripping,mortised into door,at perimeter of sliding doors. G. Activation and Safety Devices: Factory install devices in doors and headers. 1. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 Page 9 of 12 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 a. Provide capability for switching between bi-directional and uni-directional detection. b. For one-way-traffic entrance doors, detector on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed. 2. Presence Detector: Infrared-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. Detectors shall remain active at all times. D. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed. E. Key Switch: Recess-mounted, door control switch with key-controlled actuator; enclosed in 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm)junction box. Provide face plate engraved with letters indicating switch functions. 1. Face Plate Material: Painted metal. 2. Functions: Two-way automatic,hold open,one-way exit,off,full open,and partial open. 3. Mounting: Recess mounted indoor jamb. F. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked,latched,or bolted. G. Opening-Width Control Switch: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width. 2.7 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish,unless otherwise indicated. B. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Not used. C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn;with minimum 1-inch-(25-mm-)long throw bolt;BHMA A156.5,Grade 1. 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1,six-pin mortise type. a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system. 2. Deadbolts: Steel,mortise type,BHMA A156.5,Grade 1. 3. Two-Point Locking: Mechanism in stile of active door leaf that automatically extends lockbolt into overhead carrier assembly. D. Automatic Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that automatically locks door against sliding when in closed position. Provide fail secure operation if power fails. E. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 J. Caution Sign: BHMA A156.10;6 inches(150 mm) in diameter,with minimum 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)high, black lettering on a yellow background with the words"CAUTION AUTOMATIC DOOR." K. Emergency Breakaway Sign: BHMA A156.10; red background with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high contrasting letters with the words "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term,maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind pressures. B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet do motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation including spring closing with power off. 1. Operation: Power opening and spring closing. 2. Features: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable backcheck and latching. C. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Obstruction recycle. e. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 2.6 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Motion Detectors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units with metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10;with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. 1. Provide capability for switching between bi-directional and uni-directional detection. 2. For one-way-traffic entrance doors,detector on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed. B. Presence Detectors: Self-contained, infrared-scanner units with metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. Detectors shall remain active at all times. C. Combination Motion/Presence Detectors: Self-contained units; consisting of both motion and presence detectors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. 1. Motion Detector: K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less w. than 2 to 10 seconds. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square,snap-on,extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile;3-1/2-inch(90-mm)nominal width. 3. Rail Design: 6-1/2-inch(165-mm)nominal height. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door;match stile design. 5. Division Bars: Colonial style aluminum grilles in airspace. C. Sidelites: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelites with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2- mm-)thick,extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on,extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite;match stile design. 4. Division Bars: Colonial style aluminum grilles in airspace. D. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing." E. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed,with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg)per leaf over spans up to 14 feet(4.3 m)without intermediate supports. a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet(4.3 m). F. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon-or delrin-covered ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. I. Rollers: Minimum two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active leaf. G. Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom-guide track system, with stainless- steel ball-bearing-center roller wheels. Threshold saddle used at outside door and recessed guide used at inner door. H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extruded Bars,Rods,Profiles,and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M). 3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107;of consistency suitable for application. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos;formulated for 30-mil(0.76-mm)thickness per coat. 2.3 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors,sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance Door: 1. Configuration: Single-sliding door,with one sliding leaf and sidelite. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf and sidelite. C. Mounting: Between jambs. 2. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence detector. 3. Activation Device: Motion detector mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door. 4. Safety Devices: Presence detector mounted to underside of door header and one photoelectric beam mounted in sidelite jambs to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing. 5. Finish: Finish framing, door,sidelite and header with high-performance organic finish (2-coat fluoropolymer). a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 6 inches(45 by 150 mm). 2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch(1.6-mm)wall thickness. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrance door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including,but not limited to,excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators,controls,and hardware. C. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion,provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance door assembly Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance,repair or replacement of worn or defective components,lubrication, cleaning,and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance door assembly operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair, and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to Owner. 2. Perform maintenance,including emergency callback service,during normal working hours. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Single-Sliding Units: a. Besam Automated Entrance Systems,Inc. b. DORMA Automatics;Div.of DORMA Group North America. C. Dor-O-Matic,Inc.;an Ingersoll-Rand Company. d. EFCO Corporation. e. Gildor,Inc. f. Horton Automatics;Div.of Overhead Door Corporation. g. KM Systems,Inc. h. Nabco Entrances Inc. i. Sierra Automatic Doors,Inc. j. Stanley Access Technologies;Div. of The Stanley Works. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Certified Inspector: Certified by AAADM. D. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-- Aluminum." G. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. I. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Not used. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating automatic entrance door assemblies without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrance doors to comply with indicated requirements. C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies and security access control system. 00%* Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 40"k 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Operating Range: Minus 20 deg F(29 deg C)to 130 deg F(54 deg C). E. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 L/s x sq. m) of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static- air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). F. Opening-Force Requirements: 1. Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf(222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails,and not more than 15 lbf(67 N)required to open door to minimum required width. G. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 lbf(133 N)required to prevent door from closing. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for automatic entrance doors. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections,details,hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required,in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance door, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For certified inspector. F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perfonned by a qualified testing agency,for automatic entrance door assemblies. H. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance manuals. L Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a certified inspector. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 08461 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and interior single-sliding,automatic entrance door assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrance doors. 3. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance door operators. .. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that,when actuated,sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors-08461 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame,as well as locations of supports, inserts,and anchoring devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped,bowed,or otherwise damaged. AOW END OF SECTION 08311 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Access Doors and Frames-08311 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Apo,-, B. Flush,Non-Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame:Minimum 0.060-inch-(1.5-mm-)thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. 5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks,rolled trade names,or roughness. C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead for installation in gypsum board assembly, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in plaster and drywall construction. 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Access Doors and Frames-08311 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M for uncoated base metal. E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,Commercial Steel(CS),Type B,with A60(ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M. F. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy 5005-H15; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ANSI H35.2(ANSI H35.2(M)). G. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M,Grade C or D. H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6. 1. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 6328 632M,alloy 6061-T6. J. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch(0.76-mm)zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section"Painting." B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush,Insulated,Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: As required for assembly rating. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F(139 deg C)at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch(0.9 mm). 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-(1.5-mm-)thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush screwdriver with interior release. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Access Doors and Frames-08311 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 rAOW B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL lOB for vertical access doors. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in"Submittals"Article. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Access Doors: a. Acudor Products,Inc. b. Bar-Co,Inc.Div.;Alfab,Inc. C. Cendrex,Inc. d. Cesco Products. e. Elmdor/Stoneman;Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. f. Jensen Industries. g. J.L.Industries,Inc. h. Karp Associates,Inc. i. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. j. MIFAB Manufacturing,Inc. k. Milcor Limited Partnership. 1. Nystrom Building Products Co. m. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. n. Williams Bros.Corporation of America(The). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects;pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Access Doors and Frames-08311 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors and frames. 3. Ceiling access doors and frames. 4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors and frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories" for roof hatches. 2. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying. 3. Division 9 Section"Acoustical Tile Ceilings"for access tile in suspended acoustical tile ceilings. ap► 4. Division 15 Section"Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. C. Unit Prices: Furnish prices for the following as specified in Division 1 Section"Unit Prices": 1. Wall access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors and frames. 3. Ceiling access doors and frames. 4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings(if required)for access doors and frames. B. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions,and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Access Doors and Frames-08311 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; Aovftk do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/2 inch(13 mm) at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch(3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 3/8 inch(9.6 mm)from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section"Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08211 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Molded Hardboard Doors-08225 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard or other manufacturer's standard. 2. Construction: Three plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied. 2.4 HOLLOW-CORE DOORS A. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Standard hollow core. 2. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core. 3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows: a. 5-by-18-inch(125-by-460-mm)lock blocks at both stiles. b. 5-inch(125-mm)top-rail blocking. C. 10-inch(250-mm)bottom-rail blocking. d. 2-1/2-inch(64-mm)midrail blocking. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting or factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated,with the following uniform clearances and bevels,unless otherwise indicated: AM- 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. B. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation,see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard,and as indicated. 0*1 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Molded Hardboard Doors-08225 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship,have warped(bow, cup,or twist)more than 1/4 inch(6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch(1067-by-2134-mm)section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch(0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. b. Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two years. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Hardboard Faced Doors: a. Craftmaster. b. Masonite Corp. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION,GENERAL A. Doors for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Economy. 2. Faces for Interior Doors: Hardboard. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade LD-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through- bolting hardware. •, Rockridge-Northampton,MA Molded Hardboard Doors-08225 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 "* SECTION 08225 -MOLDED HARDBOARD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with medium overlay,6-panel embossed hardboard faces. 2. Hollow-core doors with 6-panel embossed hardboard faces. 3. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry" for wood door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.I-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING 000"4 A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Molded Hardboard Doors-08225 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors will be installed. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,location,and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation,see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard,and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs,and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from ,vft, bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section"Painting." F. Comply with air sealing requirements of Energy Star Homes Technical Standards. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08212 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Stile and Rail Wood Doors-08212 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Interior Doors: 1. Grade for Opaque Finish: Standard. 2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Manufacturer's standard softwood species and cut for stiles and rails; with panels of same species or wood-base construction materials, as standard with manufacturer. 3. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick complying with Division 8 Section"Glazing." 4. Interior Door Types: a. Interior French Doors: WDMA Design Group French Doors. b. Closet Doors: WDMA Design Group Louver Doors,Panel Design. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch(3.2 mm) at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch(13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled,provide 3/8 inch(10 mm)from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W Series standards,and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood stops. E. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. F. Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish,and quality of construction. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop apply one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section"Painting" to faces and edges of doors,including mortises and cutouts. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Stile and Rail Wood Doors-08212 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each stile and rail door is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for friger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components,with either dry-use or wet- use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Low-Emitting Materials: 1. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain added urea- formaldehyde resins. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Artistic Doors and Windows,Inc. 2. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. 3. International Door and Latch. 4. JELD-WEN,Inc. 5. Maywood,Inc. 6. McPhillips Manufacturing. 7. QSM Doors,Inc. 8. Simpson Door Company. 00"'' Rockridge-Northampton,MA Stile and Rail Wood Doors-08212 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry A!w'� Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors,"unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable. C. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials,unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F(16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and fmishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Interior Doors: Five years. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Stile and Rail Wood Doors-08212 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 08212-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Shop priming interior stile and rail wood doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"for wood door frames. 2. Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glass vision panels in stile and rail wood doors and sidelites. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. 1. Include factory-finishing specifications. 2. Include adhesive manufacturer's product data indicating urea-formaldehyde content. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking);and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm),with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. D. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of stile and rail wood door through one source from a single manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Stile and Rail Wood Doors-08212 Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating panel and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at the weather stripping for smooth operation. B. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealant materials. C. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure doors are in acceptable condition at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION OOW Avll" Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors-08203 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Glazing Method: a. Insulated tempered glass. 2. Glass Type: a. Low E with Argon Gas Fill. 3. Units are silicone and tape glazed at panel interior to allow reglazing from the exterior. 4. Units sealed with a cross-linking hot-melt dual seal system. E. Hardware: 1. Single point lockset: Zinc die cast exterior handle white and extruded aluminum interior handle white with oak insert and lock lever. Optional: Key lock. 2. Tandem ball bearing nylon(standard)rollers adjustable to 5/16". 3. All provisions of this section shall conform to specifications highlighted in Section 08710—Door Hardware. F. Weather Stripping: 1. Woven pile weather strip with mylar fin applied to the panel. 2. Woven pile weather strip applied to frame and interlock. G. Screens: 1. Consisting of formed aluminum frames, .045-inch thickness, with baked-on acrylic coating,metal- stamped corner keys, 18 x 16 charcoal fiberglass mesh. Ago'" 2. Tandem ball bearing nylon(standard)rollers adjustable to 5/16"(8 mm). 3. Frame finish: To match exterior frame. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. Drywall return: 1/2"to 5/8"shipped loose. Finish: Color to match interior frame. B. Vinyl brick mould. Color to match exterior frame. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings to ensure proper installation and operation. B. Install door unit plumb, level and square with no distortion of frame members. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions and comply with Energy Star Homes Technical Standard. 1. If acceptable to manufacturer,seal frame and rough opening using low expansion foam. 2. If low expansion foam is unacceptable to manufacturer, fill perimeter frame to wall opening with batt insulation and backer rod and sealant. Unit must be sealed air tight. 00%, D. Apply approved sealant in accordance with Section 07900-Joint Sealers. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors-08203 Page 4 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the storage and delivery requirements specified in Section 01600-Product Requirements. B. Store doors in a dry location,under cover,protected from weather. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Workmanship and materials: 20 year limited warranty. B. Insulating glass: 20 year limited warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Visions 20009 Sliding Glass doors as manufactured by Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. of Medford, Wisconsin. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Superseal Manufacturing Co.,Inc. C. Substitutions:Under provisions of Section 01600. Apo", 2.2 VINYL SLIDING GLASS DOOR MATERIALS A. Frame: 1. Frame members shall be manufactured from .094-inch extruded unplasticized polyvinylchloride (uPVC). Frame corners shall be fusion welded and cleaned. Frame extrusion shall be designed to include no less than 12 individual chambers. 2. Frame shall have standard jamb depth of 3-5/16" with an integral nailing fin and an overall profile thickness of 4-3/4". B. Panel: 1. Panel members shall be manufactured from .094-inch extruded unplasticized polyvinylchloride (uPVC). Panel corners shall be fusion welded and cleaned. Panel extrusion shall be designed to include no less than two individual chambers. 2. Lock stile of multi-chamber panel shall include aluminum reinforcement of .095-inch wall thickness; meeting stile of multi-chamber active and inactive panel shall have aluminum reinforcement of.065-inch thickness. 3. Panel shall be 1-1/2" in thickness,with 2-3/16"rails and stiles. C. Finish: White. D. Glazing: Select quality complying with ASTM C1036. Insulating glass IGCC certified to performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E774. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors-08203 Page 3 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. National Fenestration Rating Council(NFRC): 1. NFRC 100-97—Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. 2. ENERGY STAR®Compliant Models available. D. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). E. Federal Specification(FS): 1. FS L-S-125B—Screen,Insect Non-Metallic. F. Safety glass tested in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Door units shall comply with AAMA/NWWDA Class SGD-R35 (6-0 x 6-8 maximum R.O.)unless more stringent requirements specified. B. Air infiltration not to exceed 0.30 cfm(0.09 m3/min)per lineal ft. of perimeter crack when tested at 1.57 psf(75 Pa)in accordance with ASTM E283. C. No water penetration when tested at 5.25 psf(260 Pa)in accordance with ASTM E547. D. Door must withstand a wind load of 52.5 psf(2520 Pa)without damage to unit when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. E. Doors must pass a forced entry resistance test of at least Level 10 to meet requirements set forth in ASTM F842. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings as set forth in Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's product literature for all products and accessories furnished. C. Submit test reports confirming compliance with performance criteria listed in 1.4. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: Except for hardware mechanisms and aluminum extrusions,the door manufacturer is responsible for fabrication of all components and materials including assembly of insulating glass and manufacture of all panels and frames. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Emergency Egress or Rescue: Comply with requirements for sleeping units of Massachusetts Building Code. 00W Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors-08203 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 oil 1 11 11 SECTION 08203 -VINYL SLIDING GLASS DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl Siding Glass Doors with Hardware. 2. Glazing. 3. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01660-Product Requirements. 3. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08800-Glazing. 7. Section 09900-Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C1036-Specification for Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C1048 - Specifications for Heat Treated Flat Glass — Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 4. ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences. 5. ASTM E547 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 6. ASTM E773 -Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 7. ASTM E774-Specification for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 8. ASTM F842 - Test Method for Measurement of Forced Entry Resistance of Horizontal Sliding Door Assemblies. 9. ASTM E1887 -Standard Test Method for Fog Determination. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/National Wood Window&Door Association: 1. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97—Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum,Vinyl(PVC)and Wood , + Windows and Glass Doors. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors-08203 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 4. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 001 5. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION 08110 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 M. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to ASTM E 413. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better. N. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. O. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate knock-down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. P. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Q. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,according to ANSI A250.8. R. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard,formed from 0.032-inch-(0.8-mm-)thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,louvers,and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. S. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. For in-place gypsum board partitions,install knock-down,drywall slip-on frames. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 F. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings;place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. G. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc- coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. H. Inserts,Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls,comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Metallic-coated steel sheet where indicated. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch(3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch(19 mm)at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Single-Acting,Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge. H. Double-Acting,Door-Edge Profile: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch(54-mm)radius. I. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." J. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. K. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. L. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F(2.33 W/sq.in x K)or better. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 , ** (ZF120)zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating;stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes,thicknesses,and designs indicated. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Interior Flush Doors: Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty), Model 1 Full Flush. 2. Interior Embossed 6-Panel Doors: Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush), embossed 6-panel design. C. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Exterior Flush Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). 2. Exterior Embossed 6-Panel Doors: Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush), embossed 6-panel design. D. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.042-inch-(1.0-mm-)thick steel sheet for: 1. Level 1 steel doors. C. Frames of 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet for: 1. Door openings wider than 48 inches(1220 mm). 2. Level 1 steel doors. 3. Level 2 steel doors. D. Frames of 0.067-inch-(1.7-mm-)thick steel sheet for: 1. Level 3 steel doors. 2. Level 4 steel doors. E. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated,based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F(250 deg C)maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet,remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch(6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products,Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors;a division of General Products Co.,Inc. C. Ceco Door Products;a United Dominion Company. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Company. f. Deansteel Manufacturing,Inc. g. Kewanee Corporation(The). h. Mesker Door,Inc. i. Pioneer Industries Inc. j. Republic Builders Products. k. Steelcraft;a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects;pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel(DS),Type B;stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. AOW Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Sidelight frames 4. Borrowed-light frames. 5. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware and weather stripping. 2. Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glass in glazed openings in doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 4. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings,and finishes. B. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are oow� indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Steel Doors and Frames-08110 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 I Part blend of synthetic rubber Tremco Gutter Seal Gutter systems and resin. Multi component,non-sag,ure- Primer:Type 75 or 150; Sealant:Per- Joints in EIFS systems.Primer is required for seal- thane sealant,ASTM C920 cora Dynatrol II,Primer: Primer 1; ing EIFS to EIFS joints. Verify primer and sealant Sealant: Tremco Dymeric 511 with manufacturer. Butyl Sealant, 1 part,non-sag Pecora BC-158,Tremco Butyl Sealant Under exterior thresholds ASTM C920 Interior Acoustical Sealant, 1 part,butyl USG Acoustical Sealant,Pecora AC- Joints at perimeters of sound rated gypsum wall- type,non-setting,non-skinning, 20,Tremco Acoustical Sealant board assemblies. non-sag,acoustically tested. ASTM C 834 Acrylic Latex, 1 part,non-sag, Pecora AC-20,Tremco Tremflex 834 Interior joints between dissimilar materials,wood ASTM C 834 or OSI LC 160 trim and at door and window frames Urethane, 1 part, self leveling; Pecora Urexpan NR-201,Vulkem 45, Interior control and expansion joints in concrete ASTM C 920 Sika 1 A SL slabs. Single component,neutral,non- Pecora 898,Tremco Tremsil 200,GE Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining sag,silicone sealant. SCS 1700 walls,floors and counters.Joints in commercial kitchens and at country kitchens END OF SECTION 07920 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 7 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 I. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. oomk 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE Sealant Description Manufacturer Locations Exterior Single component non-sag ure- Pecora Dynatrol I-XL,Tremco Dy- Interior and exterior expansion and control joints, thane sealants monic, Sonneborn NP 1 joints at simulated stone,brick masonry,and sid- ing,joints between sections of precast copings, perimeters of exterior doors,windows,lovers,pipe penetrations and other wall penetrations. Urethane, 1 part, self leveling; Pecora Urexpan NR-201,Vulkem 45, Sealant at expansion joints in concrete slabs, side- ASTM C 920 Sika 1 A SL walks and pool decks that are less than 1" wide. Urethane, 2 part, self leveling; Pecora Urexpan NR-200,Tremco Sealant at expansion joints in concrete slabs,side- ASTM C 920 THC 9000 or Vulkem 255 walks and pool decks that are greater than 1"wide. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,harm substrates, AWW• or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. Plastic Laminate f. Primed wood B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,based on joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated,unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration "^ indicated;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 7 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated or field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials,free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water,surface dirt,and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Simulated Stone d. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. Quarry Tile f. Marble and Granite tile 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2 -PRODUCTS AOW 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products listed in the Schedule at the end of this section. 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade,class,and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates,provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food;provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.4 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS A. Not Used 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants,primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330,Type C(closed-cell material with a surface skin) O(open- cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F(minus 32 deg Q. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 7 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for"Product Test Reports" Paragraph in"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920,and where applicable,to other standard test methods. 3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. D. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints,as follows,to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive look elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 0V- Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through Penetration Firestop Systems" for sealing penetrations in fire- resistance-rated construction. 2. Division 7 Section"Exterior Insulation and Finish System-Class PB"for EIFS related sealants. 3. Division 8 Section"Glazing"for glazing sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency,indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Joint Sealants-07920 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 ROW THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS KEY IRERESISTANCE RATE WALL CONSTRUCTION : .7d�3,3�:iFpi rI`PPLICABLE DESIGNS INCLUDE ryr s�;I4s€ .!' WJ.W.-3'•*L AND,;-`J.C'K "L SERIE.�j f:i;! i3::'A& ..........I ,4i;i1aI3'::1•s PENETRANT —� ,-+•..s:,3=I�=' ' `;i i:l:alr::to �ftE.FERTOSCFIEDULE. .•i••..,;,1{{�{ FOR TYPE 1 11", ! n4p r. - n;'rsr, THROUGH-PENETRATION + +i:' ?!:-?r`!3; FIRESTOP SYSTEM- lj iH' 111F3. PROVIDE SYSTEM IN t3°Rih3'i7°{` ACCORDANCE WITH Jul`;=13`!st FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE t{= ills :.i,r7ar�..LH FN IRERESISTANCE RATE I FLOOR CONSTRUCTION AFIRE BARRIER 3APPL11>BLE DESIGNS INCLUDE F-A.,F-E•F-C A•iJD C-A',C-E- C-"oERIESj � •` .•,,.. iGt;l,;;: la is?75::4:m:!foil"'`3•,. •u� f:3' -i'�r73:�I�:!i j ! ky}I u:ur.-�{iu3ii31'ii4t:(1s44iii?•`a?:H ! r:.:�::_•:uet3?!Iifl iSi!3iiiiti!'-:���r�e.a!aij �'y� {!f'.Ic4ij3i'S ..:FFr.,4r,ts:{rtt�:t;J7:�}{{Fl�:,E3h:4311�;•l�j :F �1!�'?3 -n. x r!:ri a.:}: , {•rrm•334!!�rtn3E3'i t3s s.r.:v.�:nr.:s.._•.•e: -eit•1..:' t -r,I,j... G��fic9i,tt',i•,T!-r,7ut,:t!,=:f f�}��tt'':kG! i !�.3 ii''%3l>?!3;1!..3 3Fli•M1.�f7 }{3. k'ani:i rnr�,{{ !•.�'1 i,i�rn! ,�+t{�•3i:}!;:fi4'!T�� �,S,Q �6�S ".•5t.u�u fi xi 17u !uc:{:.ax•3t�rflx!iE ii', �� �4 Y�••i4•n: u•Is3� _ .� '} Y.3.33��E!t i f 'iif Isu. �?L.:�Pi "L.i .n.i. �.s.. 'f •..�r. ,3r.,. •ne- {{ 131.3 3.jit 3i I:3 ? t i:.:.rrl:�:P,tl �`!1...3- ';.,, : ri.. E; 3 r:�3;. r:3 I��i�i3 n? .f�:r T�!:is �i s:n343::II,..�lxe;; i.•--,��i3�r•'.4>�1C.rkuu:u �!U.t.. t > �,�'•'L�nft{{�!idi 4 G ::iiil,:r!::ur>?m 43'x.i:,� !'' u if t 7 il,'•Y3!p Sttt.^ 1:.,St .•.:L•{•r a:3!� :it x3'3u' 6 3i3:r••i 'r e�,7 r�.c.13'n••I 1:i' >�r�r'i I7U r m..µ{ .,.�:3•�:;.i�+t� 1..IQL:i:J:. w ,• s;� , r :f.:3;,3:.•:,�It} .4f 3!t a•.t7:3� .�,e1 f;7•ni' :Y::t r:.�I 'Iw,3�3?•4��• '�� � 1� 3�y ��h�3u�!!i 7Ix>`i•y:;��.� �1�}�j�t��'''t#t`, •�� {- 3!i lrl i•i•;7-�i,!•i5•�i='�f�;,it1r33i! i".a9� ���a.!a{},�F{}y; 3ii�,�i#t•�' ��''{}n�[i�ri!I_ 3���r�Ii3 ni.{�i tP�}'• 4 at8{��s iaGE?.'i�uG L 4:.'t''u •�"A'.�:i�:'�.'���'e7, � ..�. 3?3!R- ,: :^..n:..rr>Ihf.t$SAM, 1�I^...4 l3:!4 i x, :i.i3mt •• I i ..0-..n t..:sm r;, r n {. ,K SI{P;:iIIL:�},�";n S':r4,fl:::.{.�r?i 4 r., vix I i ( I Courtesy of The Hillier Group,Princeton,New Jersey END OF SECTION 07841 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 W-J-4001-4999 INSULATED PIPES C-AJ-5001-5999 C-BJ-5001-599 F-C-5001-599 C-AJ-5001-599 W-L-5001-5999 or 9 9 9 F-A-5001-5999 or W-J-5001-5999 ,X MISCELLANEOUS C-AJ-6001-6999 C-AJ-6001-699 W-L-6001-6999 ELECTRICAL or 9 PENETRANTS F-A-6001-6999 xx x MISCELLANEOUS C-AJ-7001-7999 F-C-7001-799 C-AJ-7001-799 W-L-7001-7999 MECHANICAL 9 9 PENETRANTS or W-J-7001-7999 GROUPING OF C-AJ-8001-8999 C-BJ-8001-899 F-C-8001-899 C-AJ-8001-899 W-L-8001-8999 PENETRATIONS or 9 9 9, F-A-8001-8999 C-BJ-8001-899 9, or W-J-8001-8999 For each location where a fire-resistance-rated floor or wall assembly is penetrated,provide a UL-listed through-penetration firestop system selected from the applicable UL number range listed above that complies with SECTION 07841 -THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS and is suitable for the penetration conditions indicated for the project. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE Firestop S stems are listed using the Alpha-Alpha-Numeric Identification System Published in UL's Fire Resistance Directory,Vol.2 CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PENETRATION SYSTEMS WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS (First Alpha Component=C or F) (First Alpha Component=C or W) Concrete Floors Concrete Floors Framed Floors Concrete or Concrete or Framed Walls with a minimum with a Masonry Walls Masonry walls thickness less than minimum with a minimum with a or equal to 5 inches thickness thickness less than minimum greater than 5 or equal to 8 thickness TYPE OF inches inches greater than 8 PENETRANT inches NO PENETRATING C-AJ-0001-0999 or C-BJ-0001-099 C-AJ-001-999 W-L-000-1-0999 ITEMS F-A-0001-0999 9, 9, C-BJ-0001-099 9, or W-J-0001-099 METALLIC PIPE, C-AJ-1001-1999 C-BJ-1001-199 F-C-1001-199 C-AJ-1001-199 C-BK-1001-199 W-L-1001-1999 CONDUIT,OR or 9, 9 9, 9 TUBING F-A-1001-1999 C-BK-1001- C-BJ-0001-099 or 199 9,or 9, W-K-1001-1999 F-B-1001-1999 or W-J-1001-1999 NONMETALLIC C-AJ-2001-2999 C-BJ-2001-299 F-C-2001-299 C-AJ-2001-299 W-L-2001-2999 PIPE,CONDUIT, or 9 or 9 9, OR TUBING F-A-2001-2999 F-B-2001-2999 C-BJ-2001-299 9, or W-J-2001-2999 ELECTRICAL C-AJ-3001-3999 C-BJ-3001-399 F-C-3001-399 C-AJ-3001-399 W-L-3001-3999 CABLES or 9 9 9, F-A-3001-3999 or C-BJ-3001-399 F-B-3001-3999 9, or W-J-3001-3999 CABLE TRAYS C-AJ-4001-4999 C-BJ-4001-499 C-AJ-4001-499 W-K-4001- W-L-4001-4999 WITH or 9 9, 4999 ELECTRICAL F-A-4001-4999 C-BJ-4001-499 A01** CABLES 9, or Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through- penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued. C. Where deficiencies are found,repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through- penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through- penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations,penetrating items,substrates,and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill 40"*. materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill,void,or cavity materials. B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork,and a neoprene gasket. C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers,or silicone compounds. G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, "^ and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillowsibags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber,water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent,silicone-based liquid elastomers that,when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible,nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing,single-component,silicone-based,neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 2. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2-PRODUCTS ems', 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 that are available from the following manufacturers: B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals,Inc. 5. Instant Firestop Mfg.Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings Corp. 7. Isolatek International. 8. Nelson Firestop Products. 9. NUCOIndustries. 10. RectorSeal Corporation(The). 11. Specified Technologies Inc. 12. 3M Fire Protection Products. 13. Tremco. 14. United States Gypsum Company. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include,but are not limited to,the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials,including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. C. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 10 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 "` C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in"Performance Requirements"Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in"Fire Resistance Directory." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section"Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project;curing time;and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes, contaminants,or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain,frost,condensation,or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,where this is inadequate,forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through- penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations;confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind AIM* other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction,have examined each installation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- (100-mm-) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) AON* in overall cross-sectional area. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view,traffic,moisture,and physical damage,provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view,provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450,as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire- protection engineer. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. .. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated,from a single manufacturer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Frrestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07841 -THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire- resistance-rated assemblies,including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Floors. 2. Roofs. 3. Walls and partitions. 4. Smoke barriers. 5. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete slabs and walls. 2. Division 7 Section'Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories. 3. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For the following constructions,provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection-rated openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 3. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies. B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T- ratings indicated,as well as F-ratings,as determined per ASTM E 814,where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck,roof insulation, flashing,roofing membranes,penetrations,equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual,"unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood,by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing(as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. F. Operational Units: Test-operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Accessories-07720 Page 4 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 ' E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm)dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening,nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O. 2.3 ROOF HATCHES A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9- kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 9-inch- (225-mm-) high, integral-curb, double-wall construction with 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1- inch- (25-mm-) thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion- resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps,and both interior and exterior latch handles. B. Type: Single-leaf personnel access. 1. Type l: Single leaf lid,30 by 36 inches(750x900mm). C. Material: Aluminum or galvanized steel,or in combination,at Contractor's option. 1. Finish: High-performance organic coating. D. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.4 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Accessories-07720 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's"Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"details for installing units. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Roof Hatches: a. Babcock-Davis Hatchways,Inc. b. Bilco Company. C. Bristolite Skylights. d. Custom Curb,Inc. e. Dur-Red Products,Inc. f. Goeller Enterprises. g. Hi Pro International,Inc. h. J.L.Industries,Inc. i. Metallic Products Corporation. j. Milcor,Inc. k. Nystrom Products Co. 1. O'Keeffe's Inc. m. Precision Stair Corporation. n. Roof Products&Systems Corp. o. ThyCurb,Inc, P. Trimco,Inc. q. Wasco Products,Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for alclad alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations,with mill finish,unless otherwise indicated. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M) alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements,with mill finish,unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M with G90 (Z275) coating designation; commercial quality,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Structural Quality: Grade 40(Grade 275),where indicated or as required for strength. D. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Accessories-07720 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.:10213 SECTION 07720-ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof hatches. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for ladders and miscellaneous metal framing and supports. 2. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing,wood cants,and wood nailers. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing,scuppers,fasciae,and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 4. Division 7 Section"Manufactured Roof Specialties"for fasciae,copings. 5. Division 7 Section"Roof Expansion Assemblies" for roof expansion-joint covers. 6. Division 7 Section"Asphalt Shingles"for ridge vents. 7. Division 7 Sections for roofing accessories included as part of roofing Work. 8. Division 9 Section"Painting"for shop primers and field painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materials, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other Work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for roof accessories with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples in manufacturer's standard sizes, and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color or shade variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Accessories-07720 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion assemblies and materials,unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Coordinate installation of roof expansion joint assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. C. Extend roof expansion joint assemblies over sloped and flat roof assemblies and fascia and soffit with factory-fabricated transitions to provide continuous,uninterrupted,waterproof roof expansion assemblies. 1. Install factory-fabricated transitions between roof expansion joint assemblies and building expansion joint cover assemblies, specified in Division 5 Section "Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies,"to provide continuous,uninterrupted,watertight construction. D. Splice roof expansion joint assemblies with materials provided by roof expansion assembly manufacturer for this purpose, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to provide continuous, uninterrupted, waterproof roof expansion assemblies. E. Provide uniform profile of expansion joint assembly throughout length of each installation; do not stretch polymeric sheets. F. Bed anchorage flanges in cement or sealant recommended by manufacturer and securely nail to curbs and cant strips as recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 6 inches(150 nun)o.c. G. Anchor roof expansion joint assemblies in the manner indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. H. Provide not less than a 4-inch (100-mm) embedding of flanges in bituminous membranes, with hot bitumen or roof cement. Cover with stripping material and install according to requirements in Division 7 Section"Asphalt Shingles." I. On single-ply roofing, install roof expansion joint assemblies in the manner indicated, complying with manufacturer's instructions. Anchor to cants or curbs and seal to membrane with sealant compatible with roofing membrane and expansion joint assembly. Cover flanges with stripping or flashing and install according to requirements in Division 7 Section"EPDM Membrane Roofing." 3.2 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures roof expansion joint assemblies are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07716 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Expansion Assemblies-07716 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip zinc-coating designation G90 (Z275), stretcher- leveled standard of flatness and either commercial steel or forming steel, minimum 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) thick. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, minimum 0.015 inch(0.4 mm)thick. C. Copper: ASTM B 370,temper H00(cold rolled)unless temper 060 is required for forming,minimum 16 oz./sq.ft. (0.55 mm thick). D. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) alloy 3003-H14, 5052-H32, or 6061-T6, mill finish, minimum 0.032 inch(0.8 mm)thick. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T52, mill finish, minimum 0.040 inch(1.0 mm)thick. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type II. B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 665. C. Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber: ASTM D 1056. D. Silicone Extrusions: Classified according to ASTM D 2000, 4GE, 709, UV stabilized and does not propagate flame. 2.4 BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard assemblies of sizes and types indicated,including prefabricated units for corner and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion joints, splicing units, adhesives, coatings, and other components as recommended by joint unit manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate assemblies specifically for roof-to-roof applications. B. Metal-Flanged, Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Assemblies: Provide assemblies consisting of exposed polymeric sheet over foam bellows, securely anchored at both edges to 3- to 4-inch- (76- to 100-mm-) wide sheet metal nailing flanges, either flat or angle formed to fit cant or curbs as required. Insulate bellows with closed-cell, flexible rubber or plastic foam not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick; adhere bellows to underside of polymeric sheet. 1. Polymeric Sheet: EPDM,60 mils(1.5 mm)thick. 2. Metal Flanges: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel,minimum 0.019 inch(0.5 mm)thick. 3. Metal Flanges: Where flanges will be embedded in concrete or mortar, provide manufacturer's standard perforated-metal mortar flanges. 4. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible, continuous, polymeric moisture barrier looped under roof expansion assembly covers at locations indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Expansion Assemblies-07716 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roof expansion joint assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal-flanged, bellows-type roof expansion joint assemblies approved by roofing membrane manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate delivery and installation of expansion joint assemblies to prevent damage and provide timely integration of units with roofing membranes and flashing. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by roof expansion assembly manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace roof expansion assemblies that leak, deteriorate in excess of rates specified in manufacturer's published product literature, or otherwise fail to perform within specified warranty period. C. Warranty Period: Two years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Metal-Flanged,Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Joint Assemblies: a. T Series Roof Expansion Cover;Architectural Art Manufacturing,Inc. b. Type BRBG-2-SN Roof Bellows;Balco Metalines,a division of Balco,Inc. C. Metalastic;BMCA Insulation Products,Inc./GAF. d. Expansion Joint Shield;Celotex Corporation. e. Expand-O-Flash;Johns Manville Corporation. f. Series ERJ;MM Systems Corporation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Expansion Assemblies-07716 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07716-ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal-flanged,bellows-type roof expansion joint assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for expansion joint covers in construction other than roofs. 2. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs for mounting roof expansion assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section"Asphalt Shingles." 4. Division 7 Section"BPDM Membrane Roofing." 5. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal expansion joint systems,flashing,and other sheet metal items. 6. Division 7 Section"Manufactured Roof Specialties" for other manufactured roof items. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide roof expansion joint assemblies that, when installed, remain watertight within movement limitations specified by manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, construction details, material and finish descriptions,installation instructions,and dimensions of individual components. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,joints, splices,locations of joints and splices, anchorage details, intersections, transitions, fittings, and attachments to other Work. Where joint assemblies change planes,provide isometric drawings depicting how components interconnect to achieve continuity. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roof expansion joint assemblies' compliance with building code in effect for Project,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 0W Rockridge-Northampton,MA Roof Expansion Assemblies-07716 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units contact dissimilar metal or corrosive substrates,including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer. C. Expansion Provisions: Install running lengths to allow controlled expansion for movement of metal components in relation not only to one another but also to adjoining dissimilar materials, including flashing and roofing membrane materials, in a manner sufficient to prevent water leakage, deformation, or damage. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure work of this Section will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07710 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 A*W 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 1402, Test Method 7. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and glosses. 2.8 COIL-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Apply high-performance fluoropolymer coating, complying with ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M) process, in thickness indicated, on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturer and applicator. Furnish appropriate air-drying spray finish in matching color for touchup. B. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm)and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523. 1. Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel,blister, flake, chip,crack,or check in finish;without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and glosses. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, roof edges,and parapets for suitable conditions for roof edge system installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of finished metals. Strip with care to avoid damage to finish. B. Prepare surfaces to receive roof edge system specified. Install blocking, cleats, water dams, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive work of this Section and with vapor retarders,roofing insulation, roofing membrane, flashing, and wall construction, as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor products securely to structural substrates to withstand lateral and thermal stresses and inward and outward loading pressures. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 Page 5 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Provide gutters and downspouts fabricated from the following metal: 1. Formed-aluminum sheet in thickness indicated,but not less than the following: a. Thickness: 0.032 inch(0.8 mm). 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories designed and manufactured to match and fit roof edge treatment system indicated. B. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel, nonmagnetic, of manufacturer's standard type and size for product and application indicated. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Concealed Fasteners: Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers,compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm)dry film thickness per coat. F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening,nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant. G. Foam-Rubber Seal: Manufacturer's standard foam. 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare,pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating or resin manufacturer's written instructions. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 a. ABC Seamless,Inc. b. Architectural Products Co. C. ATAS International,Inc. d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman: W.P.Hickman Co. f. Merchant and Evans,Inc. g. Metal-Era,Inc. h. MM Systems Corp. i. Petersen Aluminum Corp. j. Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. 2.2 METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for use intended and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 1. Alloy 5005-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch (1.2 mm), for aluminum sheet with other than mill finish. B. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet prepainted by coil-coating process with indicated coating complying with ASTM A 755(ASTM A 755M). 2.3 COPINGS A. Provide copings in shapes and sizes indicated, with shop-fabricated corners. Include anchor plates formed from at least 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet; cleats or other attachment devices; concealed splice plates; and trim and other accessories indicated or required for complete installation,with no exposed fasteners. B. Provide exposed coping components fabricated from one of the following metals: 1. Formed-aluminum sheet in thickness indicated,but not less than the following: a. Thickness: 0.063 inch(1.6 mm). 2. Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet in thickness indicated,but not less than the following: a. Thickness: 0.034 inch(0.85 mm). 2.4 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Provide gutters and downspouts in shapes and sizes indicated,with mitered and welded comers. Include steel straps formed from at least 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet; hangers or other attachment devices; screens; end plates; and trim and other accessories indicated or required for complete installation. 1. Cottages: 5""K"Style with 2"x3"downspouts. 2. Congregate Building:6""K"Style with 3"x4"downspouts. B. Additional Features: Provide items below fabricated from the same metal as gutters and downspouts. 1. Downspout starters(fascia sump)with downspout starter hole. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11!3!03 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide manufactured roof specialties capable of withstanding wind loads, structural movement,thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failing. B. Provide manufactured roofing specialties, incorporating roof edge treatment that complies with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the appropriate Wind Zone. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof specialty from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this Section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation to ensure best-possible weather resistance and protection of materials and finishes against damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Formed-Aluminum Copings: a. ABC Seamless,Inc. b. Architectural Products Co. C. ATAS International,Inc. d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman: W.P.Hickman Co. f. Merchant and Evans,Inc. g. Metal-Era,Inc. h. MM Systems Corp. i. Petersen Aluminum Corp. j. Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. 2. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Copings: a. ATAS International,Inc. b. Hickman: W.P.Hickman Co. C. Merchant and Evans,Inc. d. Metal-Era,Inc. e. Petersen Aluminum Corp. 3. Formed-Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 07710-MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Copings. 2. Gutters and downspouts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, scuppers,trim and fascia units,and miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 2. Division 7 Section"Roof Expansion Assemblies"for roof expansion joint covers. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured curbs, roof hatches, gravity ventilators, penthouse ventilators, and smoke vents. Roof accessories installed integrally with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system Sections as roofing work. 4. Division 7 Section"Asphalt Shingles"for ridge vents and drip edge. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, joining, profiles, accessories, anchorage, flashing connections, and relationship to supporting structure and to adjoining roof and wall construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Furnish straight Samples in lengths specified below or where corner pieces are required for Project;furnish corner Samples with each leg in lengths specified below: 1. Copings: 8 inches(200 mm)long. 2. Gutters and Downspouts: 8 inches (200 mm) long, including liners, screens, straps, hangers,and other support and attachment devices. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Manufactured Roof Specialties-07710 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of O" roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping,being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows,doors,and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head and similar flashings to extend 4 inches(100 mm)or full dimension of opening trim beyond wall openings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings,pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 9 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,buckling,and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and elastomeric or butyl sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches(300 nun)apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)deep,filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)for nails and not less than 3/4 inch(19 mm)for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted,Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper or stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. 4001, 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F(4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper. 2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head. 3. Seal or solder exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work Aqw with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3103 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head and similar flashings to extend full length of trim and beyond wall openings. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. 2.9 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound,dry,smooth,clean,sloped for drainage,and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,welding rods,protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene low underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim,unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible,noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior,4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm)beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from one of the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. b. Prepainted,Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch(0.7 mm)thick. 2.7 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step,Cricket,and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. B. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. 2. Prepainted,Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch(0.55 mm)thick. C. Eave,Rake,Ridge,and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. D. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch(1.0 mm)thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch(0.8 mm)thick. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft.(1.6 mm thick),hard tempered. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,nonsag,nontoxic,nonstaining tape. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized,heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm)dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,asbestos free,of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Contractor shall coordinate the flashing requirements of the window and door manufacturer, siding and exterior insulation and finish system. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements,but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M),Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005,Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required,but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating: a. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil(0.02 mm)for topcoat. b. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604,except as modified below: a) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. b) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-(0.15-mm-)thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B. Felts: ASTM D 226,Type II(No. 30),asphalt-saturated organic felt,nonperforated. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper,minimum 3 lb/100 sq.ft.(0.16 kg/sq. m). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents AOW contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories,unit skylights,and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements,including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping,twisting,and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do OWN- not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. lomk Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material,thickness,weight,and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening,joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners,clips,cleats,and attachments to adjoining work. 4. Details of expansion-joint covers,including showing direction of expansion and contraction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with factory- applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim: 12 inches(300 mm)long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: Full-size Sample. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approval of mockups is for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Formed roof flashing and trim. 2. Formed wall flashing and trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for manufactured sheet metal expansion joint covers. 2. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers,curbs, and blocking. 3. Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingles" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 4. Division 7 Section "EPDM Membrane" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. 5. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet metal flashing and trim. 6. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents,and other manufactured roof accessory units. 7. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants. 8. Division 7 Section"Exterior Insulation and Finish System" for metal flashing requirements. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: 1. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 lbf/sq. ft. (1.48 to 2.15 kPa): 90-lbf/sq. ft. (4.31- kPa) perimeter uplift force, 120-1bf/sq. ft. (5.74-kPa) corner uplift force, and 45-lbf/sq. ft. (2.15- kPa)outward force. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim-07620 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing "` installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report,with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07531 Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 G. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas,apply splice tape,and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. K. Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated,or if not indicated at locations where EPDM is subject to degradation by potentially grease faulty mechanical equipment. L. At roof slope transition where asphalt shingles meet EPDM,run EPDM up slope a minimum of 24". Lap top 12 inches with self adhering membrane underlayment (see section 07311). Asphalt shingles are attached by nailing through EPDM directly into substrate. Extend roofing felt and asphalt shingles 12" over top edge of EPDM. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings. 3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. F. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. G. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch(6 mm)of nailers,projections,and penetrations. H. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. I. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. Mechanically fasten when required to satisfy design load requirements. 1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers,perimeter,and field of roof. J. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers,perimeter,and field of roof. 3.4 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. E. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Cover Board: DOC PS 2,Exposure 1,oriented strand board,7/16 inch(11 mm)thick. 2.7 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface- textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 1. NOTE: Design intent is to have one continuous walkway along the entire building length and around each piece of roof top equipment. For GMP, Contractor to assume twice the length of EPDM roofing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 400* D. Install vapor barrier on warm side of assembly if not otherwise provided at interior surface. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm(7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq.m). 1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive,FMG approved for vapor-retarder application. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards,selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. AlliedSignal Inc.;Commercial Roofing Systems. b. Apache Products Company. C. Atlas Roofing Corporation. d. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. e. Celotex Corporation. A"' f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corp. h. GenFlex Roofing Systems. i. Hunter Panels,LLC. j. Johns Manville International,Inc. k. Koppers Industries. 1. RMAX. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/2 inch per 12 inches(1:24),unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Alternatively, shapes may be formed from tapered insulation as required. 2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Fasteners used if/and as required to satisfy design load requirements. C. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere AOW roof insulation to substrate. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 Page 6 of 10 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 k. Stafast Roofing Products. 1. Versico Inc. 2. Thickness: 60 mils(1.5 mm),nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-(1.5-mm-)thick EPDM,partially cured or cured,according to application. C. Epichlorohydrin Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, unreinforced flexible sheet with the following typical properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated: 1. Tensile Strength: 1500 psi(10.3 MPa);ASTM D 412. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent;ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 150 lbf/in.(26.3 kN/m);ASTM D 412. 4. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F(Minus 29 deg C);ASTM D 746. 5. Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated sample at 104 deg F(40 deg C)and 100-pphm(100-MPa)ozone;ASTM D 1149. 6. Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours' immersion in diesel fuel No.2 at 158 deg F(70 deg C);ASTM D 471. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. E. Seaming Material: Single-component butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant,color to match roofing membrane. G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch(25 by 3 mm)thick;with anchors. 1. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch(25 mm)wide by 0.05 inch(1.3 mm)thick,prepunched. J. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings,T joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips,and other accessories. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, substrate board,walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type 1, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM,and as follows: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Celotex Corporation. C. ERSystems. d. Firestone Building Products Company. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. International Diamond Systems. g. Johns Manville International,Inc. h. Mule-Hide Products Co.,Inc. !+. i. Protective Coatings,Inc. j. Roofing Products International,Inc. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 10 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by roofing membrane manufacturer. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A;ASTM E 108,for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. "'' 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean,dry,protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing,and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 10 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans,elevations,sections,details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation,including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 12-by-12-inch(300-by-300-mm)square of roof insulation. 3. 12-by-12-inch(300-by-300-mm)square of walkway pads or rolls. 4. 12-inch(300-mm)length of metal termination bars. 5. Six insulation fasteners of each type,length,and finish. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized,or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in"Performance Requirements"Article. 1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,for components of roofing system. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing and FMG approval for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548. 00*_ Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 10 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 07531 -EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Adhered membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers,curbs,and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section"Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings,and counterflashings. 4. Division 7 Section"Roof Expansion Assemblies." 5. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 6. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for roof drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight;do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7. 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 40 lbf/sq.ft.(kPa/sq.m). 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 40 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq.m). 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 15 lbf/sq. ft.(kPa/sq.m). Rockridge-Northampton,MA EPDM Membrane Roofing-07531 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 10 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Contractor shall pay particular attention and provide coordination for flashing requirements at and around wall penetrations at windows and doors as applicable for the manufacturers of windows and doors and siding systems. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. B. Install vinyl siding and soffit and accessories according to ASTM D 4756. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07460 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Siding-07460 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 n. Variform,Inc. 2. Pattern: 6-inch(152-norm)exposure in beaded-edge,2-inch(51-nun)triple board style. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Ventilation: Provide non-perforated,slotted edge soffit. 5. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.035 inch(0.9 mm). 6. Minimum Profile Height: 1/2 inch(13 mm). 7. Colors for Vinyl Soffit: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding,unless otherwise indicated 2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding,unless otherwise indicated. B. Vinyl Accessories: Where vinyl accessories are indicated, provide integrally colored vinyl accessories complying with ASTM D 3679 except for wind-load resistance. 1. Texture: Smooth. C. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Louvers. 2. Moldings and trim. AMMI D. Colors for Decorative Accessories: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"at window and door heads and where indicated. 1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish,same color as siding. F. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O joint substrates. NOTE: Silicon sealants are detrimental to PVC exterior trims and are NOT to be used. G. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch(25 mm)into substrate. 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of inch(6 mm)or 3 screw-threads into substrate. 3. For fastening to aluminum, use aluminum fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view,use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened. 4. For fastening vinyl, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Siding-07460 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 5. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each siding and soffit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 SIDING A. Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored,vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Alcoa Building Products,Inc. b. Alside,Inc. C. CertainTeed Corp. d. Crane Plastics Holding Company. e. Gentek Building Products,Inc. f. Heartland Building Products. g. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. h. Mitten Vinyl Inc. i. Owens Corning. j. Resource Materials Corporation; Subsidiary of Poly-Foam International,Inc. k. Rollex Corporation. 1. Royal Group Technologies Limited. m. Variform,Inc. 2. Horizontal Pattern: Type B; 8-inch (203-mm) exposure in plain, double 4-inch (102-mm) board style. 3. Horizontal Pattern: Type A; 6-1/2- or 7-inch (165- or 178-mm) exposure in square-edge, single board style. 4. Texture: Type A;Wood grain. Type B;Wood grain. 5. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch(1.0 mm). 6. Minimum Profile Depth(Butt Thickness): %inch(13 mm). 7. Nailing Hem: Double thickness. 8. Colors for Vinyl Siding: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOFFIT A. Vinyl Soffit: Integrally colored,vinyl soffit complying with ASTM D 4477. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Same manufacturers listed for vinyl siding. b. Alcoa Building Products,Inc. C. Alside,Inc. d. CertainTeed Corp. e. Crane Plastics Holding Company. f. Gentek Building Products,Inc. g. Heartland Building Products. h. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. i. Mitten Vinyl Inc. j. Owens Corning. k. Resource Materials Corporation; Subsidiary of Poly-Foam International,Inc. 1. Rollex Corporation. m. Royal Group Technologies Limited. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Siding-07460 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 olpw 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Siding and Soffit: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories,through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide vinyl siding products that are listed in VSI's list of certified products. C. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area. 2. Build mockup approximately 10' long by 20' high. Include outside comer on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight place. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Siding-07460 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 07460-SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl siding. 2. Vinyl soffit. 3. Vinyl decorative accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for building wrap. 2. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"for exterior trim. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, scuppers, and other sheet metal work. 4. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." 5. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for gutters and downspouts and copings. 6. Refer to Section 01230 Alternates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For vinyl siding products, include VSI's official certification logo printed on Product Data. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For siding, soffit and decorative accessories. C. Samples for Verification: For each type,color,texture, and pattern required. 1. 12-inch-(300-mm-)long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 12-inch-(300-mm-)long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 3. 12-inch-(300-mm-)long-by-actual-width Sample of trim. D. Product Certificates: For each type of siding and soffit, signed by product manufacturer. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Siding-07460 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written AoNk instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. END OF SECTION 07311 o"' Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA s Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7 inches (175 mm)wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch(13 mm)over drip edge at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses,maintaining uniform exposure. D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches(50 mm)short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips. 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches(150 mm)of valley center. 2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-)wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches(150 mm)over self-adhering sheet underlayment. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment; wrinkle free, and on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches(914 mm)beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches(914 mm)beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches(450 mm)on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches(450 mm)on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches(914 mm)on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches(450 mm) and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches(100 mm). 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches(100 mm). 8. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches(450 mm)on each roof slope. 9. Asphalt shingles to E.P.D.M. roofing: Overlap E.P.D.M. by 12". Note: E.P.D.M. to transition from "flat" roof to sloped roof by extending up sloped roof 24". Top 12" of E.D.P.M to be covered by self-adhering underlayment and asphalt shingles. C. Concealed Closed-Cut Valley Lining: Comply with ARMA and NRCA recommendations. Install a 36- inch- (914-mm-) wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Fasten to roof deck with felt underlayment nails. 1. Lap roof deck felt underlayment over valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches(150 mm). 2. Install a 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide strip of granular-surfaced valley lining centered in valley, with granular-surface face up. Lap ends of strips at least 12 inches(300 mm)in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten to roof deck with roofing nails. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 8 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 a. Air Vent,Inc.,a Certainteed Company;Flash Filtervent. b. Comparable products by other manufacturers may be considered. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type II,asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667;aluminum,stainless-steel,copper,or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch(3 mm)through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing,use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch(25-mm)minimum diameter. 2.7 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural ' Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design,dimensions,metal,and other characteristics of item. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches(125 mm)over and 4 inches (100 mm) beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm)up the vertical surface. 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimum extension of 5 inches(125 mm)over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 18 inches (450 nun) beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches(150 mm)beyond each side of chimney, skylight or roof accessory and 6 inches(150 mm)above the roof plane. 4. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet(3 m)with 5-inch roof deck flange and 1/4- inch double over edge projection and 1 1/8" fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. Prefinished white color. 5. Vent Pipe Flashing: ASTM B 749,Type L5 1121,at least 1/16"thick.Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe,in order to solder to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4" from pipe onto roof. NOTE: Vent piping should generally not be installed in asphalt shingle roofs but rather into the E.P.D.M."flat"roof sections. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 6. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869,Type I,asphalt-saturated organic felts,nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment,Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970,minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SMS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to receive underlayment. 1. Available Products: a. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing,Div.of Carlisle Companies,Inc.;Dri-Start"A." b. Grace,W.R. &Co.;Grace Ice and Water Shield. C. Henry Company;Perma-Seal PE. d. Johns Manville International,Inc.;Roof Defender. e. NEI Advanced Composite Technology;AC Poly Ice and StormSeal. f. Owens Corning;WeatherLock M. g. Polyguard Products,Inc.;Polyguard Deck Guard. h. Protecto Wrap Company;Rainproof TM. i. SafSeal Innovations; SafSeal 7740. C. Granular surfaced valley lining: ASTM D 3909,mineral-granular-surfaced,glass—felt-based,asphalt roll roofing;36 inches(914 mm)wide. 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV- stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Products: a. Air Vent Inc.,a Certainteed Company;ShingleVent II. b. GAF Materials Corporation;Cobra Rigid Vent II. C. Globe Building Materials,Inc.; SmartAir Ridge Vent. d. Lomanco,Inc.;OR-4. e. Mid-America Building Products;RidgeMaster Plus. 2. Minimum Net Free Area: 18 sq. inches per foot. 3. Width: 12". 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. 2.5 SPECIALTY ROOF VENTS A. Wall to Roof Flashing Vent: ., 1. Products: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 8 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Materials failures include manufacturing defects and failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a reasonable time. 1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first 5 years nonprorated. 2. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 60 mph for 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified. 3. Basis-of-Design Products: Products listed establish acceptable requirements. Products by other manufacturers of comparable quality may be considered. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Multi-tab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 1. Available Products: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Certainteed Corporation. C. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. e. Globe Building Materials,Inc. f. IKO. g. Malarkey Roofing Company. h. Owens Corning. i. PABCO Roofing Products. j. TAMKO Roofing Products,Inc. 2. Tab Arrangement:Three tab,,regularly spaced. 3. Butt Edge:Notched cut. 4. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 { E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,for asphalt shingles. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For asphalt shingles. G. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions Owl permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 Page 2 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 4. Ridge vents. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for roof deck wood structural panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings and counterflashings not part of this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle,ridge and hip cap shingles and ridge vent indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products,of sizes indicated,to verify color selected. 1. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle strip. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full-size ridge and hip cap asphalt shingle. 3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch-(300-mm-)long Sample. 4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches(300 mm)square. D. Qualification Data: For Installer Rockridge-Northampton,MA Asphalt Shingles-07311 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer and EIFS manufacturer that ensure that EIFS are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07241 OOW Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 $OOW 2. High-impact reinforcing mesh from grade to 10 feet in height. G. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch (230-by-300-mm) strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches (100 mm)on each side of comers. 1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches(200 mm)wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. H. Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat. I. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. J. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primer, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines,and texture variations. 1. Embed aggregate in finish coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform applied-aggregate finish of color and texture matching approved sample. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" and in EIMA's"EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems,Class PB." 1. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 3. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. 4. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints,without disturbing joint seal. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing will include that required to verify compliance with specifications and with authorities having jurisdiction. C. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense,shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches(100 mm)from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in sheathing. 9. Place insulation with adhesive strips and channels, slots, or waves aligned in the vertical position for drainage. Align drainage channels, slots,or waves with channels, slots, or waves in insulation boards above and below. 10. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 11. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 12. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. 13. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves,rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 1 inch. 14. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate where indicated. 15. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 16. Install insulation closure blocks using ribbon-and-dab method to create air zones where indicated. 17. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 18. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) over front and back face,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 19. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh,and finish coat. b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. C. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. 20. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-/weather-resistive barrier. D. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated,where required by EIFS manufacturer,and as follows: 1. Where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS. 2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates,materials,and construction. 3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction. 4. Where wall height changes. E. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer,but not less than 1/16-inch(1.6-mm)dry-coat thickness. F. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 nun) or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written requirements. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches (204 mm) of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary,so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh above 10' above grade. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. *.- Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates. C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. 3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS,at expansion joints,at window sills, and elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation. 1. Drip Screed/Track: Use at bottom edges of EIFS,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads,and at floor line expansion joints of EIFS with drainage,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 5. Casing Bead: Use at other locations. C. Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397,EIFS manufacturer's written requirements,and the following: 1. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate. 2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact,high initial grab,and overall level surface. 3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before installing mechanical fasteners, beginning rasping and sanding insulation,or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. 4. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the following minimum penetration: a. Steel Framing: 5/16 inch(8 mm). b. Wood Framing: 1 inch(25 mm). 5. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally. 6. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. 7. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible. 8. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches(150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches(100 mm)from aesthetic reveals. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with 4"R perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage. 4. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated one-piece V profile;designed to relieve stress of movement. 5. Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows;with end and back dams;designed to direct water to exterior. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers,joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in EIMA s EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB" and with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below: 1. Two part methane. B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." C. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MIXING A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior fmish coats on other work. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq.yd.(136 g/sq.m). 2. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd. (509 g/sq.m). 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq.yd. (127 g/sq.m). 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq.yd. (136 g/sq.m). 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq.yd. (244 g/sq.m). G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials. H. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing Portland cement. 1. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. J. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles,and fillers. X10, K. Water: Potable. L. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board;and of the following description: 1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954. 2. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) in thickness,provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002. 3. For attachment to wood framing members and plywood sheathing, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002,Type W. 4. For attachment,provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate. M. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784,manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063. 1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. 2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. POW, Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for EIFS with drainage is based on Sto "Rainscreen." Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product. Refer to requirements listed in Section 01600-Product Requirements for substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide substrates,water-/weather-resistive barriers, adhesive,fasteners,board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: "Sandblast" or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Fasteners: Wafer-head or hard-roc steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954, with an organic-polymer coating or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 500 hours per ASTM B 117. a. Size and Length: As recommended by sheathing manufacturer for type and thickness of sheathing board to be attached. C. Water-/Weather-Resistive Barrier: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226,Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt),without perforations. D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. E. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type 1, and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for more stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: 1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. 2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less,respectively,per ASTM E 84. 3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397. 4. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical drainage channels, slots,or waves on the back side of board. 5. Board Insulation Closure Blocks: EIFS manufacturer's standard density, size, and configuration. F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced,alkali-resistant, open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,aging, corrosion,damaging temperatures,construction traffic,and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of ,. construction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers'written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing,water-/weather-resistive barrier, flashing, trim,joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-/weather-resistive barrier behind EIFS with drainage. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Samples for Verification: 24-inch-(600-mm-)square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated,prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including custom trim,each profile,an aesthetic reveal,a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. 1. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS and joint sealants comply with requirements. F. Material Test Reports: For each water-/weather-resistive barrier, insulation, reinforcing mesh, joint sealant,and coating. G. Material Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for each insulation and joint sealant, signed by manufacturers or a third-party agency approved by EIFS manufacturer. H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. I. Field quality-control test reports. J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for EIFS. K. Research/Evaluation Reports: For water-/weather-resistive barrier, insulation and EIFS. L. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. 2. Radiant Heat Exposure, Unrestricted Installation: Tolerable level of incident radiant heat energy of at least 12.5 kW/sq.in when tested according to the BOCA Code. 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives,base coats, and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less,per ASTM E 84. tom" Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 I. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts (500 L) of sand when tested per ASTM D 968,Method A. 2. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable for test equipment and consisting of 1-inch-(25.4-mm-)thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-)thick gypsum board;cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 23,Method 1,or ASTM G 53. 3. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 4. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch(50.8-by-50.8-mm) clean glass substrate,cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273. 5. Salt-Spray Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch-(25.4-mm-)thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion,rusting,blistering,peeling,or delamination after testing for 300 hours per ASTM B 117. 6. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the adhesive, base coat, or finish coat. Minimum 5-psi (34.5- kPa) tensile strength before and after freeze-thaw and accelerated weathering tests per EIMA 101.03. 7. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa)of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02. 8. Water Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion,rusting,blistering,peeling,or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. 9. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following impact classification and range: a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb(2.8 to 5.6 J). b. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb(10.2 to 17 J). 10. Positive and Negative Wind-Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm)in size, consisting of studs,sheathing, and 1-inch- (25.4-mm-)thick EIFS; and showing capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. 11. Drainage: 3 samples capable of draining water, and having an average minimum true drainage efficiency of 90 percent when tested per EIMA 200.2. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and termination, flashing details,joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of joint sealants and exposed accessories involving color selection. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07241 -EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS-CLASS PB PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior insulation and finish system(EIFS)with drainage applied over the following: a. Glass fiber faced gypsum sheathing. b. Plywood sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for plywood sheathing and building wrap and wood framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s). B. Class PB EIFS: A "nonload bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation board attached either adhesively,mechanically,or both to the substrate;an integrally reinforced base coat;and a textured protective finish coat," as defined by ASTM C 1397. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following: 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in- service conditions. 2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction,and interior finish. B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following when tested per methods referenced: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB-07241 EGA,P.C. Page I of 11 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with 40W vapor-retarder tape or acoustical sealant to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Now 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed-cell(nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive,mastic,or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces,except for firestopping. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: OOW 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity,provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically. 4. Batts shall be cut to accommodate all obstructions(i.e.plumbing and electrical). 5. The insulation must be installed flush with stud face and completely fill the stud cavities. Install at full loft without gaps or empty pockets. E. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where encountered. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu.m). 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS/AIR BATTIERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates,including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings;and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by owlk vapor-retarder manufacturer. Rockridge—Northampton,NIA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 NOW 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed,rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. F. Comply with Energy Star Homes Technical Standards: 1. Note: All penetrations through the insulated envelope must be sealed. Coordinate the work of this Section with other trades. Do no use non-fire rated materials at locations where fire stopping or fire sealing is required. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Note: At Contractor's option"Insul Tarp"may be provided in lieu of extruded-polystyrene board '^ insulation at under-slab locations. This product is not to be used along foundation walls. Contractor to coordination this work with the work of other trades affected such as underslab fill, plumbing, etc. Minimum R Value: 10. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. No additional vapor barrier is required. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450,respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.601b/cu. ft.(26 kg/cu. m),unless otherwise indicated. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50,respectively;passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. D. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764 for type (method of application) indicated below; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5,and as follows: 1. Type 1 for pneumatic application. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: a. Raven Industries,Inc.;DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries,Inc.;Griffolyn T-65. B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor-Retarder/Air Barrier: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either polyester scrim or nylon cord and weighing not less than 25 lbs per 1,000 s.f. with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 1. 3M(#8086)red contractor's tape. D. Acoustical Sealant:Tremco. > Rockridge—Northampton,MA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Avw 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing,and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight,except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: w a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Products. 2. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: Refer to Sections Subdrainage, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 3. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. 4. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. b. Owens Coming. C. Thermafiber. 5. Underslab Insulation Tarp: a. Insulation Solutions, Inc."Insul Tarp". Rockridge—Northampton,MA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Loose-fill building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Air sealing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Subdrainage" for insulated drainage panels. 2. Division 7 Section "EPDM-Single-Ply Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of e0. roofing construction. 3. Division 7 Section"Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing"for insulated drainage panels. 4. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 5. Division 15 Sections"Duct Insulation," "Equipment Insulation," and"Pipe Insulation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 0M. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Building Insulation-07210 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Ow with Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic or sealant. F. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. G. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates,reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Insulation drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch(19 mm) of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07131 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust- free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill,prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). F. Corners: Prepare,prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch (19-mm) fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 3.3 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET APPLICATION A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F(16 deg Q. D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks,construction,and contraction joints. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. D. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. E. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied,trowel grade or low viscosity. F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity,two-component,asphalt-modified coating. G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch(25 by 3 mm)thick,predrilled at 9-inch(225-mm)centers. I. Protection Course: Semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch(3 mm),nominal. 2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course. 2.4 INSULATION A. Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap or tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels, faced with manufacturer's standard,nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. 1. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Diversifoam Products. 2. Dow Chemical Company(The). 3. Owens Corning. 4. T. Clear Corporation. 5. Tenneco Building Products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.;VM 75. b. American Permaquik Inc.;PQ 7100. C. Carlisle Corporation,Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Div.;CCW 701. d. Cetco;Envirosheet. e. W.R. Grace&Co.;Bituthene. f. W.R.Meadows,Inc.;Mel-Rol. g. T. C.Miradri;Miradri. h. Monsey Bakor;Elasto-Seal 2000. i. Pecora Corporation;Duramem 700-SM. j. Polyguard Products,Inc.;Polyguard 650. k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.;Plastiwrap 60. 1. Tamko Roofing Products,Inc.;TW-60. 2.2 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Physical Properties: As follows,measured per standard test methods referenced: a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi(1.7 MPa)minimum;ASTM D 412,Die C,modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum;ASTM D 412,Die C,modified. C. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F(minus 29 deg C);ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch(3-mm)movement;ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf(180 N)minimum;ASTM E 154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet(45 m)minimum;ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F(21 deg C);ASTM D 570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms(2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96,Water Method. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 00"� B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials,protection course,and molded-sheet drainage panels through one source from a single manufacturer for each. C. Mockups: Apply waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment,corner treatment,and execution quality. 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing until mockups are approved. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow,rain,fog,or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight during specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)in width. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 ROW SECTION 07131 -SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing at elevator pit. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Subdrainage." 2. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"for joint-sealant materials and installation. 3. Division 7 Section"Dampproofing." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ,mow, A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate,technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings,penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing,and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch(300-by-300-mm) square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations,and exclusions before starting waterproofing. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing-07131 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any,as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior whether indicated or not. 1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing,extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm)over outside face of footing. 2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints,cracks, and where shown as "reinforced,"by embedding an 8-inch-(200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofrng coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. 3.4 COLD-APPLIED,CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, or one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq.m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-grade mastic. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. END OF SECTION 07115 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Bituminous Dampproofrng-07115 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 a. Gardner Asphalt Corporation. b. Henry Company. C. Karnak Corporation. d. Koppers Industries,Inc. e. Malarkey Roofing Company. f. Meadows,W.R.,Inc. g. Sonneborn,Div.of ChemRex,Inc. h. Tamms Industries. 2. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: (Not required where insulation board will cover dampproofing) a. Grace,W. R.&Co.; Construction Products Div. b. Meadows,W. R.,Inc. C. Sonnebom,Div.of ChemRex,Inc. 2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. Cold-Applied,Cut-Back(Solvent-Based)Asphalt Dampproofing: 1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586,Type I. 2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479,Type I. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS , A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668,Type I. C. Protection Course,Asphalt-Board Type: Premolded, 1/8-inch-(3-mm-) thick,multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film. D. Protection Course, Polystyrene Type: Fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; nominal thickness not less than 3/16 inch(5 mm). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,, ` Rockridge-Northampton,MA Bituminous Dampproofing-07115 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 07115 -BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing applied to the following surfaces: 1. Exterior,below-grade surfaces of concrete foundation walls. Foundation walls to be dampproofed include only those walls that retain earth or fill above the level of the adjacent concrete slab. B. Related Sections include Division 7 Section"Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer,number of coats,coverage or thickness, and protection course. B. Material Certificates: For each product,signed by manufacturers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers'written instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: ow 1. Cold-Applied,Cut-Back(Solvent-Based)Asphalt Dampproofing: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Bituminous Dampproofing-07115 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 3. Surface: High gloss,pebble texture. how 4. Colors: Manufacturer's standard color as selected. B. Accessories: 1. Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard for use with panel and as required for complete installation. 2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard appropriate for use indicated. 3. Sealant: Silicone-based; compatible with panel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine work environment and exiting wall, floor and ceiling conditions. Verify that substrate and adjacent work are installed in manner to allow Work of this Section to proceed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Layout panels such that panel joints are kept to a minimum. C. Install level and square with all corner and edge trim tight. Scrib as necessary for tight fit. D. Cut all penetrations clean and within coverplate area. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completed installation, wipe panels with damp cloth and mild soap solution per manufacturer's instructions. Remove excessive or smeared sealants. END OF SECTION 06605 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Wall Panels-06605 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 "K` SECTION 06605—FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic wall panels. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: All materials, indicating size, color, texture, finish and test results for required fire ratings and flame/smoke ratings. B. Installation Instruction. C. Maintenance Data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Marlite,Dover, OH. 2. BP Chemicals,Inc.,Florence,KY. 3. Kemlite Company,Joliet,IL. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wall Panels: 1. Flame Spread: Class A. "'^ 2. Sheet Size:48"x108"x3/32". Rockridge-Northampton,MA Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Wall Panels-06605 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 2 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Cigarette Burn Test Passes ANSI Z-124.3 2.3 PRODUCTS A. Vanity tops with integral sink and backsplash and sidesplash as indicated. 1. Provide 1/4"thick cast polymer product,using adhesives suitable for a cost polymer product. 2. Acceptable Products: Provide product similar to recessed oval or designer oval as manufactured by Robison Marble. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, scribe to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and recommended installation instructions. B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive. C. Provide back splashes and side splashes as indicated on drawings. Attach to countertops using manufacturer's recommended methods. D. Protect surfaces from damage during installation. Repair or replace damaged product that does not meet specifier's satisfaction. E. General contractor shall be responsible to protect product during subsequent construction activity. END OF SECTION 06601 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cultured Marble-06601 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Allowable Tolerances: 1*1 1. Variation in component size: +/- '/a"(6mm) 2. Location of openings:+/- '/4"(6mm)from indicated position. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Cultured marble vanity tops: a. American Shower and Bath. b. Elegant Marble Products. C. Glenmar Manufacturing. d. Kerrico Corporation. e. Lehigh Cultured Marble,Inc. f. Luicame Industries,Inc. g. Marble Works by Zenz. h. The Marble Works,Inc. i. Marbleon,Inc. j. Marblelux Company. k. Mathews Marble Mfg., Corp. 1. Monroe Industries,Inc. M. Remee Casting. n. Robison Marble. o. Roma Marble. p. Rynone Manufacturing Corp. q. Tri City Marble Co.,Inc. r. United Marble,Inc. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Cast, filled polymer with the following performance requirements: Propei1y Requirement Method Color Fasteners No change-200 hrs. ANSI Z-124 Wear&Cleansing Passes ANSI Z-124 Impact Resistance No clips or cracks ANSI Z-124 Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z-124 Chemical Resistance Passes ANSI Z-124 Drain Fitting Connector Passes ANSI Z-124.3 A Loads on Lavatory Top Passes ANSI Z-124.3 Thermal Shock Resistance Passes ANSI Z-124.3 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cultured Marble-06601 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Afft. SECTION 06601 —CULTURED MARBLE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vanity tops with integral backsplash and sidesplash. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 12, Section"Kitchen and Bath Casework"for plastic laminate countertops. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent and attached work. B. Samples: Submit minimum 6"x6"samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. C. Product Data: Indicate product description, installation information and compliance with specified performance requirements. D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance recommendations, including recommended repair and cleaning instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until ready for installation. Store indoors. B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Performance Standards: Standards of the following,as referenced herein: 1. American National Standards Institute(ANSI)—Z-124.1,2,3,4/ANSI A-112.19.7& 8. 2. Applicable building codes. B. Provide provision of evidence of certification to applicable standards. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cultured Marble-06601 EGA,P.C. Page I of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.2 EXTERIOR COLUMNS A. Material:Non-load bearing fiberglass. B. Style: Tuscan, smooth(non-fluted) with entasis lengthwise split. C. Base and Capital: Manufacturer's standard non-load bearing with attachment devices for nonstructural connection of column to foundation and framing. D. Dimensions: 12"base, 10"top,8' nominal and 7'-4"nominal length. E. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard for complete installation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance and weathertightness. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with column manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install plumb. Neatly fit items to adjacent construction. C. Firmly attach to building structure. D. Seal as required for weathertight installation. E. Prep and paint in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 06600 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Plastic Fabrication-06600 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 06600—PLASTIC FABRICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Decorative non-structural exterior columns. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"for interior ornamental wood columns. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material '* description,dimensions of products,individual components and profiles. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's finish instructions and recommendations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Edon Fiberglass. 2. Dixie-Pacific. 3. Melton Classics. 4. Stromberg Architectural Products. 5. Focal Point. 6. Fibertech. 7. Turncraft. 8. Spartan. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Plastic Fabrication-06600 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Am* SECTION 06402 -INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Refer to Section 01210-Allowances for Work of this Section. END OF SECTION 06402 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Interior Architectural Woodwork-06402 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of I EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 OOW 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush,and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch(1.5-mm)maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches(610 mm)long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints,where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 RAILING INSTALLATION '* A. Balusters: Dovetail or mortise balusters into treads, glue, and nail in place. Let into railings and glue in place. B. Newel Posts: Secure newel posts to stringers, rough carriages, and risers with countersunk-head wood screws and glue. C. Railings: Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts,and glue. Assemble railings at goosenecks,easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06200 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Glue: Aliphatic-or phenolic resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. E. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. F. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. NOTE: Silicone sealants are detrimental to PVC exterior trims and are not to be used. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim,except shoe and crown molds. C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch(25 mm)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch(3-mm)radius. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours,unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.5 UTILITY SHELVING A. Utility Shelving: 3/4 - inch (19-mm) medium- density fiberboard shelving with radiused front edge or boards of same species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish. 1. Shelf Cleats: '/4-by-3-1/2-inch(19-by-89-mm)boards for interior lumber trim for opaque finish. 2. Shelf Brackets: Prime—painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod is indicated. 2.6 RAILINGS A. Interior Railings: Clear,kiln-dried hard maple of pattern indicated, either solid or laminated. 1. Arcway's#6400P 1 —Final selection to be coordinated with interior design. B. Balusters: Clear,kiln-dried,paint grade turned balusters of pattern and size indicated. 1. Arway's#5015—Final selection to be coordinated with interior design. C. Newel Posts: 2'/4-inch-(70-mm-)square,clear,turned,kiln-dried paint grade,either solid or laminated. 1. Final selection to be coordinated with interior design. 2.7 ORNAMENTAL WOOD COLUMNS '* A. Fabricate columns for opaque finish from clear,biln dried ponderosa pine, yellow poplar or similar paint grade stock. Column stoves maybe finger jointed. B. Shafts: Built up from tongue and groove stoves joined with waterproof glue. Lather turn shafts to provide 10"base diameter and true architectural entasis taper. C. Capital and Base: Manufacturer's standard molded glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or built-up from wood components with waterproof glue. D. Style:Tuscan,smooth(non-fluted)with entasis. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: 1. Stainless steel. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails,screws, and other anchoring devices of type,size,material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,concealed where possible. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 Page 4 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 f. Turncraft Div., Cascade Wood Products,Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards'Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS-1. C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4 E. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2,Grade MD. F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. PVC Exterior Trim(Cellular Vinyl House Trim). 1. Trim Boards,facia,etc: Sizes and thickness as indicated;white color. 2. Brick Mould: 2" x 1 '/4", PVC # WM 180 Brick Moulding as manufactured by Azek Inc.; white color. Basis of design. 3. Sill: 1 5/8"x 1 '/2",#WM 311 as manufactured by Azek,Inc. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Grade A finish, kiln —dried, white maple finished lumber(S4S), selected for compatible grain and color. B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish(Painted): Finished lumber(S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades: 1. P-grade,pine or poplar(finger joint acceptable)or primed medium-density fiberboard. C. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Transparent Finish(Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade white maple. a. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. 2. Moldings for Opaque Finish(Painted): P-grade pine or poplar(finger joint acceptable) or primed medium density fiberboard. 3. Refer to Drawings for molding profiles. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. For wood columns, include quarter section samples of cap, base, plinth and six inch long section low of shaft. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof,wet work in space is completed and nominally dry,and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions *. permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain,snow,or dampness. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Cellular Vinyl Trim: a. Edge building Products distributed by Georgia Pacific Corp. b. Marley Moldings, Limited. C. Azek,Inc. 2. Ornamental Wood Columns: a. Chadsworth's 1-800-Columns. b. Hartman Sanders. C. Meton Classics,Inc. d. Schwerd,A.F.Manufacturing Co. e. Somerset Door and Column Company. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Interior Standing and running trim. 3. Interior trim. 4. Shelving and clothes rods. 5. Railings. 6. Interior ornamental wood columns. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for furring,blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed look to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 3. Division 7 Section"Siding" for vinyl siding. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 5. SCMA-Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 6. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 7. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 8. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions,dimensions of individual components and profiles,textures,and colors. B. Samples for Verification: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Finish Carpentry-06200 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. 1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. 1. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated. J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. K. Do not cut or remove truss members. L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. A"*- 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06176 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 I. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and '' for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated,with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A,G60 (Z1 SO) coating designation. C. Truss Tie-Downs(Hurricane or Seismic Ties): As indicated on Drawings. D. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles,and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. Before installing,splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. AM. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. 3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." C. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members, of the following grade and any of the following species: 1. Grade for Chord Members: No. 2 or better as required by design. 2. Grade for Web Members: Same grade as indicated for chord members. 3. Species: Douglas fir-larch;WCLIB or WWPA. 4. Species: Douglas fir-larch(north);NLGA. 5. Species: Hem-fir(north);NLGA. 6. Species: Spruce-pine-fir(south);NELMA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 7. Species: Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA. 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements indicated below: B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A(Z180)coating designation;Designation SS,Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Wire,Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated,and as follows: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113/03 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Connector Plates: a. Alpine Engineered Products,Inc. b. CompuTrus,Inc. C. Eagle Metal Products. d. Jager Industries,Inc. e. Mitek Industries,Inc. f. Robbins Engineering,Inc. g. TEE-LOK Corporation. h. Truswal Systems Corporation. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company,Inc. b. United Steel Products Company,Inc. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors,metal framing anchors,bolts,and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of Iumber; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values,orientation,and location of metal connector plates;and bearing details. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Truss spacing shall be coordinated with plumbing rough-ins, mechanical duct runs, chases and shafts and recessed lighting patterns. Trusses requiring critical placement to coordinate with other trades shall be dimensioned in plan. Truss counts shall be based on coordinated layouts with no truss spacing exceeding the maximum allowable spacing noted on drawings. C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer and professional engineer. E. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI 1. 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB,Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TP1 1,"National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected `A Wood Trusses." Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 06176-METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood roof and girder trusses and truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing and subflooring and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. B. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB- Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Snow/ Live load Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span; Total load vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. b. Floor Trusses: Live Load vertical deflection 1/480 of span; total load deflection 1/360 of span. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses-06176 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 4. Bottom plates of exterior frame walls shall be sealed to sub-floor with construction adhesive or caulk. 5. Coordinate the installation of tub/shower units to allow insulation subcontractor to insulate and air seal walls as required. 6. Seal seams of exterior sheathing before installing building paper or air infiltration barrier. Use caulk, foam or 3M red contractor's tape,pressed carefully in place when wood is dry. END OF SECTION 06100 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P C Page 12 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 4. Tread Size:2"nominal dimension lumber or 1"OSB. 5. Riser Size: 1"nominal dimension lumber or 11/16"OSB. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 1/8-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/16-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.7 PARTICLEBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with the National Particleboard Association's recommendations for type of subfloor indicated. Fill and sand gouges,gaps,and chipped edges. Sand uneven joints flush. 1. Fastening Method: Glue and nail underlayment to subflooring. 3.8 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. General: Fasten gypsum sheathing to supports with galvanized roofing nails; comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule. Keep perimeter fasteners 3/8 inch(9.5 mm)from edges and ends of units. B. Install 48-by-96-inch(1219-by-2438-mm)and longer sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to,and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Fit units tightly against each other. 3.9 BUILDING WRAP APPLICATION A. Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated. 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch(102-mm)overlap. 3. Seal seams,edges,and penetrations with tape. 4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.10 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. 3.11 AIR SEALING A. Maximum allowable air leakage in 2 square inches leakage per 100 square feet of building shell areas. The following must be provided: 1. Gaskets or sill seals shall be set under sills along foundation walls and slabs. 2. First floor band joist where used shall be sealed to adjoining mud sills and decking using construction adhesive or caulk. Construction adhesive or caulk shall be used between multiple sill plates. 3. Band joists between upper floors where used shall be sealed to the adjoining top plate and decking. Construction adhesive or caulk shall be used between multiple top plates. •.. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches(1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide jamb studs as noted on the structural drawings. Provide headers of depth indicated. E. Provide temporary bracing in exterior walls as required. F. Provide temporary bracing in walls,as required. 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1- 1/2 inches (38 mm)of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches(76 mm)on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members,by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members by using metal joist hangers. E. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; headers and trimmers as noted on the drawings. C. Do not notch joists. Do not bore holes larger than 1/4 depth of joist; locate in the middle third of the depth of the joist.Notify Architect if hole requirements are greater than stated limits. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. E. Provide joist bridging(solid wood to match joists)or metal bridging at mid-span of all joists. F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth of joist over supports. G. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. 3.6 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated,to comply with the following requirements: 1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-size,minimum. 2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches of effective depth. 3. Stringer Spacing: At least 4 stringers for each 44-inch clear width of stair. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible,secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d(100-mm)nails spaced not less than 32 inches(812 mm)o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 1. For continuous members,locate end joints over supports. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal(38- mm actual)thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Refer to the structural drawings for stud bearing wall and shear wall framing stud size and spacing. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs as a minimum. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures,specialty items,and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high,using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used,provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal thick lumber of same width as framing members. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers;coated or uncoated;with or without perforations;and complying with ASTM E 1677, Type I. 1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils(0.08 mm). 2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms(575 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months. B. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. C. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required. D. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. E. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. F. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking,grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2304.9.1,"Fastener Schedule" in the International Building Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood;predrill as required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 12 11/3103 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,except with wafer heads and reamer wings,length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components,zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.11 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated,with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)coating designation. C. Bridging: Rigid,V-section,nailless type,0.062 inch(1.6 mm)thick,length to suit joist size and spacing. D. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch(25 mm) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch(2.8 mm)thick. E. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. Only as noted on the plans or for use in remedial work. 1. Width: 1-1/4 inches. 2. Thickness:0.062 inch. 3. Length: As indicated. F. Rafter Tie-Downs(Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Refer to the structural drawings. G. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Refer to the structural drawings. H. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 1. Refer to structural drawings for hold down requirements. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 12 1]/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. ate" 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm). B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch for sloped roof areas. Not less than 23/32 for flat roof areas. C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thickness. 3. Size: 48"x longest length practical for vertical installation. 2.8 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. APA rated plywood: Structural 1. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 60/32. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch(18.3 mm). 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. B. Oriented-Stand-Board, Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating:Not less than 32 oc. 2. Thickness:Not less than 23/32 inch(18.3 mm). 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. C. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1,Grade PBU. 2.9 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated,in thickness indicated or,if not indicated,not less than 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick. 2.10 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 "* 1. Hem-fir(north);NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction,including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir(north);NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir;NELMA,NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem-fir(north),No. 2 grade lumber;NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir,No. 2 grade;NELMA,NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi(19.7 MPa) for 12-inch nominal-(286-mm actual-)depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity,Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi(13 800 MPa). B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: A composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-)depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity,Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi(13 800 MPa). 2.7 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing:Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Chromated copper arsenate(CCA). b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate(ACZA). C. Ammoniacal,or amine,copper quat(ACQ). d. Copper his(dimethyldithiocarbamate)(CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate(CC). f. Copper azole,Type A(CBA-A). g. Oxine copper(copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: As,, 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases,blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, No. 2 grade or better and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(North);NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir(North)or Spruce-pine-fir;NELMA,NLGA,WCLIB,or WWPA. C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls, Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade or better and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fu;WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No.2 grade or better and any of the following species: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Parallel-Strand Lumber: a. Trus Joist MacMillan. 3. Building Wrap: a. Celotex Corporation(The);Building Products Division. b. DuPont(E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company). C. Parsec, Inc. d. Raven Industries, Inc. e. Reemay,Inc. f. Simplex Products. g. Sto-Cote Products,Inc. h. Tenneco Building Products. 4. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company,Inc. b. United Steel Products Company,Inc. 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness or less,unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 12 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing,installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 7. Building wrap. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having 00W jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Trus Joist MacMillan. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 12 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 5. Utility shelving. 6. Wood furring. 7. Wood sheathing. 8. Subflooring and underlayment. 9. Plywood backing panels. 10. Building wrap. ¢, * 11. Air sealing required during framing stages. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses." 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 3. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PB" for weather resistant barrier. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA -National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Rough Carpentry-06100 EGA,P.C. Page I of 12 11/3!03 EGA Project No.: 10213 G. Extruded Preformed Seals: Install seals to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with minimum number of end joints. 1. For straight sections,provide preformed seals in continuous lengths. 2. Vulcanize or heat-weld field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using procedures recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant adhesive approved by manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing preformed seals. 4. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Install foam seals with adhesive recommended by manufacturer and heat seal all splices. H. Joint Systems with Seals: Seal end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions to provide a watertight installation. I. Seismic Seals: Install interior seals in continuous lengths. Install exterior seal in standard lengths and vulcanize or heat-weld field splice joints to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. Seal transitions and end joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous,uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint,including transitions and end joints. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed,clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05811 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Mill Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; no other applied finish unless buffing is required to remove scratches, welding, or grinding produced in fabrication process. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Coordinate and famish anchorages, Placement Drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting-in of frames. C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary to secure joint systems to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of joint systems. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials,unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Coordinate installation of architectural joint assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. C. Terminate exposed ends of exterior architectural joint assemblies with factory-fabricated termination devices to maintain waterproof system. D. Install factory-fabricated transitions between building expansion-joint cover assemblies and roof expansion-joint assemblies, specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Expansion Assemblies," to provide continuous,uninterrupted, watertight construction. E. Cutting,Fitting,and Placement: Perform cutting,drilling,and fitting required to install joint systems. 1. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. 3. Set covers in horizontal surfaces at elevations that place exposed surfaces flush with adjoining finishes. 4. Locate wall,ceiling,and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Securely attach in place with required accessories. 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 3 inches(75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches(600 mm) o.c. F. Continuity: Maintain continuity of joint systems with a minimum number of end joints and align metal members. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. Adhere flexible filler materials, if any, to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. l"` Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 B. Architectural Joint System Schedule: 1. Interior,Floor to Floor a. Basis of Design Product: CS Group,CFR-300. Color:As selected Nominal Joint Width: 3" Movement Capability: 1'/z" 2. Interior,Wall to Wall a. Basis of Design Product: CS Group,FWFC-300 with fire barrier- 1 hr. Color:As selected Nominal Joint Width: 3" Movement Capability: 1'/2" Fire Barrier:WW-D-1017 3. Interior,Ceiling to Wall a. Basis of Design Product: CS Group Color: As selected Nominal Joint Width: 3" Movement Capability: 1'/2" Fire Barrier:WN-D-1017 4. Exterior,Wall to Wall a. Basis of Design Product: Johns Manville"Expond-O-Guard" Color: As selected Nominal Joint Width: 3" Movement Capability: P/2" 5. Other Exterior a. Basis of Design Product: Johns Manville"Expand-O-Flash" EJ Color:As selected Nominal Joist Width: 3" Movement Capability: 1'/z" 2.4 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each architectural joint system specified in Part 2 "Architectural Joint Systems" Article below is based on the products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the other manufacturers listed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M),alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. B. Preformed Seals: Single or multicellular extruded elastomeric seals designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to be installed in frames or with anchored flanges, in color indicated or, if not indicated,as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Strip Seals: Elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions with a continuous longitudinal internal baffle system throughout complying with ASTM E 1783; used with compatible frames, flanges, and molded- rubber anchor blocks. D. Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle system complying with ASTM E 1612 in sizes and profiles indicated or as recommended by manufacturer. E. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint. F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesives, and other accessories compatible with material in contact,as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS A. General: Provide joint systems of design,basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with the capability to accommodate joint widths indicated and variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. 2. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint systems. 3. Frames for Strip Seals: Designed with semiclosed cavity that provides a mechanical lock for seals of type indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 G. Nominal Joint Width: Width of linear gap indicated as representing the conditions existing when architectural joint systems will be installed or, if no nominal joint width is indicated, a width equal to the sum of maximum and minimum joint widths divided by two. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide factory-fabricated architectural joint systems capable of withstanding the types of loads and of accommodating the kinds of movement, and the other functions for which they are designed including those specified below, without failure. Types of failure include those listed in Appendix X3 of ASTM E 1399. 1. Pedestrian Traffic Joints: Support pedestrian traffic across joint. 2. Exterior Joints: Maintain continuity of weather enclosure. 3. Other Joints: Where indicated, provide joint systems that prevent penetration of water, moisture, and other substances deleterious to building components or content. 4. Joints in Surfaces with Architectural Finishes: Serve as finished architectural joint closures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, construction details, material and fmish descriptions,and dimensions of individual components and seals. B. Shop Drawings: For each joint system specified,provide the following: 1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing entire route of each joint system, plans, mow.,, elevations, sections, details,joints,splices,locations of joints and splices,and attachments to other Work. Where joint systems change planes, provide Isometric Drawings depicting how components interconnect to achieve continuity of joint covers and fillers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each exposed metal and elastomeric material of joint system indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency,indicating architectural joint systems comply with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of architectural joint system's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a single manufacturer to the extent possible. Coordinate compatibility with adjoining joint systems specified in other Sections. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide joint systems incorporating fire barriers that are identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 and UL 2079, including hose-stream test of vertical wall assemblies, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 00 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 look SECTION 05811 -ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Types of joints for which architectural joint systems are specified include the following: 1. Exterior wall joints. 2. Exterior soffit joints. 3. Interior pedestrian traffic joints. 4. Interior wall and ceiling joints. 5. Interior soffit joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for block-outs and cast-in anchorage and frames for architectural joint systems in concrete floors,and walls. 2. Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal roof and wall joint systems. 3. Division 7 Section"Roof Expansion Assemblies" for factory-fabricated roof joint systems. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants and preformed compressed-foam sealants without metal frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Joint System: Any filler or cover used to span, fill, cover, or seal a joint, except expanding foam seals and poured or foamed in-place sealants. B. Cyclic Movement: Periodic change between widest and narrowest joint widths in an automatically mechanically controlled system. C. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint. D. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities. E. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities. F. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values(mm or inches) or a percentage of nominal value of joint width. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Architectural Joint Systems-05811 Page 1 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood,or dissimilar metals,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated,as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. END OF SECTION 05530 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gratings-05530 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 00* C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames,and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2.6 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Pressure-Locked, Rectangular Bar Aluminum Grating: Fabricated by either pressing rectangular flush- top crossbars into slotted bearing bars or swaging crossbars between bearing bars. 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 11/16 inch(17.5 mm)o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm). 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch(4.8 mm). 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches(102 mm)o.c. 5. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish. B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. 1. Provide not less than 4 weld lugs for each grating section composed of rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced less than 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c., with each lug shop welded to 3 or more bearing bars. Interrupt intermediate bearing bars as necessary for fasteners securing grating to supports. 2. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports. C. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 2.7 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut,drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches(32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch(6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gratings-05530 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 k. Tru-Weld. 2.2 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer for type of use indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M),alloys as follows: 1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6,for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1,for grating crossbars. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated,provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type,grade,and class required. B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts,Alloy Group 1. C. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B 18.22.1 (ASME B 18.22M). D. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,ASME B 18.2 1.1 (ASME B 18.21.2M). E. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group [1 (AI)] [2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 15 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch(1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gratings-05530 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2,"Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Metal Bar Gratings: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation. b. All American Grating,Inc. C. Barnett/Bates Corp. d. Borden Metal Products(Canada)Limited. e. Fisher&Ludlow. f. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. g. IKG Industries;a Harsco Company. h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. i. Ohio Gratings,Inc. j. Seidelhuber Metal Products,Inc. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gratings-05530 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 05530-GRATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bar gratings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 75 lbf/sq. ft. (3.59 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 2000 lbf(8.90 kN), whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Limit deflection to L/240 or 1/4 inch(6.4 mm),whichever is less. B. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7,"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Formed-metal plank gratings. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations, sections,details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gratings-05530 Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated,at spacing required to support structural loads C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For wood stud partitions,use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. END OF SECTION 05521 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 I. Stripe paint corners,crevices,bolts, welds and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight,hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(5 mm in 3 m). C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication"Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material;and leave 1/8-inch(3-mm)build-up, sloped away from post. C. Install removable railing sections,where indicated,in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. , Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is '/4 inch(6mm)or less. N. Brackets,Flanges,Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work,unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less that 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than '/2 inch(13 mm)greater than outside dimensions of post,with steel plate forming bottom closure. Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts;limit movement of post socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings,including hardware,after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes,by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves and other ferrous components. D. For non-galvanized railings,provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings,brackets, fasteners and sleeves. E. Preparation for Shop Priming for Galvanized Steel: After galvanizing,thoroughly clean railings of grease,dirt,oil,flux and other foreign matter and treat with metallic-phosphate process. F. Preparation for Shop Priming for Non-Galvanized Steel: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings. 1. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No.4,"Brush-off Blast Cleaning." G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PAI, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop,Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 6 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage,but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut,reinforce,drill and tap as indicted to receive finish hardware,screws and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or non-welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections,including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusions without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches. I. Non-welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricated members and fittings to produce flush, smooth,rigid,hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling,twisting,cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 5 of 8 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Malleable Iron:ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General:Provide the following: 1. Steel railings: Plated steel fasteners comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding designs or loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting selections. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 Coordinate wall and other contiguous to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established "'^ dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls or assemblies. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries,Inc. b. Sharpe Products C. Wagner,R&B,Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS AND GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces and General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks. Rolled trade names,stains, discolorations or blemishes. B. Brackets,Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500(cold formed)or ASTM A 513,Type 5 (material drawn). B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless a another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. Interior railings are not galvanized. C. Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Castings:Either gray or malleable iron,unless another class is indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. otook Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range)in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling,opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime- sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F(67 deg C),ambient;material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Grout,anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations,sections,details and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,texture,or design. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member,including handrails,top rails,posts,and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. E. Welding certificates. F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code—Steel. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, 040*" establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 00%, SECTION 05521 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. Stair and ramp handrails. Stair exit gates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering handrails and railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of handrail and railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf.ft. (0.73 kN/m)applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 2001bf(0.89 kN)applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft.(0.73k N/m)applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(0.89 kN)applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 501bf(0.22 kN)applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.Ft. (0.093 sf.m). Rockridge-Northampton,MA Pipe and Tube Railings-05521 EGA,P.C. Page I of 8 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through-bolts,lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level,plumb,true,and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld,cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings,if any. 3.3 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position in footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." END OF SECTION 05500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal Fabrications-05500 Page 6 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.10 CURB ANGLES AT LOADING DOCK A. Not used. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill,and tap units to receive hardware,hangers,and similar items. 2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Fabricate pipe bollards from 6" Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2.13 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for shop painting. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal Fabrications-05500 Page 5 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space- anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut,reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.8 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3,unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders,comply with ASME Al7.1. B. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches(457 mm)apart. C. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (10-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 16 inches(406 mm)apart. D. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch-(19-mm-)diameter steel bars,spaced 12 inches(300 mm)o.c. E. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails;plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. F. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches(1500 mm)o.c.with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. G. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Not used. Metal Fabrications-05500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 4 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section"Painting." 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,grade,and class required. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior "" and exterior applications. 2.6 CONCRETE FILL A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa),unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 nun), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1, Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal Fabrications-05500 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS,GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names,or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M,rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight(Schedule 40),unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Metal Fabrications-05500 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel ladders. 2. Loose steel lintels. 3. Support angles for elevator door sills. 4. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 7. Pipe bollards. B. Related Sections include the following: AN*` 1. Division 5 Section"Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 5 Section"Gratings" for metal gratings. 3. Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings. 4. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors and other rough hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Metal Fabrications-05500 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 1113103 D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05120 AIM- Rockridge-Northampton,MA Structural Steel-05120 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 C. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently owk fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. D. Splice members only where indicated. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance,and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs,back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures,at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709;performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. Structural Steel-05120 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 6 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 es n e�i B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures,at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709;performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,bearing plates, and other embedments,with steel erector present,for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys,braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb,and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,shims,or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Structural Steel-05120 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS DLL for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance,and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. Structural Steel-05120 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 4 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A, Grade 50. B. Channels,Angles: ASTM A 36/A. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: As specified. 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS,CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 , Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts;; and ASTM F 436(ASTM F 436M)hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959,Type 325 compressible-washer type. a. Finish: Plain. B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307,Grade A(ASTM F 568M,Property Class 4.6),straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Structural Steel-05120 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts,nuts,and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control,high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector,Category CSE. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code--Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." e 3. AISC's"Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 4. AISC's"Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 5. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets,dunnage,or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates,instructions,and directions for installation. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Structural Steel-05120 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section"Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"that support design loads. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts,connections,splices,camber,holes,and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size,length,and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For fabricator. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Structural Steel-05120 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 D. Place gypsum concrete per manufacturer's instructions for 1/4"thickness. E. Protect installation of product with placement of barriers or temporary wood planking for traffic areas. F. Submit certificate indicating compliance with manufacturer's specifications of 2000 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM C 472-79 testing procedure. G. Thoroughly clean all areas of spillage or overspray. Discard waste products. END OF SECTION 03450 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Concrete-03450 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.7 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 472-Method of Physical Testing of Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete. B. ASTM E 84- Standard of Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. UL L528 -Fire Resistance Rating- 1 Hour. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Forta-Fill gypsum concrete;Hacher Industries,Inc. 2. Gyp-Crete 2000;Gyp-Crete Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Gypsum concrete. ++ B. Substrate primer. C. Sand: 1/16"maximum washed plaster or mortar sand. D. Water:Potable and free from impurities. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that condition of subfloor is structurally sound, broom clean and free of oil, grease or other contaminants. B. Verify that work of other trades is sufficiently complete and ready to receive work of this Section. C. Beginning installation means installer accepts conditions and surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fill all cracks and voids with taping compound to prevent leakage. B. Mix products per manufacturer's instructions. C. Prime wood substrates per manufacturer's instructions. Gypsum Concrete-03450 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 of 3 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 ooftl SECTION 03450-GYPSUM CONCRETE PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies gypsum concrete underlayment system. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with finish flooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer(applicator)who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed gypsum-based underlayment applications similar in material and to the extent required for this Project,and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilations and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended,in writing,by manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate gypsum concrete underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesive, specified in Division 9 Sections. 1. Before installing surface sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer, if any, verify compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives. AOW-. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Gypsum Concrete-03450 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03300 '"k. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Page 16 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used,subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m),but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m),plus one set for each additional 50 cu.yd.(38 cu.m)or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143;one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method,for structural lightweight concrete;one test for each composite sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. AV. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number,date of concrete placement,name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope,or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 15 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 hook 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one- half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs,rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. Aaft. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,popouts,honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days,correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 14 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings or as required by other trades, if not shown. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h(1 kg/sq. in x h)before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover,water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch(300-mm)lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.1.3 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 13 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes,brooms,or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to covered with resilient flooring,carpet,ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,paint, #Owl or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-(3.05-m-) long straightedge,resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface,does not exceed the following: a. 1/4 inch(6.4 mm). E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin- set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures,unless otherwise indicated,after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 12 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints,until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows,before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions,or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)and not more than 80 deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators,unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots,or dry areas. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch(3 mm)in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-(3-mm-)wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch(12 mm)or more than 1 inch(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or fubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field- fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site,subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 oil C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and 'k* secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys,unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,beams,and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners,and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness,as follows: Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses,and the like,for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts,accurately located,to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls,where flashing is shown at lintels,shelf angles,and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release e01k, agent. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Page 8 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 AOW E. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch-(19-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate size at exterior slabs. F. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. G. Limit water-soluble,chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. H. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete,as required,for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Shrinkage control"fibermesh"or equal.Proportioned per the manufacturer's specification. Submit for review an approval to the Architect. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure,batch,mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities,designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual,as follows: 1. Class B, 1/4 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation. n. Finishing Aid;Symons Corporation. o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist;Vexcon Chemicals,Inc. 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self- expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II,non-redispersible,acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases,as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 3-5 inches. D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 6 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densities concrete surfaces. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: a. Titan Hard;Burke Group,LLC(The). b. Chemisil Plus;ChemMasters. C. Intraseal;Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing Co.,Inc. d. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co.,Inc. e. Day-Chem Sure Hard;Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Euco Diamond Hard;Euclid Chemical Co. g. Seal Hard;L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc. h. Vexcon Starseal PS;Vexcon Chemicals,Inc. 2.9 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.(305 g/sq.m)dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterbome, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Evaporation Retarder: a. CimfiIm;Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Finishing Aid Concentrate;Burke Group,LLC(The). C. Spray-Film;ChemMasters. d. Aquafilm;Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing Co.,Inc. e. Sure Film;Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Eucobar;Euclid Chemical Co. g. Vapor Aid;Kaufman Products,Inc. h. Lambco Skin;Lambert Corporation. i. E-Con;L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc. j. Confilm;Master Builders,Inc. k. Waterhold;Metalcrete Industries. 1. Rich Film;Richmond Screw Anchor Co. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. D. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,intersections,and directional changes. 1. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. PVC Waterstops: ew a. Greenstreak. b. Meadows: W.R.Meadows,Inc. C. Murphy: Paul Murphy Plastics Co. d. Progress Unlimited Inc. e. Stemson Group. f. Tamms Industries Co.;Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North America,Inc. g. Vinylex Corporation. h. Westec Barrier Technologies;Div.of Western Textile Products,Inc. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397,not less than 10 mils thick: 1. Nonwoven,polyester-reinforced,polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick. 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils thick. Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 4 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Chamfer Strips: Wood,metal,PVC,or rubber strips,3/4 by 3/4 inch(19 by 19 mm),minimum. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A Grade 60 deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and as follows: B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A Grade 60 . Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of buns. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded,and as follows: 1. Class: Severe weathering region,but not less than 3S. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve,and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No.50 . C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Page 3 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1,according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant,each aggregate from one source,and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following,unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301,"Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood,metal,or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. Structural 1,B-B,or better,mill oiled and edge sealed. b. B-B(Concrete Form),Class 1,or better,mill oiled and edge sealed. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 Page 2 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.:10213 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork,reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design,placement procedures,and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement,walks and patios. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other pozzolans,ground granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending,and placement,prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing,bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Waterstops. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Cast-in-Place-Concrete-03300 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 1018/03 At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed '' work for Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION A Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 10 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 A01%. 1. First Week: Provide all labor and arrange for all watering necessary for rooting of the sod. Soil on sod pads shall be kept moist at all times. In the absence of adequate rainfall, watering shall be performed daily or as often as necessary during the first week and in sufficient quantities to maintain moist soil to a depth of at least 4 inches. Watering should be done during the heat of the day to prevent wilting. 2. Second Week: Water the sod as required to maintain adequate moisture in the upper 4 inches of soil, necessary for the promotion of deep root growth. B. Mowing The first mowing shall not be attempted until the sod is firmly rooted and secure in place. Not more than 40% of the grass leaf shall be removed by the initial or subsequent mowings. Bluegrass height shall be maintained between 1 1/2" and 2 1/2", unless otherwise specified. C. Duration 1. Maintenance shall begin immediately after sodding operations and shall continue for a minimum of thirty (60) days, or until acceptance, whichever is longer. 2. Maintenance of sodded areas shall consist of watering, weeding, cutting, repair of all erosion and sodding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. All areas that fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be resodded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly distributed and not exceeding 6" square of any sod area, will be allowed at the discretion of the Landscape Architect. 3.07 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done near pavement or streets, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, and broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt onto pavement or street. B. After completion of all sodding operations, dispose of all debris and excess material, to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be swept and hosed clean. 3.08 FINAL INSPECTION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 9 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil, the sod bed shall be fine graded to remove ridges and depressions, and the surface cleared of all stones V or more in diameter and of other debris. 3.05 SOD TRANSPLANTING A. Moisture Content Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content (excessively dry or wet) may adversely affect its survival. B. Time Limitations 1. Sod shall be harvested, delivered and transplanted within a period of 36 hours unless a suitable preservation method is approved prior to delivery. 2. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect prior to its installation. C. Transplanting 1. Moistening the Soil: During periods of higher than optimal temperature for species being specified and after all unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying sod. 2. Starter Strip: The first row of sod shall be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows placed parallel to and tightly against each other. Lateral joints shall be staggered to promote more uniform growth and strength. Care shall be exercised to ensure that sod is not stretched or overlapped and that all joints are butted tight in order to prevent voids that would cause air-drying of the roots. 3. Sloping Surfaces: On 1:3 or greater slopes, sod shall be laid with staggered joints and secured by tamping, pegging or other approved methods. 4. Watering and Rolling: Water sod immediately after transplanting to prevent excessive drying during progress of work. As sodding is completed in any one section, the entire area shall be rolled. It shall then be thoroughly watered to a depth sufficient that the underside of the new sod pad and soil immediately below the sod are thoroughly wet. The Owner shall be responsible for having adequate water available. 3.06 SOD MAINTENANCE A. Watering Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 8 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 A. The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true smooth slope parallel and 4" below finished grade for all sod areas. B. There must be sufficient grade stakes as determined by the Landscape Architect to insure correct line and grade of subgrade and of finished grade. C. The top 3" of the subgrade immediately prior to being covered with topsoil shall be raked or otherwise loosened, and shall be free of stones, rock and other foreign material 3" or greater in dimensions. 3.03 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or worked in a frozen or muddy condition. B. Topsoil shall be placed and spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 4" in sod lawn areas so that after natural settlement of light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines, grades and elevations indicated. C. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing, and stones over 1" in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil and it shall also be free of smaller stones in excessive quantities as determined by the Landscape Architect. D. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller weighing not more than 100 lbs. per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade. 3.04 SOD BED PREPARATION A. After the areas to be sodded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at a rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply the 12-4-6 fertilizer at a rate of 20 pounds per 1,000 square feet within ten (10) days prior to sodding. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3 inches by disking or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools. Adjacent trees and shrubs use hand tools to avoid disturbance of the roots. C. The soil shall be reconstituted as may be recommended by a soil testing agency prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 7 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 B. Limestone Ground dolomitic limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone, and shall contain not less than 85% of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50%will pass a 100-mesh sieve, and 90% will pass a 20-mesh sieve. 2.04 SOD A. General Sod shall be commercially grown lawn grass at least two years old from time of original seeding, vigorous, well-rooted, healthy turf, free from insect pests, disease, weeds or other deleterious matter. Sod shall be cut by mechanical sod cutter to a thickness of not less than 3/4" nor more than 1 1/2". Width of strips shall be either 12 or 18 inches; and lengths shall not exceed 6'. B. Sod shall consist of a blend of grasses equal to that obtained by using the following seed mixture: 20%Newport Kentucky Bluegrass 25%Advent Perennial Ryegrass 30%Creeping Red Fescue 25%Topgun Perennial Ryegrass Actual formulation shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that sod placement may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 6 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 4% Phosphoric Acid 6% Potash Fertilizer shall be mixed as specified, and delivered to the site in standard un-opened containers showing weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer. C. Special Protection If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Peat Peat shall be moist peat. It shall be finely shredded, consist of 90% organic moss peat, be brown in color and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed 1/4" in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition containing not more than 35% moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10%. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 5 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 dimension, be free of lumps, plants, glass, roots, sticks, excessive stone content, debris and extraneous matter as determined by the Landscape Architect. Screened loam shall fall within the pH range of 6.0-6.5 except as noted on plans and details. It shall be uncontaminated by salt water, foreign matter and substances harmful to plant growth. The maximum soluble salt index shall be 100. Screened loam shall not have levels of aluminum greater than 200 parts per million. If limestone is required to amend the screened loam to bring it within the pH range of 6.0-6.5,no more than 200 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, incorporated into the soil, or 50 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, surface application,per season. The Landscape Architect will reject any material delivered to the site which, after post-delivery testing does not meet these specifications. If the delivered screened loam does not meet the specifications in this document, the delivered screened loam will be removed by the contractor at the contractor's expense and at the time of rej ection. B. Testing The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Landscape Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. 2.02 FERTILIZER A. General All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced 12-4-6 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Commercial Fertilizer Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from super- phosphoric acid, or bonemeal containing 25-50% phosphoric acid and 2-3% nitrogen; and potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60%potash. It shall contain the following percentages by weight: 12%Nitrogen Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 00W 3. Use all means necessary to protect sodding materials before, during and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect. 1.09 PLANTING SEASON A. Soddin Sodding shall be done between August 15 and October 1 and/or April 1 and May 15. B. Variance If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Screened loam shall be "fine sandy loam" or"sandy loam" determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM d-422) and based on the USDA Classification System. Screened loam shall have the following mechanical analysis: Textural Class Percentage of Total Weight Average Percentage Sand 45-75 60 (0.05-2.0mm dia.) Silt 15-35 25 (0.002-0.05mm dia.) Clay 5-20 15 (<0.002mm dia.) Screened loam shall not contain less than 5 percent nor more than 10 percent organic matter as determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried samples, at 100 degrees C, +/- 5 degrees C. Screened loam shall consist of fertile, friable natural loam capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Loam shall be without admixture of subsoil and refuse, resulting in a homogenous material free of stones greater than '/2" in the greatest Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding EGA,P.C. Page 3 ]0/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work, and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards All sod material shall meet or exceed the Specifications of the American Sod Producers Association requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within fifteen (45) days after Award of Contract, and before any sod materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all sodding and other items proposed to be installed. 1. Make submittal in accordance with the provisions of these Specifications. 2. Include complete data on source, size and quality. 3. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section. 4. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Prior to installation, deliver all sod certificates to the Landscape Architect. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site with all labels intact and legible at the time of the Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from site all sodding materials that are not true to name and all materials that do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 02860-Sodding Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02860 SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. A"*- 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES The scope of this Section includes everything necessary for, and incidental to, the execution and completion of reconstituting of topsoil, finish grading, fertilizing, sodding, watering and maintenance of all areas as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork Section 02315 ...................................................................... B. Planting ......................................................................Section 02800 C. Sodding ......................................................................Section 02860 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen low Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02860-Sodding Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 3.08 ACCEPTANCE IN PART The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.09 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied,pavements shall be kept clear at all times,broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be swept and hosed clean. 3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE At the end of the guarantee period, the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed W work for the Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding Page 11 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 C. Promptly after seeding, wet the seed bed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout the germination period. D. Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Straw or salt marsh hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall be spread evenly and uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre. Lumps and thick mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch anchor stakes, strings and matting shall be removed before final acceptance of lawns. In addition, following mulching, all slopes of 3:1 or greater shall be covered with jute,biodegradable tobacco netting or approved equal securely stapled in place. Overlap all joints in netting a minimum of 6". E. Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating. These measures shall include furnishing warnings signs,barriers, and other needed measures of protection. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until Acceptance or for a minimum of 60 days, whichever is longer. B. Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering, weeding, curing, repair of all erosion, and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be watered in a a satisfactory manner during and immediately after planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly distributed and not exceeding 8" square of any lawn area, will be allowed at the discretion of the Landscape Architect. At the time of the first cutting,there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-1/2" high, and mower blades shall be set between 2-1/2" and 3" high. Catch shall be representative of seed specified. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE The Landscape Architect shall inspect all work for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Acceptance of the work. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding EGA,P.C. Page 10 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 E. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil, and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade. 3.04 SEED BED PREPARATION A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at a rate of 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply the 18-26-12 fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet within 10 days prior to seeding. Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3" by disking or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools. Adjacent to trees and shrubs, use hand tools to avoid disturbances of the roots. C. The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil, as may be recommended by a soil testing agency,prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor, as recommended, at no expense to the Owner. D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil, the seed bed shall be fine graded to remove all ridges and depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one inch or more in diameter. 3.05 SEEDING A. Immediately before seeding, the ground shall be restored, as necessary, to a loose friable condition by dicing or other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface shall be cleared of all debris and of all stones 1" or more in diameter. B. Seed all areas to be seeded with specified grass seed, sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Sow 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet in one direction and 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet at right angles to the first seeding. Spread seed when soil is moist. Cultipacker, or approved similar equipment,may be used to cover the seed and to firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker, the seeded ground shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another. Hydro- seeding is an acceptable manner of seeding, providing the Contractor certifies in writing that the hydro-seed fertilizer mix is as herein specified and applied at the equivalent rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding EGA,P.C. Page EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 3 I. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true, smooth slope,parallel and 6" below finished grade, for all seed bed areas. Remove all existing lawns and grasses, including roots. B. There must be sufficient grade staked, as determined by the Landscape Architect, to insure correct line and grade of subgrade and of finished grade. C. Immediately prior to being covered with topsoil,the top 3" of the subgrade shall be raked or otherwise loosened and shall be free of stones, rock, and other foreign material 3" or greater in dimensions. 3.03 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or worked in a frozen or muddy condition. B. Topsoil shall be placed and spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 4" in "loam and seed" lawn areas and 15" in plant bed areas so that after natural settlement and light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated. If excess topsoil exists, topsoil shall be spread a maximum of 8" deep on lawn areas. D. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing, and stones over one inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It shall be free of smaller stones in excessive quantities, as determined by the Landscape Architect. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2.04 GRASS SEED A. General All grass seed shall be: 1. Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned. 2. Grade A recent crop seed. 3. Treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing. 4. Delivered to the site in sealed containers with dealer's guaranteed analysis. B. Seed Mix (for Springtime Construction) Proportions by Weight Percent by Percent of Percent Wei ht Seed Eqdty Germination 30% Creeping Red Fescue 98% 85% 25% Topgun Perennial 98% 85% Ryegrass 25% Advent Perennial 98% 85% Ryegrass 20% Newport Kentucky 85% 75% Bluegrass SECTION 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Awl', shall not exceed one (1) inch in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition, containing not more than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10 percent. B. Limestone Ground dolomitic limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100-mesh sieve, and 90 percent will pass a 20-mesh sieve. 02850-Seeding Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. Testing The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Landscape Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. 2.02 FERTILIZER A. General All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced, 10-6-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Commercial Fertilizer Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from super phosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric acid or bone meal containing 25-30 percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen; and potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. It shall contain the following percentages by weight. 18%Nitrogen - 26%Phosphoric Acid - 12% Potash Fertilizer shall be mixed, as specified, and delivered to the site in standard, unopened containers showing weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer. C. Special Protection If stored at the site,protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Peat Peat shall be moist. It shall be finely shredded, consist of 90 percent organic moss peat,be brown in color, and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles 02850-Seeding Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 A. Screened loam shall be"fine sandy loam" or"sandy loam" determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM d-422) and based on the USDA Classification System. Screened loam shall have the following mechanical analysis: Textural Class Percentage of Total Weight Average Percentage Sand 45-75 60 (0.05-2.0mm dia.) Silt 15-35 25 (0.002-0.05mm dia.) Clay 5-20 15 (<0.002mm dia.) Screened loam shall not contain less than 5 percent nor more than 10 percent organic matter as determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried samples, at 100 degrees C, +/- 5 degrees C. Screened loam shall consist of fertile, friable natural loam capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Loam shall be without admixture of subsoil and refuse, resulting in a homogenous material free of stones greater than %" in the greatest dimension, be free of lumps,plants, glass, roots, sticks, excessive stone content, debris and extraneous matter as determined by the Landscape Architect. Screened loam shall fall within the pH range of 6.0-6.5 except as noted on plans and details. It shall be uncontaminated by salt water, foreign matter and substances harmful to plant growth. The maximum soluble salt index shall be 100. Screened loam shall not have levels of aluminum greater than 200 parts per million. If limestone is required to amend the screened loam to bring it within the pH range of 6.0-6.5, no more than 200 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, incorporated into the soil, or 50 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, surface application, per season. The Landscape Architect will reject any material delivered to the site which, after post-delivery testing does not meet these specifications. If the delivered screened loam does not meet the specifications in this document, the delivered screened loam will be removed by the contractor at the contractor's expense and at the time of rejection. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 fow 2. Prior to installation, deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect seeding materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.09 PLANTING SEASON A. Seeding Seeding shall be done between August 15th to September 30 and/or April 1st to June 15th. B. Variance If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding, the Contractor shall be responsible for a full growth of grass. PART 2.00 -PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL 02850 Seeding Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 AOW Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards 1. All planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Quality shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards" for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. ANSI 2260.1 -Nursery Stock. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all seeding and other items proposed to be installed. At least 10 days prior to shipment/delivery of materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect a one (1) cubic foot representative sample, certifications, certified test results for materials as specified below. The Contractor shall provide a listing of the addresses (locations) identifying the origin of the soil to be delivered. If the origin is from multiple locations, all locations shall be provided at the time of submission o required information specified above.No material shall be ordered or delivered until the required submittals have been submitted and approved by the Landscape Architect. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. Approval shall not constitute final acceptance. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject, on or after delivery, any material which does not meet these specifications. 1. Include complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 02850-Seeding Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02850 SEEDING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES A. Planting required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes seeding and other ground cover throughout the Work. 1.05 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork Section 02315 .................................................................... B. Planting ....................................................................Section 02800 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen AOW Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02850-Seeding Page 1 EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10!08/03 3.06 CARE OF EXISTING TREES Upon completion of the work under this Section, all existing trees shall be pruned and any injuries repaired. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of construction operations. Roots greater than 2" shall be hand-cut to provide clean, concise, cutting and removal. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4" diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed; wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water, and the treated area shall be coated with an approved tree paint. 3.07 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied,pavements shall be kept clear at all times,broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.08 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE At the end of the guarantee period,the Landscape Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Landscape Architect at that time,he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project. END OF SECTION 02800-Planting Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 15 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 judgement of the Landscape Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work. B. Acceptance in Part The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.05 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year from the date of Acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. C. When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time. D. The Contractor shall replace,without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather conditions permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous thriving condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. Replacements required because of vandalism or other causes beyond control of the Contractor are not part of the Contract. E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item. F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the guarantee period to determine what changes, if any, should be made to the Owner's maintenance program. Submit in writing to the Landscape Architect any recommended changes. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting EGA,P.C. Page 14 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, tightening and repairing guys,resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying such sprays or other items as are necessary to keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition. C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of all kinds for the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured, they shall be treated or replaced as directed by the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an irrigation system. 3.05 INSPECTION In addition to normal progress inspection, schedule and conduct the following formal inspections, giving the Landscape Architect at least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for inspection: A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting. o"'", B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings. C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Landscape Architect so that the final inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after completion of planting. D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period, provided that all previous deficiencies have been corrected. 3.04 ACCEPTANCE A. The Landscape Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Acceptance of plant material by the Landscape Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size, character, and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the 02800-Planting Rock ridge—Northampton,MA Page 13 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Tree Caliper.............................................. 3 to 5 inches AnchorSize ..................................................... 4 inches Minimum Dept(feet)............................................ 2-1/2 Preload anchors after driving until anchor turns in the ground at 90 degree angle to line of driving force. Anchor assembly will rise 2 to 6 inches during pre-loading. Attach guying cables, turnbuckles and hose, and secure until tree is rigidly guyed. On all guys, 1/3 distance up from ground to trunk, secure white plastic flagging 1" wide x 18", ties securely. a) Trees 3: in caliper or greater shall be guyed using the 120 degree, three guy method, or as shown on the Drawings. b) Trees less than 3" in caliper shall be staked using the 180 degree, two stake method. c) Remove all wrapping and guying material at the end of guarantee period. 2. Wrap trunks of deciduous tress of 1-1/2: or more caliper with a spiral overlapping wrapping to minimum height of third branch. Wrap from bottom and tie wrapping securely in place. Remove wrapping at end of guarantee period. low 3. Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning to be done under supervision of the Project Landscape Architect. Pruning and trimming shall include the following: a) Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect. Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree. b) Use only clean sharp tools. c) Paint cuts over 3/4: diameter, covering all exposed, living tissue. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until acceptance of the project by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days, whichever is longer. 02800-Planting - Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 12 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. 4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. B. Planting Trees and Shrubs 1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after digging. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. 2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots. 3. Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set. Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is AOW plastic, remove top 2/3. 4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full,water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering, install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering. 5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings. 7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4" layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting. 8. Immediately after planting, water all plants thoroughly. C. Guying, Staking, Wrapping and Pruning 1. Guying shall be completed immediately after planting. Drive ground anchors into ground by manual or machine method at approximately 45 degree angle to ground plane and distributed at 120 degree intervals around trunk of tree. Anchors shall be driven to minimum vertical depth after preloading as follows: Rock ridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting EGA,P.C. Page 11 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Landscape Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be made. B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings. C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during planting operations. D. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil condition which the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Landscape Architect for correcting condition. Notify the Landscape Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions which the Contractor considers detrimental growth of plant material. E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect. F. If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be considered by the Landscape Architect. Where location cannot be changed, as determined by the Landscape Architect, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6" below the required pit depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Landscape Architect. 3.03 PLANTING OPERATIONS A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated 1. Immediately before digging, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage. 2. Dig,ball and burlap ("B&B")plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diameter not less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable materials and shall be kept well 02800-Planting Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 10 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 AW Hose to encase guy wires or wires used for fastening trees to stakes shall be new or used 2-ply reinforced rubber garden hose. Wrapping material for tree trunks shall be standard burlap, heavy crepe paper, or other suitable material, in strips 6 to 10 inches wide. 2.13 TREE PAINT Tree paint shall be "Cabot Tree Paint" or approved equal. 2.14 ANTI-DESICCANT Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surfaces, permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions ("Wiltpruf' manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls,New York, or approved equal). PART 3 -EXECUTION w 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS 02800-Planting Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections. B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Landscape Architect may refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgement, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection. C. Plants identified as "selection specimen" shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. 2.11 PLANT LABELS Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather- resistant ink or embossed process lettering. 2.12 GUYING, STAKING,AND WRAPPING MATERIALS Ground anchors shall be castings, stamped steel, or deadmen of wood or other material approved by the Landscape Architect. Width across top span and length, exclusive of pin from top to arrowed tip, shall conform to the following list. Assemblies for anchors shall also conform to the following list: TreeCaliper.......................................................... 2 - 5 inches AnchorSize............................................................... 4 inches Type Wire Capacity 3,500 lbs. Assembly 36" length; .120 diameter Guying cable shall be five strand, 3/16" diameter steel cable. Turnbuckles shall be galvanized or dip-painted, having a 3" minimum lengthwise opening fitted with screw eyes. Eyebolts shall be galvanized, having a 1" opening fitted with screw length of 1>". Hose shall be suitable lengths of two-ply, reinforced,black rubber hose, 3/4" in diameter. Stakes for supporting trees shall be 2-1/2 inches square of round,by 8 feet sound wood, treated for one half their length with creosote or equal. Flags to be fastened to guys shall be of sound wood about 1/2 inch by 3 inches by 12 inches with a 3/8 inch hole centered 1-1/2 inches from each end, or 1-1/2 inches by 12 inches sheet metal with corners clipped and punched both ends, painted white. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their *VW normal position. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. E. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached securely to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth. F. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Landscape Architect. If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price. G. Type of Protection to Roots 1. Balled and Burlapped Plants Plants designated "B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full 1 recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the process of planting, the ball may be secured to a platform. 2. Protection After Delivery The balls of"B&B" plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch, or other protection from drying winds and sun. Bare-rooted plants shall be planted or heeled-in immediately upon delivery. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted. 2.09 INSPECTIONS Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Landscape Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site. 2.10 SELECTION AND TAGGING Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting EGA,P.C. Page EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 3 necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of "* lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified. 2.07 PLANTING SOIL Planting soil mix shall consist of seven parts topsoil and one part peat moss by volume. It shall have pH value between pH 6.0 to pH 6.5. For spring planting only, add five pounds of 11-8-4 commercial fertilizer per cubic yard of planting soil; mix thoroughly. Soil shall not be used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect. 2.08 PLANT MATERIALS Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years and shall be freshly dug. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted. A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of specimen quality; exceptionally heavy; and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound; healthy; vigorous; well-branched and densely foliated when in leaf, free of disease; insects; eggs or larvae; and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would prevent thriving growth. B. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over 3/4" in diameter, not completely calloused, will be rejected. C. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Landscape Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved,the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. D. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6" above natural ground line for trees up to 4" in caliper and 12" above the natural ground line for trees over 4" in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting EGA,P.C. Page EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 3 The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from ov.►, topsoil to be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis, and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Landscape Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. 2.02 FERTILIZER A. General All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced 20-10-5 ratio of N-P-K fertilizer, and shall conform to the applicable State fertilizer laws. It shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer which becomes caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be accepted. 2.03 BARK MULCH Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size, free of chunks and pieces of wood thicker than 1/4" and approved by the Landscape Architect. The mulch must be partially decomposed and dark brown in color. 2.04 TREE STAKES Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all tree stakes shall be spruce or fir construction grade, rough-sawn, 2" x 2" x 8' long. 2.05 PEAT MOSS Brown; acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH; low in content of wood material and free of mineral matter harmful to plant life; water absorbing capacity, 1100 to 2000 percent; moisture content 30 percent natural, shredded or granulated. 2.06 WATER Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 A. Screened loam shall be"fine sandy loam" or"sandy loam" determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM d-422) and based on the USDA Classification System. Screened loam shall have the following mechanical analysis: Textural Class Percentage of Total Weight Average Percentage Sand 45-75 60 (0.05-2.Omm dia.) Silt 15-35 25 (0.002-0.05mm dia.) Clay 5-20 15 (<0.002mm dia.) Screened loam shall not contain less than 5 percent nor more than 10 percent organic matter as determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried samples, at 100 degrees C, +/- 5 degrees C. Screened loam shall consist of fertile, friable natural loam capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. Loam shall be without admixture of subsoil and refuse, resulting in a homogenous material free of stones greater than %" in the greatest dimension,be free of lumps, plants, glass,roots, sticks, excessive stone content, debris and extraneous matter as determined by the Landscape Architect. Screened loam shall fall within the pH range of 6.0-6.5 except as noted on plans and details. It shall be uncontaminated by salt water, foreign matter and substances harmful to plant growth. The maximum soluble salt index shall be 100. Screened loam shall not have levels of aluminum greater than 200 parts per million. If limestone is required to amend the screened loam to bring it within the pH range of 6.0-6.5, no more than 200 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, incorporated into the soil, or 50 pounds of limestone per 1000 square feet of loam, surface application, per season. The Landscape Architect will reject any material delivered to the site which, after post-delivery testing does not meet these specifications. If the delivered screened loam does not meet the specifications in this document, the delivered screened loam will be removed by the contractor at the contractor's expense and at the time of rejection. B. Testing Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting EGA,P.C. Page 4 EGA M 10213 10/08/03 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all plants which are not true to name and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Planting Season 1. Planting shall be done within the following dates: Deciduous Material: March 1 - May 15 October 15 - December 1 Evergreen Material: March 1 - June 1 August 15 - October 15 Seeding, Sodding: April 1 - June 1 August 15 - October 15 2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Project Landscape Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Landscape Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL Roclaidge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting Page 3 EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10/08(03 Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section. B. Standards 1. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards" for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. 3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the plants, in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen. In all cases,botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed: 1. Include a complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Landscape Architect. B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. 02800-Planting Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02800 PLANTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes planting of trees and/or shrubs throughout the Work including furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for root protection, and tree guards where applicable. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork ......................................................................Section 02315 B. Seeding ......................................................................Section 02850 C. Sodding ......................................................................Section 02860 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen Iow Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02800-Planting Page 1 EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces; leave undisturbed for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then perform final finishing. e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven days; provide and install all required protective coverings. 2. Major Defective Areas If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Engineer may require the concrete to be removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 13 EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 0 2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering. 3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain. 4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own employees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows a strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days. 3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Inspection 1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Engineer. B. Patchin 1. Minor Defective Areas a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular to the surface. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it to prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar. b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and a solution of one part "Konset", or equal approved by the Engineer, to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately. C. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a consistency as dry as is possible within the requirements of handling and placing; thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 12 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. In cold weather (below 50 deg. F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above 50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum temperature within the enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five day period and 65 deg. F for a three day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available water content of the concrete. C. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the sun, shielded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods to retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of the concrete, and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are to be placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a fashion that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed. D. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No curing compounds of any kind shall be permitted,unless approved by the Engineer. 3.07 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Placement 1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F. 3. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations. B. Protection 1. Provide and use all required rain covers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to protect the concrete. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 11 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 A. General 1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bullfloat as necessary. 2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or drop below them. 3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the Drawings. B. Finishing 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in appearance, and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'. 2. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep. , • 3. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing operations shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface and the concrete has started to stiffen. 4. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float. Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled. C. Exterior Finishes Where "broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a medium stiff broom after troweling is complete. 3.06 CURING General A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or sun in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. An approved curing method providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for a minimum period of three days. AOM- Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 10 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is complete. 3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is particularly important during hot or dry weather. 4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints. 5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet in length. C. Compaction 1. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2. During placement, thoroughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by mechanical vibration. D. Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be placed at 24-foot intervals maximum. E. Isolation Joints Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around street light footings, or as directed by the Engineer. They shall be a preformed foam material with joint sealant identical to the approved expansion joints. F. Acceptablity Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreign materials. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Location Make and locate construction joints so as not to impair the strength of the structure. B. Approval Obtain the Engineer's approval of location of all control joints and construction joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement. ,., 3.05 LEVELING AND FINISHING Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. Forms 1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the thickness of the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Engineer. 2. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been previously used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to the established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished walk which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for surface drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2% cross-slope typical. 3. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete. C. Notification Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours before placing the concrete. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Method 1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation and loss of materials. 2. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without loss or separation of materials. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. 4. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never exceeding the maximum specified slump. B. Rate of Placement 1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily between bare bars. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 At all construction and expansion joints,joint sealant shall be gray in color as: A. 790 Building Sealant" by Dow Corning; B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.; C. "Perma-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal. 2.05 SEALANT RETAINER Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polyethylene foam cord by the following manufacturers: A. Progress Unlimited Inc.,New York City,NY; B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI; C. Products Research Corp., Gloucester City,NJ, or approved equal. 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place. 3. Thoroughly wet the forms (except in freezing weather) or oil them; remove all standing water. 4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 No. 4 0 5 1 0 10 1 0 15 No. 8 -- -- 0 5 1 0 5 E. Water All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES-SITE WORK Cement concrete for footings and walkways shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates, water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified according to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used shall be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work. CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate % Air Concrete Strength* Designation Size - --------------------------------------- A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2 4.5 B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0 DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0 E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0 F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0 * As evaluated under ASTM C94-74. All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Engineer for approval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. 2.03 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed cell polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for the installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufacturer's standard instructions. 2.04 JOINT SEALANT Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein. 2. When used as a _fine aggregate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear and frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains, organic matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect bonding of the cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be relatively spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the sand shall show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table. Size of Percent by Weigh Passing Sieve Minimum Maximum 3/8" 100 --- #4 95 100 #16 55 80 #50 10 25 #100 2 8 #200 0 2 3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from deleterious amounts of organic matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement. Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse aggregate. When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for each designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and maximum in each case. To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or project, the range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon determination of the character and source of the materials that the Contractor proposes to furnish. Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3 Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8" Sieve Size Min. Max. I Min. Max. I Min. Max. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1/2 inch 90 100 1 -- -- I -- -- 3/4 inch 35 60 90 100 1 -- -- ,, 1/2 inch -- -- -- -- 1 90 100 3/8 inch 10 25 20 50 1 30 70 Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete EGA,P.C. Page 5 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. General All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer, shall be transit- mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D. Concrete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the Engineer. B. Quality-Site Concrete(See Section 3300 for all other concrete) 1. All concrete for walkways and footings shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and shall be proportioned within the following limits: EXTERIOR SLABS LOCATION OF CONCRETE & SITE WORK Min. psi @ 28 days 3000 Max. size of aggregate 3/4 inch Min. sacks of cement/CY 5.50 Max. slump in inches 4 2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water- cement ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air. C. Cement-Site Concrete All cement for walls, mortar, footings and walkways shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I, and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 deg. F. Color shall match existing concrete. D. Aggregates-Site Concrete Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete EGA,P.C. Page 4 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. D. Codes The work shall be completed in accordance with standards and approval of the City of Northampton Department of Public Works. E. Permits The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job ook site, submit to the Engineer the name and address of transit-mix concrete supplier. B. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip 1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour. 2. Make a record available to the Engineer for his inspection upon request. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to the Engineer. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect site electrical and storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. �.., B. Replacements Rocla idge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete EGA,P.C. Page 3 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 00'" 1. Excavating, Filling & Grading..........................................Section 02230 2. Bituminous Concrete Pavement Section 02743 3. Unit Masonry Section 02650 4. Structural Cast-in-place Concrete Section 03300 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, completely familiar with the design and application of the work described in this section, be present at all times during progress of work of this section, and direct all work performed under this section. C. Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete - 318 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10- lb. (4.54 kg)Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm)Drop D 1157 4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301-66 of the American Concrete Institute. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02750 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Reinforced cement concrete required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and includes,but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Exterior flatwork; 2. Concrete piers, piles and footings for wetland boardwalk 3. Decorative concrete pool 4. Patching 5. Light pole bases B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02750—Reinforced Cement Concrete Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10108/03 EGA#: 10213 Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. END OF SECTION Roclo'idge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 11 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. Any longitudinal or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to placement of adjacent mix, shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement,base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic. 11. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement(if greater than or equal seven days since binder placed), parking lot overlay areas, manholes, concrete collars and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 gal./100 s.y. after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over. 12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge. 13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in. when tested with a 10 ft. straight edge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area. At joints with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed+ 0.05 ft. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this section. REMEDIAL MEASURES Upon direction of the ENGINEER, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 SPECIAL CONDITIONS Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 10 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 WIN construction. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours,unless artificial light, satisfactory to the ENGINEER, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted. 6. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be completed while the mix temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while ,, mixture is hot and in compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal or mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold. 8. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall weight at.least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively. 9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work. 10. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 9 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned,replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.05 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING A. Preparation Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no circumstances shall mix temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325 degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load. B. Placement Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished, handled and laid in accordance with Section 460 and Section 701 of the State Specifications, except as herein modified. 1. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied individually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings. 2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by the ENGINEER. 3. Adjacent concrete work, curb, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition. 4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Highway Department Specifications, Section 460, Class I, Bituminous Concrete Pavement, Type-I. 5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 10 days prior to the pavement Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 8 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. The gravel shall be furnished,hauled, deposited and spread in layers as specified in applicable provisions of Section 405 of the State Specifications and compacted as specified for the formation of embankments, for sub-base, shoulders etc., and as specified herein. B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles, or with power graders of approved types, or by hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers no more than six (6") inches thick, compacted measure. Compaction requirements shall be to 95%maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2 in. shall be excluded from course. The method of compaction proposed by the Contractor shall be approved by the ENGINEER and the approved method and procedure, once established and providing the required results, shall be used throughout the entire operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. Trucks shall not be used for compaction purposes. C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. D. Width of Base 1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. 2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted. E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. A Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 7 EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 B. Paving Equipment All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified. 3.03 GRADING A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation under Section 02315-EARTHWORK,before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the ENGINEER as specified in Section 02315-EARTHWORK. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out,reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the ENGINEER. Subgrade shall be approved by the ENGINEER before installation of paving base course. Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 6 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 00", 2.04 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT Bituminous tack coat material shall conform to AASHTO M82. 2.07 TRAFFIC PAINT Paint for parking space pavement striping shall conform to Materials Section M7.01.10, "Fast-Drying White Traffic Paint", of the MHD Specifications. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 00*_ 2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the ENGINEER. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Compacting Equipment All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the ENGINEER. Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 5 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as hereinbefore defined and indicated on the drawings, shall consist of gravel borrow composed of hard durable stone, and coarse sand, free of loam, clay or silt, uniformly graded and containing no stone having any dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When spread and rolled on the prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State Specifications, Section M1, sub-section M1.03.0, Type "b", and attention is directed to the selected gravel size limitation. Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an approved testing laboratory shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER. No stone greater than 3" in any dimension. 2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I, Type I-1, conforming to the requirements of Construction Standards Section 460 and Materials Specifications Section M3.11.00 of MHD Standard Specifications. 1. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve, and bitumen content= 5 1/2%+ 1/2%by weight. 2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 5/8 in. sieve, and bitumen content= 6 1/2% + 1/2%by weight. Complete job mix formula,listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and approved by the ENGINEER at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. 2.03 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB A. Bituminous concrete shall be Class I, conforming to applicable requirements of MHD Specifications M3.11.03 for "Dense Mix". B. Curb shall be Modified MHD Type A (Cape Cod) berm. See project drawings for detail. Aaw Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Oak D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade. E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project,be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices. F. The contractor shall certify after the track construction that the track has been laid out,marked, and graded in a manner that satisfies the requirenments as shown on the plans. Certification shall include checking of the markings by a registered surveyor. 1.08 SUBMITTALS Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section. Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M 140 Emulsified Asphalt B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D. 1557: Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.5kg) Rammer and 18-in.(475-mm) Drop C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD): Specifications: Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with City of NORTHAMPTON Department of Public Works. 1.06 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE Excavation and Fill ............................................................................ Section 02315 Reinforced Cement Concrete............................................................. Section 02750 UnitMasonry...................................................................................... Section 02650 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified,work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: 1. MHD specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base course and Section 500 for"curb and edging". 2. MHD specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint. B. Paving work,base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance. All trenches for utility installation shall be completed and backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches unless approved by the ENGINEER. C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work, except as otherwise noted. Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement EGA,P.C. Page 2 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 SECTION 02743 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the ENGINEER's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the ENGINEER's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes,but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Bituminous concrete parking lot and sidewalk pavement 2. Bituminous concrete curb 3. Painting of pavement markings 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS Rockridge—Northampton 02743—Bituminous Concrete Pavement Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Upon direction of the Engineer, cut out and/or re-work all surfaces and subgade areas which do not meet the requirements of this section. Perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 CLEAN-UP Sweep surface of pavers thoroughly, removing all dust and foreign materials. Hose with water to ensure a clean,unsoiled surface. Sweep and hose all adjoining areas to remove all mortar and paver debris. Remove all debris from area. END OF SECTION 02650—Unit Masonry Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2. Paving pattern: a. At entry walkway,pavers shall be laid in a running bond with the long axis of the pattern running parallel to the long axis of the walkway. b. At the garden terrace,pavers shall be laid in a stack bond. 3 . Newly laid pavers must be protected at all times by panels of plywood on which the installer stands. The panels can be advanced as work processes, but the plywood protection must be maintained in areas that will be subjected to continued movement of materials and equipment. These precautions must be taken in order to avoid depressions and protect paver alignment. If additional leveling of the pavers is required, the surface shall be rolled with a power roller after sufficient heat has been built up from several days of hot weather. C. Joint Treatment I . The mortar joints shall be approximately 3/8"thick. Joints may vary slightly to adjust the bond and minimize cutting, closures, or jumping of bond. Closure pieces shall be large enough to be in proportion with the paving pattern.No small closure pieces are permitted. All cutting shall be done by saws. All materials shall be kept clean and care shall be taken to keep mortar off the face of the pavers. Cement stains that remain shall be cleaned with a 10% solution of muriatic acid or mortar cleaner or swept with moist sand. 2. Expansion joints shall be continuous through the concrete base and pavers and shall be 3/8" in width as shown on the drawings. Recess expansion joint filler a minimum of 1/2" in brick paving. Sealant shall then be applied to joints continuously and uniformity to a depth of 1/2" or as required. Care must be taken that sealant bonds properly to both sides of the joint. Sealant shall be flush with joint. All adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned immediately of sealant in a manner recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 1. PRECAST CURBING All work of this section shall conform to the Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications, Construction Standards Section 500. 3.03 REMEDIAL MEASURES 02650—Unit Masonry Rock ridge—Northampton,MA Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 �Opw 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that pavers may be installed in strict accordance with the original design and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION All masonry work is to be done by masons who are skilled in their trade in a neat and workmanlike manner. 1. BRICK PAVERS A. Mortar 1. Proportions shall be as per manufacturers directions. Anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures are permitted only upon written approval of the Engineer. Any mixtures submitted for the approval of the Engineer must be a type that contains no salt or other deleterious matters, and that will not alter the strength or color of the mixture. The use of an admixture without prior approval shall be just cause for stopping and/or condemning the work. 2. Mortar mixing: Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in the exact proportions specified by batch machine mixers. Use of mortar requiring retempering not permitted. B. Placement of Pavers 1. All pavers shall be laid plumb and true to line with level accurately spaced courses,bond, comers, and reveals. The mortar setting bed shall be approximately 1/2"thick, with a minimum on 3/8" and a maximum of 1".Lay full thickness without stepping or toothing in mortar beds, spread smooth and rake out to 1" depth as shown on the plans and specified herein. 02650—Unit Masonry Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 ROW Compressive Strength 3000 psi min. 3000 psi min. Tensile Strength 500 psi min. 500 psi min. Bond Strength 500 psi min. 500 psi min. Water Absorption 4%max. 4%max. Ozone Resistance 200 hrs. @ 200ppm w/no loss The finished mortar and grout shall be resistant to urine, dilute acid, dilute alkali, sugar,brine and food waste products. All mortar additives and epoxy adhesives and grouts shall be compatible and from one manufacture. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original containers with manufacturer's identification on each package. The addition of water or other materials to dilute the mortar additive or epoxy additive and grout will not be permitted. 2.03 PRECAST CURB The precast curbing shall be of two types: a. As edging for bituminous parking lot and drive pavements, where indicated on the plans, it shall be 6"x 18"precast concrete curbing as manufactured by Chase Precast,North Brookfield,MA, or approved equal. b. As indicated in the drawings as edging for the raised central planting bed at the terrace garden, it shall be 6"x 18" "Rock Curb" cast stone curbing, Limestone Grey Tudor finish with battered profile, as manufactured by Hanover Architectural Products, Hanover, PA, or approved equal. 2.04 JOINT FILLER Joint filler shall be Portland Cement to which pigments have been added and shall conform to ASTM C-150. Sand shall conform to ASTM C-33. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection e"'' Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02650—Unit Masonry Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectural Coatings All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: "a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK PAVERS Brick Pavers shall be as manufactured by Endicott Clay Products Co., Fairbury, Nebraska, or approved equal. 1. Nominal dimensions: a. at garden terrace: 7 5/8"x 7 5/8"x 2 %4" b. at entry walkway: 3 5/8" x 7 5/8"x 2/1/4" 4. Color: medium ironspot#46 2.02 SETTING BED Setting bed shall be Laticrete thick bed system by Laticrete International, Inc., Bethany, CT 06525, (800) 243-4788 or approved equivalent Bed shall be Laticrete Latex Portland Cement thick bed mortar or approved equal. See manufacturers directions for mixing. Grout shall be Laticrete Portland Cement Grout or approved equivalent. Submit color sample to Engineer for approval. All mortar additives shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application, and when cured. The bedding and grouting mortar shall be weather, frost, shock, and chemical resistant and shall meet the following requirements. Thick Bed Mortar Thin Bed Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02650—Unit Masonry Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection 1. Use all means necessary to protect the masonry units and materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Masonry units shall be protected against wetting prior to laying. 3. Do not use, and immediately remove from the project site all materials in broken containers or in packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage. 4. Do not use any chipped, broken, or otherwise damaged or defective masonry units. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this section. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions When temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling, or same is forecast to occur within 48 hours,provide fireproof protection covering of work and heat materials with UL approved flame heaters, as approved. Maintain materials and work above 50 degrees F for 72 hours. Do not use any admixture to prevent freezing. Do not lay frozen materials or build upon frozen surfaces. Lay masonry units dry. Any completed work found to be affected by frost shall be taken down and rebuilt, at no additional cost to the Owner. %, 02650—Unit Masonry Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications of Workmen A. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, completely familiar with the design and application of the work described in this section,be present at all times during progress of work of this section, and direct all work performed under this section. B. For actual installation and finishing of precast pavement surfaces and operation of the required equipment, use only personnel that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required. C. Masonry units shall conform to the physical requirements of the local building code and the current applicable ASTM specifications applying to particular use for the construction in which units are employed. 1.06 SUBMITTALS Materials List After award of Contract and before any unit paving materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Engineer a complete materials list of all masonry materials. A. Show manufacturers' name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. B. Upon approval of the Engineer, the manufacturers' recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work. C. The paver supplier shall submit 6 copies of all necessary shop drawings to the Engineer for his approval. These drawings shall show all bedding, bonding,jointing and anchoring details. D. Samples: The Installing Contractor shall submit to the Engineer four production units of each color and style selected. This submission is made for final approval and establishes job site criteria for quality and color uniformity. All surface texture shall be uniform within the normal color range established between the manufacturer and Engineer. Submit affidavits stating that masonry units to be used on the job complies with all applicable ASTM specifications. 02650—Unit Masonry Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02650 UNIT MASONRY PART 1.00—GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the work specified, in accordance with the Landscape Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality of greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Landscape Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Work includes all labor,materials, equipment and incidental items necessary to complete the installation of Brick Paver Units in all areas noted and detailed in the drawings where paver units are installed over cast-m- place concrete base, namely, at entry walkways at main entry to new 3-story building and in garden terrace area; and the installation of Precast Curb Units, Cast Stone Curb Units, and the filling of mortar joints in all areas noted and detailed in the drawings. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Earthwork ........................................................... Section 02315 Bituminous Concrete Pavement (curbing)................ Section 02600 Cast-in-place Concrete Pavement............................. Section 02750 02650—Unit Masonry Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1"" manufacturer's directions. Other additives will not be permitted in the mortar. Two coats of bituminous waterproofing material shall then be applied to the hardened plaster. The material shall be "minwax Fibrous Brush Coat" made by the Minwax Company,New York,N.Y. Tremco 121 Foundation Coating" made by the Tremco Manufacturing Company, Cleveland Ohio; "Intertol No. 7 made by Intertol Company,Newark,NJ; or approved equal. The material shall be applied by brush or spray(using a primer if necessary) in accordance with the direction of the manufacturer. The Engineer at his discretion may require that two coats of the above described bituminous waterproofing material be applied to the outside of precast manholes installed in wet areas. 3.07 CERTIFICATES Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications. END OF SECTION Aow- 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 10 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 plans. Structures shall be plumb and vertical, with each section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior approval. 1. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Drain pipe shall extend, around its entire circumference,to inside surface of wall of structure into which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or nonshrink grout. For grouted joints, surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with nonshrink grout. B. Castings Casting frames shall be set on a full bed of mortar, true to grade and concentric with the masonry. All voids beneath the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar at least 1 inch thick shall be placed around the outside of the bottom flange extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around the frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame. D. Laying Brick Bricks shall be clean when laid. For best results, bricks should have a section rate, when laid, not in excess of 40 gpm, in accordance with the NBS test procedure. Except in cold weather, all brick shall be set as directed by the Engineer to approximate this condition. Each brick shall be laid in a full bed and joint of mortar without requiring subsequent grouting, slushing or filling and shall be thoroughly bonded as directed. Brick work shall be protected against weather and frost as approved or required by the Engineer. E. Plastering Outside faces of brick masonry shall be plastered with mortar 3/4 inch thick. The masonry shall be properly wetted as above specified before the plaster is applied. The plaster shall be carefully spread and troweled so that all cracks are thoroughly worked out. After hardening, the plaster shall be carefully checked, by being tapped, for bond and soundness. Waterproofing shall be added to the mortar for underground masonry in accordance with the waterproofing 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment, and approval shall be obtained from the Engineer before backfilling work commences. D. Procedure 1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked,permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer. 2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. 3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch,to obtain a substantially unyielding bed. 4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs Vie k of pipe before laying them. 5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles,blocking, or stones. 6. Where a concrete cradle is used, the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so constructed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed. 7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved. 8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. 9. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be sealed with precast concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed, entire contact surface between plug and pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driven home before mastic has set up. A. General All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location shall be in strict accordance with the 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 ,e! ""'`. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 02230 of these Specifications. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with all applicable Standards. Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B,Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual. B. Approvals No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the owner's representative. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. C. Controls The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batter boards, laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in 1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Contracting Officer rejects any brick, the same shall be immediately removed from the worksite and brick satisfactory to the Contracting Officer substituted. Brick shall be culled and completely piled as soon as delivered. 2.08 MORTAR FOR BRICKWORK The mortar shall be composed of Portland Cement, hydrated lime, and sand, in which the volume of sand shall not exceed three times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. The proportions of cement and lime shall be 1 1/4. Cement shall be Type II as previously specified. Lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes,Designation C 207. "Mortaseal" made by U.S. Gypsum or "4 Hydrate" made by the New England Lime Company shall normally meet this specification. The sand shall conform to the ASTM Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar, Designation C144. 2.09 CATCH BASIN HOODS Catch basin oil and grease trap hoods shall be Model L219-12, for 12" dia. pipe and L219-15 for 15" dia. pipe, by LeBaron Foundry, Inc., Brockton, MA or approved equal. PART 3.00-EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 OOW 2.04 PRECAST CATCH BASINS AND MANHOLES Precast catch basins and manholes shall conform to the requirements of the City of Northampton Department of Public Works and the project drawings. 2.04 AREA DRAINS Area drains shall be 10"heavy-duty pvc inline drains and 10"diameter ductile iron flat gratings, as manufactured by Nyoplast America, Buford, Georgia, or approved equal. 2.05 TERRACE DRAIN Terrace drains shall be 31100 series coated cast iron Leveleze floor drain with 9"round ductile iron grate, as manufactured by Josam Company, Michigan City, IN, or approved equal. 2.05 PORTLAND CEMENT Cement shall be single brand of approved American made Portland Cement conforming to current specifications of ASTM Standard Specification for Portland Cement, Designation C 150, Type II or, where required. Type III high early-strength cement. When used in the work, cement shall be free from lumps and partially or wholly set cement. 2.06 WATER Clean, fresh water shall be used for mixing mortar. 2.07 KIND OF BRICK The brick shall be good, sound, hard, and uniformly burned brick, regular and uniform in shape and size, of compact texture and satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Brick shall be Grade SA conforming to the ASTM Standard Specification for Sewer Brick(made from Clay or Shale),Designation C 32. In case the Rockridge—Northampton 02630—Storm Drainage Page EGA,P.C. EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 3 100W B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers,with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Engineer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Construct/install drainage structures in accordance with project drawings and the applicable referenced standards. 2.01 CASTINGS A. The catch basin frame and grate shall be Model LF244, 3-flange, as manufactured by the LeBaron Foundry, Inc., or approved equal. 2.02 CONCRETE PIPE A. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M5.02.2, Reinforced Concrete Pipe. B. Concrete pipe shall be joined by one of the following methods: 1. Rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C443; 2. Portland cement mortar; 3. Nonshrink grout; or 4. Asphalt mastic cement. 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE PVC pipe shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification. Fittings shall be of the same material as he pipe. Solvent-cemented joints shall be made in accordance with ASTD D 2855. 02630—Storm Drainage Rockridge—Northampton Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges National Clay Pipe Institute (NCPI): Clay Pipe Engineering Manual Applicable standards of the City of Northampton Dept. of Public Works C. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Federal and state environmental agency regulations and the Town of Northampton Conservation Commission's Order of Conditions pertaining to storm drainage systems where applicable. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Do not permit any storm drainage component to be brought onto the job until it has been approved by the Engineer. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Engineer. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. Rockridge—Northampton 02630—Storm Drainage Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 * 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Standards American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges American Concrete Institute (ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete - 318 American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615 Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C139 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C 140 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings C425 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,Using Rubber Gaskets C443 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated C700 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers C789 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-1b. (4.54 kg)Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm) Drop D1157 02630—Storm Drainage Rocla-idge—Northampton Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE PART1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes,but is not necessarily limited to: - storm drainage pipe - catch basins, manholes, storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines - building slab subdrainage and roof drain laterals - required fittings and bends - testing B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demolition and Clearing........................................Section 02230 Earthwork ....................................................................Section 02315 Bituminous Concrete Pavement....................................Section 02743 Reinforced Cement Concrete ........................................Section 02750 Rockridge—Northampton 02630—Storm Drainage Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 "^ 3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas,use NPS 4 (DN 100)PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm)above grade. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid-wall-piping storm drainage system. C. Where required,connect low elevations of foundation subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 02620 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 L. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course . Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 nun). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building. 3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches(915 mm),unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. 3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges,"Division II, Section 26.4.2.4,"Joint Properties." B. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division I1, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to ASTM D 2321. C. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. D. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729,with loose bell-and-spigot joints. E. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes. 3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage: 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 7 11/3!03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3.5 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated,but not less than 6 inches(150 mm)deep and 12 inches(300 mm) wide. B. Place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing and compact to dimensions indicated,but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide after concrete footing forms have been removed. C. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. D. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches(100 mm). E. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive or tape. F. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation"Article for foundation subdrainage. G. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. H. After satisfactory testing,cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches(150 rum)on side away from A"* footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches(300 mm)of finish grade. I. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. J. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches(100 mm). K. Install vertical drainage panels as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing. Install as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article. Do not install aggregate. 3. Separate 4 inches(100 mm)of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches(100 mm)of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 4. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 5. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of pipe. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm)below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Construction adhesives,metal stick pins, or double-sided tape may be used instead of nails. Do not penetrate waterproofing or dampproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing/dampproofing manufacturer. 6. If additional panels are required on same row, cut away 4 inches(100 mm)of installed panel core, install new panel against installed panel,and overlap new panel with installed panel fabric. 7. If additional rows of panels are required,overlap lower panel with 4 inches(100 mm)of fabric. 8. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches(300 mm)below finish grade. 9. For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 nun) for overlap. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 Page 5 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 A0W 2.8 SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 2.9 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq.ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min.per sq.m)when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or multifilament. 2. Style(s): Flat and sock. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating,trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings,couplings,and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose,bell-and-spigot joints. B. Header Piping: 1. PE drainage tubing and fittings,couplings,and coupled joints. 2. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings,and coupled joints. 3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 Page 4 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 2.6 CLEANOUTS A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: ASME Al 12.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing;and secured,scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug. B. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034,PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.7 DRAINAGE PANELS A. Net Fabric Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite with drainage core faced with geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. GSE Lining Technology,Inc. b. JDR Enterprises,Inc. C. Strata Systems,Inc. tom"^ 2. Drainage Core: 3-dimensional, PE nonwoven-strand geonet, approximately 0.25-inch- (6-mm-) thick. a. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm/ft. (30 L/min. per m) of unit width at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq.m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. B. Fabric-Covered Insulated Drainage Panels: Extruded PS board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap or tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels;faced with geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company(The). b. Owens Coming. C. T.Clear Corporation. 2. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 25-psig (172-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Minimum In-Plane Flow Rate: 9 gpm/ft. (112 L/min. per m) of unit width when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 4. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates ,. range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq.m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 1. NPS 6 (DN 150) and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 2. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard,band type. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729,bell-and-spigot ends,for loose joints. 2.4 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252,corrugated,band type,matching tubing and fittings. B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034,SDR 35,bell-and-spigot ends,for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477,elastomeric seal. 2.5 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion- resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Sleeve Materials: a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477,elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,PVC. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 Page 2 of 7 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 02620- SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1. Foundations at basement of congregate building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Subdrainage"for insulated drainage panels. 2. Division 7 Waterproofing Sections for insulated drainage panels. 3. Division 7 Section Building Insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. D. PP: Polypropylene plastic. E. PS: Polystyrene plastic. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Solid-wall pipe and fittings. 3. Drainage panels. 4. Geotextile filter fabrics. B. Approval of waterproofing manufacturer's service agent for use of drainage panels against and for waterproofing membrane protection. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Subdrainage-02620 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 7 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 F. Manhole Testing 1. Leakage testing of sewer manholes shall be included in the testing of the gravity sewer system. Leakage for each manhole shall not exceed 1 gal./vertical ft. of manhole per 24 hours. G. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit a written statement to the Engineer that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedures and listing test results shall be submitted to the Engineer and to governmental agencies that have jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractors' superintendent. I. Pipe deflection testing for PVC piping. 1. Six months following completion of the backfill over the PVC pipe installation, the pipeline shall be tested for deflection using a "go/no go" deflection mandrel. The "go/no-go" gage shall be passed through all sections of the pipeline. 2. Pipe deflections shall be measured and converted to percent deflection. Deflections shall be recorded, with a copy of results submitted to the Engineer. Test results shall be mailed or delivered to the Engineer not later than the day following the day on which test was made. 3. Sections of pipe with deflection greater than 7.5% shall be replaced. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 11 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 w_ d. Low-pressure air shall be introduced into the sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches a value 4 psig greater than the maximum pressure exerted by groundwater that may be above the invert of the pipe at the time of the test. However, the internal air pressure in the sealed line shall not be allowed to exceed 8 psig. When the maximum pressure exerted by the groundwater is greater than 4 psig, conduct infiltration test. e. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize in the section under test. After the stabilization period, the low-pressure air supply hose shall be quickly disconnected from the control panel. The time required in minutes for the pressure in the section under test to decrease from 3.5 to 2.5 psig (greater than the maximum pressure exerted by groundwater that may be above the invert of the pipe) shall not be less than shown in the following table: Pipe diameter in inches Minutes 8 4.0 10 5.0 12 5.5 *. f. Where the sewer section to be tested contains more than one size of pipe, the minimum allowable time shall be based on the largest diameter pipe in the section, and shall be the time shown on the table reduced by 0.5 minutes. 4. Rate of infiltration and exfiltration shall not exceed 20 gal./in. of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Each section of pipe tested shall meet the above criterion. E. Closed Circuit TV Testing 1. In addition to the leakage testing specified above, the entire sewer system piping shall be tested using closed circuit TV testing equipment. Testing shall be done by a specialty pipeline-testing agency experienced in closed circuit TV testing of utility pipelines and acceptable to the City of Northampton. Equipment used shall be specifically designed for inspection and testing of utility pipelines. 2. Testing shall include visual observation of interior of pipeline including all joints and connections. Pipeline shall be certified by testing agency to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents including requirements for slope,joining, and absence of debris and foreign matter. 3. Duplicate copies of test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 10 EGA M 10213 10/08/03 4. Manholes and piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible. 5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority of having jurisdiction. C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the City of Northampton plumbing inspector, and received by them not less than five days before the date of test. D. Gravity flow system test 1. When the groundwater is more than 1 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upper end of the section to be tested, an infiltration test shall be made. The upper end of the section to be tested shall be plugged on V-notch weir of appropriate size shall be fitted into the lower end. There shall be no leakage around the weir plate. Commercially manufactured weirs, made and calibrated for the purpose,may be employed. 2. When groundwater is less than 1 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upper end of the section to be tested, an exfiltration test shall be made. The sewer shall be plugged at the inlet pipes of both the upper and lower manholes. The line shall then be filled with water to a level 2 ft. above the crown of the pipe in the upper manhole. Before any measurements are made, a period of about 2 hours shall be permitted to allow for absorption and escape of trapped air. Following this, a test period of at least 4 hours shall begin. At the end of the test period, loss of water shall be measured and leakage computed therefrom. 3. Air testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedures described in ASTM C 828, except as otherwise noted. For low-pressure air tests use equipment specifically designed and manufactured to test sewer pipelines with low-pressure air. The equipment shall be provided with an air regulatory valve or air safety valve so set that the internal air pressure in the pipeline cannot exceed 8 psig. a. The leakage test using low-pressure air shall be made on each manhole-to-manhole of pipeline after placement of the backfill. b. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe to be tested. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures without requiring external bracing or blocking. C. All air used for testing shall pass through a single control panel. 02530—Sanitary Sewage Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 "Ook protect cement-based mixtures from too rapid drying and damage from cold weather and frost. 5. Where required, new piping shall be connected to existing manholes by mechanical smooth wall coring into existing structures. Drilling, jack hammering, breaking will not be allowed. Completed work shall be adequately patched and finished with non-shrinking grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6. Maximum misalignment of pipe into manholes shall be indicated on the Drawings. C. Connections to existing facilities 1. The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed sanitary sewer into existing sanitary sewer facilities, where and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering existing piping or structure. 3. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3.02 TESTING A. The entire sewer system, including piping and manholes shall be tested for leakage. System may be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be tested using closed circuit TV. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the City of Northampton Department of Public Works. B. General Test Requirements 1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure sewer line shall have thrust blocks installed (under another section of the specifications) and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to the line. 2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed before piping is tested. 3. Adequate provisions shall be made for carrying off flushing water without causing erosion or other damage. 02530—Sanitary Sewage Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 9. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each day's work. 10. Cleaning a. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. b. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. In large, accessible piping,use brushes and brooms for clearing. d. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops. e. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris. B. Manhole Installation 1. Manholes shall be set vertical on a base material as indicated on the Drawings,with each section in true alignment. 2. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be plugged thoroughly with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 3. Brick shall be employed to bring frame and cover to required elevation as indicated on the Drawings. Complete brick installation shall be coated with at least a 3/4 in. thickness of mortar on outside to provide a fully sealed and watertight collar between the top manhole section and the cover frame a. Before installation of castings, chipped and scraped areas shall be touched up with one coat of bituminous paint. b. Cast iron frame shall be set concentric with manhole opening in a full bed of mortar. A thick ring of mortar extending to the outer edge of brick or concrete shall be placed all around the bottom flange of the cast iron frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and sloped to shed waterway from the frame. 4. Portland cement-based mixtures used on this work shall receive a minimum of three days of moist curing, which shall start immediately after the material has been placed. Suitable means shall be employed to 02530—Sanitary Sewage Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 Grout shall be a nonshrink cement-based type, such as Master Builders Company "Embeco", or U.S. Grout Corporation "Five Star Grout". G. Castings 1. Manhole frames and covers shall be Model LK 110 as manufactured by LeBaron Foundry Company, Brockton, MA, or approved equal. Manhole covers shall have 3"-high letters cast into the cover to read"SEWER". H. Embedment Materials PVC pipe embedment materials shall conform to Class I or Class II embedment materials as defined in ASTM D 2321. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The Contractor shall install all sanitary sewer structures and pipe in the locations as shown on the Drawings and/or as approved by the Owner's Field Representative and in accordance with all applicable standards. A. Piping- PVC 1. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. 2. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site. 3. PVC pipe installation shall conform to ASTM D2321. 4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts of the required grade. 7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets. 8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently support on saddles, blocking or stones. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 6 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 ° e. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe, and shall be accurately set to conform to the required line and grade. 2. Pipe shall be joined to precast base using a seal similar to that indicated on the Drawings. 3. Manholes shall have shaped brick inverts. 4. Manhole steps shall be extruded aluminum, conforming to Fed. Spec. QQ-A-200/8, or polypropylene plastic reinforced with 3/8 in. diameter steel rod, as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc. Peachtree City, GA 30269, or approved equal. a. Steps shall be drop-front anti-skid design, 12 in wide. Projection of front edge of step shall be greater than or equal to 5 in. from manhole wall. b. Steps shall embedded 4 in. into manhole wall. Those portions of aluminum steps to be embedded in manhole wall shall receive a heavy coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Coating shall be thoroughly dry before steps are embedded in manhole. C. Steps in precast sections shall be embedded at time of casting. 5. Manholes shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO H-20 loading, as specified in the AASHTO Specifications. D. Brick 1. Brick for support of cast iron cover and frame shall be one of the following types: a. Clay brick meeting the physical requirements of MHD Specifications Section M4.05.2. 2. Brick for sewer manhole invert channel shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M4.05.2. E. Mortar Mortar shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M4.02.15. F. Grout Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 5 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 AOW 4. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 in. to 8 in. below finished grade. 5. Manufacturer: Allen Systems, Emed, Seton Name Place B. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pipe 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to ASTM D 3034, SDR35 minimum wall thickness. 2. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6". 3. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring, factory assembled. 4. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an "assemble stripe", to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes. 5. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212. 6. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper location in the coupling grooves. 7. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type, compatible with the pipe. C. Sanitary Manholes 1. Precast concrete manholes shall conform to all applicable standards and the project drawings and shall be similar to those manufactured by Hydro Conduit, Wauregan, CT, or approved equal. a. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints. b. Joints between sections shall be made with preformed rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C433. C. Each section shall have no more than two lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices. d. Precast base shall be manufactured with wall openings to receive the ends of pipes that are to be connected to structure. 02530—Sanitary Sewage Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 `00011 b. The abutting property owners shall be notified prior trenching in the public right of way for the purpose of making the connection to the municipal sewer. B. Permits The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. C. Inspection 1. All sanitary sewer System installation within the public right of way shall be inspected and approved by the City of Northampton DPW. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the City and paying all fees associated with the Sanitary Sewerage System installation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for sanitary sewage system materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for sanitary sewage systems, and maintenance data. C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings at Project Closeout. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. A. Identification 1. Provide underground-type plastic line markers, manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service. 2. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick 3. Provide green tape with black printing reading "CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW". Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 3 EGA M 10213 10/08/03 4. Connection of building sanitary sewer service lines to the site sanitary sewer system. 5. Installation of sanitary sewer facilities with the Public R.O.W. and/or easements, including connections to existing sanitary sewer facilities. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Earthwork Section 02315 ........................................................................... Reinforced Cement Concrete Section 02750 ............................................... 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Society for Testing and Materials: Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C433 Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipelines (4 to 12-in.) C828 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D3231 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034 Joints for Drain and Sewer and Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3212 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 4. City of Northampton Requirements a. The Contractor shall notify the City of Northampton DPW prior to any work within the public right of way. All work and materials shall be subject to the approval of the City DPW. 02530—Sanitary Sewage Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 k SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT lowk In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install exterior sanitary sewer system beginning at a point 10 feet outside of building foundation wall, in accordance with the Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Installation of sanitary sewers consisting of manholes, drop connections, pipe and all necessary and required accessory items and operations including connections to existing facilities. 2. Pay costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing services. File applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction. 3. Alteration, reconstruction and/or relocation of existing sanitary sewer facilities as required. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02530—Sanitary Sewage EGA,P.C. Page 1 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 F. During the disinfection period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in existing mains. G. The Contractor shall dispose of the water used in disinfecting and flushing in an acceptable manner. H. Any temporary connections required for disinfection shall be installed and subsequently properly abandoned at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02510 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 11 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 AV*- without extension of time for completion of work. Additional tests and repairs shall be made until the section passes the specified tests. 10. All joints within vaults shall have no visible leakage. Joints from which water continues to run or squirt in an active manner will not be accepted. 11. Upon successful completion of the tests, plugs or caps installed for the testing shall be removed. 12. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, it is impractical to follow the foregoing procedure exactly for any reasons, modifications in the procedure shall be submitted for approval and be made as approved and accepted,but in any event the Contractor shall be responsible for tightness of the line within the above leakage and pressure requirements. E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit to the Engineer a written statement that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and signed by the Contractor's Superintendent. F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test procedure and listing test results shall be submitted to the Engineer and to governmental agencies having jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractor's superintendent. 3.05 DISINFECTION A. The Contractor shall disinfect the lines carrying potable water. The work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the City of Northampton DPW Standards. Test results shall be sent to the Engineer and the aforementioned DPW. B. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfection, and shall perform the work in accordance with procedure outlined in the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C651 except as otherwise specified herein. C. The dosage shall be such so as to produce a chlorine concentration of no less than 25 (mg/1)ppm after a contact period of not less than 24 hours. D. After treatment, the pipeline shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content does not exceed 1.0 (mg/1) ppm. E. After flushing samples shall be collected as per City of Northampton DPW standards. 02510—water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 10 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the City of Northampton DPW Water Division, and received by them at least five days before the date of test. D. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests 1. Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C600, Section 4, and at test pressure indicated in the City of Northampton DPW Standards. 2. Pressure pipe shall be given combined hydrostatic and leakage tests in sections of acceptable length as the Engineer shall direct. 3. Furnish and install suitable temporary testing plugs or caps; all necessary pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gages, and other necessary equipment; and all labor required. 4. Unless it has already been done, the section of pipe to be tested shall be filled with water of approved quality, and all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants or blowoffs are not available at high points for releasing air, make necessary excavations, do backfilling and make taps at such points. Plug holes after completion of the test. 5. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24 hours prior to the combined pressure and leakage test being applied. 6. The meter and gage shall be installed and shall be kept in use during the test so that water entering water main under test will be measured and the pressure in the water main indicated. 7. The pressure test shall be made at 1.5 times the normal working water pressure (based on the elevation of the lowest point of the section under test), but not less than 150 PSI. If the Contractor cannot achieve the specified pressure and maintain it for the specified time, with no additional pumping, the section shall be considered as having failed to pass the test. 8. Following a successful pressure test, or concurrently with test, make a leakage test by metering the flow of water into the pipe while maintaining in the water main and pressure equal to the specified test pressure. If the average leakage during the period exceeds specified the rate of gallons per hour, the section shall be considered as having failed the leakage test. 9. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure test, the leakage test, or both, locate, uncover, and repair or replace defective pipes, fittings, or joints, 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 3.03 ASSEMBLING SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS A. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 in. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 in. from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe and until it is properly centered over the joint. The other pipe end shall be inserted into the middle ring and brought to proper position in relation to the pipe already laid. The gaskets and followers shall then be pressed evenly and firmly into the middle ring flares. B. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up fingertight, diametrically opposite nuts shall be progressively and uniformly tightened all around the joint, preferable by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate size and torque for the bolts. C. The correct torque as indicated by a torque wrench shall not exceed the sleeve manufacturers recommendations. D. An approved tar coating shall be applied on the entire outer surface of such couplings, including bolts, following installation. 3.04 TESTING A. All portions of the water distribution system installed shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage. B. General Test Requirements 1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure line shall have thrust blocks installed and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to the line. 2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed before piping is tested. 3. Adequate provision shall be made for carrying off flushing without causing erosion or other damage. 4. Piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible. 5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority having A00W jurisdiction and in accordance with the City of Northampton DPW Standards. 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 4. Where indicated, new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water Distribution System in accordance with the City of Northampton Requirements. C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 1. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each days work. 2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions, if so approved, may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at lest 12 in. from the visible limits of the crack. 1. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine suitable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not A"* acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and guillotine or rotary type abrasive saws may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by cutting. 2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipe or fittings will render them unfit for use; he shall use the utmost care in handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed. E. Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Where pipe is being capped for future connection, cap shall be braced with concrete thrust block. 3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with City of Northampton DPW Standards. Rockridge-Northampton,MA 02510—Water Distribution EGA,P.C. Page 7 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 OOW PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the referenced City of Northampton DPW Standards. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not indicated on the Drawings, the Engineer's approval shall be obtained for proposed locations before installation. B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the City of Northampton DPW Standards. 1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures including dewatering as required shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. 3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA EGA,P.C. Page EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 3 (clockwise). Gate valve shall be designed to be bottle-tight for a minimum working pressure of 200 lb. per sq. in. B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip-style cast iron and shall be an adjustable telescoping, heavy pattern type. 1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the piping or valve. 2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent undue settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve-operating nut and stuffing box, and rest on the backfill. 3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in. vertically without reduction of the lap between sections to less than 4 in. 4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 1/4 inch and length of box shall be as required to suit finish ground elevation. 5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover shall be flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have a word "WATER" cast into top. 6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation. C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified, extensions, including centering spacers, shall be added to the operation nut assembly to raise the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to that with the normal required depth of cover. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Hydrant shall conform to AWWA C502 and local governmental authorities having jurisdiction. Hydrant shall be positive automatic drain type to prevent freezing, and shall have one 4 1/2 inch pumper and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections, National Standard Threads. Main valve opening shall be 5 1/4 in. and valve shall open to left (counter-clockwise). Inlet connection shall be 6 in., mechanical joint. Operating nut shall be pentagonal, 1 5/8 inches point to flat and open left(counter-clockwise). B. Hydrant shall be City of Northampton Standard Model K81A Guardian manufactured by Kennedy Valve Co., and shall be approved by the City of Northampton DPW. 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2.01 PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed in sizes as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the latest ANSI Standards' Designations A251.51 (AWWA 6151) for "Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds of Sand-Lines Molds for Water or Other Liquids" and A21.50 for "Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ductile iron pipe shall be at least thickness Class 52. 1. DI pipe shall be push-on joint type except as otherwise indicated or specified. 2. CI or DI fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 respectfully, and shall be of a pressure classification at least equal to that of the pipe with which they are used. 3. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA CI I I/A21.11. 4. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining 1/8-inch minimum thickness on pipe 12 inches and smaller and bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI04/A21.4. The outside of the pipe and fittings shall be coated with a standard bituminous coating conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and C110, respectively. 5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except that the ends shall be plain (without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or machined at right angles to the axis. B. Sleeve-type couplings shall be cast iron and shall be Dresser style. 1. To ensure correct fitting of pipe and couplings, sleeve-type couplings and accessories shall be furnished by the supplier of the pipe and shall be of a pressure rating at least equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be installed. 2. Couplings shall be provided with epoxy coated steel bolts. 3. Outer surfaces of couplings including bolts and nuts shall be coated with an approved tar coating upon installation. 2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Gate valve shall be iron body, New York Style (Metropolitan Pattern) conforming to ANSI/AWWA C500. Gate Valve shall have mechanical joint ends, interior epoxy coated, 2 in. square operating nut. Valve shall open to right 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. Inspection and Testing 1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in duplicate sworn certificates of such tests. 2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings and special castings inspected and/or tested by an independent testing agency at either the manufacturer's plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and tests shall be at the Owner's expense. 3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a hammer test just before being installed. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Engineer, a complete list of materials proposed to be furnished and installed. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturers' recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Upon approval of the Engineer, the manufacturers'recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work. 3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until the Engineer has approved it. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully shown in red line on a print of the utility plan all changes made to the water system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the water system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Engineer. A00b- PART2 -PRODUCTS Rocla�idge-Northampton,MA 02510—Water Distribution Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 4. Installation of water lines within the Public R.O.W. and/or Easements, including connections to existing water supply facilities. 5. Work performed under the Water Distribution System Scope of Services shall be limited to work outside of, and up to a point of ten (10) feet outside of the building(s) foundation wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building(s) foundation wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building and connection to new water service piping installed under this section shall be included under the scope of services described in the various sections of Division 15 of these Specifications. 6. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings, required by the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demolition and Clearing Section 02230 Earthwork .............................................................................Section 02315 Bituminous Concrete Pavement Section 02743 Reinforced Cement Concrete Section 02750 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. City of Northampton Requirements: The Contractor shall notify the City of Northampton Water Department sufficiently in advance of connecting new or relocated water services to existing water main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval of the City. Any questions regarding these matters should be made directly to the Water Division,Northampton Public Works Department, 413-587-1097, ext. 301. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the City and paying all fees associated with the water system installation and testing. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the referenced City of Northampton DPW Standards. Should discrepancies exist between the City of Northampton Standards and this Specification, the City of Northampton Standards shall prevail. For materials or methods of installation not included in the City of Northamptom Standards,but specified herein, the Contractor shall submit this material or methodology to the City of Northampton DPW for approval prior to purchase and/or execution. 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 00%, SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation, piping, valves and boxes, hydrants, pipe fittings, thrust blocks, manhole, vaults and all necessary and required accessory items and operations including sheeting, bracing, pumping and coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors. 2. Connection of building water service lines to the water distribution system. 3. Testing and disinfection. 02510—Water Distribution Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 ROW G. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit,pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 4- inch thick layers,to the specified compaction,using mechanical tampers. H. For work within City of Northampton streets and walkways, compaction shall be as required by the Northampton Department of Public Works. 3.06 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture(-1%to+3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Engineer. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above,but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmovmg and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which,in the opinion of the Engineer become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. 3.07 CLEANING UP Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork EGA,P.C. Page 15 1 0/08/03 EGA#: 10213 C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas for site improvement or structures including but not limited to walkways, retaining walls, curbing,patching and pavement subgrade shall be compacted as specified in the following table: Subgrade Max. Compacted Compaction Area or Compaction Thickness Per of Each Lift Structure Minimum % Lift -Inch Minimum% Above pipe cover to 90 subgrade 85 12 Area or Structure not otherwise noted 85 12 90 Manhole or similar structure, and within 2 feet 8 95 horizontally 90 Roadway pavement, including 1 foot 8 95 beyond edge 90 Pipe Cover -- 6 95 Structural Fill under Foundations and Slabs 90 8 95 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item (base course, footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: 1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap,that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer or Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 14 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 D. Except as otherwise noted,tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be+ 2 inches from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 2 inches. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 1 inch. E. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over- excavation), shall be filled to those levels at no additional cost to the Owner. Over-excavation in rock shall be filled with either gravel bedding as defined in paragraph 2.02B of this section or concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi. with compacted granular fill, if in earth. 3.05 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 13 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be+2 inches from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 3.03 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, concrete or"Granite Fill" shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. 1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material for water, sewer and drainage pipe shall be"Gravel Bedding". Bedding material for conduit shall be concrete or"Fine Granular Fill" as shown on the plans or as required by and pro acted undeo hers. Material for utilities will be furnished,p p appropriate utility specification section. 3.04 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Engineer have inspected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility line and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling,the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 12 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 I. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over- excavation), shall be filled to those levels with concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi if in rock, or with compacted granular fill, if in earth. See Section 01250 regarding compensation for overexcavation. J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, race, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench above this level shall be sloping, at an angle 45 degrees from vertical, from this level to grade. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be sheeted. 1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct. Compensation shall be as specified in Section 01250. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with unauthorized excavation. M. Below-ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Engineer. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at both ends. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. For pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter, both inner and outer faces of plug shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. 3.02 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done in any area only after the Engineer has reviewed subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the formation of slippage planes. r00* 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 11 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work" and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. Surplus topsoil shall be retained by the Owner. 3.02 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the required tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavate site as shown on the drawings and cross-sections. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from,the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Engineer. C. Sheeting, shoring,bracing,pumping,bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete,utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. D. Sheeting shall be installed, where required, to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging of the tree. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected an d required by safety Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed m q conformance to law. E. All structures, including but not limiited to foundations, footings,pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced,underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. G. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 10 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 No. 50 90 No. 200 65 F. Fine granular fill shall be clean, well graded sand with the following limits: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 3/4 inch 100 1/2 inch 90 - 100 No. 4 60 - 100 No. 30 20 - 90 No. 50 10 - 70 No. 100 0 - 20 90 - 200 0 - 10 G. Crushed stone shall satisfy the following limits: Sieve Size %Passing by Weight 13/4 inch 100 1 1/2 inch 90 - 100 1 inch 20 - 55 3/4 inch 0 - 15 3/8 inch 0 - 5 5 PART 3.00 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section,become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved,uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and approved,make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 9 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 depth layers exposed to the sun and thoroughly dried by the sun prior to use as a fill material anywhere on site. 2.02 FILL MATERIAL Fill materials specified here are for site improvements , including but not limited to walkways, curbing,patching, retaining walls and light pole bases. All fill for City of Northampton public streets and walkways shall be in accordance with all requirements of the Northampton Depatrment of Public Works. All trench backfill within City of Northampton rights of way shall conform to Massachusetts Highway Department standard specification for controlled density fill, Type 2E. Backfill material shall be well-graded within the specified limits. Gradation of materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136. A. Granular fill shall be sand graded with the following limits Sieve Size % Passim by Weight 1 inch 20 - 60 No. 4 No. 40 10 - 35 No. 200 0 - 8 B. Gravel bedding shall be gravel, crushed quarry rock or crushed gravel from off-site sources graded within the following limits: Sieve Size %Passing y Weight 1 inch 3/4 inch 20- 500 3/8 inch 0 - 10 No. 4 No. 8 0 - 5 C. Trench and structural fill shall be a gravelly sand or sand gravel graded with the following limits Sieve Size %Passing by Weight 6 inches 100 No. 4 30 - 80 No. 40 5 - 30 No. 200 0 - 8 D. Common fill shall be bankrun sand, gravel, or mixture thereof, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 6 inches 100 No. 4 30 - 95 No. 200 0 - 15 E. Stone dust shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight No. 4 100 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 8 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Engineer prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk. 1.16 ROCK AND BOULDER EXCAVATION A. The contrator shall be responsible for all rock and boulder removal as required to complete the construction as shown on the plan The cost for authorized removal of rock and boulders shall be as specified in Section 01250. The cost of unauthorized rock removal shal be the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. Notification For approval of imported fill material, notify the Engineer at least four working days in advance of intention to import material; designate the proposed borrow area, and provide samples, as necessary, from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. C. Fill material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, approved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements: 1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities in a reasonable length of time. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. 5. If any fill material is obtained from the excavation of the existing septic system, the material shall be excavated and laid in 4 inch maximum 02315-Earthwork Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 7 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant. E. Topsoil - The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. Refer to Section 02800-Planting, for a full definition of topsoil as required for this project. F. Rock and Boulder Excavation- shall be defined as removal of sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge of mineral matter as follows: Rock excavation for trenches and pits includes removal and disposal of materials and obstructions encountered that cannot be excavated with a track-mounted power excavator, equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215C LC, and rated at not less than 115 HP flywheel power and 32,000-pound drawbar pull and equipped with a short stick and a 42-inch wide, short tip radius rock bucket rated at 0.81 cubic yard(heaped) capacity. Trenches in excess of 10 feet in width and pits in excess of 30 feet in either length or width are classified as open excavation. 3. Rock excavation in open excavations includes removal and disposal of materials and obstructions encountered that cannot be dislodged and excavated with modern, track-mounted, heavy- duty excavating equipment without drilling, blasting, or ripping. Rock excavation equipment is defined as Caterpillar Model No. 973 or equivalent track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 HP flywheel power and developing minimum of 45,000-pound breakout force(measured in accordance with SAE J732). a. Typical of materials classified as rock are boulders 1 cu. yd. or more in volume, solid rock, rock in ledges, and rock- hard cementitious aggregate deposits. b. Intermittent drilling,blasting, or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified as earth excavation. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Engineer and Engineer for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements. hook- Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 C. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the geotechnical testing laboratory must demonstrate to Engineer's satisfaction,based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct required field and laboratory geo-technical testing without delaying the progress of the Work. 1.12 FROST PROTECTION Frozen or muddy material shall not be placed as fill or backfill. 1.13 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations. C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. D. The cost for any authorized sheeting shall be as specifies in Section 02295. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of unauthorized sheeting and shoring. OW 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade- shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation, and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. B. Embankment- shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross-section. C. Utility Trench Backfill - is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed. D. Unsuitable Material - material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least one of the following properties: 1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 100 lb. as determined by ASTM D 1557. 2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction debris, roots and stumps. 3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 55. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 OW marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. 3. Buried structures,utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade, which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas,by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. 1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0%slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through temporary sediment basins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, not to the surface of roads,walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation, and shall conform to requirements of Section 02150, EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills,pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment,in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry, firm subgrade, other methods acceptable to the Engineer shall be employed. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Comply with Massachusetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988, and with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork Page 4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 sue' 1.08 SUBMITTALS Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Engineer from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: 1. Test reports on borrow material. 2. Verification of suitability of each borrow material, in accordance with specified requirements. 3. Field reports; in-place soil density tests. 4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. 5. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site. See Section 01500. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site. B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities 1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to : streets, curbs, paving, trees,utility lines and structures, monuments,bench marks and other public and private property, and to protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement,lateral earth-movement,undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his cost, existing bench Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork Page 3 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 them for himself during the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein. 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating, filling and grading required for this work includes,but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Clearing and preparation of site. 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil 3. Protection of existing trees and vegetation 4. Excavation: a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated for installation of site work improvements, including but not limited to walkways, curbing, patching,retaining walls, light pole bases and planting. b. Excavation and backfill of utilities. c. Excavation and backfill of miscellaneous rock,boulders and debris in areas of construction. d. Excavating and backfill for structures 5. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 6. Filling and backfilling as required for pavement and patching including furnishing of any extra material required. 7. Compacted gravel for pavement areas. 8. Disposal of excess material. 9. Dewatering of excavation as may be required. 1.07 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Site Demolition and Clearing................................................... Section 02230 A. Erosion and Sediment Control.................................................. Section 02150 B. Bituminous Concrete Pavement............................................... Section 02743 C. Seeding ............................................................................... Section 02850 D. Cast-in-place Concrete Section 02750 ............................................................. E. Unit Masonry........................................................................... Section 02650 F. Planting Section 02800 ............................................................................... G. Temporary Facilities ................................................................ Section 01500 Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02315-Earthwork Page 2 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 SECTION 02315 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, In accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information. 1.05 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed. B. Plans, surveys,measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are believed to be correct,but the Contractor shall have examined 02315-Earthwork Rodlaidge—Northampton,MA Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2. Do not permit stockpiling of materials or debris within the barricaded area nor permit the earth surface to be changed in any way except as specifically approved by the Engineer. 3.06 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS Contractor shall remove and store as directed all items which may be re-used. Items not to be re-used shall be stored and/or disposed of as directed by the Director. Items falling under this classification, but not considered as a full listing include drainage structure, frames, covers and grates, granite curbing, site lighting, lightpole bases,parking meters, flagpole, lighting control enclosures and other pertinent physical items. Items which are considered as suitable for re-use shall be cleaned and satisfactorily moved to designated storage locations. All items to be discarded shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. 3.05 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS A. Remove and legally dispose of all debris from the site. Leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Engineer. Debris shall include of stumps, roots and rocks not in compliance with the criteria for fill (Ref. Section 02315). B. See Sectio 02200 for removal and disposal of bituminous and cement concrete. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing EGA,P.C. Page 7 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 cutting machine comprised of a suitable motor, driving a circular cutter, with control devices, and mounted on a sturdy frame, supported by rubber tire wheels. D. Demolition shall be done as efficiently and rapidly as possible, with no undue accumulations of rubbish or debris. Refuse shall be hauled away by the Contractor, with route of travel to and from point of dumping kept clear and free during periods of use. E. Take precautions to guard against movement, settlement or collapse of any surrounding construction designated to remain and be liable for any such movement, settlement or collapse. 3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING- GENERAL A. Cut down all trees and brush, as designated on the plans. Remove all stumps and debris, and remove from the property. No burning of materials will be permitted on the site. B. Remove from the site all brush, rubbish, pavement, concrete or masonry foundations designated to be removed. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF BARRICADES A. Layout 1. At all trees designated to be protected on the plan, construct a temporary barricade around the tree a minimum of six (6) feet from the trunk. 2. Make barricades at least three (3) feet high, consisting of snow fencing, in a square configuration with 2" x 4" wood corner posts set at least 36 inches into the ground. 3. At all sidewalks to be removed and replaced, construct barricades and/or bridges as necessary to allow safe passage of pedestrians in conformance with City of Northampton Specifications. B. Protection 1. Take special care in setting posts not to damage tree roots. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing Page 6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 review a schedule showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with, use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 3. Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of other trades. E. Disconnection of Utilities: Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities: Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected. G. Provide adequate fire protection in accordance with local Fire Department requirements. H. Do not close or obstruct street or sidewalks without the proper permit. Conduct operations with minimum traffic interference. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Removed and salvaged items shall be delivered to the Owner at a location designated by the Owner's Representative. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner. The Contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. B. Items to be reset on the site may be stacked on the site until reuse. Care and protection of the stacked items until reuse shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any damaged items shall be replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner. C. Saw cutting shall be conducted in locations which are designated on the plans so that pavement to remain shall have a finished edge. Cutting shall be done in a neat, straight line. The equipment for cutting pavement shall consist of a Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing Page 5 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PRUNING PAINT -Not applicable. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS All other materials, not specifically described,but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Engineer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Engineer at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. 2. Locate all existing trees to remain and mark with survey tape. 3. Locate all existing items to remain, to be salvaged nad stored, or to be salvaged and relocated on site and mark with survey tape. Review protection, transportation and storage of these items with the Owner and Engineer prior to commencing any salvage operations. C. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Engineer all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for neighbors and the public. Before commencing any work, submit for Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing EGA,P.C. Page 4 EGA#: 10213 10/08/03 Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust and Mud Control: Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the work of the Section; thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the site. See Section 01500-Temporary Facilities. B. Burning: On-site burning will not be permitted. C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect existing objects and utilities designated to remain included but not limited to parking meters, fencing, retaining walls,utility structures and lines both underground and abovebround. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. When work occurs within the root structure of an existing tree designated to remain, such work shall be carried out by hand with no machinery allowed that may damage the root structure of the tree. D. Provide, erect and maintain all catch platforms, lights,barriers, weather protection, warning signs, and all other items as required for the proper protection of the workmen engaged in demolition operations, public and adjacent construction. E. Provide adequate fire protection in accordance with local Fire Department requirements. F. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct street or sidewalks without the proper permit. Conduct operations with minimum traffic interference. See Section 01010- Summary of Work. G. Protect all public and private property adjacent to and on the job site including platforms, vents,utility lines, streets, sidewalks, light standards, hydrants, street signs,mail boxes and fire alarm boxes. Make all repairs necessitated by reason of, or in the course of, operations under this Contract to the complete satisfaction of the Owner of the damaged property. Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing EGA,P.C. Page 3 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. Removal and salvage of existing site items includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Drainage structure frames and grates/covers 2. Signage 3. Fencing 4. Street light posts and foundations 5. Curbing C. Definitions The term"site demolition and clearing", as used herein, includes the removal and disposal of all existing objects (except for those objects designated to remain)within the project area, plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications. 1.05 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE Earthwork ................................................................................. Section 02315 Temporary Facilities Section 01500 ................................................................... 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during tree clearing and grubbing operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the types of trees involved and who shall direct the trimming of roots and limbs where required. 2. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the applicable utility agencies. B. Codes and Standards Perform demolition clearing work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of Local (City of Northampton Department of Public Works), State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Rockridge-Northampton,MA 02230-Site Demolition and Clearing EGA,P.C. Page 2 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 OV SECTION 02230 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. ROW 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to removal and off-site disposal of the following: 1. Bituminous concrete pavement 2. Concrete pavement(sidewalks and slab pavement) 3. Vegetation(trees, stumps, shrubs and vines) 4. Debris and rubble within project area ,Apw Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02230—Site Demolition and Clearing Page 1 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 and order the Contractor to make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all components of the drainage system and sweep off roadways as approved by the Engineer before Contract closeout. 8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked weekly or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition. 9. Silt fences shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as required to maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original condition. Lower edge of fence shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times, as required to prevent water from washing beneath. 10. Collected sediment deposits shall be disposed of by light top-dressing on undisturbed, vegetated areas of the site outside of wetland jurisdictional areas. D. Removal of Erosion Control Devices 1. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been restabilized, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded. 2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of completed slope or entire Project, whichever is later. D. On-going maintenance Permanent, on-going site maintenance for the prevention of erosion and sedimentation shall be carried out in accordance with the Stormwater Operation and Maintenance Plan referenced above. END OF SECTION Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02150—Erosion Control Pagel EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 1. The catch basin grate shall be removed from the frame, wrapped in a layer of filter fabric, and replaced. 2. A hay-bale barrier shall be constructed at each structure to enclose the inlet on all sides. 3.04 TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASIN Not Applicable 3.05 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices during storm events, after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to weekends, and prior to any forecasted storm events. B. Wetland areas, water courses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall be monitored weekly for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery. C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during construction period. 1. Cleaning: Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. 2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices immediately, and, in no case,more than four hours after observing such deficiencies, and as directed by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion control measures as may be necessary during the course of construction, and as directed by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within four hours of any impending emergency situation. 5. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Engineer to make repairs or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of construction. 6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion control devices, and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory, the Engineer will direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work 02150—Erosion Control Roclo idge—Northampton,MA Page6 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 B. Following seeding, area shall be tightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 to 1/4 inch of soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. C. Following rolling, entire shall be watered until equivalent of a 2-inch depth of water shall have been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate that will not dislodge seed. Water shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent drying of surface, until grass attains an average height of 1 1/2 inches. D. At the Contractor's option, seed may be spread by the hydroseeding methods, utilizing power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding method, with mulch applied at the rate of 2700 lb. dry weight of mulch per acre. A mulching machine, acceptable to the Engineer, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other provisions specified above for conventional seeding shall apply to hydro seeding. 1. If the results of hydroseeding application are unsatisfactory, the mixture and/or application rate and methods shall be modified to achieve the required results. 2. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass, for any reason whatsoever, shall be reseeded and such areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. 3.02 SILT FENCE A. Silt fencing shall be placed at the downslope edge of the limit of grading before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be installed prior to all upgradient earthwork. B. Silt fence shall be installed around stockpiled topsoil and other aggregate material. 3.03 CATCH BASIN FILTER DAM Upon completion of catch basin structures, each structure shall receive anti-siltation protection as follows: OOW Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02150—Erosion Control Pages EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall be "Silt Fence" preassembled silt fence structure,manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte,NC, or approved equal. 1. Each package shall include oak post, industrial polypropylene netting, Mirafi 100 sediment control fabric, metal coupler and instructions. 2. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.; fabric width minimum of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft., and post spacing maximum of 10'. 3. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation, and beveled at top to resist splitting. 2.02 CRUSHED STONE Not applicable. 2.03 FILTER FABRIC Filter fabric for catch basin filter dam shall be Mirafi 140N drainage fabric, manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte,NC, or approved equal. 2.04 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Seed mixture for temporary cover shall conform to the following: Quantity per 1000 sq. ft coverage Material 4 lb. Poa annua (annual ryegrass) Seed shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section 6.03.01, "Erosion Seed". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY SEED COVER *- A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 4.0 lb./1000 sq. ft. 02150—Erosion Control Roc]Qidge—Northampton,MA Page4 EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA M 10213 4. Temporary seeding, mulching, or other suitable stabilization measures shall be used to protect exposed critical areas during prolonged construction or other land disturbances. 5. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 6. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work. B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. 1. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 3:1 (horizontal: vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1. 1.08 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who, when authorized, will mobilize the necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, and otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impending emergency situation. B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Contractor may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24-hour "duty roster" for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Engineer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Rockridge—Northampton,MA 02150—Erosion Control EGA,P.C. Page3 EGA M 10213 10/08/03 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Policy on the Geometric Design of Highways and Streets B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges C. Stormwater Operation and Maintenance Plan, Storm Drainage Analysis and Design for the Proposed Improvements to Rockridge at Laurel Park,prepared for New England Deaconess Association by Coler& Colantonio, Inc., March 5, 2003. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall include: 1. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. 2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing programs in each major area of work. B. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. 1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases: 1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible,natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Extent of area that is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure shall be kept within practical limits. 02150—Erosion Control RoclQidge—Northampton,MA Paget EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 AA SECTION 02150 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to minimize erosion and sedimentation on the project site. B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include,but not be limited to, installation and maintenance of silt fence erosion control barriers and installation schedules of erosion control structures. C. Related work specified elsewhere Site Demolition and Clearing................................................... Section 02230 Earthwork ............................................................................... Section 02315 02150--Erosion Control Rockridge—Northampton,MA Pagel EGA,P.C. 10/08/03 EGA#: 10213 g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. C. Disassembly;component removal,repair,and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times,and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria,and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. D. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations,board diagrams,and other visual aids,but not student practice. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Photographic Documentation." 2. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and discard. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 01820 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Demonstration and Training-01820 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following,as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications,and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following,as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system,subsystem,or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning AW"` e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Demonstration and Training-01820 Page 3 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Motorized doors, including automatic entrance doors. 2. Equipment, including waste compactors, food service equipment, residential appliances, and pool equipment. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Low voltage systems. 5. Conveying systems. 6. HVAC systems. 7. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 8. Electrical service and distribution. 9. Packaged engine generators,including transfer switches. 10. Lighting equipment and controls. 11. Communication systems. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design,Operational Requirements,and Criteria: Include the following: a. System,subsystem,and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Demonstration and Training-01820 Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 OW SECTION 01820-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems,subsystems,and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems,subsystems,and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. mentation" for preparing and submitting demonstration 2. Division 1 Section "Photographic Docu and training videotapes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times,length of instruction time, and instructors'names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training,submit one complete training manual for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. C. Attendance Record: For each training module,submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Submit one copy at end of each training module. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Demonstration and Training-01820 Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers'standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 Page 7 of 7 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly;component removal,repair,and replacement;and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning,adjusting,and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape,if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual,and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers'forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency,operation,and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product,material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system,subsystem,and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 Page 6 of 7 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds,as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,list name,address,and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following,as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color,pattern,and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information,as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal,replacement,and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 7 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings,trouble indications, error messages,and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier,and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 2. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 3. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 4. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System,subsystem,and equipment descriptions. 2. Operating standards. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Control diagrams. 6. Piped system diagrams. 7. Precautions against improper use. 8. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following,as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation,and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed,and identify color-coding where required for identification. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 7 EGA Project No.: 10213 1018/03 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (115-by-280-mm)paper;with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-I 1-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,descriptions of contents,and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system,subsystem,piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Gas leak. 3. Water leak. 4. Power failure. 5. Water outage. 6. System,subsystem, or equipment failure. 7. Chemical release or spill. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 7 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system,list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency,operation,and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS,GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials,in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name,address,and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume,and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 Page 2 of 7 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01782-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals,including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems,subsystems,and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: #40*1 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division I Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts,equipment,or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Operation and Maintenance Data-01782 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 7 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 40p,,, 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished,including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders,Record Drawings,and Product Data where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in in written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders,Record Drawings,and Product Data where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Project Record Documents-01781 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 mow, 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer,subcontractor,or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Locations and depths of underground utilities. d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. e. Revisions to electrical circuitry. f. Actual equipment locations. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 1. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross- reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw,and add details and notations where applicable. 2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. 4. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications,addenda,and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Project Record Documents-01781 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 3 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01781 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Submit one set of record transparencies. B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS AM A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Project Record Documents-01781 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers, and grills. P. Clean ducts,blowers,and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace bumed-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Closeout Procedures-01770 Page 5 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 OOW B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module,develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, OWN including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,even-textured surface. d. Remove tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults,manholes,attics,and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar "^ equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Closeout Procedures-01770 Page 4 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name,address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner's personnel with at least seven days advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Closeout Procedures-01770 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy,use,operation,and maintenance. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected(punch list),endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final,continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation,adjustment,and maintenance of products,equipment,and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors,equipment,and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: * a. Project name. b. Date. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Closeout Procedures-01770 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.:10213 SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications,and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. " 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Closeout Procedures-01770 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 7. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. C. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished,cut reinforcement,and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. D. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals,using power-driven saw,then remove concrete between saw cuts. E. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts. F. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished,then break up and remove. G. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. H. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Items to be Removed and Salvaged and Retained for Owner Use: 1. Gazebo structure. END OF SECTION 01732 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. E. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. F. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring,bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement,settlement,or collapse of construction to remain,and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions,such as ice,flooding,and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 4. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and """ salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours'notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify,disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks,walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls,ceilings, floors,and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours'notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways,corridors,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 2. Before selective demolition,Owner will remove the following items: D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. l Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff,capping,and continuation of utility services. 4. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. B. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. AOW Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 1018/03 SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Summary"for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. Division I Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before e0►, selective demolition. 4. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 5. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 6. Division 2 Section 'Building Demolition" for demolition of entire buildings, structures, and site improvements. 7. Division 15 Sections for demolishing,cutting,patching,or relocating mechanical items. 8. Division 16 Sections for demolishing,cutting,patching,or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed,removed and salvaged,or removed and reinstalled. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Selective Demolition-01732 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION 01731 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Cutting and Patching-01731 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. AOMK 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction,and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Cutting and Patching-01731 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and '^ patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended,or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water,moisture,or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping,ductwork,vessels,and equipment. 5. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would,in Architect's opinion,reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces,use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Cutting and Patching-01731 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Designibuild contractors are responsible for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Cutting and Patching-01731 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped,scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,mortar,oils,putty,and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 'Aw K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation,as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas,unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg Q. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area,as appropriate. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements,including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement,utility slopes,and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks,control points,and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations,with horizontal and vertical data,on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls,major site improvements,and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas,and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections,include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions,including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utilities and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents,submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify Architect promptly. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 6 10/S/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer or land surveyor to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer or land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by professional engineer or land surveyor. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) Rockridge—Northampton,MA Execution Requirements-01700 Page 1 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 4. Proposed change in Contract Sum !wwk Credit to Owner$ Additional cost to Owner$ 5. Proposed change in Contract Time Reduce/Increase Contract Time by_days. 6. Effect of the proposed substitution on other parts of the work,or on other contracts. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION () Provide more information in the following categories;and Resubmit. () The proposed substitution is approved,with the following conditions: The following changes will be made by Change Order: Addition to/deduction from the Contract Sum $ Addition to/deduction from the Contract Time days Date EGA,P.C. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Product Substitution Form-01631 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 SECTION 01631—SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: Rockridge OWNER: New England Deaconess Association TO ARCHITECT: EGA,P.C. 12 Auburn Street Newburyport,MA 01950 FROM CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST,WITH SUPPORTING DATA 1. Section of the Specifications to which this request applies: Product data for proposed substitution is attached: Description of product,reference standards,performance and test data. Sample is attached_ Sample will be sent if requested by Architect AO'* 2. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified is attached. ORIGINAL PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION Name,brand Catalog No. Manufacturer Significant variations of proposed substitutions from original product: 3. Unit costs of original product and proposed substitution. State whether cost is for material only( ),or,material installed( ). Original product$ per Substitution$ per Rockridge-Northampton,MA Product Substitution Form-01631 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 2 EGA Project No.:10213 10/8/03 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals,to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners,if requested. 5. Samples,if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source"name single manufacturers or sources,provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers'names,provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of- Design Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 6. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and"Allowance"provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost,time, energy conservation,or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,increased cost of other construction by Owner,and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged,and unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available,and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term"as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics"of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled"Product" name a single product and manufacturer,provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 Page 4 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, R from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information,including a proposal of change, if any,in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project,product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected,even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration, and loss,including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable,hazardous,easily damaged,or sensitive to deterioration,theft,and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,protecting,and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements,under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 Page 3 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a AOVW particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name,model number,and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 4. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information,including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties;product substitutions;and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Allowances"for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section"Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section"References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. 4. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work,whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Product Requirements-01600 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 6 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protections as soon as available,do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest- control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully,using environmentally safe materials. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Not used. F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. 1. For safety barriers,sidewalk bridges,and similar uses,provide minimum 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)thick exterior plywood. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served,with sign mounted above. a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers. b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers ofNFPA-recommended classes for exposures. C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire- exposure areas. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. H. Safety Enclosure Fence: Provide 5'-0" High Orange. Plastic fabric at areas around new construction where directed by Owner. 3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification sign (4' x 8' x3/4") and other directional signs (1' x 3' x 3/4"). Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section 'Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction,provide separate containers,clearly labeled,for each type of waste material to be deposited. F. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid stations, toilets,wash facilities,lunchrooms,and similar areas. G. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Furnish and equip offices as required for its appropriate use. 2. Provide resilient floor covering and painted gypsum wallboard walls and acoustical ceiling. 0r►, Provide operable windows with adjustable blinds and insect screens. 3. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg Q. Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F(23 deg Q. 4. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot (4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction,sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 I. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide voice-mail service on superintendent's telephone. 4. Furnish superintendent with portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet(9 m)of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities,under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,within construction limits indicated,as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section"Earthwork." 3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 2 Section"Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations,and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. 3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel,if,and,as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk excessively to reach facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 1. Install electric power service underground,unless overhead service must be used. 2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 1. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations,traffic conditions,and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self- contained,liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured,NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance,wiring circuits,not exceeding 125-V ac,20-A rating,and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company,Owner,and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. 1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 2. As soon as water is required at each level, extend service to form a temporary water- and fire- protection standpipe. Provide distribution piping. Space outlets so water can be reached with a 100-foot(30-m)hose. Provide one hose at each outlet. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged,previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section"Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." C. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. 1. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned;on foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried,portable,UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification,extinguishing agent,and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type;vented;fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Bottled-water drinking-water units,including paper cup supply. 1. Where power is accessible,provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F(7.2 to 12.7 deg C). Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Division 2 Section"Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. 4. Division 2 Section"Termite Control"for pest control. 5. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Architect's consultants. 5. Testing agencies. 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Use owners existing sewer without payment of use charges. Contractor will not have access to existing sanitary facilities. C. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. eA + D. Electric Power Service: Use electric powers from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6,NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. AW Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 9 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities,and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities,including toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. 7. Lighting. 8. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Dewatering facilities and drains. 3. Project identification and temporary signs. 4. Waste disposal facilities. 5. Field offices. 6. Lifts and hoists. 7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. 5. Security enclosure and lockup. 6. Barricades,warning signs,and lights. 7. Fire protection. 8. Safety enclosure fence. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Temporary Facilities and Controls-01500 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 9 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CAPUC (See CPUC) CBHF State of California,Department of Consumer Affairs (800)952-5210 Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (916)445-1254 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415)703-2782 www.cpue.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (936)639-8180 Forest Products Laboratory Htxforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 16 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800)638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301)504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202)482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202)260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202)366-4000 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202)418-0190 www.fec.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888)463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (202)708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202)708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510)486-5605 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301)975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration (202)693-1999 www.osha.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202)720-9540 (See USDA) TRB Transportation Research Board (202)334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202)720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202)268-2000 www.usps.com Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01.420 EGA,P.C. Page 15 of 16 10/8J03 EGA Project No.: 10213 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (800)506-4653 (Formerly: AWCMA-American Window Covering (212)661-4261 Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association (800)223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA-National Wood Window and (847)299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916)372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association (800)550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530)661-9591 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503)224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International,Inc. (708)799-2300 www.bocai.org CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909)595-8449 Officials(The) www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800)284-4406 www.icbo.org (562)699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703)931-4533 (Formerly: CABO-Council of American Building Officials) www.inticode.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International,Inc. (205)591-1853 www.sbcci.org D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.anny.mil Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 14 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800)982-0355 www.ssia.com (202)342-8630 SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (312)456-5590 (Formerly: ML/SFA-Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspc.org (412)281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847)438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216)241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing,and Restoration Institute (816)472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America,Inc. (864)646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries (703)907-7700 Alliance www.tiaonline.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800)405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847)705-9898 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council (336)885-5065 www.ufac.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800)704-4050 www.ul.com (847)272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972)243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology,Inc. (800)938-7488 www.culturenet.ca/usitt (315)463-6463 USP U.S.Pharmacopeia (800)822-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800)424-2869 www.wastec.org (202)244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800)283-1486 www.wclib.org (503)639-0651 Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 13 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (Contact by mail only) RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888)225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415)382-0662 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (800)220-7620 www.rma.org (202)682-4800 SAE SAE International (724)776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847)462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440)899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (843)689-6878 www.sefalabfum.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315)646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312)644-6610 www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute (843)626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561)533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703)803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800)523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD-The Society of the Plastics Industry,Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry (202)974-5200 www.plasticsindustry.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(The) (850)434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781)444-0242 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 12 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 NGA National Glass Association (703)442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800)933?0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901)377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604)524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901)526-5016 www.nofma.org NPA National Particleboard Association (See CPA) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800)323-9545 www.nrca.net (847)299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888)846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301)587-1400 NSA National Stone Association (800)342-1415 www.aggregates.org (703)525-8788 NSF NSF International (800)673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734)769-8010 www.nsf.org NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association,Inc. (800)323-9736 www.ntma.com (703)779-1022 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312)786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800)332-7322 www.pdca.com (703)359-0826 PDI Plumbing&Drainage Institute (800)589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508)230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217)333-3929 //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PIMA Photographic&Imaging Manufacturers Association (914)698-7603 (Formerly: NAPM-National Association of Photographic Manufacturers) www.pima.net RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800)644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312)670-2400 Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 11 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703)281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312)332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281)228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703)684-0084 (The) www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute,Inc. (304)258-5100 NAPM National Association of Photographic Manufacturers (See PIMA) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association,Inc. (800)557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703)713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (414)248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable Television Association (202)775-3669 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301)977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301)657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association (207)829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703)841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617)770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301)589-6372 '* www.nfrc.org Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 10 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8103 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315)646-2234 www.igcc.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America,Inc. (812)275-4426 www.iliai.com IRI Industrial Risk Insurers (800)243?8308 www.industrialrisk.com (860)520?7300 ITS Intertek Testing Services (800)345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607)753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703)264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute (972)370-0967 www.loseke.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (201)664-2700 (Formerly: ALA-American Laminators Association) www.Ima.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800)488-6864 www.lightning.org (847)577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216)241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (312)201-0193 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847)480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312)644-6610 MGPHO Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization,Inc. (877)238-5157 www.mgpho.org (913)681-6548 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800)345-1815 www.mhia.org (704)676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (614)228-6194 www.marble-institute.com ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA) Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 9 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401)275-3000 (Formerly: FM-Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202)289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785)271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA-Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215)895-2343 www.drexel.edu/gri GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888)786-7744 www.pumps.org (973)267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908)464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood&Veneer Association (703)435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H.P.White Laboratory,Inc. (410)838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA International) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association,Inc. (508)394-4424 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute(The) (703)450-0116 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 4122 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,Inc. (The) (212)419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212)248-5000 www.iesna.org Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 8 of 16 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 CISCA Ceilings&Interior Systems Construction Association (630)584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301)670-0604 (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800)510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202)462-9607 CRI Carpet&Rug Institute(The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706)278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847)517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800)463-6727 (Formerly: IAS-International Approval Services) (416)747-4000 www.esa-intemational.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The) (800)689-2900 look www.csinet.org (703)684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake&Shingle Bureau (604)820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281)583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703)222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry (703)907-7500 Association www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800)294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com (770)968-7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association,Inc. (914)332-0040 www.ejma.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216)241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 7 of 16 EGA Project No.:10213 10/8/03 AWCI AWCI International (703)534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800)449-8811 www.awinet.org (703)733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association (817)326-6300 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800)443-9353 www.aws.org (305)443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800)926-7337 www.awwa.org (303)794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212)297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association(The) (703)620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616)285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203)637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CUSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573)341-4471 www.umr.edu/—ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800)232-3282 www.copper.org (212)251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613)230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics&Film Association,Inc. (216)241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703)412-0900 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819)956-0425 www.pwgsc.gc.calcgsb CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937)222-2462 Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303)792-9559 www.aite-glulam.org ALA American Laminators Association (See LMA) ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800)395-2522 www.anca.org (703)736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301)972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International,Inc. (847)394-0150 www.amea.org ANLA American Nursery&Landscape Association (202)789-2900 (Formerly: AAN-American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202)293-8020 www.anli.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (402)476-3852 www.aosaseed.com APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association (253)565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (941)454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202)682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute (703)524-8800 www.ari.org ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (609)848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800)548-2723 www.asce.org (703)295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and (800)527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404)636-8400 ASME ASME International (800)843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212)591-7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astm.org Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 Page 5 of 16 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 AAN American Association of Nurserymen (See ANLA) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202)624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists(The) (919)549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202)367-1155 www.abma-de.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312)201-0101 www.flexibleduct.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies,Inc. (The) (205)257-2530 www.aeic.org AFPA American Forest&Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest&Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202)463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202)824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America(The) (703)548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847)934-8800 www.ahardbd.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202)872-5955 www.aham.org Al Asphalt Institute (859)288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects(The) (202)626-7300 www.e-architect.com AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800)644-2400 www.aisc.org (312)670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202)452-7100 www.steel.org Oak Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 DOD Department of Defense Specifications and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215)697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215)697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online Available from General Services Administration (202)619-8925 www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs-cfm Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202)289-7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215)697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board (800)872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202)272-5434 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association,Inc. (The) (202)862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216)241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202)737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847)303-5664 www.aamanet.org Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different,but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board (800)872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202)272-5434 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office (888)293-6498 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (202)512-1530 CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station (601)634-2355 www.wes.army.mil Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01420-REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and"permitted"have the same meaning as"directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and"specified"have the same meaning as"indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site,ready for unloading,unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension, finishing, curing,protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub- subcontractor,to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated;and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Rockridge—Northampton,MA References-01420 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 16 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner,Architect,testing agencies,and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for 00W quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Quality Requirements-01400 Page 5 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility,provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality- control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests,inspections,obtaining samples,and similar activities. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Quality Requirements-01400 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design,and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent. F. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or,if not indicated,as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication,or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. Mockups will be incorporated into the Work,and will remain,where possible. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report,in duplicate,of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Quality Requirements-01400 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 5 1018103 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional,for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes,loads,and other factors used in performing these services. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Quality Requirements-01400 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size,physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals,to demonstrate aesthetic effects and,where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Quality Requirements-01400 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following,as applicable: 1. Name,address,and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions,products,and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles,if any,and term of the coverage. S. Construction Photographs and Videotapes: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number,Specification Section title and number,name of reviewer,date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Submittal Procedures-01330 EGA,P.C. Page 5 of 5 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that AOW manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form,indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements. L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers'names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software,if any,used for calculations. Include page numbers. P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Submittal Procedures-01330 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 5 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review,when received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 or other form acceptable to Architect and Contractor. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record(PQR)on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and,where required,is authorized for this specific Project. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Submittal Procedures-01330 Page 3 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,Owner,or other parties is required,allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. a. Division 3-Concrete. b. Division 5 - Structural Steel. C. Division 6-Wood Framing,Plate-Connected Wood Trusses. d. Division 15 -Mechanical. e. Division 16-Electrical. 3. If intermediate submittal is necessary,process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 7 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4"x 5" on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier,including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. Submit only as many copies as are required for appropriate specification section. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Submittal Procedures-01330 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction photographs. 3. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting periodic construction photographs. 40*_ 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mockups. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Submittal Procedures-01330 Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents,prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic,durations,actual starts and finishes,and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses,indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, Owner's Representative separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 EGA,P.C. Page 6 of 6 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the Schedule of Values). E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule,prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. F. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists,sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list,tabulate activity number,early finish date,dollar value,and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list,tabulate activity number,late finish date,dollar value,and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and 'cumulative value completed"with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 4. Accidents. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Unusual events(refer to special reports). 7. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Change Orders received and implemented. 9. Construction Change Directives received. 10. Services connected and disconnected. 11. Equipment or system tests and startups. 12. Substantial Completions authorized. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 Page 5 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node)format. B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use"one workday"as the unit of time. C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram,prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. C. Delivery. d. Fabrication. e. Installation. 2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 3. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 6 EGA Project No.:10213 10/8/03 a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE,GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's"Construction Planning& Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 14 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion,and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section"Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion,and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule,provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 Page 3 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three printed copies of initial schedule,large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on 3-1/2-inch diskettes, formatted to hold 1.44 MB of data, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule(Initial or Updated)and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three printed copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date,and total float. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date,or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit three copies at weekly intervals. G. Field Condition Reports: Submit three copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule,progress reports,payment requests,and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication,and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts,the Schedule of Values,and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary schedule. Include submittals required 00"k during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 Page 2 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work,including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three printed copies. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Construction Progress Documentation-01320 Page 1 of 6 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 Aoft- Rockridge-Northampton,MA Project Management and Coordination-01310 Page 5 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present,including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Site utilization. 5) Temporary facilities and controls. 6) Work hours. 7) Progress cleaning. 8) Quality and work standards. 9) Change Orders. 10) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present,including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Site utilization. 5) Temporary facilities and controls. 6) Work hours. 7) Progress cleaning. 8) Quality and work standards. 9) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Project Management and Coordination-01310 Page 4 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 k. Office,work,and storage areas. 1. Security. m. Progress cleaning. n. Working hours. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration,including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Submittals. e. Review of mockups. f. Possible conflicts. g. Compatibility problems. h. Time schedules. i. Weather limitations. j. Manufacturer's written recommendations. k. Warranty requirements. 1. Compatibility of materials. k" M. Acceptability of substrates. n. Temporary facilities and controls. o. Space and access limitations. P. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. q. Testing and inspecting requirements. r. Required performance results. S. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions,agreements,and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 4 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Project Management and Coordination-01310 Page 3 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,including Owner and Architect,within 7 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 14 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner,Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing. C. Designation of responsible personnel. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. f. Distribution of the Contract Documents. g. Submittal procedures. h. Preparation of Record Documents. oak i. Use of the premises. j. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Project Management and Coordination-01310 Page 2 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,but not limited to,the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services,including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection,and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Project Management and Coordination-01310 Page 1 of 5 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted,including,but not limited,to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees,and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement,accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706,"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A,"Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707,"Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 Payment Procedures-01290 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 4 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 5 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested,before deduction for retainage, on each item with the following month's application for payment. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers with the following month's application for payment. hich entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate w H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. Copies of building permits. 6. Initial progress report. 7. Report of preconstruction conference. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Performance and payment bonds. Payment Procedures-01290 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 3 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by "* Architect and paid for by Owner. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Payment Procedures-01290 Page 2 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section"Unit Prices"for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules,including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. A� B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Payment Procedures-01290 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.:10213 Aw PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1 -Earthwork 1. Description:Rock excavation both open and trench. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard each type. B. Unit Price No.2 -Access Doors and Frames 1. Description:Access Doors and Frames according to Division 8, Section 08311. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each type. C. Unit Price No. 3 -Cottage Humidification 1. Description: Add alternates for the cottage humidifiers listed as Alternate M1 and E1 in Section 01240. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each humidifier. D. Unit Price No.4-Ceramic Tile and Sheet Vinyl Flooring 1. Provide unit price for providing ceramic tile in lieu of sheet vinyl flooring as indicated in Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per unit,unit price. E. Unit Price No. 5 -Sheet Vinyl Flooring 1. Provide unit price for providing higher quality sheet vinyl flooring in kitchens and entries as indicated in the Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per unit, unit price. F. Unit Price No. 6-Carpet 1. Provide unit price for providing higher quality carpet as indicated in Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per unit,unit price. END OF SECTION 01270 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Unit Prices-01270 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 11/3/03 SECTION 01270-UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Division 1 Section"Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements"for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense,by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) Rockridge-Northampton,MA Unit Prices-01270 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 2 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 11/3/03 A. Change Directive: Architect may issue a Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Change Directive Awk instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Contract Modification Procedures-01250 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in- place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested,prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs APON, and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey,measure,or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE Rockridge-Northampton,MA Contract Modification Procedures-01250 Page 2 of 3 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. 2. Division 1 Section"Unit Prices"for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section"Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract_ Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Contract Modification Procedures-01250 Page 1 of 3 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 H. Alternate No. 8,Division 16. AOW 1. E1 The Electrical Contractor shall carry in the bid as "Add Alternate E1" all electrical work associated with installing a humidifier"H-2" in a cottage unit. The cost shall be carried as a per unit cost. END OF SECTION 01240 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Alternates Schedule-01240 Page 2 of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 01240-ALTERNATES SCHEDULE A. Alternate No. 1,Divisions 2 through 16;Den/Sunroom extension at cottages. 1. Base: Of the twelve cottages, 3 have sunrooms that are constructed as part of the base package. These include cottages, 0109, 0111 and 0115. The remainder of the cottages does not have sunrooms. 2. Alternate: Provide per unit amount to add sunrooms to each cottage which does not in same within the base. B. Alternate No. 2, Section 07460-Siding. 1. Base: a. Type A siding is 6 '/2"or 7"exposure in square edge,single board style vinyl siding. b. Type B siding is 8"exposure, double 4 inch board style vinyl siding. 2. Alternate:Provide total amount to provide: a. Type A base bid type B. b. Type B - "Cedar Impressions" as manufactured by Certainteed; double 7" Perfection Shingles with Perfection Mitered Cornerport trim for Type B. C. Alternate No. 3, Section 09310-Ceramic Tile and Section 09652-Sheet Vinyl Flooring. 1. Provide alternate price for providing ceramic tile in lieu of sheet vinyl flooring as indicated in Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per dwelling unit,unit price. D. Alternate No.4, Section 09652-Sheet Vinyl Flooring. 1. Provide alternate price for providing higher quality sheet vinyl flooring in kitchens and entries as indicated in the Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. E. Alternate No. 5, Section 09688-Carpet. 1. Provide alternate price for Carpet CP-1 as indicated in Section 09688 of the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per dwelling unit,unit price. F. Alternate No. 6,Section 09688 -Carpet. 1. Provide alternate price for providing higher quality carpet as indicated in Cottage and Apartment Upgrade Package described in the Generic Finish Schedule Legend. Provide per dwelling unit, unit price. G. Alternate No. 7,Division 15. 1. M 1 The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish a per unit price to install a steam humidifier(1-12) in cottages as detailed on drawing M-9. Price shall include all related work including installation,piping and controls. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Alternates Schedule-01240 Page 1 of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials,equipment, systems,or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included in Section 01240. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01230 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Alternates-01230 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 1 EGA Project No.: 10213 1018103 11/3/03 B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. 1.5 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect,prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise,disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1, Section 01450-Testing and Inspection Services: Lump Sum of$10,000. B. Allowance No. 2,Division 2-Earthwork: Lump Sum of$10,000 for open and trench rock excavation. C. Allowance No. 3,Division 2-Landscaping/Planting: Lump Sum of$50,000. D. Allowance No. 4, Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Lump Sum of$5,000 for additional standing and running trim and woodwork in addition to that indicated by the design documents. E. Allowance No. 5, Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Lump Sum Allowance of $7,500 for a reception desk in the new lobby. F. Allowance No. 6, Section 10431 - Signage and Directories: Lump Sum of $6,000 for main entry signs on Coles Meadow Road. Lump Sum of $10,000 for miscellaneous exterior directional Signage and all interior signage. Total of$16,000. END OF SECTION 01210 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Allowances-01210 Page 2 of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 01210-ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases,these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Division 1 Section"Unit Prices"for procedures using unit prices. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. Allowances-01210 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page I of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner may partially occupy site and building during construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy,mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Work Restrictions-01140 Page 2 of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 A�* SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. B. Applicable sections of the City of Northampton Planning Board-Order of Conditions. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Owner will continue operations during construction. Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including Project site, during construction period with the following restrictions: 1. Contractor shall be restricted to the limits of work area for site work and general construction. 2. Contractor's staging and parking areas shall be restricted to the limits of work area or as may be modified from time to time between the Owner and Contractor to the benefit of the construction process without detriment to the operation of the facility. 3. Owner will evacuate the existing Dining Room to allow the contractor full use for the initial phases of Phase 1 construction. Contractor shall not perform any construction operations that will compromise the rest home facility operations without consent of the Owner. 4. Contractor's hours of operation shall be restricted as follows unless otherwise approved by Owner: a. Site work and exterior building construction shall occur only between the hours of 7:00 am and 6:00 pm Monday through Friday. Saturday hours for this Work shall be between 8:00 am and 4:00 pm. b. Work interior to the buildings shall occur only between the hours of 6:30 am and 9:00 pm. Work that is noisy or otherwise intrusive to the residents of the nursing facility shall occur between the hours of 7:00 am and 5:00 pm. Interior work will be permitted Monday through Saturday. Loud music from construction radios is prohibited. 5. No work will be permitted on holidays as observed by federal and state governments unless agreed to by Owner. 6. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 7. Smoking is prohibited both on site and in the building except in areas specifically approved by the Owner. B. Owner reserves the right to restrict use of the premises by Owner's right to perform work or engage other contractors for portions of the Work. Rockridge—Northampton,MA Work Restrictions-01140 Page 1 of 2 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 Alwl PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Summary-01100 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 11/3/03 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of limited areas of the premises for construction operations, including use of Project site,during construction period. Contractor's use of these areas is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with Work under this Contract. This contract will include,but is not necessarily limited to the following: I. Interior design contract: This contract will include delivery and installation of moveable furniture and fixtures. It will also include window treatments. Contractor will be required to allow the work of this contract to occur in select portions of the project prior to Substantial Completion and Owner occupancy. 2. Tree Clearing and Stump Grinding: This contract will include all work associated with required tree removal. This contract work shall occur prior to Construction Manager's use of premises. 3. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. ` 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat"numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence;however,the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: I. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally,the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon() is used within a sentence or phrase. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Summary-01100 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 3 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 01100-SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of: 1. Project Location: 25 Coles Meadow Road,Northampton,MA 01060. 2. Owner:New England Deaconess Association-80 Deaconess Road,Concord,MA 01742-4199. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated November 3, 2003, were prepared for Project I by EGA,P.C., 12 Auburn Street,Newburyport,MA 01950. C. Construction Manager: Delphi Construction, Inc. Construction Manager for this Project and is Project's Constructor. In Divisions 1 through 16 Specifications, the terms "Construction Manager" and "Contractor"are synonymous. D. The Work consists of the addition of 42 units of assisted living apartments(30 units within the congregate building and 12 "cottages.") onto an existing Level IV Rest Home. Additionally, new commons areas will be added consistent with a new assisted living facility. Future phases of the project will include conversion of existing first floor Level IV apartments into a special dementia care unit, as well as conversion of some of the upper level IV apartments into assisted living apartments. Future phases will also include a new maintenance building of approximately 1,200sf. 1. The Work includes all materials, labor, plants, equipment, tools, machinery, transportation, and services necessary for,or reasonably inferred,incidental to the construction of the project. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work of this contract shall be conducted in a single phase. 1. The Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 365 days of the Notice to Proceed. Rockridge-Northampton,MA Summary-01100 EGA,P.C. Page 1 of 3 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 MECHANICAL low► M-1 Basement Floor Plan Piping 11/03/03 M-2 First Floor Plan Piping 11/03/03 M-3 Second Floor Plan Piping 11/03/03 M-4 Third Floor Plan Piping 11/03/03 M-5 Basement Floor Plan Ductwork 11/03/03 M-6 First Floor Plan Ductwork 11/03/03 M-7 Second Floor Plan Ductwork 11/03/03 M-8 Third Floor Plan Ductwork 11/03/03 M-9 First Floor Part Plan Mechanical 11/03/03 M-10 Details 11/03/03 M-11 Equipment Schedules 11/03/03 PLUMBING P-1 Plumbing Fixture Schedule and Details 11/03/03 P-2 Basement Floor Plan Plumbing 11/03/03 P-3 First Floor Plan Plumbing 11/03/03 P-4 Second Floor Plan Plumbing 11/03/03 P-5 Third Floor Plan Plumbing 11/03/03 P-6 Enlarged Plans&Risers Plumbing 11/03/03 P-7 First Floor Part.Plan Plumbing 11/03/03 ELECTRICAL ES1 Electrical Site Plan,Electric Riser&Panel Schedule 11/03/03 E1 Legend,Light Fixture Schedule and Notes 11/03/03 E2 Basement Floor Plan Lighting&Power 11/03/03 E3 First Floor Plan—Core—Lighting&Power 11/03/03 E4 First Floor Plan— Lighting&Power 11/03/03 E5 Second Floor Plan—Lighting&Power 11/03/03 E6 Third Floor Plan—Lighting&Power 11/03/03 E7 Typical Unit Plans 11/03/03 E8 Typical Cottage Plans 11/03/03 E9 Typical Cottage Plans 11/03/03 E10 Fire Alarm 11/03/03 Ell Fire Alarm 11/03/03 INTERIORS ID-1.B Basement Floor Plan Flooring Layout 11/03/03 ID-1.1a First Floor Plan Flooring Layout 11/03/03 ID-l.lb First Floor Plan Flooring Layout 11/03/03 ID-1.2 Second Floor Plan Flooring Layout 11/03/03 ID-1.3 Third Floor Plan Flooring Layout 11/03/03 END OF SECTION 00013 Rockridge-Northampton,MA List of Drawings-00013 EGA,P.C. Page 3 of 3 EGA Project No.: 10213 10/8/03 11/3/03 A-2.5 Unit Floor Plans 11/03/03 A-2.6 Unit Floor Plans 11/03/03 A-2.7 Unit Kitchen Elevations 11/03/03 A-2,8 Unit Bath Elevations 11/03/03 A-2.9 Bath and Closet Elevations 11/03/03 A-2.10 Common Area Casework Elevations 11/03/03 A-3.1 Exterior Elevations 11/03/03 A-3.2 Exterior Elevations 11/03/03 A-3.3 Exterior Elevations 11/03/03 A-4.1 Building Sections 11/03/03 A-4.2 Building Sections 11/03/03 A-4.3 Building Sections 11/03/03 A-4.4 Building Sections 11/03/03 A-4.5 Building Sections 11/03/03 A-5.1a Multi-Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.lb Multi-Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.2a Commons Details 11/03/03 A-5.2b Commons Details 11/03/03 A-5.3 Porch Details 11/03/03 A-5.4 Multi-Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.5 Elevator Sections&Details 11/03/03 A-5.6 Single Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.7 Single Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.8 Single Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.9 Single Story Details 11/03/03 A-5.10 Details 1.1/03/03 A-6.1 Assembly Types and Details 11/03/03 mow► A-6.2 Door Schedule,Door&Frame Types 11/03/03 A-6.3 Door Details 11/03/03 A-6.4 Win. Schedule&Details 11/03/03 A-7.1 Interior Elevations&Details 11/03/03 A-7.2 Interior Elevations 11/03/03 A-7.3 Interior Elevations 11/03/03 A-7.4 Interior Elevations 11/03/03 A-7.5 Interior Elevations 11/03/03 STRUCTURAL SO.1 General Notes and Typical Details 10/08/03 SLO Basement Foundation Plan 11/03/03 SLOA Alt. Basement Foundation Plan 11/03/03 S1.1 First Floor Framing and Foundation Plan 11/03/03 S L IA Alt.First Floor Framing and Foundation Plan 11/03/03 S1.2 Cottage Foundation Plan 11/03/03 S1.3 Second Floor Framing Plan 11/03/03 S13A Alt. Second Floor Framing Plan 11/03/03 SI A Cottage Roof Framing Plan 11/03/03 S1.5 Third Floor Framing Plan 11/03/03 S1.6 Roof Framing Plan 11/03/03 S2.1 Foundation Sections 11/03/03 S2.2 Cottage Foundation Sections 11/03/03 S2.3 Floor and Roof Sections 11/03/03 S2.4 Shear Wall Elevations and Details 11/03/03 List of Drawings-00013 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 2 of 3 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 00013 -LIST OF DRAWINGS LATEST ISSUE DATE SITE DEVELOPMENT GU-1 Grading&Utilities Plan 10/08/03 GU-2 Grading&Utilities Plan 10/08/03 GU-3 Cottage Grading Detail 10/08/03 GU-4 Grading Detail Plan 10/08/03 L-1 Layout&Materials Plan 10/08/03 L-2 Layout&Materials Plan 10/08/03 L-3 Cottage Layout Detail 10/08/03 L-4 Layout Plan 10/08/03 PL-1 Planting&Lighting Plan 10/08/03 PL-2 Planting&Lighting Plan 10/08/03 PL-3 Planting&Grading Details 10/08/03 SW North King Street Sidewalk Construction Plan 11/03/03 D-1 Construction Details 10/08/03 D-2 Construction Details 10/08/03 D-3 Construction Details 10/08/03 D-4 Construction Details 10/08/03 D-5 Construction Details 10/08/03 ARCHITECTURAL A-O.Oa Life Safety-Code Analysis 11/03/03 A-O.Ob Life Safety-Code Analysis 11/03/03 D-1.1 First Floor Demo Plan 11/03/03 A-0.13 Basement Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-0.1 First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-0.2 Second Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-0.3 Third Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-O.R Roof Plan 11/03/03 A-1.13 Basement Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-1.B-rcp Basement Reflected Ceiling Plan 11/03/03 A-1.1a First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-1.1b First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-1.la-rcp First Floor Part.Reflected Ceiling Plan 11/03/03 A-l.lb-rcp First Floor Part.Reflected Ceiling Plan 11/03/03 A-1.2 Second Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-1.2-rcp Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan 11/03/03 A-1.3 Third Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-1.3-rcp Third Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan 11/03/03 A-1.Ra Partial Roof Plan 11/03/03 A-1.Rb Partial Roof Plan 11/03/03 A-2.13 Enlarged Basement Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.1a Enlarged First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.1b Enlarged First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.1c Enlarged First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.1d Enlarged First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.le Enlarged First Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.2 Enlarged Second Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.3 Enlarged Third Floor Plan 11/03/03 A-2.4 Unit Floor Plans 11/03/03 "` List of Drawings-00013 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 3 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 SECTION 00012-PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER: New England Deaconess Assoc. Contact: Walter Bartkus 80 Deaconess Road Tel: 978-369-5151 x306 Concord,MA 01742 Fax: (978)371-8091 Email: wbartkus(a-)nedeaconess.com ARCHITECT: EGA,P.C. Contact: Gerry Menke 12 Auburn Street Tel: 978-462-5515 Newburyport,MA 01950 Fax: 978-462-5525 Email: gmenke(ck a.net CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: Delphi Construction Contact: Jake Simmons 2250 Main Street Tel: 978-371-9939 Concord,MA 01742 Fax: 978-371-4944 Email: jsirnmons@delphiconstruction.net CIVIL ENGINEER: Coler&Colantonio,Inc. Contact: David M.Thompson 55 Bobala Road Tel: 413-313-0121 (direct) Holyoke,MA 01040 Fax: 413-313-0190 Email: dthompson(a)col-col.com ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Victor Reno Assoc. Contact: Vic Reno Reno Road Tel: 603-352-1452 Marlow,NH 03456 Fax: 603-352-3731 Email: renoengineering@,earthlink.net MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McGill Engineering Contact: Doug McGill 140 Stannard Mountain Road Tel: 802-748-1066 Danville,VT 05828 Fax: 802-748-0991 Email: mcizillengineering@,pshift.com pshift.com INTERIOR DESIGNER: Wellesley Design Contact: Chuck Steinman 66-70 Union Square Tel: 617-623-1122 Suite 201 Fax: 617-623-7720 Somerville,MA 02143 Email: chuck@wdcinteriors.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Aberjona Engineering Contact: Steve Goan I Mount Vernon Street Tel: 781-729-6188 Winchester,MA 01890 Fax: 781-729-7960 Email: steveg(o-)aberiona.com Project Directory-00012 Rockridge-Northampton,MA Page 1 of 1 EGA,P.C. 10/8/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 ** 15400 Plumbing 11/03/03 15460 Plumbing Fixtures 11/03/03 15500 Sprinkler System 10/08/03 15614 Natural Gas Piping 11/03/03 15617 Breeching and Metal Chimney 11/03/03 15630 Boilers 11/03/03 15700 Liquid Heat Transfer 11/03/03 15710 Hot Water Specialties 11/03/03 15740 Terminal Units 11/03/03 15800 Air Distribution 11/03/03 15820 Fans 11/03/03 15840 Ductwork 11/03/03 15870 Outlets 11/03/03 15900 Automatic Temperature Controls 11/03/03 DIVISION 16 16005 Summary of Electrical Work 11/03/03 16007 Definitions and Standards 11/03/03 16010 Electrical Requirements 11/03/03 16051 Electrical Related Work 11/03/03 16110 Raceways 11/03/03 16120 Wires and Cables 11/03/03 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 11/03/03 16140 Wiring Devices 11/03/03 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 11/03/03 16180 Overcurrent Protective Devices 11/03/03 16195 Electrical Identification 11/03/03 16450 Grounding 11/03/03 16470 Panelboards 11/03/03 16495 Automatic Transfer Switches(ATS) 11/03/03 16511 Interior Lighting Fixtures 11/03/03 16512 Exterior Lighting Fixtures 11/03/03 16621 Emergency Generator 11/03/03 16721 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 11/03/03 16754 Emergency Call System 11/03/03 16760 Door Entry Access System 11/03/03 APPENDIX A Planning Board Decision 10/08/03 APPENDIX B Geotechnical Report 11/03/03 APPENDIX C Generic Finish Schedule and Legend 11/03/03 APPENDIX D Equipment Cut Sheets 11/03/03 END OF SECTION 00010 —` Rockridge—Northampton,MA Table of Contents-00010 EGA,P.C. Page 4 of 4 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 08814 Mirrored Glass 11/03/03 DIVISION 9 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 11/03/03 09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies 11/03/03 09310 Ceramic Tile 11/03/03 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 11/03/03 09651 Resilient Floor Tile 11/03/03 09652 Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings 11/03/03 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 11/03/03 09680 Carpet 11/03/03 11/03/03 09720 Wall Coverings 09912 Painting(Professional Line Products) 11/03/03 DIVISION 10 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 11/03/03 10550 Postal Specialties 11/03/03 10605 Wire Mesh Partitions 11/03/03 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 11/03/03 DIVISION 11 11451 Residential Appliances 11/03/03 DIVISION 12 12356 Kitchen Casework 11/03/03 12500 Window Draperies/Blinds and Track DIVISION 13 Not Used DIVISION 14 14240 Hydraulic Elevators 10/08/03 DIVISION 15 11/03/03 15000 Alternates 11/03/03 15010 General Requirements 11/03/03 15011 Testing and Balancing 11/03/03 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 11/03/03 15061 Pressure Tests 11/03/03 15062 Equipment Supports 11/03/03 15063 Identification of Piping 11/03/03 15064 Sleeves and Flashing 11/03/03 15100 Valves and Cocks 11/03/03 15101 Tags and Charts 11/03/03 15140 Pumps 11/03/03 15160 Expansion Compensators and Anchors 11/03/03 15180 Thermal Insulation 11/03/03 15181 Acoustic Insulation Table of Contents-00010 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 3 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 DIVISION 3 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 10/08/03 03450 Gypsum Concrete 11/03/03 DIVISION 4 Not Used DIVISION 5 05120 Structural Steel 11/03/03 05500 Metal Fabrications 11/03/03 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings 11/03/03 05530 Gratings 11/03/03 05811 Architectural Joint Systems 11/03/03 DIVISION 6 06100 Rough Carpentry 11/03/03 06176 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses 11/03/03 06200 Finish Carpentry 11/03/03 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 11/03/03 06600 Plastic Fabrication 11/03/03 06601 Cultured Marble 11/03/03 06605 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Wall Panels 11/03/03 mom", DIVISION 7 07115 Bituminous Dampproofing 11/03/03 07131 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 11/03/03 07210 Building Insulation 11/03/03 07241 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB 11/03/03 07311 Asphalt Shingles 11/03/03 07460 Siding 11/03/03 07531 EPDM Membrane Roofing 11/03/03 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 11/03/03 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties 11/03/03 07716 Roof Expansion Assemblies 11/03/03 07720 Roof Accessories 11/03/03 07841 Through Penetration Firestop Systems 11/03/03 07920 Joint Sealants 11/03/03 DIVISION 8 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 11/03/03 08203 Vinyl Sliding Glass Doors 11/03/03 08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 11/03/03 08225 Molded Hardboard Doors 1 1/03/03 08311 Access Doors and Frames 11/03103 08461 Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors 11/03/03 08560 Vinyl Double-Hung Windows 11/03/03 08612 Vinyl Fixed Windows 11/03/03 08711 Door Hardware 11/03/03 08800 Glazing 11/03/03 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Table of Contents-00010 EGA,P.C. Page 2 of 4 EGA Project No.: 10213 11/3/03 r 017 SECTION 00010-TABLE OF CONTENTS LATEST VOLUME I ISSUE DATE DIVISION 0 11/03/03 00012 Project Directory 11/03/03 00013 List of Drawings DIVISION 1 11/03/03 01100 Summary 10/08/03 01140 Work Restrictions 11/03/03 01210 Allowances 11/03/03 01230 Alternates 11/03/03 01240 Alternates Schedule 10/08/03 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 11/03/03 01270 Unit Prices 10/08/03 01290 Payment Procedures 10/08/03 01310 Project Management and Coordination 10/08/03 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 10/08/03 01330 Submittal Procedures 10/08/03 01400 Quality Requirements 10/08/03 01420 References 10/08/03 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 10/08/03 01600 Product Requirements 10/08/03 01631 Substitution Request Form 10/08/03 01700 Execution Requirements 10/08/03 01731 Cutting and Patching 10/08/03 01732 Selective Demolition 10/08/03 01770 Closeout Procedures 10/08/03 01781 Project Record Documents 10/08/03 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 10/08/03 01820 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2 02150 Erosion and Sediment Control 10/08/03 10/08/03 02230 Site Demolition and Clearing 10/08/03 02315 Earthwork 10/08/03 02510 Water Distribution 10/08/03 02530 Sanitary Sewage System 11/03/03 02620 Subdrainage 10/08/03 02630 Storm Drainage 10/08/03 02650 Unit Masonry 10/08/03 02743 Bituminous Concrete Pavement 10/08/03 02750 Reinforced Cement Concrete 10/08/03 02800 Planting 10/08/03 02850 Seeding 10/08/03 02860 Sodding OW Table of Contents-00010 Rockridge—Northampton,MA Page 1 of 4 EGA,P.C. 11/3/03 EGA Project No.: 10213 TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR ROCKRIDGE NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS WIT w 741-1.1w MR � G �r N E W 6 U R Y P O R T MASSACHUSETTS er �M�' `� N Of DF.S MOl N E S IOWA ♦��t �6